Loading...
MARSHALL STREET WRF RAPID SAND FILTER REHABILITATION - 09-0045-UTm MARSHALL STREET WRF RAPID SAND FILTER REHABILITATION (PROJECT No. 09-0045-UT) CONTRACT DOCUMENTS & SPECIFICATIONS Prepared for Clearwater BID DOCUMENTS FEBRUARY, 2011 --em"N OP ID: JV A44 R CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DAT04/25/111 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terns and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder In lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER 407-660-8262 NAMEACT t Brown & Brown of Florida, Inc. 407-660-2012 PHONE Ext): (AlAC,. No); 2600 Lake Lucien Dr., Ste. 330 Maitland, FL 32751-7234 E-MAIL ADDRESS: Tom D'Avanzo, CPA, CPCU PRODUCER W HART-1 1 INSURED Wharton-Smith, Inc. P.O. Box 471028 Lake Monroe, FL 32747 ' COVERAGES 1 u u CERTIFICATE NUMBER: CUSTOMER Ip #;. ... .. __ INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERA_0_ E NAIC # Insurance Co y INSURER A: Arnerisure 19488 ....,,,.. Co wsuRERe:American Guarantee Liab Ins - 26247 INSURER C : INSURER D : INSURER E : REVISION NUMBER; THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABUVh FUK I Mt VULIUY HtraUu NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS INDICATED . CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED 13Y THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. -`^ T........_ ADPL S l' POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LIMITS L BER MMIDD MM/DDIYYYY INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUM GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 "' A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY X X GL 2036108060011 04/01111 04/01112 ' RENTED 0 PREMISES (Ea occurrence) - $ 300,000 CLAIMS-MADE " OCCUR ME (Any one person) $ 10,000 A X XCU Not Excluded PRODUCTS & COMPLETE PERSONAL g ADV INJURY 1,000,000 $ A X Broad Form PD CONTRACT LIAB PER GL GENERAL AGGREGATE_ $ 2,000,00 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ _ 2,000,00 POLICY X PRO LOC Emp Ben. $ 1,000,00 AUT OMOBILE LIABILITY X X COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ 1,000,000 (Ea accident) A X ANY AUTO CA 20361070401 04101111 04/01/12 BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ SCHEDULED AUTOS $1,000 COMPREHENSIVE PROPERTY DAMAGE $ A X HIRED AUTOS $1,000 COLLISION DIED (Per accident) A X NON-OWNEDAUTOS $- -• .... UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ 20,000,000 EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE - $ 20,000,000 -°- B - AUC 5966548 03 04/01111 04101/12 DEDUCTIBLE $ - - - X RETENTION S WORKERS COMPENSATION WC STATU- OTH- X T BY_ A AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETORIPARTNER/EXECUTIVE Y / N WC-2036109-05 04/01/11 04101112 E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 500,000 OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory in NH) N / A X _ E.L. DISEASE - Fro EMPLOYE $ 500,000 If yes, describe under D ESC RIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L. DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT _ $ 500,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, H more space is required) 11-020: Marshall Street WRF Rapid Sand Filter Rehabilitation City of Clearwater & others per prime contract are additional insured on the ects the named insured's operations olicies as res eral & Auto Liabilit G p y p en when required per written contract. Waivers of subrogation apply per ,...4. F ftr --to !.`.1 Arr4n Wr I Iminralln fniinwa nrm ff=m FOR 11 2 1 ! 1(4( SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN City of Clearwater ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. 100 South Myrtle Ave. FL 33756 APR 2 Clearwater„ 7 2011 NTATIV E AUTHORIZED REPRESE r / / , ;; ty W ?i?fi f ?''(= r''9"MI"tttr • •.ti,rr ,?l.':1IJ?i :: (? : ',.;, ti IGr, /^,ic W 1VOO-LUU11 At;UKLr L UKI"UPCAI IU1q. A11 rlynls 1CSC1VCU. ACORD 25 (2009/09) The ACORD name and log are registered marks of ACORD City of Clearwater, Florida MARSHALL STREET WRF RAPID SAND FILTER REHABILITATION (09-0045-UT) TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION IVA SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX ODP DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Prepared in the Office of the City Engineer Pagei 7/22/2010 11 t SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS MARSHALL STREET WRF RAPID SAND FILTER REHABILITATION # 09-0045-UT CLEARWATER, FLORIDA ' Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: www.ni.YC.]eaiwater.com/cityprojects, on February 4th, 2011, until no later than close of business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the websitc, reflects reproduction cost only. The work for which proposals are invited consists of, Rehabilitation of 12 rapid sand filter cells and appurtenant equipment alon , with control building trench infillin and concrete slab demolition at the Marshall Street Water Reclamation Facility (WRF) A MANDATORY Pre-Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on Thursday, February 17th, 2011, at 10:00 a.m. on site at the Marshall Street Water Reclamation Facility 1605 Harbor Drive, Clearwater, FL 33755. Representatives of the Owner and Consulting Engineer will be present to discuss this Project. Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located at the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 South Myrtle Ave., 3"' Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756- 5520, until 1:30 P.M. on Thursday, March 17th, 2011, and publicly opened and read at that hour and place for MARSHALL STREET WRF RAPID SAND FILTER REHABILITATION CONTRACT NUMBER 09-0045-UT. A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and proposal form is available to the general public (Contractors, Sub-contractors, suppliers, vendors, etc.) for review and purchase. However, sealed proposals will only be accepted from those Contractors that are currently City pre-qualified Contractors in the construction category of Wastewater and Water Treatment Facilities with a minimum pre-qualification amount of S 2,500,000. Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks/ten (10) workdays prior to the bid opening date. A 10% bad bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects. The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids. The City of Clearwater, Florida George McKibben, Purchasing Manager (727) 562-4634 Section I,doc Page I of 1 8/27/2008 1 I SECTION INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ' Table of Contents: SEC TION II .................................................................................................................................. . i 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS .......................................................................... 1 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS .................................................................................. 1 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE ................................. 1 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA ....................................................................... 2 ' 5 SID SECURITY OR SID BOND .................................................................................... 3 6 CONTRACT TIME .......................................................................................................... 3 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ............................................................................................. 3 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT ......................................................... 3 9 SUBCONTRACTORS .............................•........................................................................ 3 10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM ................................................................................................. 4 ' 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS .................................................................................................. 4 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS .................................................... 5 13 REJECTION OF SIDS .................................................................................................... 5 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER ............................................................•................. 5 15 OPENING OF BIDS ......................................................................................................... 5 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES ........................................... 5 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE ............................. 6 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT ............................................................................................... 7 19 BID PROTEST .................................................................................................................. 7 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT ................................................................................................. 8 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES ....................................................................................... 8 1 A Section II.doc i 9/27/2010 1 Section I1- Instructions to Bidders r 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room -- website address: www.myclearwater.com/cityl)rojects. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the City's Website, reflects reproduction costs only, which is non-refundable. A complete bidder's package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only to pre-qualified bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who may be a possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a "Subcontractor" ' package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items. 1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub-bidders or others. ' 1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose. 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre-qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre- qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, Engineering Services Division at P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758- 4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street address only) or by phone at (727) 562-4750. All qualification data must be completed and delivered to the Director of Engineering at the above address not later than fourteen (14) ' days prior to the time set for the receipt of bids. Bidders currently pre-qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication. 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in Section II.doc Page 1 of 9 9/27/2010 1: Section II - Instructions to Bidders preparation. of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. 3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated. for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work. 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, either by mail or facsimile transmission, to all parties recorded by the Purchasing Manager as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than ten (10) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. Section II.doc Page 2 of 9 9/27/2010 1 I 1 F [J 1 I 1 1 fl 1 Section II - Instructions to Bidders 4.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or Engineer. 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the forn-1 of a certified or cashiers check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted. 5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid opening. 5.3 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida. 6 CONTRACT TIME 6.1 The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the Technical Specifications. 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement. 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Section II.doc Page 3 of 9 9/27/2010 Section II - Instructions to Bidders Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will. be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 9.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization against whom he has reasonable objection. 10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM 10.1 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. The Bidder must state in the Bid/Proposal Dorm in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which he will perform, the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice- president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall produce evidence, satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. 10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 10.4 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature. 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a 8.5"xll" manila envelope with the project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted. Section Il.doc Page 4 of 9 9/27/2010 u 1 [J 1 1 1 1 Section II - Instructions to Bidders 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. 12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid. 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public. 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. 15 OPENING OF BIDS 15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids. 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. 16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically Section ILdoc Page 5 of 9 9/27/2010 Ll Section It - Instructions to Bidders stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the Contractor. 16.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements. 16.4 The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV - Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III - General Conditions. 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 17.1 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which. are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the accompanying certification statement: (1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such. prohibition. (2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. (3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). (4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. (5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of this section. I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements. Section II.doc Page 6 of 9 9/27/2010 1 u Section 11- Instructions to Bidders 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved ill favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the City. 18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will. be awarded to only one Contractor. 19 BID PROTEST 19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section. 19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE: A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself. B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, which ever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated. C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of Section II.doc Page 7 of 9 9/27/2010 1 Section II - Instructions to Bidders , intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception. D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5) work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated ' with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager. E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he/she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original fon-nal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City , Manager. F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10) work days of receipt of the appeal. 19.3 PROTEST FEE: When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5% of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid. 19.4 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City. 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT , 20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918-08) along with the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. ' 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 21.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit ' and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters. A. The control of construction-related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters. Section rl,doc Page 8 of 9 9/27/2010 1 Section IC - Instructions to Bidders B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment control provisions. ' NP1aES Management Measures available at City_ of Clearwater „Eiagineering Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction-related Best Management Practices. References EPA website 1 LI J 1 CI J 1 i 11 1 Section II„doc Page 9 of 9 9/27/2010 F, I Table of Contents: SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION III .................................................................................................................................. i GENERAL CONDITIONS ................................................................ T able of Contents: ....................................................................................................................... ... i 1 DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................ .. 1 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS ......................................................................................... .. 5 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE .......................... .. 5 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS .......................................................................................... .. 5 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT .............................................................................................................. .. 5 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION ................................................................... .. 5 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ...................................................................... .. 6 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS .............................................................................................. .. 6 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT ....................................................................... .. 7 3.1 INTENT ......................................................................................................................... .. 7 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES ................................................ .. 7 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS .................................................................................................... S 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS ....................................................................................... .. 8 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS .......................................................................... .. 8 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES ................................... .. 8 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS .................................................................................................. .. 9 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE ............................................................................................ 9 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND ............................. .. 9 5.2 INSURANCE ................................................................................................................. .. 9 5. 2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE ......................................................... 10 5. 2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITYAND PROPERTYDAMAGE COVERAGE ............................ 10 5. 2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY... ........ ............................ . ............ 11 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS ...................................................... .. 12 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES ..................................................................... 12 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE ............................................................. 12 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 13 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS .............................................................. 14 6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS........ 14 6.5 USE OF PREMISES ...................................................................................................... 15 6 5.1 STAGING AREAS .................................................................................................... 15 6. 5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS ................................................................................ 15 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES ................................... 16 Section I II.doc i 11/03/2 010 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS ...................................................................................... 16 6.8 PERMITS ....................................................................................................................... 16 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION. ........ I ............................. ....................... .................... 17 6.10 EMERGENCIES ............................................................................................................ 18 6.11 DRAWINGS .................................................................................................................. 18 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFls, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW ........................ 18 6.11.2 AS-B UIL T DRA WINGS ............................................................................................ 19 6. 11.3 CAD STANDARDS ................................................................................................... 21 611.4 DELIVERABLES .• ......................................... ...................................................... 23 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE ........................... 23 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK ........................................................................................ 23 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION .................................................................................................... 23 OTHER WORK .............................................................................................................. 24 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE ........................................................................................ 24 7.2 COORDINATION ......................................................................................................... 24 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY ...................................................................................... 25 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION .............. 25 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE ................................................................................... 25 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS ........................................................ 25 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................................................ 26 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS .................................. 26 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES ........................................................................................ 26 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES ............. 27 CHANGES IN THE WORK .......................................................................................... 27 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE ................................................................... 28 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE .................................................................... 28 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT ....................... 29 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK .................................................................................................... 30 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME .................................................................... 30 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ............................................................................................... 31 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION .......................................................................................... 31 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK ....................................................................................... 32 13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK ....................................... 32 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................ 32 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD ...................................................................... 33 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ................................................................... 33 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK ....................................................... 33 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ......................................... 34 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT ........................................................... 34 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE ............................................................... 35 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS ................................ 35 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION ............................................................................................ 0 1 3 4 36 7 8 9 1.0 1 1l2 13 14 Section III.doc ii 11/03/2010 1 14.5 14.6 14.7 14.8 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 22.1 22.2 ' 23 23.1 23.2 23.3 23.4 23.5 1 23.6 23.7 23.8 24 Section Ill.doc Him FINAL INSPECTION ........................................................................... ........................ 36 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT ........................................... ........................ 37 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE ........................................... ........................ 37 WAIVER OF CLAIMS ......................................................................... ........... SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION ............................ ........................ 38 OWNER MAY SUSPEND 'FHE WORK .............................. ......... .............. OWNER MAY TERMINATE .............................................................. ........................ 38 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE ................... ........................ 39 DISPUTE RESOLUTION ...................................................................... ........................ 40 MISCELLANEOUS ............................................................................... ........................ 40 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS ................................ GIVING NOTICE .................................................................................. ........................ 40 NOTICE OF CLAIM ............................................................................. ........................ 40 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED .......... 40 ............. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT ........................................... .............. .......... 41 RENEWAL OPTION ............................................................................ ........................ 41 ROLL-OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS ......................... ........................ 41 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK ...................................... ........................ 41 MATERIAL USED ........................................................ 41 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ............. ........................ 41 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION ............................... ........................ 41 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION .. ........................ 42 GENERAL ............................................................................................. ........................ 42 EXAMPLE ............................................................................................. ........................ 42 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS .................................................... ........................ 43 SCOPE AND PURPOSE ....................................................................... ........................ 43 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE ......................... ........................ 43 FIXED SIGN ......................................................................................... ........................ 43 PORTABLE SIGNS .............................................................................. ........................ 43 SIGN COLORING ................................................................................. ........................ 44 SIGN PLACEMENT ............................................................................. ........................ 44 SIGN MAINTENANCE ........................................................................ ........................ 44 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN .................................................................. ........................ 44 15.1 15.2 15.3 17.1 17.2 17.3 17.4 17.5 17.6 17.7 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................. 45 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions 1 DEFINITIONS Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents. Agent Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the city. Agreement The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Application far° Payment The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Approve The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the work to be performed. Bidding Documents The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Bonds Perforrnanc e and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. City The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida. Construction Inspector A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the intent of the Contract Documents. ' Construction Manager The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding section III.doc Page I of 46 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the Owner's Representative during construction. Contract Documents The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post-Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative. Critical Path Method Construction Schedule-CPM A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution of the schedule. Day A calendar day of twenty-four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment. Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement, which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent Section III.doc Page 2 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. F. D.O.T Specifications The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition). ' Furnish The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place and ready for service". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseeing. Laws and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. Milestone A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the final completion date. Notice to Proceed (NTP) A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed. For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Owner's Representative Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction. Person A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial ' entity. Project The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 1 Section III.doc Page 3 of 46 11/03/2010 1 Section III - General Conditions Partial Utilization Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work.. Representative of Contractor The Contractor shall assign a responsible person. or persons, one of whom shall be at the construction site at all times that work is progressing. The narnes and positions of these persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre-construction conference. This person or persons shall not be.changed without written approval of City Engineer. Request for .Information (RM) An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from the Contractor to the Engineer. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which. are specifically prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all. illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment Bond. Section III.doc Page 4 of 46 11/03/2010 1 1 1 Section 111 -- General Conditions Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water. Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work The entire completed, construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract. 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS Engineer shall furnish to Contractor two (2) copies of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. ' 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable Section I1:I.doc Page 5 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Within twenty (20) days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Owner's Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. Typically, oversight of the project officially passes from the Engineering Department to the Construction Department at the preconstruction conference. In these cases, the preconstruction conference is run by the Construction Department and chaired by the City's Construction Manager. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the Preconstruction Conference a color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at this conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also bring a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the preconstruction conference a completed Emergency Call List and a completed Authorized Signature List. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a project disk that has all of the necessary data and survey control points for the purpose of construction stakeout and as-built survey. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a Contractor evaluation package. This is for the purpose of rating the Contractor's performance for reference when considering future contracts and bid prequalification. 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a look-ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting, and all material test reports generated in the same time period. Section III.doc Page 6 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 3.1 INTENT The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of r' the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well- known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents, shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's Representative, or any of their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. ' 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. t Section III.doc Page 7 of 46 11 /03/2010 1 Section III - General Conditions 4 AVAILABILITY-OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid. for by the Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. Section 11I.doc Page 8 of 46 11/03/2010 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t r t Section III— General Conditions 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer wbenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour. 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to ineet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. ¦ 5.2 INSURANCE Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or r furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily Section III.doc Page 9 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an. offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such. person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v) Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by the Owner or any other additional insured) which. Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and maintained shall: (i) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) Owner of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whore shall be listed as additional insured, and include coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual. liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, shall remain in effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish the Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to the Owner and any such additional insured, of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer. The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations: 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory (2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000. 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE Comprehensive General Liability including Premise/Operations; Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities: Section Ill.doc Page 10 of 46 11/03/2010 1 u 1 1 u 1 1 1 Ll 1 I Section III - General Conditions Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate Aggregate (2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual $1,,000,000. Annual Aggregate Aggregate (3) Personal Injury, with $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual employment exclusion deleted Aggregate Aggregate 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY including all owned (private and others), hired and non-owned vehicles: Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Person $500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Accident (2) Property Damage $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from Owner. Lon shore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self-insurer. For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7, S, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to secure the payment of compensation. Section Ill..doc rage 11 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, .Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Sub-contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party malting such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted whenever necessary. Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed Section IIl.doc Page 12 of 46 11/03/2010 1 1 1 1 t i Section III - General Conditions from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the Owner's Representative. Contractor shall. reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $60.00 per hour. Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without the Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work. All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and. conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 11 11 1 The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment to be incorporated into the WORK under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Contract Documents. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures. Section I'fWoc Page 13 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. 6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person.. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Section III.doc Page 14 of 46 11/03/2010 i Section III - General Conditions Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 1 1 1 Cl 0 1 u 11 6.5 USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.5.1 STAGING AREAS The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right-of-ways, is very important to the Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed: Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days. Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times. • All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP. • Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days. Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times. Section III.doc Page 15 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions • Sod must be restored with ten (10) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe pressure test. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times. If the project or a portion of it does not involve right-of ways, then a different schedule of sod. restoration may be considered. 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual lazowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work. 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. 6.8 PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. Section III.doc Page 16 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III - Gencral Conditions Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner of Clearwater Building Permit Pees will be waived. 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all ' safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other haxmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when ' prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. Section III.doc Page 17 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions 6.10 EMERGENCIES In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from. the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. 6.11 DRAWINGS 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified: (1) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each submittal within twenty-one (21) consecutive calendar days. The Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction. Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within twenty-one (21) consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay claim from the Contractor. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's Section III.doc Page 18 of 46 11/03/2010 I Section III - General Conditions review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Engineer's review and approval of Shop :Drawings or Samples shall. not relieve Contractor from. responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written .notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a number greater than twenty percent (20%) of the total number of first time submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for all third submittals. The number of first time submittals shall be equal to the number of submittals agreed to by Engineer and Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal of Shop Drawings, Samples or other items requiring approval will be backcharged to Contractor at the rate of 3.0 times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due Contractor for Work completed. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor. 6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As-Built Drawings, in good order and legible condition to be continuously marked-up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. The As-Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant, and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project. .The As-Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As-Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked-up blueline prints do not conform to the "As-Built Drawings" requirements. As-Built Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay Section III.doc Page 19 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As-Built Drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness. Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The Owner's acceptance of the "As-Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As-Built Drawings. 6.11.2.1 General The Contractor shall prepare an "AS-BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 61G17-6, Florida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The contractoa- will deliver to the Owner two bard copies of signed and sealed As-Built Drawings and an AutoCAD file. 61G17-6.002 Dejinition: (10)(a) As-Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and/or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may he located and delineated: also know as Record Survey. This survey shall be clearly titled "As-Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the Owner with the required As-Built Survey. 6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted. 6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain) All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, Basting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. 6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring The as-built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as-built drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional Section 111.doc Page 20 of 46 11/03/2010 1 Section III - General Conditions conduit runs, 1-line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. 6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control The As-Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department. 6.11.2.6 Standards The As-Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 61G17 and the Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the as-built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. 6.11.2.7 Other The As-Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS 1 6.11.3.1 Layer Naming t 1 6.11.3.1.1 Drnfiv=Q and Aiiffivpc DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line work and symbols TX suffix denotes text - use for all text, no matter the prefix 6.11.3.1.2 I aver Nnminn npfinitinns- GAS gas lines and appurtenances ELEC power lines and appurtenances PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances BOC curbs WALK sidewalk WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers Section III.doc Page 21 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions STORM storm lines and appurtenances TREES trees, bushes, planters SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances - FENCE all fences BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation. DRIVE driveways m EOP edge of pavement without curbs TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes TOPBANK top of bank TOESLOPE toe of slope TOPBERM top of berm TOEBERM toe of berm SEAWALL seawall CONCSLAB concrete slabs WALL walls, except seawall SHORE shoreline, water elevation CL centerline of road CLD centerline of ditch CLS centerline of swale CORNER property corners, monumentation BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks Other layers may be created as required, using above format. 6.11.3.2 Layer Properties All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer. All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer. All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts. 6.11.3.3 Text Styles Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0°, and a text height of .008 times the plot scale. Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5°, and a text height of .010 times the plot scale. Section III.doc Page 22 of 46 11/03/2010 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 Section III - General Conditions 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES: The as-built survey shall be produced on vellum or bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1 "=20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital. format. Acceptable file formats include: DWG, DXP of a shape file. Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 5624762 or e-mail address Thomas. Mahon ?learwater.com. 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non-execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance". Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 1 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, Section III.doc Page 23 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform. or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder oa- whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person. If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against the Owner on such account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the Owner shall notify Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indernrlifi.cation obligation under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub-contractor, Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers, directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any of them. 7 OTHER WORK 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for these purposes. The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with the Contractor's work or schedule. 7.2 COORDINATION If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. Section I11.doc Page 24 of 46 11/03/2010 t Section III - General Conditions 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative. The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General Conditions. The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work. The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on Tests and Inspections. In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances. Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ' 9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION t 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE Dependant of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer. 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time. Section III.doc Page 25 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with. Owner's Representative authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty (30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor. Section III.doc Page 26 of 46 11/03/2010 i i 1 1 Section III - General Conditions When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants. 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. Section III.doc Page 27 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III _.. General Conditions Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work. The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments recommended by Owner's Representative covering: changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties; changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by Section III.doc Page 28 of 46 11/03/2010 1. Section III - General Conditions a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work. Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and Contractor camlot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for directed changes in the WORK, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT"' basis. The Contractor shall apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and other items of direct costs required for the directed work. The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items: 1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual. payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with negotiating the subject change. 2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall be substantiated through vendors' invoices. 3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs if specifically used for the WORK. The rental rates shall not exceed the current rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as the full-unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor-owned equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment on stand-by. 4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater. The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed by the Contractor or Subcontractor. A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five percent (5%), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%). B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10%) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above. C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4. The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense. 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment section III.doc Page 29 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III- General Conditions required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid. 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Own er's Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence, unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an Section III.doc . Page 30 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. ' Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be ' delays within the control of Contractor. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Titres ' (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work. ' 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK AND INSPECTION 13.1 TESTS Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. ' Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in ' the Contract Documents. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and ' obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase ' thereof for incorporation of the Work. Section III.doc Page 31 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's Representative has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation., inspection or testing as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price. 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). Section III.doc Page 32 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it ftom the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. ' In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written 1 Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner ' prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating ' the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for ' Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the Owner. 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if ' Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In ' exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from Section III.doc Page 33 of 46 11/03/2010 t Section III -General Conditions all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, Agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors, and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and. remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will. be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in. the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 21$.735 and as described herein. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as-built survey and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on-site marked up as-built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the Contract Documents. In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. Section III.doc Page 34 of 46 11/03/2010 1 1 ?J Section III - General Conditions 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at the Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold frorn the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall. the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment, unless the application requires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment requires review and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment will be paid by the Owner within twenty-five (25) business days. If an Application for payment is rejected, notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the reasons for refusing payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted in writing, specifying deficiencies and identifying actions that would make the Application proper. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. The Owner's Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to Owner. Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Owner Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's Representative or Agent has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with Section III.doc Page 35 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III -- General Conditions the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay in accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative or Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the following: The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and Contractor and will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will produce a final punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and assign a date for this work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list. Failure to include any corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the contractor to complete all the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. Section III.doc Page 36 of 46 11/03/2010 u 1 1 Section III - General Conditions 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, As-built/Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii) consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by the Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any Lien. 1 Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition. t 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to Section III.doc Page 37 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative. 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period. of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative; if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or. if this Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed. The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem Section IILdoc Page 38 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III -General Conditions expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and. when so approved by Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release Contractor from liability. Upon. seven (7) days' written. notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable ' sums for overhead and profit on such Work; for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; ' for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. I Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. ' 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE If, through, no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety ' (90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to ' be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement ' and. without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven (7) day's written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work Section III.doc Page 39 of 46 11/03/20'10 Section III - General Conditions until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article. 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. 17 MISCELLANEOUS 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner. 17.2 GIVING NOTICE Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. Section III.doc Page 40 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III -General Conditions 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights ' to notice of assignment. 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2) years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the Contractor/Vendor. All terms, conditions ' and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction Department. 17.7 ROLL-OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll-off containers and/or dumpsters for their disposal needs. For availability or pricing contact Tom Glenn at the City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, phone: (727) 562-4923 or email: tom.glenn@myclearwater.com. 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the Contractor shall work and order thereof. 19 MATERIAL USED All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all materials. ' 20. CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications, Technical Specifications, Drawings. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. 21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION The Owner reserves the right, when identified during the bidding process as part of the project's documents, to contract with the Contractor to purchase certain portions of materials identified in the project as a sales tax savings option in compliance with Florida Law since the Owner is exempt from payment of sales tax. The Contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable ' taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment, which will be a part of the Contractor's work. The Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Contractor's contract. The Owner purchasing of construction materials, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Section III.doc Page 41 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions Additionally, Purchase Orders will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number. See SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION for ODP items included in the Contract Documents and the APPENDIX for ODP Documents. 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 22.1 GENERAL The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500-foot radius, unless stated otherwise in. the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to rernove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with, the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4-1/4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours. Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in the contract proposal. 22.2 EXAMPLE CITY SEAL Of CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION TODAY'S DATE: PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE We are the construction contractor performing (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property. This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property owners of the pending start of construction. (Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners) The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way. Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, Section III.doc Page 42 of 46 11/03/2010 1 Section III -General Conditions textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere. We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Superintendent at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you. 1 u s 1 1 Construction is anticipated to begin on: Company Name Company Address Contractor Phone Number 23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION. 23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference. 23.3 FIXED SIGN Fixed sign shall be 4-foot by 6-foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2-inches. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of two (2) 4-inch by 4-inch (4"x4") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24-inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint. 23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24-inches by 30-inches (24"00") in size and will be attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080- inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade. Section III.doc Page 43 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions 23.5 SIGN COLORING Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's sun and waves logo. The color of the sun shall be pantone yellow; the wave shall be process blue; and the text shall be black. 23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right-of-way, the signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of- way, the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved. to the locations of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment. 23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced. 23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN Section III.doc Page 44 of 46 11/03/2010 Section III - General Conditions PROJECT NAME (CONTRACT NUMBER) (DEPARTMENT NAME) PROJECT CONTRACTOR: COMPLETION FUNDING: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: ? LL Clearwater U 1 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives written notice to proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 of these General Conditions. It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number of consecutive calendar days as determined in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Section III.doc Page 45 of 46 11/03/2010 1 Section III - General Conditions Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars , ($480.00) per each eight-hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of ' final acceptance. Section III.doc Page 46 of 46 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11/03/2010 SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of Contents: SECTION IV .................................................................................................................................. i TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................... i 1 SCOPE OF WORK ........................................................................................................... 1 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................. 1 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST .................................................................................. 6 2 FIELD ENGINEERING .................................................................................................. 7 2.1 LINE AND GRADE S14ALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR .............. . 7 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS .................................................................... . ........ 7 2 1.2 LAYOUT DA"IA ....................................................................................................... 8 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY ................................ . 8 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS .............................................................................................. . S 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS ........................................................................................ . 8 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS .......................................................................... . 8 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK .............................................................. 10 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK ........................................................ 10 6 CONCRETE ..................................................................................................................... 11 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK ......................................... 11. 7.1 EXCAVATION...... ......................................................................................................... 11 7.2 FORMS .......................................................................................................................... 11 8 REINFORCEMENT ........................................................................................................ 11 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 12 9 OBSTRUCTIONS ........................................................................................................... 12 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT .......................................................................................... 12 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS ................................................................ 13 12 DEWATERING ............................................................................................................... 13 12.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 13 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 14 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL ................................................................................... 14 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROMANYNON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY ........................... 14 13 SANITARY MANHOLES .............................................................................................. 16 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE .......................................................................................................... 16 13.2 PRECAST TYPE .......................................................................................................... 17 Section IV.doc i 10/11/2010 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) ........................................ 17 13.3 DROP MANHOLES ..................................................................................................... 17 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS ............................................................................................ 17 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS .............................................................................................. 17 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES ............................................................................. 18 14 BACKFILL ...................................................................................................................... 18 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC ........................................................................................ 18 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................ 18 1. 6.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 18 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL ..................................................................... 19 8 UNDERDRAINS ............................................................................................................. 19 9 STORM SEWERS ........................•......................................................•.......................... 20 0 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS .............................................................. 21 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................. .................... 19 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................. .................... 19 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................. .................... 19 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................. .................... 20 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION ..................................................................... .................... 20 19.2 TESTING .................................................................................................. ....................20 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................. .................... 21 20.1 MATERIALS ............................................................................................ .................... 21 20.1.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ..................................................................... ................... 21 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE .......................................................................... ................... 21 20.2 INSTALLATION ...................................................................................... .................... 21 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE ..................................................................... ................... 21 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE .......................................................................... ................... 22 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS ............................................................................ ................... 22 20.4 TESTING ................................................................................................... ...................22 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITYSEWERS ..................................................... ................... 22 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS ........................................................... ................... 23 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT .............................................................................. ................... 23 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE ..................................................................... ................... 23 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE .......................................................................... ................... 23 DRAINAGE ..................................................................................................................... 23 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE .......................................................................... 23 22.1 BASE ............................................................................................................................ 23 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ................... 25 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ............ ................... 25 22.2 SUBGRADE.............................. ................................................................ 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ............................................................. ................... 25 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ......................................................................... ................... 26 18 19 20 21 22 Section IV,doc ii 10/11/2010 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS ................................................................... 26 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE ........................................................................................... 26 23.1.1 AGGREGATE ........................................................................................................ 26 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS.. ........................................ ...................................... 26 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................ 26 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES .................................................................... 27 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS ............................... 27 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 28 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION .............................................................. 28 23.61 CRACKS ................................................................................................................ 28 23.62 POTHOLES .......................................................................................................... 28 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES ................................................................................ 29 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 29 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE .................................................................... 30 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 30 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 30 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT .................................. 31 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 31 25.1 IRRIGATION ................................................................................................................ 31 25. DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 31 25.1.2 PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................... 33 25.1.3 EXECUTION ......................................................................................................... 37 25.2 LANDSCAPE ............................................................................................................... 40 25.2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 40 25.2.2 PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................... 45 25.2.3 EXECUTION ......................................................................................................... 48 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING ................................................... 55 26.1 INTENT ........................................................................................................................ 55 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTORANSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ......................... 55 26.3 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 55 26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ................................................................... 56 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ....................................................................................... 56 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 57 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ..................................................................................... 57 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 57 26.9 PAYMENT .................................................................................................................... 57 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS ........................................................................................... 57 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .............................................................. ...................... 58 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 58 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS ................................ 58 29 CONCRETE CURBS ..................................................................................................... 58 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 58 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 58 Section IV.doc iii 10/11/2010 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS ......................................................... 58 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS .......................................................................................... 58 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS ......................................................................................... 59 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 59 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT ........................................................ ............................ 59 31 SODDING ........................................................................................•...............................59 32 SEEDING .........................................................................................................................60 33 STORM MANHOLES INLETS CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................ 60 33.1 BLJILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES ................................................................. ............... 60 33.2 PRECAST TYPE ........................................................................................... ............... 61 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT .................................................................................. ............... 61 MATERIAL, USED ...............................................................................•.......... ............... 61 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ....................... ............... 61 S TREET SIGNS ............................................................................................... ............... 61 AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS .................................................. 61 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING ................. ............... 61 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING .................................... ............... 61 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS ......................................................... ............... 62 37.4 EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................ ............... 62 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO ...................................................................... 62 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO ........................................................ ............... 62 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION ............................................................................................ 62 37.8 LIGHTING ................................................................................................................... 63 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL .................................................................................................... 63 37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX ......... ................:......................................................................... 63 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE ............................................................................................... 63 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES ..................................................................... .............. 63 E ROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL ................................................................... 63 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS ................................................................. 63 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES ............................. 64 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS ...................... .............. 64 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES .......................................................... .............. 64 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS ......................................................................... .............. 64 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES ........ .............. 64 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS ...................................................... .............. 65 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION ......................................... .............. 65 38.9 MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................... .............. 65 38.10 COMPLIANCE ............................................................................................... 4 S 6 7 8 ..............65 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING ............. ................................................ 68 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................... 68 Section IV.doc iv 10/11/2010 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES ....................•................................................................................... 68 41.1 SCOPE .......................................................................................................................... 68 41.2 MATERIALS .................................................................................... ........ 69 41.2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 69 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS .................. . .................................................. 69 41.2.3 GATE VALVES ...................................................................................................... 71 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES ...................................................................................................... 71 41.25 HYDRANTS ............................... ............................................................................ 72 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES ............................................................................................. 73 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTIONAND REPAIRS .................................................................. 73 41.28 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS ................................................................................ 73 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES ....................................................... . . . ... ................................ 74 41.2.10 BLOW OFFHYDRA N%S ...................................................................................... 74 41.3 CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................................ 74 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING ....................................................................................... 74 4.1.3.2 PIPE LAYING ....................................................................................................... 74 41.3.3 SETTING OF VAL VES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS .... . . ................................... 76 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES ............................................................... 76 41.4 TESTS ........................................................................................................................... 77 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS ......................................................................................... 77 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST ................................................................................................ 77 41.5 STERILIZATION ......................................................................................................... 77 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT .......................................................................................... 77 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 77 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PR OCED URF, .......................................................................... 77 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS ........................................................................... 78 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS .............................................................................................. 78 41.6 ME ASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ........................................................................... 78 41.61 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 78 41.62 FURNISHAND INSTALL WATER MAINS ........................................................... 79 41.63 FURNISHAND INSTALL FITTINGS ................................................................... 79 41.64 FURNISHAND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS ................................................................................................................ 79 41.65 FURNISHAND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS ....................................................... 79 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 80 43 TENNIS COURTS .......................................................................................................... 80 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS .......................................................................................... 80 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS ............................................................................................. 80 43.1.2 BASE COURSE ..................................................................................................... 80 43.1.3 PRIME COAT ....................................................................................................... 80 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE. ............................................ ........... ............................ 80 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE ................................................ ................................. 80 43.1.6 COLOR COAT ...................................................................................................... 81 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS.... ...................................................... q ....................... ......... 82 43.2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 82 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION .................................................... ............................. .......... 83 Section IV.doc v 10/11/2 010 43.2.3 SLOPE ...................................... ..... ........................... ...................................... .. .....83 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................ ....... 84 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING ................................................................................ ....... 84 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE ...................................................................................... ....... 84 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER ............................................................................................ ....... 84 43.2.8 FENCING ...................................................................................................... ....... 85 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS .............................:............................................................... .......85 43.2.10 CO URT EQ UIPMENT ............................................... .... ... . . . .. .. .. .. ............. ..... ....... 85 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE .................................................................................... ....... 87 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) ........................................................................... ....... 87 43.2.13 CONCRETE ................................................................................................... .......87 4,3.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING .......................................... ....... 87 43.2.15 WATER COOLER ........................................ . .................................................. ....... 88 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION ....................................................................................... .......88 43.2.17 WARRANTY.....,....... ...................................................... . .. . ............................ ....... 88 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL .................................................................. ....... 89 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL .. ....... 89 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN ....................................................... ....... 89 442 WORK ZONE SAFETY .................................................................................. ....... 89 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES ................................................................ ....... 90 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS ........................................................................................... ....... 90 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS .......... ....... 90 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS .................................................. ....... 90 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS ...................................................................................... ....... 90 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN ............................ ....... 90 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION ............. ....... 91 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ...................................... ....... 91 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR..... ....... 91 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING ....................................................................... ....... 91 45.1 INTENT ................................................................................................................. ....... 91 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ................. ....... 92 45.3 MATERIALS ......................................................................................................... ....... 92 45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ............................................................ ....... 92 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ................................................................................ ....... 93 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION ...................................................................................... ....... 93 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION .............................................................................. ....... 93 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................ ....... 93 45.9 PAYMENT ....................................................................................................................93 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING ..................................... 94 46.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 94 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS .................................................................................... ....... 94 46.1.2 QUALITYCONTROL .................................................................................... ....... 94 46.1.3 SAMPLES ....................................................................................................... .......94 46.1.4 REJECTION ................................................................................................... .......94 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................. ........ 94 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES ......................................................................... 6 ........ 95 44 45 46 Section IV.doc vi 10/11/2010 463.1 HANDLING OF PIPE .......................................................................................... . 95 463.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS ................................................................... . 95 46 3.3 PIPE.IOINING .................................................................................................... . 95 463.4 IANDLING OF FUSED PIPE ............................................................................ . 95 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE ...................................................................................... .. 95 46.4.1 PIPIT' REQ UIREMENI S AND DIMENSIONS ..................................................... . 95 464.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION .......................................................................... . 95 464.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS ......................................................... . 96 464.4 INSERTION OF T HE LINER ............................................................................... . 96 464.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES ..................................................................... . 96 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED ............................................... . 96 46.4.7 BACKFILLING .................................................................................................... .97 464.8 POINT REPAIR .................................................................................................... . 97 464.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS.. ................................................................................ . 97 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE ...................... 97 47.1 SCOPE ......................................................................................................................... .97 47.2 MATERIALS ............................................................................................................... . 97 47.3 PIPE .............................................................................................................................. 97 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM ...................................................................................................... 98 47.5 FITTINGS .................................................................................................................... . 98 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................ 98 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT ............................................................................... . 98 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE ................. 98 48.3 COMPOSITION ............................................................................................ ... 98 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................. 99 48.5 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 99 48.6 WATER ......................................................................................................................... 99 48.7 REINFORCEMENT .............................................................................. ................ 99 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS ...................................................................................... . 99 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION ....................................................................................... 100 48.10 PROPORTIONING ..................................................................................................... 100 48.11 MIXING ...................................................................................................................... 100 48.12 APPLICATION ........................................................................................................... 100 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ....................................................................................... 101 48.14 SURFACE FINISH ............................................................................. 101 48.15 CURING ..................................................................................................................... 101 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION ................................................................... 101 48.17 INSPECTION ............................................................................................................. 102 48.18 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................. 102 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION ......................... 103 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT ............................................................................................... 103 49.2 PAYMENT .................................................................................................................. 103 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS .......................................................................... 103 49.3.1 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................ 103 49.3.2 INSTALLATIONAND EXECUTION .................................................................. 104 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM .............................................. 104 47 48 49 Section IV.doc vii 10/11/2010 49.4.1 MATERIALS .............. ....................................... ......... ....................................... ... 105 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROI....................................................................................... 105 49.6 GROUTING MIX ....................................................................................................... 105 49.7 LINER MIX ................................................................................................................ 105 49.8 WATER ....................................................................................................................... 106 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS ................................................................................................ 106 49.10 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................. 106 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION ....................................................................... 106 49.11.1 PREPARATION ................................................................................................... 106 49.11.2 MIXING ............................................................................................................... 107 49.11.3 SPRAYING .......................................................................................................... 107 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING ......................................................................................... 107 49.11.5 CURING .............................................................................................................. 107 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE ...................................................... 108 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM ....... 108 49.12.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................ 108 49.12.2 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................ 108 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION .................................................................. .110 PROTECT INFORMATION SIGNS .......................................................................... .112 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM ............................................................ .112 51.1 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................ .112 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS ..................................................................................... .113 51.2.1 ASPHALT ............................................................................................................ .113 51.2.2 CONCRETE ........................................................................................................ .113 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX, .......................................................................... . 113 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT ......................................................... .113 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE .......................................................... .114 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION .................................................................................... .114 51.6 PLAYING LINES ....................................................................................................... .114 51.7 GENERAL .................................................................................................................. .114 51.8 LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................................ .114 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION ..........................115 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES ..................................................................................115 53.1 MATERIAL ......................................... .. ...................115 53.1.1 GABIONAND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL .................................................. .115 53.1.2 GABIONAND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL :.............................................. .117 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE ............................................................................................... .118 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC ....................................................................................... .118 53.2 PERFORMANCE ........................................................................................................118 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS ...........................................................119 54.1 SCOPE .........................................................................................................................119 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK ....................................................................................... ..119 54.3 WORK METHODS ................................................................................................... . 120 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING ....................................................................... 120 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT ........................................................................... 2 3 4 120 50 51 52 53 5 Section IV.doc viii 10/11/2010 54.4 LITTER ....................................................................................................................... 120 54.5 VISUAL CHECK ....................................................................................................... 120 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING .......................................................... 120 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.)..... 120 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL .................................................................................................. 120 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL ................................................................................................ 121 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY ............................................................................................ 121 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION............. .............................................................................. 121 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA ......................................................... 121 54.13 MULCH CONDITION ............................................................................................... 121 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR .................................................................... 121 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL ..................................................... 121 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION ............................................................................................ 121 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION ............................................................................................ 122 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE ................................................................................................. 1.22 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK ....................................................................................... 122 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL .............................................................................. 122 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS ........................................................................................... 122 55 MILLING OPERATIONS ........................................................................................... 123 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE ...................................... 123 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... 123 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS ................................................................................. 124 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS ..................................................................................... 124 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES .................. 124 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES ............................................................ 124 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING ................................................................................................ 124 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS .............................................................................. 125 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 125 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 125 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ................................................................................... 125 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 125 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 125 57 RIPRAP ......................................................................................................................... 125 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 125 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT .................................................................................... ....... 126 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY ................................................................................ 126 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL ............................................................................................. 126 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING ................................................................ 126 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS ........................................... 126 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 127 60 S IGNING AND MARKING ......................................................................................... 127 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 127 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING ..............................................................................................127 Section IV.doc ix 10/11/2010 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT :..:..:..::::............:....: 128 , 62 TREE PROTECTION .......................... ......................... 62.1 TREE BARRICADES ................................................................................................ 128 62.2 ROOT PRUNING ....................................................................................................... 128 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING ........................................................................................ 129 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES .............................................................................................. 130 ' 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN ............................................................................................... 130 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES ..................................................................... 130 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE ....................................................... 130 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS ........................................................................................... 131 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS ........................................................................................... 131 63.6 POSTING ....................................................................................................................131 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES ............................................................................................ 131. fl' Section IV.doc x 10/11/2010 1 1 ¦ ¦ 1 1 1 Section iv -Technical Specifications SCOPE OF WORK 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION Project Name: MARSHALL STREET WRF RAPID SAND FILTER REHABILITATION Project Number: 09-0045-UT Description of Work: A. Rehabilitate twelve (12) existing rapid sand filters and associated equipment at the Marshall Street WRF. This is an active wastewater treatment plant and the work must be performed in such a manner and phased to minimize the operational impact on the plant and the plant staff. Currently, there are existing filter cells that are out of service. The work shall be scheduled and performed so as to place a minimum of 9 filters cells (existing and rehabilitated), including the ability to backwash these cells, in service. Thereafter, no fewer than 9 cells (existing and rehabilitated), including the ability to backwash these cells, shall remain in service at all times until all cells are rehabilitated. For short periods of time, as approved by and coordinated with the Owner, the Contractor will be permitted to take the existing filter influent channel (approximately 10 minutes), 1 mudwell and backwash supply (washwater) piping headers (approximately 8 hours) out of service in order to replace existing filter-related valves. B. Record drawings and portions of the O&M Manual from the original filter construction project are available from the Owner upon request. The Contractor shall not rely on the accuracy of this information and shall verify existing conditions. C. The base bid shall include all preparations and modifications for the infilling of the Control Building trench, which includes but is not limited to cutting and capping of existing pipes; core drilling; furnishing and installing all concrete, steel, geofoam, pvc pipe including cleanouts; and demolishing the existing concrete equipment pad as shown on the Control Building Plans & Sections Sheets (M-1, S-1 & S-2). Filter Cell Components A. The Contractor shall completely disassemble and remove all existing material and components from the interior of each filter cell with the following exceptions: + The underdrain frames shall be left in place, sandblasted, and coated. + The gullet covers shall be removed, sandblasted, coated, and reinstalled. The cores and fiberglass grating shall be carefully removed, cleaned, and re- installed as directed. t + New cores and fiberglass grating shall be installed as required. + The underdrain vent piping shall be left in place. I + The low pressure air manifold piping within the cells shall be left in place. The diffusers are to be replaced. B. The Contractor shall expose all six underdrain frames in each filter cell and clean as necessary or as directed by the Engineer to enable a visual evaluation by the Engineer. It is anticipated that no underdrain frames will be replaced and that all will be sandblasted and painted in situ and in accordance with the specifications. Section IV.doc Page I of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications C. The Contractor shall remove all gullet covers and clean as necessary or as directed by the Engineer to enable a visual evaluation by the Engineer. It is anticipated that no gullet covers will be replaced. All gullet covers will be sandblasted, painted, and re-installed in accordance with the specifications. D. The Contractor shall remove and clean all cores and fiberglass grating as directed by the Engineer to enable a visual evaluation by the Engineer. The Contractor shall assume that a maximum of 36 of the 216 total. cores with gratings will be replaced with new cores and gratings under the lump sum base bid work. The remaining 180 cores with gratings are to be cleaned and re-installed. Nine (9) additional cores and gratings are included in the base bid as a unit price and will be installed only if necessary as approved by the Engineer. New cores and gratings must be installed as a pair and in sets of three per frame. New cores and existing cores shall not be installed adjacent to each. other on the same frame. If a new core is necessary, it shall be paired with a new fiberglass grating. The Contractor will be responsible for the cost of replacing cores and gratings damaged as a result of the Contractor's negligence during removal, cleaning or re-installation. E. The Contractor shall remove all other components, hardware, and, consumables inside each filter cell and replace with new components, hardware, and consumables as supplied by the filter equipment manufacturer, including but not limited to hold down beams, perimeter hold down assemblies, and stainless steel wire mesh. F. All components, hardware, and consumables located beneath the sand media in each cell, except the underdrain frames, shall be removed and replaced with new components, hardware and consumables. G. The interior walls and underdrain frames of each filter cell shall be cleaned and painted. H. The media in each cell shall be removed and replaced with new media. I. The backwash troughs, cell inlet boxes, and inlet weir in each cell shall be removed and replaced with new troughs, inlet boxes, and weirs. Valves A. A total of twenty-four (24) 20-inch offset disc type butterfly valves and pneumatic actuators for the filter filtrate and backwash inlet shall be removed and replaced with new offset disc-type butterfly valves with vane-type pneumatic actuators. Due to changes in valve standards, these valves are being replaced with valves having a different (longer) laying length. The existing 20-inch filter filtrate and backwash inlet valves have a laying length of 4.25 inches. The new valves shall have a laying length of 5.0 inches. The Contractor shall modify and relocate the existing filter piping in the pipe gallery as necessary to accommodate the changes in laying length. The Contractor shall submit a written plan describing his proposed procedure for replacing these valves while maintaining the required filters in service. B. A total of twelve (12) 18-inch filter inlet valves, stem risers, actuator pedestals, and pneumatic actuators, shall be removed and replaced with new offset disc type butterfly valves, stern risers, actuator pedestals, and vane type pneumatic actuators. Due to changes in valve standards these valves are being replaced with valves having a different lay length. The existing 18-inch filter inlet valves have a laying length of 4.25 inches. The new valves shall have a laying length of 4.5 inches. The Contractor shall modify and relocate the existing filter inlet piping as necessary to accommodate the changes in laying length. Section IV.doc Page 2 of 131 10/11/2010 1 1 Ll 1 1 1 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications C. A total of twelve (12) 20-inch filter backwash outlet butterfly valves and pneumatic actuators shall be removed and replaced with new offset disc type butterfly valves and vane type pneumatic actuators. The new valves shall have a laying length of 5.0 inches. There are no laying length issues associated with existing piping for these valves. D. The two existing 18-inch check valves serving the backwash pumps shall be removed and replaced with new check valves. E. The two existing 18-inch backwash pump throttling valves with manual actuators shall be removed and replaced with new throttling valves and new manual actuators. These valves are located immediately downstream of the backwash pump check valves. Filter Controls A. Six local filter control consoles shall be removed and replaced with six new local control consoles, including solenoid valves, air piping and tubing, controls, switches and all appurtenances required to replace the existing control consoles with new fully-functional consoles. The new local control consoles shall be integrated into the master filter control ladder logic program. The existing conduit and wiring between the control consoles and the master control panel (PI,C) shall be reused. The tubing between the control consoles and the pneumatically controlled filter valves shall be replaced. B. The existing master filter control program shall be updated in accordance with the filter manufacturer's recommendations with input from plant operations staff. The master control program shall include controls for all filter liquid (4) and air (1) valve controls, as well as the backwash (2) and mudwell (2) pumps, the chemical clean pumps (2) and new motor-operated valves (12), and any other controls provided with' the original filter installation. The new program shall replicate all original (not existing) filter controls in accordance with the original filter control strategy, except as modified herein. The filter manufacturer shall propose any other controls deemed necessary for the Owner/Engineer's consideration. The Contractor shall furnish the new filter control program to the Owner for installation by the Owner. If necessary, the Owner will replace the PLC. C. The filters will continue to operate using the existing PLC and existing program until the rehabilitation work has been completed and all butterfly valves have been replaced. At that time, the Owner will install. the program. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the Owner in making any adjustments to the program necessary for proper operation of the filters, pumps, and chemical system (timers, etc.). D. The existing float-type level switches, including all wiring and conduit in the common inlet channel (1), the clearwell (1), the chemical clean tank (1), and in each filter cell (2) shall be removed and replaced with new level switches, wiring, and conduit. The original level switches (4) in the mudwell have been removed and functionally replaced by a level transducer. The level transducer shall be retained and used in the filter program to control the mudwell pumps. The level transducer set points shall be configured in accordance with the original float levels and shall indicate mudwell level on the Master Control panel. All level switches and transducer signals shall be integrated into the master filter control ladder logic program. Filter Manufacturer's Representative The Contractor shall provide the services of the filter manufacturer's authorized representative. The filter manufacture's authorized representative shall supervise filter disassembly, installation, Section IV.doc Page 3 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications inspection, PLC re-programming, testing, and startup services for all 12 filter cells, the air systems, chemical systems, and backwash and mudwell pumping. Low Pressure Air System That portion of the existing low pressure air system for each cell inclusive of and downstream of the 3-inch manual valve and upstream of both 2-inch manual valves as shown on the drawings, shall be removed and replaced with all new components. The work shall include replacement of piping components, fittings, tubing, tubing adapters, valves and actuators, hangers, supports, and hardware. This work shall also include replacement of the 3-inch butterfly valve and associated pneumatic actuator. Replacement of the low pressure air piping upstream of the 3-inch manually-controlled valve is to be included in Additive Alternate A. The low pressure air piping in the filter pipe gallery between the 2-inch manual valves and the pipe gallery wall shall remain in service and shall be cleaned, properly prepared, and painted in accordance with the specifications. The wall penetration and the manifold piping within each cell shall remain in service. The existing diffusers in each cell are to be removed and replaced with new diffusers. New diffuser support brackets are to be installed as shown. on the drawings. High Pressure Air System The base bid shall include removing and replacing the existing high pressure air system with new components but excluding the actual dual air compressor and receiver assembly. This includes but is not limited to pneumatic actuators, piping, components, fittings, tubing, tubing adapters, valves, hangers, supports, hardware, air dryer, pre-filters, coalescing filters, and pressure regulator. Additive Alternate B provides for the removal of the existing air compressor and receiver and its replacement with a new dual compressor, receiver, appurtenant equipment, controls, and electrical disconnects, as well as provisions for a temporary air compressor to maintain operations during construction. Chemical Clean System The existing chemical clean system, including chemical storage tank, piping, and valves shall be removed and replaced with a new chemical clean system. The existing pumps shall not be replaced but shall be retained and incorporated into the new chemical clean system. This work shall include the installation of new motor-operated valves in the feed piping to each filter with all wiring and conduit to the filter control consoles and to the PLC as was originally intended and shown on the drawings but not actually installed. This work shall also include the removal and replacement of the existing eyewash/shower. Mudwell and Valve Vault A. Existing check valves, isolation valves, air release valves, and pipe supports in the mudwell valve vault shall be removed and replaced with new components. Existing components shall be sandblasted and re-painted with coal tar epoxy. B. The base elbows (2) of the existing mudwell pumps shall be removed and replaced with new base elbows. The new base elbows shall be from the same manufacturer as the pumps. The bottom of the mudwell shall be repaired as needed to provide proper mounting and support for the new base elbows. General Electrical Existing electrical panels, electrical transformer, lights, conduit, switches, and receptacles shall be removed and replaced as shown on the electrical drawings. Section IV.doc Page 4 of 131 10/1112010 1 Other Base Bid Items Section 1V - Technical Specifications • The base bid shall include cleaning and painting all existing 18-inch and 20-inch pipe, fittings, valves, and appurtenances in the pipe gallery, matching the existing color. • The base bid shall include cleaning and painting all the new actuator stands in the filter common area, matching the existing color. • The base bid shall include cleaning and painting the existing low pressure air piping down stream of the 2-inch manual valves to the filter gallery wall, matching the existing color. • The base bid shall include cutting (8) eight existing bollards off flush with the existing pavement in the parking lot immediately south of the filter building. The bollard remnants shall be ground smooth and be suitable for traffic. Additive Alternates A. Under Additive Alternate A, the Contractor shall remove and replace the 8-inch and 3- inch stainless steel low pressure air piping system, including supports, hangers, hardware, and valves upstream of the 3-inch manual valve on each filter and down stream of the coupling located just above the floor in the compressor room. This includes the run along the east wall of the compressor room serving the chlorine contact chamber. B. Under Additive Alternate B, the Contractor shall remove the existing air compressor, receiver, and appurtenant equipment and furnish and install a new compressor receiver and appurtenant equipment including new controls and electrical disconnects. C. Under Additive Alternate C, the Contractor shall clean and re-paint the filter common area walls and ceiling to match the existing colors. D. Under Additive Alternate D, the Contractor shall clean and re-paint the pipe galley walls and ceiling to match the existing colors. E. Under Additive Alternate E, the Contractor shall clean and re-paint the walls and ceiling in the compressor room to match the existing colors. Project Sign The Contractor shall provide one (1) fixed project sign as described in SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 of the Contract Documents. Owner Direct Purchase The following list of equipment is to be procured under the Owner Direct Purchase provisions of the Contract Documents. • The material within each filter cell • The filter consoles Contract Period I The Contract Period shall be 360 Consecutive Calendar Days Section IV.doc Page S of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST Project Name: MARSHALL STREET WRF RAPID SAND FILTER REHABILITATION Project Number: 09-0045-UT The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X" as shown below: 1 ® Scope Of Work 2.1 ® Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The Contractor 2.2 Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The City 3 ® Definition Of `terms 4 ? Order And Location Of The Work 5 ? Excavation For Underground Work 6 Concrete 7 Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work 8 Reinforcement 9 Obstructions 10 Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement 1 I ? Work In Easements Or Parkways 12 ? Dewatering 13 Sanitary Manholes 14 Backfill 15 ? Street Crossings, Etc. 16 ? Raisin Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures 17 Unsuitable Material Removal 18 ? Underdrains 19 ? Storm Sewers 20 Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains 21 F1 I Drainage 22 ? Roadway Base And Subgrade 23 ? Asphaltic Concrete Materials 24 Adjustment To The Unit Bid Price For Asphalt 25 ? General Planting Specifications 26 ? Hd e Deformed - Reformed Pipe Lining 27 F-1 I Plant Mix Driveways 28 ? Reporting Of Tonnage Of Recycled Materials 29 Concrete Curbs 30 Concrete Sidewalks And Driveways 31 ? Sodding 32 Seeding 33 ? Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures 34 ? Material Used 35 ? Conflict Between Plans And Specifications 36 Street Signs 37 AudioNideo Recording Of Work Areas 38 ? Erosion And Siltation Control 39 Utility Tie In Location Marking Section IV.doc Page 6 of 131 1.0/11/2010 Section Iv-'technical Specifications 40 Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee 41 Potable Water Mains, Reclaimed Water Mains and Appurtenances 42 Gas System Specifications _ 43 Tennis Courts 44 ? Work Zone Traffic Control 45 ? Cured-In-Place Pipe Lining 46 ? Specifications for Polyethylene Sliplining 47 ? S ecifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe 48 ? Gunite Specifications 49 ? Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration _ 50 ? Project Information Signs _ 51 In-Line Skating Surfacing System 52 ? Resident Notification of Start of Construction _ 53 Gabions and Mattresses 54 ? Lawn Maintenance Specifications 55 ? - Milling Operations 56 ? Clearing and Grubbing 57 ? Ri ra 58 ® Treatment Plant Safety 59 ? Traffic Signal E uipment and Materials 60 Signing And Marking 61 Roadway Lighting 62 ? Tree Protection 63 Project Web Pages 2 FIELD ENGINEERING 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the state of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As- built Survey to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any such markets. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the Section lv.doc Page 7 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Land Surveyor qualified under the laws of the state of Florida. 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record drawings for the project. 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the project Record construction drawings. 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS For the purpose of these Technical Specifications, the definition of terms from SECTION III, ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS of these Contract Documents shall apply. For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto. 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS Abbreviations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows: AA Aluminum Association, Inc. AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers' Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AMA Acoustical Materials Association AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute Section IV.doc Page 8 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV _ Technical Specifications APA American Plywood Association ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWG American Wire Gauge AWMA Aluminum Window Manufacturer's Association AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association CFR Code of Federal Regulations CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standards and National Bureau of Standards DEP Department of Environmental Protection (Florida) DOT Department of Transportation (Florida) EPA Environmental Protection Agency FAC Florida Administrative Code FBC Florida Building Code FFPC Florida Fire Prevention Code FGC Florida Gas Code FMC Florida Mechanical Code FPC Florida Plumbing Code FedSpec Federal Specifications HI Standards of Hydraulic Institute IBBM Iron Body, Bronzed Mounted IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IPS Iron Pipe Size MIL Military Specification NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NPT National Pipe Thread NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers' Association PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute SBC Standard Building Code (SBCCI) SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. SDI Steel Door Institute SFPC Standard Fire Prevention Code (SBCCI) SGC Standard Gas Code (SBCCI) SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACCNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association Section IV.doc Page 9 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications SMC Standard Mechanical Code (SBCCI) SPC Standard Plumbing Code (SBCCI) SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council TCA Title Council of America UL Underwriters' Laboratories 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK This article deleted. See SECTION 111, ARTICLE 18 - ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK. 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent Person to City staff at the start of construction. City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense. The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system.. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench-shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project. Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid Section IV.doc Page 10 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without compensation. 6 CONCRETE Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall. conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. All ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5", except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all concrete placement. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3 compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof. 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 7.1 EXCAVATION Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the dry " 7.2 FORMS Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or springing. S REINFORCEMENT When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the Section 1V.doc Page I 1 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M-86 requirements. 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 9 OBSTRUCTIONS Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall. be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains, or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made. Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means. 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as base destroyed plus 2", if over 6", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T- 180. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included. in the bid price per lineal foot of main or square yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a. square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense. The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot. Section IV.doc Page 12 of 131 10/11/2010 Section iv -`technical Specifications Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction progress. The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission. Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre- construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requirements. 12 DEWATERING 12.1 GENERAL Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam., divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer. The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. Section IV.doc Page 13 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL The City of Clearwater will hold the Contractor responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from Any Non-Contaminated Site Activity prior to dewatering or discharging into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways. Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor must collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits. The following document has been incorporated into this section for reference... 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY City Notification Procedure - Contractor must provide the City of Clearwater Environmental Department with the following information prior to beginning dewatering activities: 1) A copy of all. groundwater laboratory results 2) A copy of the FDEP Notification It is recommended that the Contractor call or meet with the City Environmental staff if you have any questions. You may contact the City at 562-4750 for direction or further assistance. STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION GENERIC PERMITOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY The facility is authorized to discharge produced ground water from any non-contaminated site activity which discharges by a point source to surface waters of the State, as defined in Chapter 62- 620, F.A.C., only if the reported values for the parameters listed in Table 1 do not exceed any of the listed screening values. Before discharge of produced ground water can occur from such sites, analytical tests on samples of the proposed untreated discharge water shall be performed to determine if contamination exists. Minimum reporting requirements for all produced ground water dischargers. The effluent shall be sampled before the commencement of discharge, again within thirty (30) days after commencement of discharge, and then once every six (6) months for the life of the project to maintain continued, coverage under this generic permit. Samples taken in compliance with the provisions of this permit shall be taken prior to actual discharge or mixing with the receiving waters. The effluent shall be sampled for the parameters listed in Table 1. TABLE 1 Screening Values for Discharges into: Parameter Fresh Waters Coastal Waters Section IV.doc Page 14 of 131 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications Total Organic Carbon (TOC) 10.0 mg/l 10.0 mg/1 PH, standard units 6.0-8.5 6.5-8.5 Total Recoverable Mercury - by Method 163 1E 0.012 µg/l 0.025 pg/1 Total Recoverable Cadmium 9.3 µg/l 9.3 µg/l Total Recoverable Copper 2.9 ltg/l 2.9 µg/l Total Recoverable Lead 0.03 mg/1 5.6 l.tg/l Total Recoverable Zinc 86.0 µg/l 86.0 l.tg/l Total Recoverable Chromium (Hex.) 11.0 ?tg/l 50.0 ltg/l Benzene 1.0 1.tg/l 1.0 l.tg/l Naphthalene 100.0 µg/l 100.0 µg/l if any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the discharge is not authorized by this permit or by the Cit?ofClearwater. (a) For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit additional information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The Department shall grant the exemption if the permittee affirmatively demonstrates that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds. (b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty (30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information: 1. the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued to; 2. the name and address of the facility, including county location; 3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s); 4. a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and longitude); 5. the name of the receiving water; and 6. the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) of this permit. (c) Discharge shall not commence until notification of coverage is received from the Department. For fresh waters and coastal waters, the pH of the effluent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless the permittee submits natural background data confirming a natural background pH outside of Section IV.doc Page 15 of 131 10/1112010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications this range. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units in coastal waters, the pll shall not vary below natural background or vary more than one (1) unit above natural background for fresh and coastal waters. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be higher than 8.5 units, the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than one (1) unit below natural background of fresh and coastal waters. The permittee shall include the natural background pH of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses required under paragraph (2) of this permit. For purposes of this section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration. of less than 1500 mg/1, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration equal to or greater than 1500 mg/1. In accordance with Rule 62-302.500(1)(a-c), F.A.C., the discharge shall at all times be free from floating solids, visible foam, turbidity, or visible oil in such amounts as to form nuisances on surface waters. If contamination exists, as indicated by the results of the analytical tests required by paragraph (2), the discharge cannot be covered by this Generic Permit. The facility shall apply for an individual wastewater permit at least ninety (90) days prior to the date discharge to surface waters of the State is expected, or, if applicable, the facility may seek coverage under any other applicable Department generic permit. No discharge is permissible without an effective permit. If the analytical tests required by paragraph (2) reveal that no contamination exists from any source, the facility can begin discharge immediately and is covered by this permit without having to submit an NOI request for coverage to the Department. A short summary of the proposed activity and copy of the analytical tests shall be sent to the applicable Department district office within one (1) week after discharge begins. These analytical tests shall be kept on site during discharge and made available to the Department if requested. Additionally, no Discharge Monitoring Report forms are required to be submitted to the Department. All of the general conditions listed in Rule 62-621.250, F.A.C., are applicable to this Generic Permit. There are no annual fees associated with the use of this Generic Permit. 13 SANITARY MANHOLES 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed twenty four inches. Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of manholes. Section IV.doc Page 16 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. ' 13.2 PRECAST TYPE ' Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5 ' inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "O" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. I 1 n 1 Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer. Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered. Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of Clearwater Engineering Detail #302 Sheet 2 of 3. Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5) inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 23.7 - Asphaltic Concrete Adjustment of Manholes. 13.3 DROP MANHOLES Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as detailed on the drawings. 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301. 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as Section IV.doc Page 17 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. Interior of built up manholes which have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have the inside plastered with 1/2-inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below. The exterior and interior of all precast manholes shall be coated with at least 15 mils dry thickness of Type 11 Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type 11 Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite. 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling. 14 BACKFILL Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98% compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement. Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground. surface to a minimum of 95% compaction of AASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test. The cost of backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure. 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. Section IV.doc Page 18 of 131 10/11/2010 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off- site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall be determined in the field by the Engineer. 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item. 18 UNDERDRAINS The Contractor shall construct sub-surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non-degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be ' stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8" diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189 described in FDOT Section 948-4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35. Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454E or 12454C, ' manufactured per ASTM F949-93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. ' Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non-perforated pipe with compacted backfill. All poly-chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings. 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ' Measurement shall be the number of lineal feet of 8" Sub-drain in place and accepted. Section IV.doc Page 19 of 131 1 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean-outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item. 19 STORM SEWERS All. stone drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be reinforced concrete unless otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 941 of the current FDOT Specifications. All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Miraf. 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe. All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout. 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes, inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter) 19.2 TESTING The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration. The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. Section IV.doc Page 20 of 131 10/11/2010 1 1 1 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, labor and incidentals, etc.). 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 20.1 MATERIALS 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform, with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35. Sewer pipe with more than 10 feet of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212 76. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 20-feet. Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41. A two-way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line. 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures recommendations. ' All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. ' 20.2 INSTALLATION 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5. The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width (typically pipe OD plus 8 to 12-inch on each side) allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be Section IV.doc Page 21 of 131 10/11/2010 1 Section IV -- Technical Specifications performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment. Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or misalignment. Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (1/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe. Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an approved water stop around pipe joint entry. The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector the location of all. new laterals. 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS The contractor shall submit.to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main pipes in manholes. 20.4 TESTING 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltra- tion. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any infiltration, dips or sags of more than 1/4- inches shall be cause for rejection. Section IV.doc Page 22 of 131 10/11/2010 I Section IV -'technical Specifications ' The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. ' 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as described in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains. 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline ' of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two-way cleanout at the property line. Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and grading. 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 21 DRAINAGE The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them. 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 22.1 BASE This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall refer to Section IV, Article I "Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base and subgrade items. Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs Section IV.doc Page 23 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner sball be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base and subgrade placement or reworking. The following base materials are acceptable: 1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constricted in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1.000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane Interlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for the work. The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer. The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests (i.e. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall be at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil cement design. Section IV.doc Page 24 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV -- Technical Specifications 5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200 6 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements are per Section 330-11, and for soil cement per Section 270-5 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (1/2"). Areas deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be ' made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. ' 22.2 SUBGRADE All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade. ' 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth Section IV.doc Page 25 of 131 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications shall be per Section 161-6.4 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per FDOT Section 160-7.2. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place (latest edition). 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item for base. 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS This specification is for the preparation and application of all S-Type Marshall Mix Design asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted. 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 23.1.1 AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 through 919 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Pa ment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined b the followin : Section IV.doc Page 26 of 131 10/11/2010 J 1 1 1 t 1 t t 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 1. Density per Section 330-11 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330-13 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of '/4" or greater shall be corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330-15.2.3 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (2000 edition). In addition, for excesses of/4" or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified. in the contract. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all asphalt. 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR to the commencement of the paving operation. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material may be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic concrete mixes up to 25% by weight. 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements: Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction) COURSE LAYER THICKNESS (Inches) THICKNESS (Inches) Type S--1 Type S-I with Type S-111 Top Layer Type S-Ill FC-3 Type S-Ill with FC-3 Top Layer Type S-I with FC-3 Top Layer 1 st 2nd 1 st 2nd 1 st 2nd 1st 2"d 1 st 2nd 1 st 2nd 1 1 1 1'/2 1 %2 2 1'/a 3/4 * 1 1 2'/2 1'/4 1'/4 1'/2 1 1'/2 1 3 1 %2 1'/2 2 1 2 1 * At the Engineer's discretion, 2" of S-III is acceptable for use on residential streets Additional Notes: 1. Type S-III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only). Section IV.doc Page 27 of 131 10/11 /2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. All pavement designs shall include a nainina.um of two inches of asphalt. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement design detail. 5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S-111 per Section 331 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used as final. riding surface on streets with the speed limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000, and all residential streets. 6. An FC-3 friction course per section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of 3000 or greater. 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 23.6.1 CRACKS Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method. 2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding roadway surface. 3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking. 4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.6.2 POTHOLES Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method. 2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole. 3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted. , 4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. i Section IV.doc Page 28 of 131 10/11/2010 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item. The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions: The riser shall meet or exceed all 1~DOT material, weld, and construction requirements. The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each riser. If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable. All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the rims manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over. It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving. 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved Lmless otherwise directed by the Engineer or Project Inspector, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt. 2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans. 3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements. 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. The Broom Tractor way of sweeping will not be permitted. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water Section IV.doc Page 29 of 131 10/11/2010 Section N -'technical Specifications supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site. 5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (Latest edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be '/4" above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101. 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in Sections A through H above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition). 2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 and 902 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67-22 unless otherwise specified in the Scope of Work. 4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications. Section IV.doc Page 30 of 131 10/11/2010 1 1 Section iv -'technical Specifications 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with the following provisions: 1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening. 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet site. The address is: http://wwwl l .myflorida.com. It is under the section "Doing Business with FDOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index". For additional information, call FDOT @ 850-414-4000. 3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the initial determination of the asphalt price. 4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used for payment calculation. 5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the salve as the monthly period for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index. 6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat. 7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time. 8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt. 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 25.1 IRRIGATION 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION f an automatic i t ll ti i f h i A. ns a a on o sts o t e on cons The work specified in this Sect underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or specified. Work noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay item. B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer. 25.1.1 .1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure, controls, etc. 1 Section IV.doc Page 31 of 131 10/11/2010 1 Section CV - Technical Specifications B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply. C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material. or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a. minimum of three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information: 1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can be purchased. 2. Catalog and part sheet on every material. and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. 4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and "hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and maintenance. b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenance. 25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines. B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials. C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the contractor. D. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public. 25.1.1.3 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City Section IV.doc Page 32 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT. 25.1.2 PRODUCTS 25.1.2.1 GENERAL A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. 25.1.2.2 PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in accordance with these specifications. B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 11.20, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D2665 and D 1785. C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80. 25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples. 25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe. 25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant. 25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES 25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve 2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals 3. Threaded-Dual end Union Connectors 4. Non-Shock Safe-T-Shear Stem Section IV.doc Page 33 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications 5. Safe-T Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing Company, Sylmer, California, or approved equal. 25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 2'/z" IN. AND LARGER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. AWWA-C-509 2. 200 lb. O. W G 3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B 4. Deep socket joints 5. Rising stem 6. Bolted bonnet 7. Double disc 8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5' long with a 2" square operating nut. 25.1.2.7 SLEEVES A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater) 25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance-pressure across-the diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi. B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemical UV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice. C. The valve body shall have a 1" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections. D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California, or approved equal. F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings. 25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete value box with #36-T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal. B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek 4181014 (10") circular valve box with #181015 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. Section IV.doc Page 34 of 131 10/11/2010 Ij 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6") economy turf box with #182002 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. 25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION 25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (1/2") low-density linear polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self.-cleaning, integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12", 1.8", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an. inside diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self- flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. 25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be available in 12", 1.8" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system. pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be 7 B. For on-surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed 3'-5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction. 25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES A. The sub-surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect directly to the dripline. 25.1.2.10.4 AIRIVACUUM RELIEF VALVE A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an Air/Vacuum Relief Valve at its high point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi. 25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy shall be within =/-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high- impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water passage. Section IV.doc Page 35 of 131 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.1.2.10.6 FILTERS A. The filter shall be a rnultiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall. be constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance. 25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the integrity of the subsurface irrigation system. 25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a, valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water. B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box. C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either sequentially or independently. D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program operation. E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one 9V alkaline battery. B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven-key programming pad. A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after one minute when not in use. C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK Control Modules. Section N.doc Page 36 of 131 1.0/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora California USA , . 25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES-B, GB, of EFB series valve. B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.3 EXECUTION t 25.1.3 .1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work. B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced. C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside authorities. E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions. F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost. G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation. H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. 1. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway base. Section IV,doc Page 37 of 131 10/11/2010 N Section IV-Technical Specifications 25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING - GENERAL A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on. Drawings. B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of other trades. C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind. D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45 degrees to 90 degrees. E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities. 25.1.3.2.2 BACKFILLING A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" of fill placed over the pipe. B. Initial backfill on all. lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger than `/2 in. C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition. D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil. E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs. F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum density. G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six (6") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities. 25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING: A. Routing of pressure and non-pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines. 1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations. 2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated. C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from. the pressure supply line. D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original Drawings, and without additional cost. Section IV.doc Page 38 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of approved layout. 25.1.3.3 INSTALLATION 25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the Owner. 2 ASSEMBLIES 25 1 3 3 . . . . A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings. B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly. C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Special Provisions. D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. 25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER) A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. 25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. .B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent. 1. Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling. 2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure is on. 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer. C. Curing 1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24 hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure. 1 1 D. Flushing the system: 1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush out the system with a full head of water. E. Installing piping under existing pavement: 1. Piping under existing pavement maybe installed by jacking & boring. Section IV.doc Page 39 of 131 10/11/2010 1 Section IV -- Technical Specifications 2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished at no additional cost. 25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans. 1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior to installation. 25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the top of the valve to finish grade. B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than 7 feet from. the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways. C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each sprinkler zone. 25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance. B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill. 25.2 LANDSCAPE 25.2.1 GENERAL 25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal, Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and Special Conditions when required. 25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental matters. B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing. 25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and Section IV.doc Page 40 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, ?. Schedules, Notes and as specified herein. B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans. C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings. D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document. 25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project. B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices. C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate and be considered the controlling document. D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non-compliance with these standards. E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or affects the work in this Section. F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One Call" at 1-800-432-4770. G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect. 25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year. B. Furnish. unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all specified work. Section IV.doc Page 41 of 131 10/11/2010 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications 25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of bidding. B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void. C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk. D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and warranties stated herein. 25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS O.A. or HT: The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. C. T. C. W: SPR. : Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds. Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds. Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. ST. TR. : Straight trunk. MIN. : Minimum. GAL.: O. C: DIA.: LVS : Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc. On center, distance between plant centers. Diameter. Leaves. Section IV.doc Page 42 of 131 10/11/2010 Section 1V -- Technical Specifications D. B. H. Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above grade. CAL.: Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade. B&B: Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. PPP: Plants per pot. FG: Field grown. STD.: Standard, single, straight trunk. Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is performed. Owners Representative: Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation. Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor. Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the landscape Plans and Specifications. 25.2.1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered. B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time. C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than ' 1 foot diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch. Section IV.doc Page 43 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport only. E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 1.2 inches of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from. crown to facilitate moving and handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of delivery. F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than G hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist. G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area. 25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS 25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS. A. The Contractor shall examine the sub-grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape Architect for adjustments to the Schedule. C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures. D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing prior to planting. E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns, protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations. 25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy Section IV.doc Page 44 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV -• Technical Specifications to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule. B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. r C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage. 25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. 25.2.2 PRODUCTS 25.2.2.1 MATERIALS 25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. 25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems. B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable. C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #I or better as to shape and quality for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and Il, Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition). D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated area. Section IV.doc Page 45 of 131 10/11/2010 Section 1V - Technical Specifications E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape materials. F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit Landscape Architect proof of it being non-available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount. G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery. H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible. 1. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures. J. Container-grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice-versa provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution. K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists. 25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24 hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation. B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements, 25.2.2.1.4 MULCH A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade "B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a pre-emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the plan. B. Install mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction. Section IV.doc Page 46 of 131 10/11/2010 t 1 1 1 w 1 1 1 1 P Section IV -Technical Specifications 25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws. B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein.. C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with. Osmocote Time Release Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St. Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand. (1,000) square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be 1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than. `/4 the nitrogen level.. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.). 25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and. the tree trunk. Galvanized steel. guy wire shall not be used. B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used. C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4" by 16" wood connected with two - 3/4" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk. D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved. 25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing. B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of 1 /3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over I". C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 - 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or Section IV.doc Page 47 of 131 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt. D. Bed preparation for annual beds under 1 gallon container size shall consist of 3" of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil. 25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Terra-Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans. 25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH at 4 - V? feet above grade. 25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for protection, of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install as directed by the manufacturer. 25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. 25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions. 25.2.3 EXECUTION 25.2.3.1 PREPARATION 25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work. B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position for any materials necessary. 25,2,3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas Section IV.doc Page 48 of 131 10/11/2010 S ti IV T h i l S if ti ec on -- ec n ca pec ica ons adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's specifications. B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed. C. Pre-emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round-Up" or " " Rodeo , and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect. D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged. by these chemicals, the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling. F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1 - '/z inches in any dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material off the site. 25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of Florida peat (1/3), sandy loam (1/3), or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release fertilizer accordin to roduct instructions and rate g p . 25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications. B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub- grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches. C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains. D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. Thorou hl work fe tili i t th t 4 i h f il g y r zer n o e op nc es o so . 1 Section IV.doc Page 49 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. 25.2.3.2 INSTALLATION 25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED) A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction. B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect. C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well- drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a. soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 - 6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction.. 25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall. be approximately located per the plans by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc. B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally accepted spacing for each species. C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant sizes. D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible to the intent of the plans. 25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball about 1 inch higher than the surrounding grade. C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle and the bottom of the root mass. Application rate: Section IV.doc Page 50 of 131 10/11/2010 IJ 1 1 C 1 1 0 L 1 i? 1J i Section IV - Technical Specifications 1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet 3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet 5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet 7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet Trees 3 tablets each '/2" (12 millimeters) caliper Palms 7- 21 gram tablets D. Native soil shall be used in back-filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers. E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie-down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the back-fill up to the proper grade Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection. F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade. G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant. H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed-free Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree angles in a triangular pattern. I. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved 25.2.3.2.4 SODDING A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut. B. An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place. C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying sod. D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade. Section IV.doc Page 51 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other approved equipment so a$ to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation. has been completed, the edges of the area shall be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated. F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas. G. On slopes steeper than 2:1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wooden pins or by other approved method. 25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of Transportation. See plan for type of seed. 25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade. B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two 3/4 inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade. C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work. D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially hazardous areas. 25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING A. All planting beds shall be weed-free prior to mulching. B. All curb, roadway, and bed. line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch. C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General Notes. D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings. or foundations of shrub trunks and a E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non-mulched clearance from the outside edge of annuals. Section IV.doc Page 52 of 131 10/11/2010 1 1 1 t 1 25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING Section IV -• Technical Specifications A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape and form of the plant. B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree. 25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN-UP A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition. C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications. 25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards. B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage. C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as specified. 25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials, property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage. F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for the damage. 25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance. B. Operations: 1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under Section IV,doc Page 53 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service. 2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of water for all planted materials before leaving the site. 25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor. 25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in Plans and Specifications. B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape Architect that the correction has been made. 25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of all other correction items, the Owner Or Project Representative will accept the project in writing. B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty period. C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the Owner. 1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim. 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative. 3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not received from the under-specified plant materials. No Section IV.doc Page 54 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications. 25.2.3.5 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty. 26 HDPE DEFORMED -REFORMED PIPE LINING 0 1 i r 1 i 26.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to 12" sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 26.3 MATERIALS Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements: Material Property ASTM Method Value HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi [Elasticity Modulus E=113,000 psi Section IV.doc Page 55 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV -- Technical Specifications HDPE Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft-lb/in Flexure Modulus E=136,000 psi Expansion Coeff. c=0.009 in/in/deg F At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above requirements. Liner shall be marked at 5-foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1-800-344-3744 or approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. Section IV.doc Page 56 of 131 10/11/2010 L? 1 r, 1 Ell Section IV - Technical Specifications 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the frill interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a. continuous, jointless liner product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met. 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 26.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified for the street paving. Section IV.doc Page 57 of 131 10/11/2010 Section 1V - Technical Specifications When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replace ment shall be of like material.. Payment shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways. 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted. 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all. work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS This Article deleted. 29 CONCRETE CURBS Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs. 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted. 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not Section IV.doc Page 58 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 1 i] 1 1 Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6) inches in thickness with 6/6 x 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted. 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 31 SODDING Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the Section IV.doc Page 59 of 131 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. 32 SEEDING Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following mariner. The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. When this work is given as a bid. item, the item shall. cover all labor, material, equipment (including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work. 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER . STORM STRUCTURES For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to 235. When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of concrete base. The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer. Section IV,doc Page 60 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 33.2 PRECAST TYPE The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using O ring between precast sections will not be acceptable for storm structures. t 1 r 0 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. 34 MATERIAL USED This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 19 - MATERIAL USED. 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 20 - CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 36 STREET SIGNS The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED. All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. 37 AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 11 r 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of a pre-construction conditions. 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty-one (21) days prior to construction in any area. Section IV.doc Page 61 of 131 10/11/2010 I Section IV - Technical Specifications 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of pre-construction color audio-video recording documentation. 37.4 EQUIPMENT All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the comni.cntary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and. be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom-in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation shall be recorded in SP mode. 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. Section IV.doc Page 62 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 37.8 LIGHTING All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping shall not exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute. a 37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number ' and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and. the date. 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc. ' within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at any one time. 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. Section rV.doc Page 63 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabi.lized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by sediment traps such as secured. hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and modified as required by construction. progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer before installation. 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transport of sediment onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters, dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one week of installation. 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans. During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City. The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of contain-ing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular removal of sediment from the basin. 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land alteration, development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel work is completed. Section IV.doc Page 64 of 131 10/11/2010 ' Section iv -'technical Specifications Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of ' the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity. 1 1 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS. All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards: a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any one time; b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. 38.9 MAINTENANCE All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required. 38.10 COMPLIANCE Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order". City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 and 607 are examples of accepted methods that may be used or required to control erosion and siltation. Section IV.doc Page 65 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV •- Technical Specifications City of Clearwater - Erosion Control This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible for soil erosion control on their site. The City of Clearwater Engineering Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways. The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site creates a potential. for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways. When erosion takes place, a City Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The procedure will be as follows: 1 st occurrence - Warning 2nd occurrence - $32 Re-inspection Fee 3rd occurrence - $80 Re-inspection Fee 4th occurrence - Stop Work Order Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Engineering Department may elect to rectify the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly. The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check. If the contractor would like to meet with a City inspector on any particular site, please contact Construction Services at 562-4750 or Planning & Development Services at 562-4741. Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on all land development projects. Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure.to do so may result in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder. Contact Engineering Department with specific questions at 562-4750. Section IV.doc Page 66 of 131 10/11/2010 V U l a CID A U K U 0 U 00 W? W ?z ?o Up w? O ? U W C?1 W? C, c a o a ?o W w a ° ? H y r F z H Q W I V E? Z ?oa w o o Q?° zQQ O ? W U W Wax ? W w L) (U ?O O W G Q" cn -d c+1 x o p CI1 Q rn 64 00 Fig CI) W U j CA 0 W ? H Q C) L) a F ICI 0 F+?I V M , N N n O , N N a V Vl 0 U U W W K ? D w 0 ?o v R. O C .? rL u ? 4 T K C `? 0 ? c r 0 3 a? ? L G ? U ? U O 7d U Ql PI z a O Q W v v I-1 H O n, 0 a n 7J M U O b G U CIO Section IV - Technical Specifications 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the American Public Works Association as follows: SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission. Municipal Electric Systems HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission Oil Distribution and Transmission Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Stearn Lines SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems Police and Fire Communications Cable Television SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems LAVENDER RECLAIMED WATER WHITE PROPOSED EXCAVATION Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be 6-inch x 3-inch and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be 4-inch X 2-inch and be placed on the curb face. 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 24 - AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE. 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES 41.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. Section IV.doc Page 68 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.2 MATERIALS 41.2.1 GENERAL ' Materials,. equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and ' engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings ' and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction. 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table: Size Class Thickness (In.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) 4" 51 0.26 350 6" 50 0.25 350 8" 50 0.27 350 12" 50 0.31 350 The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of pipe. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest revision. 41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4-inch through 8-inch shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784. ' Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings. Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table: Section IV.doc Page 69 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications Size Dimension Ratio (OD/Thick.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) Laying Length (Ft) 4 18 150 20 6 18 150 20 8 18 150 20 Pipe larger than 8-inch shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes 4-inch through 8-inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage. The bell of 4-inch and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869. Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable water service. All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated 12 gauge A.W.G. solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about 18-inches between each piece of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a 2-inch PVC pipe to 12-inches minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The 2-inch PVC pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the 2-inch PVC pipe shall be plugged with a 2-inch removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows. 41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS Fitting from 4-inch through 16-inch in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require requirements of ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI/AWWA Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA) manufacture will be acceptable. 41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors. 41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing. Section IV.doc Page 70 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV -- Technical Specifications Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris ' within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method by the Engineer. ' 41.2.3 GATE VALVES Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall be handwheel operated with rising sterns. Valves 4-inches and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with 2-inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted ' with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise). Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than. 150 psi cold water, nonshock. The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body. Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves. ' Two Inch Diameter and smaller: Not allowed. These should be approved ball valves. Three Inch Diameter: Not allowed. Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16-inch diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with ANSI/A.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509-515 latest revision. These valves shall include the ' following features consistent with C509-515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistent bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with O ring bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body.. Larger than Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate valves larger than 16-inch shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in conformance with ANSI/AWWA. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-$0, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure. All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by-pass. ' 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be 3- piece valve box assembles. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their ' installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail. Section IV.doc Page 71 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.2.5 HYDRANTS No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater potable water system: • Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant, • Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant • AVK Nostalgic 2780. • American Darling B-84-B. No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater. Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502 and include the following modifications: 1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery. 2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C-502 latest revision and must be UL/FM listed. 3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure. 4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and bottom with an O-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil. 5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two sections with the break flange located approximately 2-inch above the ground line. Breakaway bolts not allowed. 6. Operating nut shall be of one-piece bronze or ductile iron construction. 7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and corrosion due to moisture. 8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate operation. 9. Operating nut shall be a #7 (1-1/2-inch) pentagon nut. 10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, 1/4 turn type with O-ring seals or threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device. 11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber. 12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0- rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe. 13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections with a breakable coupling. 14. Hydrant shall have a 6-inch Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories. 15. Hydrant shall have a 5-1/4-inch valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open. 16. Hydrant shall be without drains. 17. Hydrant shall have two (2) 2-1/2-inch hose nozzles and one (1) 4-1/2-inch pumper nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications. Section IV.doc Page 72 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications 18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with AWWA standard C-502-85 or latest revision. All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502. Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement of the hydrant. All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 44nch P.V C. water main. The largest service connection allowable on 4-inch main shall be 1-1/2-inch. Service saddles shall be used on all 2- inch service connections to 6-inch and larger mains. Service saddles (JCM 406 series or Ford FC 202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps. 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AW WA Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials. 2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. 3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be purchased from the City and installed by City work forces. Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest revision. Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed are: Section IV.doc Page 73 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications L Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve. 2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks. 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES Steel body tapping sleeves shall be J"CM Industries Inc., JCM 412 or Smith-Blair 622. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4-inch bronze test plug. 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS Blow offs are not allowed. 41.3 CONSTRUCTION 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING 1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against pipe already on the ground. 2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING 41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and sterilization of the pipe can be completed. The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30-inches and a maximum of 42- inches below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid. conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions. Section IV.doc Page 74 of 131 10/11/2010 1 fl 1 11 1 41.3.2.2 INSTALLATION Section IV - Technical Specifications Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection. All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the joint space. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the ' Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade. Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb sterns; or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of ANSI/AWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. Section IV.doc Page 75 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 41.3.3.1 GENERAL Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified above for installation of pipe. 41.3.3.2 VALVES Valves in water mains shall., where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to exceed 18-inches from the main line. The valve box shall, not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad. detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail. 41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located 10-feet of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 5 of 5 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. All hydrants shall stand. plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer. Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6-inch ductile iron branch controlled by an independent 6 inch gate valve. 41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints. Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the plans. 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer. Section IV.doc Page 76 of 131 10/11/2010 Section TV -- Technical Specifications Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed before connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision of the City of Clearwater Water Division. 41.4 TESTS 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS After installation of water mains, complete with all. associated appurtenances including service taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision. All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative 48-hours advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing. 41.5 STERILIZATION ' Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance with AWWA C651. 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or "Perchloron". 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices generally at the ends of the lines. 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a ' minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never more than 24 hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. Section IV.doc Page 77 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set. 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein., City of Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the distribution system. in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as outlined above. If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into operation. 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 41.6.1 GENERAL Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work: • Clearing and grubbing • Excavation, including necessary pavement removal • Shoring and/or dewatering • Structural fill • Backfill • Grading • Tracer wire • Refill materials • Joints materials • Tests and sterilization • Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. Section 1V.doc Page 78 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line, including the length of valves and fittings. 41.6.2.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation. 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal. part thereof, of ductile iron ' fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical. weights by more than the tolerances permitted in ANSI/AWWA C110/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance. 41.6.3.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings. ' 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS ' 41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and installed. ' 41.6.4.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover. 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are listed in Section 41.2.5. No exceptions. 41.6.5.2 PAYMENT ' Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust Section IV.doc Page 79 of 131 10/11/2010 Section 1V - Technical Specifications anchorage, 6-inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the hydrant lead. 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS This article not applicable. 43 TENNIS COURTS 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per 1,000 square foot. Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned into the Engineer's Office. 43.1.2 BASE COURSE Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required. Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of 1" leveling course. Prior to applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer. 43.1.3 PRIME COAT The material used for prime coat shall be cut-back Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RC-250 and shall conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction". 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be constructed running East and West. Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot straight edge. If a deficiency of more than '/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE Surface course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed running North and South. Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4 " in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will Section IV.doc Page 80 of 131 10/11/2010 1 1 1 1 1 7 t 1 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications be approved. If a deficiency of more than 1/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.6 COLOR COAT 43.1.6.1 MATERIALS Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured specifically for Tennis Court Application. All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material. 43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION 43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials. Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and/or patching mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use. After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a deficiency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfaces or patch mix. No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured. 43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required. Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play. The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for all other others. The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks. 43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES Forty-eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint. Section IV.doc Page 81 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications 43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50 Degree's F and rising. NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum. or 24 hours in advance of all base and asphalt related work. 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS 43.2.1 GENERAL 43.2.1.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and /or the construction drawings. The scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with sub-surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid. Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal. 43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub-surface irrigation clay tennis court installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years. The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a determining factor in the award of the Bid. 43.2.1.3 STANDARDS The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn) Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment. 43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will waive all permit fees. 43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The Contractor shall locate the four corners of each battery and shall layout the courts in conformance with the specifications and drawings. Section IV.doc Page 82 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications 43.2.1.6 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided. 43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to Proceed." 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION 43.2..2.1 SUITABILITY ' The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts. 43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub-grade at the proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub-grade material beneath the existing tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub-grade material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide documentation of any recycled materials. 43.2.2.3 SUB-GRADE The sub-grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub-grade elevation. The sub-grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The Contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.3 SLOPE 43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in one plane, as indicated on the drawings. Section IV.doc Page 83 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION 43.2.4.1 LINER Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub-grade surface with a minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are resistant to deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows: a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade. 43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it shall be within one-quarter (1/4) inch of the established grade. 43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall. be in on four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be two and one-quarter (2-1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five (5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub-surface irrigation system.. 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING 43.2.5.1 CURB Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of one-quarter (1/4) to one-half (1/2) inch above the finished screening course elevation. 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE 43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE A surface course of ISP Type II Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The Aqua/Hydroblend material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary from specified grade by more than one-eighth (1/8) inch. 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER Root barrier (geo-tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub-surface base course of the clay tennis courts. Section IV.doc Page 84 of 131 10/11/2010 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications 43.2.8 FENCING 43.2.8.1 DESIGN The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design Ameristar HT-25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published specification. 43.2.8.2 POSTS All posts shall be a minimum 2-1/2" Ameristar HT-25 pipe; top rails 1-518" Ameristar HT-25 pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat" color system. 43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC Fence Fabric shall be 1-3/4" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages. 43.2.8.4 GATES Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of a mushroom-type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger-bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock. Provide latch, fork type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges - Size and material to suit gate size, non-lift-off type, and offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. Provide one and one-half (1-1/2) pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height. 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing. Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high- density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12) inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties. 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT 43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS Post foundations shall be not less than thirty-six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance between posts of forty-two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty-three (33) feet on a singles court. 43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven- eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support Section IV.doc Page 85 of 131 10/11/2010 Ir? L?J Section 1v -Technical Specifications the net a. height of forty-two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation. 43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR A. center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA. 43.2.10.4 NET A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length. live (5) feet greater than length between the net post shall. hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic material at each corner. Basis of Design - Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc. 43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to the center strap anchor. 43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one-half (2 - 1/2) inches. Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA. 43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT Deliver the following equipment to the owner: Ride-on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR-1 Roller, automatic forward-neutral-reverse transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3-horse power Briggs and Stratton engine. 2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 3. Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction-driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle brush; with fence hook cast aluminum. 5. Scarifier/Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminum; Proline. 6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction "Scrusher" exact installation location by Owner. 7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels. 8. Court Rake (1 each) -- six-foot length aluminum. Section IV,doc Page 86 of 131 10/11/2010 1 1 1 1 l.._J f] t t 1 'J Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana Bench 8" - 8'long x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation. Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture. 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30 gallons of water per minute for each court. 43.2.13 CONCRETE Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33, and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1-inch maximum size aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump. 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING 43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re-aiming of the existing tennis court sport lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.14.2 RE-LAMP The Contractor shall re-lamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps. 43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works. 43.2.14.4 POLES & FIXTURES The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures. The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by the Contractor. Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight-(8) tennis courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite #104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887-0770 fax (336) 887-0771. Contact Douglas A. Stewart. Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information: Section IV.doc Page 87 of 131 10/11/2010 1 Section N - Technical Specifications Pole T1 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 Pole T2 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 Pole Tel new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T5 new pole w/existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2 circuits Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T7 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T9 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles. Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall plan relocation light poles accordingly. 43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits. New conduits will be required for the three (3) new light poles and the Contractor shall include the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating of the new light poles. 43.2.15 WATER COOLER 43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series - water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal. 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment. 43.2.17 WARRANTY 43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project. 43.2.17.2 WARRANTY The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against defective materials and /or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of completion. Section IV.doc Page 88 of 131 . 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications 43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB-SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM The Contractor shall warranty the sub-surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of two years from the day of completion. 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points. 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of 'T'ransportation for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most recent addition. 1 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives: • Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones. a Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he proceeds through or around the work zone. 0 Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle. • Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material. • Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site). a Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices. • Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or maintenance work zones. The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 "When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone, accommodation. must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall be provided by appropriate signs". 2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction Section IV.doc Page 89 of 131 10/11/2010 Section 1V - Technical Specifications 102-5 Traffic Control: 102-5.1 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer. 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways. Traffic control devises conform to national and. state standards. 44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the construction process. 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS Consult with City Traffic staff for preliminary traffic control options. Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary 44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Message Board Display, Minimum of 7-day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor. 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION C-View Release 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS 44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION News Release The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days. 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone 562-4750, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. Section IV.doc Page 90 of 131 10/11/2010 1 1 1 1 Section IV -- Technical Specifications All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida. 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector. 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone Traffic Control in the proposal form. 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24-hour per day basis and shall review the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24-hour period. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety. 45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING W 45.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand Section IV.doc Page 91 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 45.3 MATERIALS The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following properties: Tensile Strength ASTM D638 3,000 psi Flexural Strength ASTM D790 4,500 psi Flexural Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D790 300,000 psi Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM D2290 150,000 psi Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box 181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach Florida 33064, 305-979-0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. Section IV.doc Page 92 of 131 10/11/2010 r Section IV - Technical Specifications 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION r After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color television, and recorded on DVD, CD VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed. and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight-hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. r 45.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. 1 Section IV.doc Page 93 of 131 10/11/2010 r Section IV - Technical Specifications 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING 46.1 MATERIALS 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight, high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc., Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D 3350 latest edition. If fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a, cell classification. equal to or exceeding the compound used in the pipe. To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall be of the same manufacture as the pipe being supplied. 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density, melt index, and other physical properties. The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in plant blending is not acceptable. The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the pipe produced is represented. by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM D 3350, 10.1.9. 46.1.3 SAMPLES The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and have them tested by an independent laboratory. 46.1.4 REJECTION Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification. 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) O.D. unless otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and/or the scope of work. Section IV.doc Page 94 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment. 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS ' Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt fusion joining method. 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to, temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures. 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred. Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid cutting or gouging the pipe. 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes: 12-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 15-inch existing sewer. 16-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 18-inch existing sewer. 18-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 21-inch existing sewer. 21 %z-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24-inch existing sewer. 28-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30-inch existing sewer. ' 34-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36-inch existing sewer. 42-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48-inch existing sewer. 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to inserting the liner. Section IV.doc Page 95 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by the specifying engineer or his representative. Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall be determined by the engineer. An entry slope grade of 2 1/2:1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible. The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and the water table. 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and removed for the full length of the access shaft. A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer. Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to the project requirements. Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion. Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow the liner pipe to stress relieve itself. The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude. at least 6 inches into the manhole where it terminates. After the 12-hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer. The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement. The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of access to the area, and the working space available. 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and installation of the liner. 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe. Section IV.doc Page 96 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre-fabricated polyethylene saddle. A neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle, and the liner pipe so that a complete water seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel bands. 46.4.7 BACKFILLING All excavations shall be backfilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose, it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and/or storage areas will be arranged for by the contractor. 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be made for each repair. The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner. 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor. Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right-of-ways, the surface shall be graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in street right-of-ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer. 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE 47.1 SCOPE This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm water. 47.2 MATERIALS All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter". The pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic. ' 47.3 PIPE The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification. Section IV.doc Page 97 of 131 10/11/2010 r Section IV - Technical Specifications Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu. of standard lengths. 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt tight joint. 47.5 FITTINGS All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished. by the pipe supplier or approved equal and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe. 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the ratio of 1.5 (one and one half) cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to I (one) cubic foot (7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide penetration in the operator's judgment. Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, vegetable, sewage and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing adequate pressure to penetrate the area. All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer. 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, except as modified by those specifications. Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent, set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified strength. 48.3 COMPOSITION' Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application. Section IV.doc Page 98 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV -- Technical Specifications 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will. produce concrete which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall have a minimum 28-day strength of 4,000 psi. 48.5 MATERIALS Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type I. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong, durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for "Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates. Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture. Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following limits: ' Passing No. 3/8 Sieve 100% Passing No. 4 Sieve 95% to 100% Passing No. 8 Sieve 80% to 100% Passing No. 16 Sieve 50% to 85% Passing No. 30 Sieve 25% to 60% Passing No. 50 Sieve 10% to 30% Passing No. 100 Sieve 2% to 10% 48.6 WATER Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. 48.7 REINFORCEMENT Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn steel wire conforming to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7. 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment. ' Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling. 1 Section IV.doc Page 99 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Specifications 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and inlets shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all cracks and cavities shall. be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45 degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement gun shall not be less than 50 psi. Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by a air/water blast to remove all particles from the cleaning operation. To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall, be thoroughly moistened with water prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall. gunite be applied in an area where free running water exists. 48.10 PROPORTIONING Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be required. If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring materials shall be subject to approval. 48.11 MIXING Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer should be cleaned thoroughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes and from the drum at regular intervals. Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of cement, including the water contained in the aggregate. Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused. 48.12 APPLICATION Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below 32 degrees, Fahrenheit. Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed. Corners shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the Section IV.doc Page 100 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses. Guniting shall be suspended if: 1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle. 2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected. Gunite shall be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless other wise specified. All cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of mesh shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh. be placed behind existing reinforcement. 'I"he time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond with succeeding applications. 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge, preferably at a 45-degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air jet. 48.14 SURFACE FINISH Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed corners by working up to ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal. After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true, flat surface. After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a. flashcoat finish except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings. 48.15 CURING Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 505.2 77 depending upon atmospheric condition. 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION During progress of the work, where appearance `is important, adjacent areas or grounds which may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be 1 adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping, brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit. r Section IV.doc Page 101 of 131 10/11/2010 I L Section IV -Technical Specifications 48.17 INSPECTION Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and replaced with sound material. 48.18 EQUIPMENT Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized mix into the delivery hose by means of a. feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts. Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle. The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150 feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of material hose: Comp. Cap (cfm) Max. Hose Dia. (In.) Max. Size Nozzle (In.) Min. Air Press. (psi) 365 15/8 1 5/8 60 600 2 2 80 750 2 1/2 21/2 90 For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be increased by 5 psi. Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses. Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer capable of producing the required material velocities. Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line. The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating). Section IV.doc Page 102 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made-in-place liner systems used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be met. 49.2 PAYMENT Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 49.3.1 MATERIALS 49.3.1.1 LINERS Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D M 3753. 49.3.1.2 MORTAR Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve. 49.3.1.3 GROUTING Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of clean, well graded sand. Section IV.doc Page 103 of 131 10/11/2010 1 Section IV -- Technical Specifications 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal of the manhole ring and corbel section. Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls. Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole. Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner. If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar. Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts. Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout. Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure an adequate bottom seal. Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal the area around the manhole liner and piping. Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure. Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed. Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage. Backftll around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod. Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 1/2" of Pinellas County Type 11 surface. 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong Seal MS 2 product. Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor., equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum 1/2" thickness using a. machine specially designed for the application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications which includes: 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. Section IV.doc Page 104 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV •- Technical Specifications 3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2 coat application. 49.4.1 MATERIALS 49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C-596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistant 5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C-109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, l hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. 49.6 GROUTING MIX Strong-Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi. 49.7 LINER MIX Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi 2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi 4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H. 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi 6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to 5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight. Section IV.doc Page 105 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV -Technical Speci fications Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions. Product must be factory blended. requiring only the addition of water at job site. Bag weight shall be 50-51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per cubic foot. Cement content must be 65%-75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume. Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater than 5/8" in height. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any heavy metal. Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process. A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth finish. 49.8 WATER Shall be clean and potable. 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. 49.10 EQUIPMENT A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and. metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor. 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.11.1 PREPARATION 1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole. 2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and Section IV.doc Page 106 of 131 10/11/2010 1 w 1 1 1 Section IV' -'technical Specifications concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with quick setting patching mix. 3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the quick. setting mix prior to the final liner application. When. severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material. 49.11.2 MIXING For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is complete. 49.11.3 SPRAYING The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be 15 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow. 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109. 49.11.5 CURING Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been completed. Section IV.doc Page 107 of 131 10/11/2010 1 Section 1V -'technical Specifications 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall. be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 49.12.1 SCOPE Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of: 1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume infiltration 2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows: a. Hydrophilic foam-injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and/or b. Hydrophilic gel-injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks 3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing) 4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of 1 /2 inch 5. Epoxy coating, minimum of 30 dry mils 49.12.2 MATERIALS 49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have the following properties: Set Time Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 Compressive Strength ASTM -C 109 1-3 minutes 1 day 510 psi 3 days 745 psi 28 days 855 psi 1 day 3,125 psi 7 days 7,808 psi 28 days 9,543 psi Section iV.doc Page 108 of 131 10/11/2010 j Section IV - Technical Specifications Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 1 day 410 psi 3 days 855 psi 28 days 1,245 psi 49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either one or both of the following materials: 1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows: Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574-86 Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574-86 Bonding Strength 250-300 psi 2.. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole-to prevent seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of manhole. Physical properties are as follows: Density 8.75-9.17 lbs/gal. ASTM D-3574 Tensile Strength 150 psi. ASTM D- 412 Elongation 250% ASTM D-3574 Shrinkage Less than 4% ASTM D-1042 Fi Toxicity Non Toxic 49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three components-two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are as follows: Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement ASTM (to be given) 1,200 1,800 psi Tensile Strength 380 psi (2.62 MPa) at 100% RH (7 day cure) 325 psi (2.24 MPa) at 50% RH ASTM C 190 Permeability 8.1x10 llcm/sec to (3 day cure) 7.6x10 cm/sec CRD 48 55 49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following properties: Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 2$ Days Section IV.doc Page 109 of 131 10/11/2010 Section fV - Technical Specifications Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000 Astor C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000 Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity -- <0.04 <0.06 <0.08 Astm C 666 Freeze-Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3% Astm C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4-5% Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F. The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which. comply with ASTM C 1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than. two inches. It will have a dark grey color. 49.12.2.5 EPOXY COATING A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the following properties at 75 degrees F: Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1:1 Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray Pot Life, hrs 1 Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000 Tensile Elongation, % 10 -20 Water Extractable Substances, mg./sq. in., max 5 Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800 49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others. 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW Work shall proceed as follows: 1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client. 2. Clean manhole and remove debris. a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris. b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease. c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure. Section IV.doc Page 110 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications d. Remove debris from work area. 3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement. (Note. Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required by client. 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration. ' 5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as needed. 6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces. 7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces. NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step 6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to cement lining. ' 49.12.3.2 PREPARATION An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the ' rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective ' screens. 49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR ' Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing/crystallization. ' 49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam. 1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface. 2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Inject material until water flow stops. n L 1 4. Remove fittings (if necessary). 49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS 1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiffbrush, forming an undercoat. 2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand. 3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal forming process. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks. 5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat. 6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining. Section IV.doc Page 111 of 131 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING 1. Dampen surface. 2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application. 3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches) has been achieved. 4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole. 5. Texture brush. surface to prepare for epoxy finish. 6. Al low for a 24-hour cure time prior to epoxy coating. NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times. 49.12.3.7 EPOXY COATING Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours. 49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area. 49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12.3.10 WARRANTY All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used. 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 -- PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS. 51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 51.1 SCOPE 1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over recreational areas intended for In-Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the Section IV.doc Page 112 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - `fechnical Specifications site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex ' System. 2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a ' satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface. 3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution. ' 4. Plexiflor In-line Skating Surfacing System • 1 Coat of Acrylic Resurfacer ' • 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave • 2 Coats of Plexiflor • Plexicolor Line Paint ' 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS 51.2.1 ASPHALT Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California ' Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to indentation). ' 51.2.2 CONCRETE Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL ' FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80-100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder 1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement. 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT 1. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix: Acrylic Resurfacer 55 gallons Water (Clean and Potable) 20-40 gallons ' Sand (60-80 mesh) 600-900 pounds Liquid Yield 112-138 gallons 2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending ' on surface porosity) at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Non-coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with ' California Ti-Coat according to Specification Section 10.1.7. The Acrylic Resurfacer. Mix I Section IV.doc Page 113 of 131 10/1112010 Section IV -Technical Specifications must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted rate of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix: Plexipave Color Base 30 gallons Plexichrome 20 gallons Water 20 gallons 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION 1. Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material. may be diluted with one (1 ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and provide uniform application. 2. Apply two coats of Plexiflor at a rate of .04-.05 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee. Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action. 4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to application of subsequent coats. 51.6 PLAYING LINES Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In-Line Hockey Association. 51.7 GENERAL 1. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner. Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations. 2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed, property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site. Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified. 51.8 LIMITATIONS 1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 50°F or more than 1 40°F. 2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent. 3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water. Section IV.doc Page 114 of 131 10/11/2010 1 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications 4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings. 5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun. 6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use. 7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring. 8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In-line Skates. 9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78 10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 70°F with 60% relative humidity. 11. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery. In-Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear. 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 22 - RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUC'T'ION. ' 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES ' 53.1 MATERIAL 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL ' 53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non-raveling construction and fabricated from a ' double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge ' 12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal Specifications QQ-W-461H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish S, Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A-641. The weight of zinc coating ' shall be determined by ASTM A-90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B-6, Table 1. Uniformity of coating shall equal or exceed four 1-minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A-239. ' The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4 '/2 inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire ' shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 13 `/z), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be ' permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and. closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger-Tite Section IV.doc Page 115 of 131 10/11/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener shall meet stainless steel material specification AS TM A-313, Type 302, Class 1, or equal. All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with ASTM A-641. 53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal. thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion.. 1. Specific Gravity: a. According to ASTM D-2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34. 2. Tensile Strength.: a. According to ASTM D-142; not less than 2980 psi. 3. Modulus of Elasticity: a. According to ASTM D-412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain. 4. Resistance to Abrasion: a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B). 5. Brittleness Temperature: a. According to ASTM D-746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade. 6. Hardness: a. According to ASTM D-2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested. 7. Creeping Corrosion: a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a 50% SOLUTION HC1 (hydrochloric acid 12 Be). 53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests: 1. Salt Spray Test: a. According to ASTM B-117 b. Period of test = 3000 hours. 2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays: a. According to ASTM D-1499 and ASTM G-23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test = 3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade. Section IV.doc Page 116 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 3. Exposure to high temperature: a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D-2287. 53.1.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit ' the following properties: 1. Appearance: a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable change in color. 2. Specific Gravity: a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value. 3. Durometer Hardness: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 4. Tensile Strength: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 5. Elongation: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 6. Modulus of Elasticity: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 7. Resistance to Abrasion: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 8. Brittleness Temperature: a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade. b. Cold Flex Temperature -Shall not be higher than +18 degrees centigrade. 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets. The stone shall meet the following physical requirements: • Absorption, maximum 5% • Los Angeles Abrasion (FM 10T096), maximum loss 45% • Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM 1-T104), maximum loss 12% Section IV.doc Page 117 of 131 10/11/2010 Section W - Technical Specifications • Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight. All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows: 1. The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866 inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A 641, Table 3. 2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table 1. The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and lacing and 0.80 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge. 3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers. 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D-2, and FDOT Standard Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985. 53.2 PERFORMANCE Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and. as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut. Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and double loops are alternated. A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back. Section IV.doc Page 118 of 131 10/1.1/2010 Section IV W Technical Specifications To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended. Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to ' opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top. ' filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses. Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the ' cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be ' replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less. 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS ' 54.1 SCOPE L1 L? 1 To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone. The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street medians including: • Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic; • Trash and debris removal from the job site; • Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces; • Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms; • Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted); • Irrigation service and repair; • Mulch replacement; • Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the • Reporting of irregularities at the job site. 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours. All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be completed before leaving the job site. Section IV.doc Page 119 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 54.3 WORK METHODS 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized representative of the other party. 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location: 54.4 LITTER Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered. 54.5 VISUAL CHECK The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours after providing the service. 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope. Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower formation, according to the following specifications: 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation; such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms. 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. Section IV.doc Page 120 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL ' Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications. ' 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas. ' 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur ' coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in mid-February, early June, and mid-September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials. ' 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA ' Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor at his/her expense. 54.13 MULCH CONDITION Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture, usually 3 inches. i 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing ' should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in ' advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to the monthly maintenance fee. ' 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a ' less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on City properties. 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across ' the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February. 1 Section IV.doc Page 121 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV -"technical Specifications 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost sensitive plants (Lantana and Yentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material.. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain. in placed as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site work at the contracted rate per man-hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation. and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City. 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7 working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no further than ten calendar days apart. 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between 6:30 a.m. - 7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. - 3:00 p.m. 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed. 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads/fronds as he feels appropriate. 2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates. Section IV.doc Page 122 of 131 10/11/2010 IV T h i l S S i i i i - n ca ec ect on pec f cat ons 3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature ' caused by the Contractor or his/her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next regular payment to the Contractor. 5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked ' vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining ' circumstances are relieved. 55 MILLING OPERATIONS 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be ' performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all ' milling. 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment. 2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. ' 3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt (the Broom Tractor way of sweeping is not be permitted). The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site. ' 4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the contract surface. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line ' and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be included in the bid item for milling. ' 6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling. ' 7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications for S-Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for Section IV.doc Page 123 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV -- Technical Specifications superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 8. Any roadway base.niaterial exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling. 9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling operation is complete. 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562-4950 to schedule delivery of material. 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS All surplus materials not claimed by the City skull become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City. 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations. 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor in. accordance with Section 1V, Article 23.7 of the City's Technical Specifications. 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING There are two types of milling used by the City: A. Wedge - This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross section. B. Full Width - This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of pavement to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer. Section IV.doc Page 124 of 131 10/11/2010 Section 1V - Technical Specifications 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale. 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted. 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required. or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications. 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures, appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements. 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 57 RIPRAP The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand-cement or rubble riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (lastest edition). 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand- cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble. Section 1V.doc Page 125 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV-Technical Specifications 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for sand-cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand-cement and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and. shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap. 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants (WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs. 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the W WTP's and the water reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include: • An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns to the skin and eyes. At the pre-construction conference, the contractor will be provided with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the contractor and sub-contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of these documents. 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must include: a Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas. The date of the training, and • The means used to verify that the employee understood the training. 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and, plans. This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, Section IV.doc Page 126 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV -- Technical Specifications pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of existing traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs. All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a. professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the manufacturer. All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LED's and, approved by both the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown features. Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the City's Traffic Engineering Division. ' 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 60 SIGNING AND MARKING All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. r This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972). The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or markings shall be "blacked-out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked-out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made. 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 1 1 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. Section IV.doc Page 127 of 131 10/11/2010 1 Section IV -- Technical Specifications 62 TREE PROTECTION 62.1 TREE BARRICADES A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows: 1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms. 2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer species. 3. At or greater than two-thirds of the dripline of all other protected species 4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand. B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two-inch lumber for upright posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four-inch lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative must approve any variation from the above requirements. C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative. D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers. E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected tree or palm. F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees. 62.2 ROOT PRUNING A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by Section IV.doc Page 128 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications construction. activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz, Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Public Works projects for root Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562-4737, or through the construction inspector assigned to the project. B. Root pruning shall only be preformed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning. D. Root pruning shall be preformed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning. E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning activities. F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter .from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said root pruning. G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be ' done to a minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than 18". H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent. ' Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved. 1. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected. J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled around to prevent damage to the root. K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established. L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees. M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to open trenching. 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be preformed by or ' under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations - Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance - Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300. Section IV,doc Page 129 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts (pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. C. No protected tree shall have Vlore than 30 percent of its foliage removed. D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion-tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall. be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts. Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project Web Pages. 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES Project Web Pages should conform to the WX Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508 guidelines whenever possible: http://www.w3.org/TR/I 999/WAI-WEBCONTENT- 19990505/ http_//www. s e cti o n 5 0 8. g o v/ In particular, use of variable-width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics. 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public Communications. This is for internal use only. Section IV.doc Page 130 of 131 10/11/2010 Section IV - Technical Specifications 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should be posted to the Project Web Pages. 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back to the City regarding the Project. 63.6 POSTING The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved, should be coordinated with. the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity issues. 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's Webmaster for posting. '1 Section IV.doc Page 131 of 131 10/11/2010 SECTION IVA MARSHALL STREET WRF RAPID SAND FILTER REHABILITATION SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BID DOCUMENTS JANUARY 2011 PREPARED FOR: LL O Cl -w-at >- e ar"o, er rr ??H. JAY ••F. »,?.,?? r.p 1r4rv1..sri ?uyµ" ? , ? ??N?.`M1 rYnI..?Y??n ??vn..ygd."? h uk?rn t' i ..w e" .•rMr?N? ?>„g1ar?;rW 'tn. "N'":nru?.>n'". THE CITY OF CLEARWATER ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT 100 SOUTH MYRTLE AVENUE CLEARWATER, FL 33756 PREPARED BY: K 40 111 ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES. INC. KING ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC. 4921 MEMORIAL HIGHWAY ONE MEMORIAL CENTER, SUITE 300 TAMPA, FL 33634 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01030 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01040 COORDINATION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01150 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01152 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01153 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01200 MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES 01300 SUBMITTALS 01310 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01385 COLOR AUDIO-VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01505 MOBILIZATION 01510 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01625 START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01640 QUALITY CONTROL 01670 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01730 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS DIVISION 02 SITEWORK 02062 REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT 02064 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT DIVISION 03 CONCRETE 03600 GROUT 03740 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS 06600 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS DIVISION 09 FINISHES 09865 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING 09900 PAINTING DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11366 RAPID SAND FILTERS 11370 AIR COMPRESSOR DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15062 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15064 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15065 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15094 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15100 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 11 u 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Description The work to be completed consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials and equipment, and the performance of all Work included in this Contract. B. Work Included The Contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, materials, plant, power, light, heat, fuel, water, tools, appliances, equipment, supplies and other means of construction necessary or proper for performing and completing the Work. He shall perform and complete the Work in the manner best calculated to promote rapid construction consistent with safety of life and property and to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall clean up the Work and maintain it during and after construction, until accepted, and shall do all work and pay all costs incidental thereto. He shall repair or restore all structures and property that may be damaged or disturbed during performance of the Work. The cost of incidental work described in these General Requirements, for which there are no specific Contract Items, shall be considered as part of the general cost of doing the work and shall be included in the prices for the various Contract Items. No additional payment will be made therefore. The Contractor shall provide and maintain such modern plant, tools, and equipment as may be necessary, in the opinion of the Engineer, to perform in a satisfactory and acceptable manner all the work required by this Contract. Only equipment of established reputation and proven efficiency shall be used. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of his workmanship, materials and equipment, prior approval of the Engineer notwithstanding. C. Public Utility Installation and Structures Public utility installations and structures shall be understood to include all poles, tracks, pipes, wires, conduits, house service connections, vaults, manholes and all other appurtenances and facilities pertaining thereto whether owned or controlled by the Owner, other governmental bodies or privately owned by individuals, firms or corporations, used to serve the public with 2 3 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005-1 01/07/11 11 transportation, traffic control, gas, electricity, telephone, sewerage, drainage, water or other public or private property which may be affected by the work shall be deemed included hereunder. The Contractor shall protect all public utility installations and structures from damage during the work. Access across any buried public utility installation, or structure, shall be made only in such locations and by means approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall so arrange his operations as to avoid any damage to these facilities. All required protective devices and construction shall be provided by the Contractor at his expense. All existing public utilities damaged by the Contractor, which are shown on the Plans or have been located in the field by the utility, shall be repaired by the Contractor, at his expense, as directed by the Engineer. No separate payment shall be made for such protection or repairs to public utility installations or structures. Public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the Owner or other governmental body, which are shown on the Plans to be removed, relocated, replaced or rebuilt by the Contractor shall be considered as a part of the general cost of doing the Work and shall be included in the prices bid for the various contract items. No separate payment shall be made therefore. Where public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the Owner or other governmental body are encountered during the course of the Work, and are not indicated on the Plans or in the Specifications, and when, in the opinion of the Engineer, removal, relocation, replacement or rebuilding is necessary to complete the work under this Contract, such work shall be accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction, or such work may be ordered, in writing by the Engineer, for the Contractor to accomplish. If such work is accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction it will be carried out expeditiously and the Contractor shall give full cooperation to permit the utility to complete the removal, relocation, replacement or rebuilding as required. If such work is accomplished by the Contractor, it will be in accordance with the General and Supplemental General Conditions. All owner, other governmental utility departments, and other owners of public utilities that may be affected by the Work will be informed in writing by the Engineer within two weeks after the execution of the Contract or Contract covering the work. Such notice will set out, in general, and direct attention to, the responsibilities of the Owner and other governmental utility departments and other owners of public utilities for such installations and structures as may be affected by the work and will be accompanied by one set of Plans and Specifications covering the work under such Contract or Contracts. In addition to the general notice given by the Engineer, the Contractor shall give written notice to Owner and other governmental utility departments and other owners of public utilities of the locations of his proposed construction GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005-2 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31. 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 operations, at least forty-eight hours in advance of breaking ground in any area or on any unit of the work. The maintenance, repair, removal, relocation or rebuilding of public utility installations and structures, when accomplished by the Contractor as herein provided, shall be done by methods approved by the Engineer. 1.02 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Drawings When obtaining data and information from the Drawings, figures shall be used in preference to scaled dimensions, and large scale drawings in preference to small scale drawings. B. Copies Furnished to Contractor The Engineer will incorporate the addenda into a set of "conformed" drawings and specifications, and provide one electronic copy of each to the Contractor. The conformed drawings and specifications shall not supersede the Contract Documents provided to the Contract. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to check that the conformed drawings and specifications properly include all revisions to the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall furnish each of the subcontractors, manufacturers, and suppliers such copies of the Contract Documents as may be required for their work. Additional copies of the Drawings and Specifications, when requested, may be furnished to the Contractor at cost of reproduction. C. Supplementary Drawings When, in the opinion of the Engineer, it becomes necessary to explain more fully the work to be done or to illustrate the work further or to show any changes which may be required, Drawings known as Supplementary Drawings, with Specifications pertaining thereto, will be prepared by the Engineer and copies thereof will be given to the Contractor and the Owner. D. Contractor to Check Drawings and Data The Contractor shall verify all dimensions, quantities and details shown on the Drawings, Supplementary Drawings, Schedules, Specifications or other data received from the Engineer and shall notify him of any errors, omissions, conflicts and discrepancies found therein. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a Request for Information (RFI), consecutively numbered, detailing all errors, omissions, conflicts and discrepancies. Engineer shall provide a response to all RFIs submitted by the Contractor. Contractor will not be GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005-3 01/07/11 allowed to take advantage of any errors or omissions, as full instructions will be furnished by the Engineer, should such errors or omissions be discovered. E F Specifications The Technical Specifications consist of three parts: General, Products, and Execution. The General Section contains General Requirements that govern the work. Products and Execution modify and supplement these by detailed requirements for the work and shall always govern whenever there appears to be a conflict. Intent All Work called for in the Specifications applicable to this Contract, but not shown on the Drawings in their present form, or vice verse, shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both. Work not specified in either the Drawings or in the Specifications, but involved in carrying out their intent or in the complete and proper execution of the work, is required and shall be performed by the Contractor as though it were specifically delineated or described. The apparent silence of the Specifications as to any detail, or the apparent omission from them of a detailed description concerning any work to be done and materials to be furnished, shall be regarded as meaning that only the best general practice is to prevail and that only material and workmanship of the best quality is to be used, and interpretation of these Specifications shall be made upon that basis. The inclusion of the Related Requirements (or work specified elsewhere) in the General part of the specifications is only for the convenience of the Contractor, and shall not be interpreted as a complete list of related Specification Sections. 1.03 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturer The names of proposed manufacturers, suppliers and dealers who are to furnish materials, fixtures, equipment, appliances or other fittings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Such approval must be obtained before shop drawings will be checked. No manufacturer will be approved for any materials to be furnished under this Contract unless he shall be of good reputation and have a plant of ample capacity. He shall, upon the request of the Engineer, be required to submit evidence that he has manufactured a similar product to the one specified and that it has been previously used for a like purpose for a sufficient length of time to demonstrate its satisfactory GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005-4 01/07/11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 F-7 LJ 1 0 1 1 2 3 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 B C D performance. All transactions with the manufacturers or subcontractors shall be through the Contractor, unless the Contractor shall request, in writing to the Engineer, that the manufacturer or subcontractor deal directly with the Engineer. Any such transactions shall not in any way release the Contractor from his full responsibility under this Contract. Any two or more pieces of material or equipment of the same kind, type or classification, and being used for identical types of service, shall be made by the same manufacturer. Delivery The Contractor shall deliver materials in ample quantities to insure the most speedy and uninterrupted progress of the work so as to complete the work within the allotted time. The Contractor shall also coordinate deliveries in order to avoid delay in, or impediment of, the progress of the work of any related Contractor. Tools and Accessories The Contractor shall, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, furnish with each type, kind or size of equipment, one complete set of suitably marked high grade special tools and appliances which may be needed to adjust, operate, maintain or repair the equipment. Such tools and appliances shall be furnished in approved painted steel cases, properly labeled and equipped with good grade cylinder locks and duplicate keys. Spare parts shall be furnished as specified. Where spare parts are specified to be "manufacturer's recommended" or "as' recommended by the manufacturer", the Contractor shall furnish those spare parts that are normally or commonly recommended by the manufacturer as shown. on the manufacturer's readily available literature. Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate, securely fastened in place and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer's name, year of manufacture, serial number, weight and principal rating data. Installation of Equipment The Contractor shall have on hand sufficient proper equipment and machinery of ample capacity to facilitate the work and to handle all emergencies normally encountered in work of this character. Equipment shall be erected in a neat and workmanlike manner on the foundations at the locations and elevations shown on the Drawings, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer during installation. All equipment shall be GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005-5 01/07/11 1 1 correctly aligned, leveled and adjusted for satisfactory operation and shall be 2 installed so that proper and necessary connections can be made readily 3 between the various units. 4 5 The Contractor shall furnish, install and protect all necessary anchor and 6 attachment bolts and all other appurtenances needed for the installation of the 7 devices included in the equipment specified. Anchor bolts shall be as 8 approved by the Engineer and made of ample size and strength for the 9 purpose intended. Substantial templates and working drawings for installation 10 shall be furnished. 11 12 The Contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish all materials and labor for, 13 and shall properly bed in non-shrink grout, each piece of equipment on its 14 supporting base that rests on masonry foundations. Grout shall completely fill 15 the space between the equipment base and the foundation. All metal surfaces 16 coming in contact with concrete or grout shall receive a coat of coal tar epoxy 17 equal to Kop-Coat 300M. 18 19 E. Service of Manufacturer's Representative 20 21 The prices for equipment shall include the cost of furnishing a competent and 22 experienced engineer or superintendent who shall represent the manufacturer 23 and shall assist the Contractor, when required, to install, adjust, test and place 24 in operation the equipment in conformity with the Contract Documents. 25 26 Prior to placing the equipment in permanent operation, the manufacturer and 27 shall furnish to the Engineer and Contractor a Certificate of Proper Installation 28 stating that the equipment has been installed in strict accordance with the 29 manufacturer's recommendations. 30 31 After the equipment is placed in permanent operation by the Owner, such 32 engineer or superintendent shall make all adjustments and tests required by 33 the Engineer to prove that such equipment is proper and in satisfactory 34 operating condition, shall instruct such personnel as may be designated by the 35 Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such equipment. 36 37 1.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING 38 39 A. General 40 41 For tests specified to be made by the Contractor, the testing personnel shall 42 make the necessary inspections and tests and the reports thereof shall be in 43 such form as will facilitate checking to determine compliance with the Contract 44 Documents. Five copies of the reports shall be submitted and authorities' 45 certification thereof must be furnished to the Engineer as a prerequisite for the 46 acceptance of any material or equipment. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005-6 01/07/11 11 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 Ll 1 2 If, in the making of any test of any material or equipment, it is ascertained by 3 the Engineer that the material or equipment does not comply with the 4 Contract, the Contractor will be notified thereof and he will be directed to 5 refrain from delivering said material or equipment, or to remove it promptly 6 from the site or from the work and replace it with acceptable material, without 7 cost to the Owner. 8 9 Tests of electrical and mechanical equipment and appliances shall be 10 conducted in accordance with recognized test codes of the ANSI, ASME, or 11 the IEEE, except as may otherwise be stated herein. 12 13 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment 14 during tests and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claim 15 for damage that may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner 16 formally takes over the operation thereof. 17 18 B. Costs 19 20 All inspection and testing of materials furnished under this Contract shall be 21 borne by the Contractor or duly authorized inspections engineers or inspection 22 bureaus without cost to the Owner, unless otherwise expressly specified. 23 24 The cost of shop and field tests of equipment and of certain other tests 25 specifically called for in the Contract Documents shall be borne by the 26 Contractor and such costs shall be deemed to be included in the Contract 27 price. 28 29 Materials and equipment submitted by the Contractor as equivalent to those 30 specified may be tested by the Owner for compliance with the specifications. 31 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the expenditures incurred in 32 making such tests on materials and equipment that are rejected for non- 33 compliance. 34 35 C. Inspection of Materials 36 37 The Contractor shall give notice in writing to the Engineer, sufficiently in 38 advance of his intention to commence the manufacture or preparation of 39 materials especially manufactured or prepared for use in or as part of the 40 permanent construction. Such notice shall contain a request for inspection, 41 the date of commencement and the expected date of completion of the 42 manufacture or preparation of materials. Upon receipt of such notice, the 43 Engineer will arrange to have a representative present at such times during 44 the manufacture as may be necessary to inspect the materials or he will notify 45 the Contractor that the inspection will be made at a point other than the point 46 of manufacture, or he will notify the Contractor that inspection will be waived. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005-7 01/07/11 1 The Contractor must comply with these provisions before shipping any material. Such inspection shall not release the Contractor from the responsibility for furnishing materials meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. D E F Certificate of Manufacture When inspection is waived or when the Engineer so requires, the Contractor shall furnish to him authoritative evidence in the form of Certificates of Manufacture that the materials to be used in the work have been manufactured and tested in conformity with the Contract Documents. These certificates shall be notarized and shall include copies of the results of physical tests and chemical analyses, where necessary, that have been made directly on the product or on similar products of the manufacturer. Shop Tests of Operating Equipment Each piece of equipment for which pressure, duty, capacity, rating, efficiency, performance, function or special requirements are specified shall be tested in the shop of the maker in a manner which shall conclusively prove that its characteristics comply fully with the requirements of the Contract Documents. No such equipment shall be shipped to the work until the Engineer notifies the Contractor, in writing, that the results of such tests are acceptable. Five copies of the manufacturer's actual test data and interpreted results thereof, accompanied by a certificate of authenticity sworn to by a responsible official of the manufacturing company, shall be forwarded to the Engineer for approval. The cost of shop tests and of furnishing manufacturer's preliminary and shop test data of operating equipment shall be borne by the Contractor. Preliminary Field Tests As soon as conditions permit, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and instruments and shall make preliminary field tests of equipment. If the preliminary field tests disclose any equipment furnished under this Contract that does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall, prior to the acceptance tests, make all changes, adjustments and replacement required. The furnishing Contractor shall assist in the preliminary field tests as applicable. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005-8 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 G. Final Field Tests Upon completion of the work and prior to final payment, all equipment and piping installed under this Contract shall be subjected to acceptance tests as specified or required to prove compliance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall furnish labor, fuel, energy, water and all other materials, equipment and instruments necessary for all acceptance tests, at no additional cost to the Owner. The Supplier shall assist in the final field tests as applicable. H. Failure of Tests Any defects in the materials and equipment or their failure to meet the tests, guarantee or requirements of the Contract Documents shall be promptly corrected by the Contractor by replacements or otherwise as directed by the Engineer. The decision of the Engineer as to whether or not the Contractor has fulfilled his obligations under the Contract shall be final and conclusive. If the Contractor fails to make these corrections or if the improved materials and equipment, when tested, shall again fail to meet the guarantees or specified requirements, the Owner, notwithstanding its partial payment for work, and materials and equipment, may reject the materials and equipment and may order the Contractor to remove them from the site at his own expense. Final Inspection During such final inspections, the work shall be clean and free from water. In no case will the final estimate be prepared until the Contractor has complied with all requirements set forth and the Engineer has made his final inspection of the entire work and is satisfied that the entire work is properly and satisfactorily constructed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.05 TEMPORARY STRUCTURES A. Temporary Fences If, during the course of the work, it is necessary to remove or disturb any fence or part thereof, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, if so ordered by the Engineer, provide a suitable temporary fence, which shall be maintained until the permanent fence is replaced. The Engineer shall be solely responsible for the determination of the necessity for providing a temporary fence and the type of temporary fence to be used. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005-9 01/07/11 B C Temporary Driveways At its own expense, the Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain and remove all temporary driveways and access roads required to provide access to the work and through the site of the work to maintain existing operations and to allow construction of other projects in the area. The Contractor shall fully cooperate with the Owner in providing this access. Temporary Structures and Facilities The Contractor shall construct any temporary piping and facilities as required in order to maintain existing treatment capacity and operations during construction. 1.06 TEMPORARY SERVICES A. First Aid The Contractor shall keep upon the site, at each location where work is in progress, a completely equipped first aid kit and shall provide ready access thereto at all times when people are employed on the work. 1.07 LINES AND GRADE A. B Grade All work under this Contract shall be constructed in accordance with the lines and grades shown on the Drawings, or as given by the Engineer. The full responsibility for keeping alignment and grade rests upon the Contractor. The Contractor, prior to commencing of construction, shall have established bench marks and base line controlling points. The Contractor shall so place excavation and other materials as to cause no inconvenience in the use of the reference marks provided. He shall remove any obstructions placed by him contrary to this provision. Surveys The Contractor shall furnish and maintain, at his own expense, stakes and other such materials to establish all working or construction lines and grades, as required, and shall be solely responsible for the accuracy thereof. All surveying shall be performed in accordance with Specification 01050. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005-10 01/07/11 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 t 1 C. Safeguarding Marks 2 3 The Contractor shall safeguard all points, stakes, grade marks, monuments 4 and bench marks made or established on the work, bear the cost of re- 5 establishing them if disturbed, and bear the entire expense of rectifying work 6 improperly installed due to not maintaining or protecting or to removing without 7 authorization such established points, stakes and marks. 8 9 The Contractor shall safeguard all existing and known property corners, 10 monuments and marks adjacent to but not related to the work and, if required, 11 shall bear the cost of re-establishing them if disturbed or destroyed. 12 13 1.08 ADJACENT STRUCTURES AND LANDSCAPING 14 15 A. The Contractor shall also be entirely responsible and liable for all damage or 16 injury as a result of his operations to all other adjacent public and private 17 property, structures of any kind and appurtenances thereto met with during the 18 progress of the work. The cost of protection, replacement in their original 19 locations and conditions or payment of damages for injuries to such adjacent 20 public and private property and structures affected by the work, whether or not 21 shown on the Drawings or specified shall be included in the various Contract 22 Items and no separate payments will be made therefore. Where such public 23 and private property, structures of any kind and appurtenances thereto are not 24 shown on the Drawings and when, in the opinion to avoid interference with the 25 work, payment therefore will be made as provided for in the General 26 Conditions. 27 28 Contractor is expressly advised that the protection of buildings structures, 29 tunnels, tanks, pipelines, etc. and related work adjacent to and in the vicinity of 30 his operations, wherever they may be, is solely his responsibility. Conditional 31 inspection of buildings or structures in the immediate vicinity of the project 32 which may reasonably be expected to be affected by the Work shall be 33 performed by and be the responsibility of the Contractor. 34 35 Contractor shall, before starting operations, make an examination of the 36 interior and exterior of the adjacent structures, buildings, facilities, etc., and 37 record by noted, measurements, photographs, etc., conditions which might be 38 aggravated by open excavation and construction. Repairs or replacement of 39 all conditions disturbed by the construction shall be made to the satisfaction of 40 the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. This does not preclude 41 conforming to the requirements of the insurance underwriters. Copies of 42 surveys, photographs, reports, etc., shall be given to the Engineer. 43 44 Prior to the beginning of any excavations the Contractor shall advise the 45 Engineer of all building or structures on which he intends to perform work or 46 which performance of the project work will affect. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005-11 01/07/11 1 B C D Protection of Trees 1. The Contractor shall adequately protect all trees and shrubs with boxes or otherwise in accordance with ordinances governing the protection of trees. No excavated materials shall be placed so as to injure such trees or shrubs. Trees or shrubs destroyed through negligence of the Contractor or his employees shall be replaced with new stock of similar size and age, in the proper season and at the sole expense of the Contractor. 2. Beneath trees or other surface structures, where possible, pipelines may be built in short tunnels, backfilled with excavated materials, except as otherwise specified, or the trees or structures carefully supported and protected from damage. 3. The Owner may order the Contractor, for the convenience of the Owner, to remove trees along the line or trench excavation. If so ordered, the Owner will obtain any permits required for removal of trees. Lawn Areas Lawn areas shall be left in as good condition as before the starting of the work. Where sod is to be removed, it shall be carefully removed, and later replaced, or the area where sod has been removed shall be restored with new sod. Restoration of Fences Any fence, or part thereof, that is damaged or removed during the course of the work shall be replaced or repaired by the Contractor and shall be left in as good or better a condition as existed before starting the work. The manner in which the fence is repaired or replaced and the materials used in such work shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. No additional payment will be made for the replacement or repair of any fence. 1.09 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PUBLIC A. Barriers and Lights During the prosecution of the work, the Contractor shall put up and maintain at all times such barriers and lights as will effectively prevent accidents. The Contractor shall provide suitable barricades, red lights, "danger" or "caution" or "street closed" signs and watchmen at all places where the work causes obstructions to the normal traffic or constitutes in any way a hazard to the public. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005-12 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 B. Smoke Prevention The Contractor shall use hard coal, coke, oil or gas as fuel for equipment generating steam. A strict compliance with ordinances regulating the production of emission of smoke will be required. No open fires will be permitted. C. Noise The Contractor shall eliminate noise to as great an extent as practicable at all times. Air compressing plants shall be equipped with silencers and the exhaust of all gasoline motors or other power equipment shall be provided with mufflers. In the vicinity of hospitals and schools, special care shall be used to avoid noise or other nuisances. The Contractor shall strictly observe all local regulations and ordinances covering noise control. Except in the event of an emergency, no work shall be done between the hours of 7:00 P.M. and 7:00 A.M., or on Sundays. If the proper and efficient prosecution of the work requires operations during the night, the written permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before starting such items of the work. D. Access to Public Services Neither the materials excavated nor the materials or plant used in the construction of the work shall be so placed as to prevent free access to all fire hydrants, valves or manholes. E. Dust Prevention The Contractor shall prevent dust nuisance from his operations or from traffic by keeping the roads and/or construction areas sprinkled with water at all times or when directed by the Owner and/or Engineer. 1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of his portion of the work that may be required to make the several parts thereof join and coordinate in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer and in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. The work shall be performed by competent workmen skilled in the trade required by the restoration. GENERAL. REQUIREMENTS 01005-13 01/07/11 1.11 CLEANING , A. During construction of the work, the Contractor shall, at all times, keep the site of the work and adjacent premises as free from material, debris and rubbish as is practicable and shall remove the same from any portion of the site if, in the opinion of the Engineer, such material, debris, or rubbish constitutes a nuisance or is objectionable. The Contractor shall remove from the site all of his surplus materials and temporary structures when no further need therefore develops. ! B. Final Clearing At the conclusion of the work, all erection plant, tools, temporary structures and materials belonging to the Contractor shall be promptly taken away, and he shall remove and promptly dispose of all water, dirt, rubbish or any other foreign substances. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and materials installed by him and shall deliver such materials and equipment undamaged in a bright, clean, polished and new operating condition. I 1.12 MISCELLANEOUS A. Protection Against Siltation and Bank Erosion I 1. The Contractor shall arrange his operations to minimize siltation and bank erosion on construction sites and on existing or proposed water courses, drainage ditches, wetlands and other areas of concern. 2. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall remove any siltation deposits and correct any erosion problems as directed by the Engineer that results from his construction operations. 3. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any fines resulting from the encroachment of any environmentally protected areas. ' B. Protection of Wetland Areas The Contractor shall properly dispose of all surplus material, including soil, in accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations and the permits issued for this project. Under no circumstances shall surplus material be disposed of ' in wetland areas as defined by the Florida Department of Environmental Protection, Southwest Florida Water Management District, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, etc. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005-14 01/07/11 1 C. Existing Facilities 2 3 The work shall be so conducted to maintain existing facilities in operation 4 insofar as is possible. Requirements and schedules of operations for 5 maintaining existing facilities in service during construction shall be as 6 described in the Special Provisions, herein. 7 8 D. Use of Chemicals 9 10 All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project 11 operation, whether herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant, or of 12 other classification, must show approval of either EPA or USDA. Use of all 13 such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in strict conformance with 14 manufacturers' instructions. 15 16 E. Tree Removal 17 18 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer forty-eight (48) hours in advance of 19 any removal of trees on the project. No clearing shall occur and no earth 20 moving equipment shall be placed on-site until after the notice has been 21 issued. The Contractor shall provide maintenance of the tree barricades and 22 other preventive measures to protect the trees that are to remain. Failure to 23 notify the Engineer before removing trees shall result in the in-kind 24 replacement of the tree at no additional cost to the Owner. 25 26 F. Sanitary and Storm Sewer Systems 27 28 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the satisfactory installation of 29 storm sewer and sanitary sewer systems to be in substantial conformance to 30 the approved Drawings. It is strongly recommended that no roadway base or 31 paving be constructed until the Contractor has performed lamping of these 32 lines to his and the Engineer's satisfaction, and all storm sewer and sanitary 33 sewer invert grades are verified in the field by the Owner. The lamping of lines 34 and verification of elevations in no way absolves the Contractor from any of his 35 contractual obligations. 36 37 G. Related Permits 38 39 The Contractor recognizes that the Owner has applied for, and may have 40 received, certain permits pertaining to the work. At the sole discretion of the 41 Owner, the Owner may assign said permits to the Contractor and the 42 Contractor shall accept said assignments upon such request from the Owner. 43 44 H. All work in the vicinity of open waters, wetlands or any jurisdictional area is to 45 be performed in strict accordance with the environmental permits and their 46 conditions. Erosion barriers, when shown on the construction Drawings, are GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005-15 01/07/11 the minimum required. If the Contractor's construction methods require that additional erosion control is necessary to satisfy these permits, such controls shall be supplied, installed and maintained throughout the construction process by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner or Engineer. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to submit, in a timely manner, any information, data, etc. which is required as a condition of a permit. Required information, data, etc. shall be submitted directly to the permitting agency by the Contractor with copies to the Permittee and the Engineer. The Contractor will be held responsible for any fine(s) or other action resulting from a violation of permit conditions. 1.13 DISPOSAL A. The Contractor will directly pay all tipping fees associated with disposal of the construction demolition debris at all sites. The Contractor shall provide and include in its bid all costs associated with hauling, disposal, and tipping fees. 1.14 RESTORATION OF PROPERTY A. Responsibility. All damage resulting from construction work on existing structures, wetland areas, roadway pavement, driveways, other paved areas, fences, utilities, traffic control devices and any other obstruction not specifically named herein, shall be repaired, restored or replaced by the Contractor unless otherwise specified. B. Temporary Repairs. All damage named in Paragraph A above shall be at least temporarily repaired, restored or replaced immediately following construction efforts at that location. Temporary restoration shall mean putting the affected area back into a safe, usable condition. In no case shall trenches remain open over night within a street right-of-way unless the governing Traffic Control Division grants specific approval. C. Permanent Repairs. All damage shall be permanently repaired, restored, or replaced not later than the 30th calendar day following the completion of construction at that location unless otherwise stipulated. Permanent repairs will be accomplished in a professional workmanship-like manner in accordance with Specifications contained herein, or contract documents, if addressed. The Contractor may be relieved of the 30-day time limit above only by specific written agreement with the Engineer. D. Owner Retribution. In the event that the Contractor fails to make the permanent repairs within the time specified, the Owner, at its option, will, with its own resources or by contract with others, cause the repair, restoration, or replacement of the affected area to be accomplished. The costs of such work GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005-16 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 will be deducted either from the next pay request or from any other monies owed the Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005-17 01/07/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005-18 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 SECTION 01030 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORKMANSHIP, MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. When a particular product is specified or called for, it is intended and shall be understood by the Contractor that the proposal offered by the Contractor included those products in his bid. Should the Contractor desire to provide products equal to those specified, the Contractor shall furnish information as described in the Standard General Conditions. The alternate product or products submitted by the Contractor shall meet the requirements of the Specifications and shall, in all respects, be equal to the products specified by name herein. B. All apparatus, mechanism, equipment, machinery and manufactured articles for incorporation into the Work shall be the new and unused standard products of recognized reputable manufacturers unless specifically noted otherwise. C. Contractor shall properly dispose of all excess materials from the site. 1.02 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS A. The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to locate, excavate and prepare for connections to the existing systems, as shown on the Drawings. All connections to existing systems shall be coordinated with the Owner and/or Engineer prior to commencing the work. All connections to existing systems shall be attended by the Owner and/or Owner's Representative. The cost of this work and for the actual connection to the existing systems shall be included in the various prices bid for the Work and shall not result in any additional cost to the Owner. 1.03 EXISTING UNDERGROUND PIPING, STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES A. The attention of the Contractor is drawn to the fact that during excavation, the possibility exists that the Contractor will encounter various water, gas, telephone, electrical, or other utility lines not shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall exercise extreme care before and during excavation to locate and flag these lines so as to avoid damage thereto. Should damage occur to an existing line, the Contractor shall immediately contact the utility and the Owner. If the repair is to be completed by the Contractor it shall be carried out in a timely and quality manner. Costs associated with such damage shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030-1 01/07/11 B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all utility or other poles, the stability of which may be endangered by the close proximity of excavation, are temporarily supported in position while work proceeds in the vicinity of the pole and that utility or other companies concerned be given reasonable advance notice of any such excavation by the Contractor. C. The locations of existing utilities are shown without express or implied representation, assurance, or guarantee that they are complete or correct or that they represent a true picture of underground piping to be encountered. Encountering existing utilities at different depths or locations than shown on the drawings shall not be cause for additional costs to the Owner. D. The existing piping and utilities that interfere with new construction shall be rerouted as shown, specified or required. The Contractor shall excavate test pits sufficiently ahead of the proposed work to predict potential conflicts. Before any piping and utilities not shown on the Drawings are disturbed, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of the location of the pipeline or utility and shall reroute or relocate the pipeline or utility as directed. E. The Contractor shall exercise care in any excavation to locate all existing piping and utilities. All utilities that do not interfere with completed work shall be carefully protected against damage. Any existing utilities damaged in any way by the Contractor shall be restored or replaced by the Contractor at his expense, as directed by the Engineer. F. It is intended that wherever existing utilities such as water, gas, telephone, electrical, or other service lines must be crossed, deflection of the pipe within recommended limits and cover shall be used to satisfactorily clear the obstruction unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. However, when in the opinion of the Owner or Engineer this procedure is not feasible, he may direct the use of fittings for the utility crossing. The Contractor shall verify utility crossings with test pits prior to construction as required by the Engineer. 1.04 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE TECHNICIAN A. Bid prices for equipment furnished shall include the cost of a competent field service technician of the manufacturers of all equipment to supervise the installation, adjustment and testing of the equipment, and to instruct the Owner's operating personnel on operation and maintenance. The approved manufacturer's operation and maintenance data, shall be delivered to the Engineer prior to instructing the Owner's personnel. This supervision may be divided into two or more time periods, as required by the installation program or as directed by the Engineer. SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030-2 01/07/11 1 1 fl 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 B. After installation of the equipment has been completed and the equipment is presumably ready for operation, but before it is operated by others, the manufacturer's field service technician shall inspect, operate, test and adjust the equipment. The inspection shall include at least the following points where applicable: 1. Soundness (without cracked or otherwise damaged parts). 2. Completeness in all details, as specified and required. 3. Correctness of setting, alignment, and relative arrangement of various parts. 4. Adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing and lubricants. 5. Calibration and adjustment of all related instrumentation and controls. 6. Energize equipment. 7. Deficiency correction. 8. Demonstration of compliance with applicable performance specification. C. The operation, testing and adjustment shall be as required to prove that the equipment has been left in proper condition for satisfactory operation under the conditions specified. D. Upon completion of this work, the manufacturer's field service technician shall submit to the Engineer in triplicate, a complete, signed report of the results of his inspection, operation, adjustments and tests. The report shall include detailed descriptions of the points inspected, tests and adjustments made, quantitative results obtained if such are specified, and suggestions for precautions to be taken to ensure proper maintenance. E. Each equipment manufacturer shall provide instruction to the Owner's operating personnel. Training shall not be performed until the requirements of Paragraphs B, C and D above have been fully satisfied and any specified performance testing completed. Training shall be provided for the number of days specified in each equipment section of these specifications. Training shall be provided on an 8-hour per day basis. Partial days [less than eight (8) full working hours] shall not be credited toward the specified duration. Training shall not be concurrent with on-going testing, debugging or installation activities; but shall be on a separate activity devoted exclusively to the instruction of the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the manufacturer's equipment. Qualified representatives of each equipment manufacturer specifically skilled in providing instruction to operations SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030-3 01/07/11 1 personnel shall perform training. Training shall provide an overview of operations and maintenance requirements and shall include as a minimum, but not be limited to: 1. Description of unit and component parts. 2. Operating capabilities and performance criteria. ' 3. Operating procedures. 4. Maintenance procedures. 5. Servicing and lubrication schedules. 6. Troubleshooting. 7. Electrical instrumentation and control requirements and interface. 8. The operating and maintenance data to be provided shall be used as a basis for training. F. A "Certificate of Proper Installation" executed by the manufacturer stating that the installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment has been satisfactorily tested and ready for operation, and that the operating personnel have been instructed in the operation and maintenance of the equipment shall be submitted before start-up by the Owner. The Certificate shall indicate date and time instruction was given and names of operating personnel in attendance. This certification shall be submitted on the certification sheet, as approved by the Engineer. G. See the Technical Specifications for additional requirements for furnishing the services of the manufacturer's field service technician. H. For other equipment furnished, the Contractor, unless otherwise specified, shall furnish the services of accredited field services technicians of the manufacturer only when some evident malfunction or over-heating makes such services necessary in the opinion of the Engineer. 1.05 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Operating and maintenance data for each piece of equipment furnished shall be delivered directly to the Engineer for approval within 60 days of shop drawing approval. No payment shall be made for equipment installed or stored on-site until the Engineer has approved the adequacy and completeness of operating and maintenance data. Final approved copies of SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030-4 01/07/11 1 1 operating and maintenance data shall have been delivered to the Engineer 2 prior to scheduling the instruction period with the Owner. 3 4 1.06 EQUIPMENT DATA LIST 5 6 7 A. Obtain, prepare and submit a complete, detailed listing of equipment and motor data for all electrical items furnished under this Contract. This listing 8 shall be submitted with the preliminary draft of Operations and Maintenance 9 Data Manuals on Equipment Data Sheets. 10 11 1.07 SPARE PARTS 12 13 A. Spare parts for certain equipment to be provided are specified in the pertinent 14 sections of the Specifications. The Contractor shall collect and store all spare 15 parts in a manner approved by the manufacturer. In addition, the Contractor 16 shall furnish to the Engineer an inventory listing all spare parts, the equipment 17 they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier, and the 18 delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item shall be 19 furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivered cost. The Contractor 20 shall deliver the spare parts to the Engineer ten (10) days prior to facility start- 21 up. 22 23 B. All spare parts shall be furnished in containers clearly identified in indelible 24 markings as to contents. Each container shall be packed for prolonged 25 storage. 26 27 1.08 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT 28 29 A. Special care shall be taken to ensure proper alignment of all equipment, with 30 particular attention to mechanical equipment such as pumps and electric 31 drives. The units shall be carefully aligned on their foundations by qualified 32 millwrights after their sole plates have been shimmed to true alignment at the 33 anchor bolts. The anchor bolts shall be set in place and the nuts tightened 34 against the shims. After the foundation alignments have been approved by 35 the manufacturer, the bedplates or wing feet of the equipment shall be 36 securely bolted in place. The alignment of equipment shall be further checked 37 after securing to the foundations, and after confirmation of all alignments, the 38 sole plates shall be finally grouted in place. The Contractor shall be 39 responsible for the exact alignment of equipment with associated piping and, 40 under no circumstances, will "pipe springing" be allowed. 41 42 B. All wedges, shims, filling pieces, keys, packing, or other materials necessary 43 to properly align, level and secure apparatus in place shall be furnished by the 44 Contractor. All parts intended to be plumb or level must be proven exactly so. 45 Any grinding necessary to bring parts to proper bearing after erection shall be 46 done at the expense of the Contractor. SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030-5 01/07/11 1 2 1.09 MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION SCHEDULES 3 4 A. For all mechanical and electrical equipment furnished, the Contractor shall 5 provide a list including the equipment name, address and telephone number of 6 the manufacturer's representative and service company so that service and/or 7 spare parts can be readily obtained. 8 9 1.10 INSTALLATION LISTS 10 11 A, All manufacturers or equipment suppliers who propose to furnish equipment or 12 products shall submit an installation list to the Engineer along with the required 13 Shop Drawings. 14 15 B. The installation list shall include all installations (minimum of two) where 16 identical equipment has been installed and has been in operation for a period 17 of at least one (1) year. 18 19 1.11 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS 20 21 A. The Contractor shall provide all openings, channels, chases, etc., and install 22 anchor bolts and other items to be embedded in concrete, as required to 23 complete the work under this Contract, together with those required by 24 subcontractors, and shall do all cutting and patching, excepting cutting and 25 patching of materials of a specified trade and as stated otherwise in the 26 following paragraph. 27 28 B. The Contractor shall coordinate with the subcontractors to provide all sleeves, 29 inserts, hangers, anchor bolts, etc., of the proper size and material for the 30 execution of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any corrective 31 cutting and refinishing required to make the necessary openings, chases, etc. 32 In no case shall beams, lintels or other structural members be cut without the 33 written approval of the Engineer. 34 35 1.12 PROVISIONS FOR CONTROL OF EROSION 36 37 A. Sufficient precautions shall be taken during construction to minimize the run- 38 off of polluting substances such as silt, clay, fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium 39 chloride, or other polluting materials harmful to humans, fish, or other life, into 40 the supplies and surface waters of the state. Control measures must be 41 adequate to assure that turbidity in the receiving water will not be increased 42 more than 10 nephelometric turbidity units (NTU), or as otherwise required by 43 the state or other controlling body, in water used for public water supply or fish 44 unless limits have been established for the particular water. In surface water 45 used for other purposes, the turbidity must not exceed 25 NTU unless SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030-6 01/07/11 1 otherwise permitted. Special precautions shall be taken in the use of 2 construction equipment to prevent operations that promote erosion. 3 4 B. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the EPA-NPDES general 5 permit for stormwater discharges and the stormwater pollution prevention plan 6 developed for the project. 7 8 1.13 VALVE INDICES 9 10 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing tags for all valves required 11 on the work and installing the tags required for his own work. Tags on above 12 ground valves shall be non-corrosive metal or plastic, 2 inches in diameter, 19- 13 gauge- thickness. Tags for buried valves shall be secured to a concrete base 14 as shown on the Drawings. Submit to the Engineer for approval, two (2) 15 samples of each type of tag proposed and manufacturer's standard color chart 16 and letter styles. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, not 17 less than 120 days before start-up, a valve schedule containing all valves 18 required for the work. The schedule shall contain for each valve, the location, 19 type, a number, words to identify the valve's function, and the normal 20 operating position. The information contained in the valve schedules shall be 21 coded on the tags in a system provided by the Owner. Above ground valve 22 tags shall be furnished with non-corrosive metal wire for attachment thereof. 23 Tag numbers and identification will be provided by the Engineer. 24 25 1.14 HURRICANE PREPAREDNESS PLAN 26 27 A. Within 30 days of the date of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to 28 the Engineer and Owner a Hurricane Preparedness Plan. The Plan should 29 outline the necessary measures that the Contractor proposes to perform at no 30 additional cost to the Owner in case of a hurricane warning. 31 32 B. In the event of inclement weather, or whenever Engineer shall direct; the 33 Contractor shall carefully protect the Work and materials against damage or 34 injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of Engineer, any portion of Work or 35 material has been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the 36 Contractor or subcontractors to set protect the Work, such Work and materials 37 shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. 38 39 1.15 WARRANTIES 40 41 A. The Contractor and the equipment manufacturers shall warranty all equipment 42 supplied under these Specifications for a minimum period of one (1) year 43 unless otherwise specified. Warranty period shall commence on the date that 44 the Work is accepted by the Owner as substantially complete. 45 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030-7 01/07/11 B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it shall be replaced and returned to service at no expense to the Owner. C. If, within the guarantee period, repairs or changes are required in connection with work that in the opinion of the Engineer is rendered necessary as the result of the use of materials, equipment or workmanship that is inferior, defec- tive, or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly upon receipt of notice from the Owner and without expense to the Owner: 1. Place in satisfactory condition in every particular all of such work and correct all defects herein. 2. Repair or replace all damage to buildings, the site, or equipment or contents thereof, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is the result of the use of materials, equipment or workmanship that are inferior, defective, or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract. 3. Repair or replace any work or material or equipment disturbed in fulfilling any such guarantee. D. If the Contractor, after notice, fails within ten (10) days to proceed to comply with the terms of this guarantee, the Owner may have the defects corrected, and the Contractor and his surety shall be liable for all expenses incurred, provided, however, that in case of an emergency where, in the opinion of the Owner, delay would cause loss or damage, repairs may be started without notice being given to the Contractor and the Contractor shall pay the cost thereof. E. All special guarantees or warranties applicable to specific parts of the work, as may be stipulated in the Contract Documents, shall be subject to the terms of this paragraph during the first year following acceptance. All special guarantees and manufacturers' warranties shall be assembled by the Contractor and delivered to the Engineer, along with a summary list thereof, before the acceptance of the Work. F. The manufacturer's warranty period shall run concurrently with the Contractor's warranty or guarantee period. No exception to this provision shall be allowed. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining equipment warranties from each of the respective suppliers or manufacturers for all the equipment specified. The form of warranty may be included in the Contract Documents, or shall otherwise be acceptable to the Owner. SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030-8 01/07/11 1 G. In the event that the manufacturer is unwilling to provide a one-year warranty 2 commencing at the time of Owner acceptance, the Contractor shall obtain 3 from the manufacturer a three (3) year warranty starting at the time of 4 equipment delivery to the job site. This three-year warranty shall not relieve 5 the Contractor of the one-year warranty commencing upon Owner acceptance. 6 7 H. The Contractor's one-year warranty or guarantee period shall be part of the 8 project performance bond. 9 10 1.16 WATERTIGHTNESS 11 12 A. All water-retaining structures (those that are intended to hold a liquid) shall be 13 filled and tested for leaks by the Contractor, with water acceptable to the 14 Engineer, prior to surface coating or painting. Procedure and manner in which 15 any leaks are repaired must meet the approval of the Engineer. All cost 16 associated with the testing and repair of leaks shall be at the expense of the 17 Contractor. 18 19 1.17 CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS 20 21 A. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the specific requirements of the 22 governmental unit or agencies having jurisdiction over the work. Wherever 23 there is a difference in the requirements of a jurisdictional body and these 24 Specifications, the more stringent shall apply. 25 26 1.18 PUBLIC NUISANCE 27 28 A. The Contractor shall not create a public nuisance including, but not limited to, 29 encroachment on adjacent lands, flooding of adjacent lands, or excessive 30 noise. 31 32 B. Sound levels measured by the Engineer personnel shall not exceed 45 dBA 7 33 PM to 7 AM or 55 dBA 7 AM to 7 PM. This sound level shall be measured at 34 the exterior of the exterior wall of the nearest residence. Levels at the equip- 35 ment shall not exceed 85 dBA measured five (5) feet from the equipment at 36 any time. Sound levels in excess of these values are sufficient cause to have 37 the work suspended. Work stoppage by the Engineer or Owner for excessive 38 noise shall not relieve the Contractor of completing the Work in accordance 39 with the Contract Time, at no additional cost to the Owner. 40 41 C. No extra charge may be made for time lost due to work stoppage resulting 42 from the creation of a public nuisance. 43 44 45 46 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030-9 01/07/11 1 1.19 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 2 3 A. Contractor shall perform work in accordance with OSHA, state and local safety 4 requirements. 5 6 1.20 SUSPENSION OF WORK DUE TO WEATHER 7 8 A. During inclement weather, all work that could be damaged or rendered inferior 9 by such weather conditions shall be suspended. The orders and decisions of 10 the Engineer as to suspensions shall be final and binding. The ability to issue 11 such an order shall not be interpreted as a requirement to do so. During 12 suspension of the work for any cause, the work shall be suitably covered and 13 protected so as to preserve it from injury by the weather or otherwise; and, if 14 the Engineer shall so direct, rubbish and surplus materials shall be removed. 15 16 1.21 RELOCATIONS 17 18 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the relocation of structures, including 19 but not limited to light poles, signs, sign poles, fences, piping, conduits and 20 drains that interfere with the positioning of the work as set out on the 21 Drawings. The cost of all such relocations shall be borne by the Contractor at 22 no additional cost to the Owner. 23 24 1.22 SALVAGE 25 26 A. Any existing equipment or material including, but not limited to, valves, pipes, 27 fittings, couplings, etc., which is removed or replaced as a result of 28 construction under this project may be designated to be salvaged as 29 necessary by the Owner. Any existing equipment or material to be salvaged 30 shall remain onsite and the Contractor shall be responsible for delivering the 31 salvage equipment/materials to the exact location onsite as directed by the 32 Engineer. 33 34 1.23 PERMITS 35 36 A. Upon notice of award, the Contractor shall immediately apply for all applicable 37 permits, not previously obtained by the Owner, from the appropriate 38 governmental agency or agencies. No work shall commence until all 39 applicable permits have been obtained and copies delivered to the Engineer. 40 The costs for obtaining all permits shall be borne by the Contractor. 41 42 1.24 PUMPING 43 44 A. The Contractor with his own equipment shall perform all pumping necessary to 45 prevent flotation of any part of the structures during construction operations. 46 All water collected during pumping operations shall be properly disposed of in SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030-10 01/07/11 1 accordance with these specifications and/or regulatory requirements, 2 whichever is more stringent. 3 4 B. The Contractor shall, for the duration of the contract and with his own 5 equipment, pump out water that may seep or leak into the excavations or 6 structures. All water collected during pumping operations shall be properly 7 disposed of in accordance with these specifications and/or regulatory 8 requirements, whichever is more stringent. Below grade galleries and other 9 operating areas shall be kept dry at all times. The extent of pumping required 10 in tanks, channels and other non-operating areas will be determined by the 11 Owner/Engineer. 12 13 1.25 NOTIFICATION OF WORK ON EXISTING FACILITIES 14 15 A. Before commencing work on any of the existing structures or equipment, the 16 Contractor shall notify the Owner/Engineer, in writing, at least 10 calendar 17 days in advance of the date he proposed to commence such work. 18 19 1.26 NOTIFICATION THAT THIS IS AN OPERATIONAL WASTEWATER TREATMENT 20 PLANT 21 22 A. The Contractor shall be aware that this work is at an active wastewater 23 treatment plant and that flow and process operations must continue 24 uninterrupted on a 24 hour a day basis throughout the construction period. 25 Forward flow through the plant can never be interrupted. It may be possible to 26 reschedule or delay filter backwash cycles for a few hours depending upon 27 circumstances. However the Contractor's work shall not cause the facility to 28 operate in violation of its FDEP Wastewater Permit under any circumstances. 29 30 B. All day-to-day scheduling of the Contractor's work, where it may impact plant 31 operations, shall be in full compliance with the directives of the Engineer after 32 Consultation with the Chief Plant Operator. 33 34 1.27 OWNER OCCUPANCY AND OPERATION OF COMPLETED FACILITIES 35 36 A. It is assumed that portions of the work will be completed prior to completion of 37 the entire work. Upon completion of construction in each individual facility, 38 including testing, if the Owner, at his sole discretion, desires to accept the 39 individual facility, the Contractor will be issued a dated certificate of completion 40 and acceptance for each individual facility. The Owner will assume ownership 41 and begin operation of the individual facility on that date and the one-year 42 guaranty period shall commence on that date. The Owner has the option of 43 not accepting any individual completed facility, but accepting the entire work 44 as a whole when it is completed and tested. 45 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 46 PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) 47 END OF SECTION SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030-11 01/07/11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030-12 01/07/11 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 SECTION 01040 COORDINATION PART I - GENERAL 1.1 PROJECT COORDINATION A. The contractor shall provide for the complete coordination of the construction efforts. This shall include but not necessarily be limited to coordination of the following: 1. The work of subcontractors. 2. The flow of material and equipment from suppliers. 3. The effort of equipment manufacturers during test and checkout. 4. The interrelated work with public and private utilities companies. 5. The interrelated work with the Owner to maintain plant operations and . where tie-ins to existing facilities are required. 6. The effort of independent testing agencies. 7. The work of other General Contractors PART II - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART III -- EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION COORDINATION 01040-1 01/07/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK COORDINATION 01040-2 01/07/11 1 i 1 1 1 SECTION 01050 2 3 FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 1. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all field engineering and survey 10 services required. Such work shall include survey work to establish existing 11 and/or proposed lines and grades and to locate and lay out site boundary's, 12 project control, site improvements, structures, controlling lines and levels and 13 all other survey required for the construction of the work. Also included are 14 such engineering services as are specified or required to execute the 15 Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and surveyors shall be licensed 16 professionals registered in the State of Florida. 17 18 B. The accuracy of any method of staking shall be the responsibility of the 19 Contractor. All surveying for vertical and horizontal control shall be the 20 responsibility of the Contractor. 21 22 C. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the preservation of all stakes and 23 marks. If any stakes or marks are carelessly or willfully disturbed by the 24 Contractor, the Contractor shall not proceed with any work until he has 25 established such points, marks, lines and elevations as may be necessary for 26 the prosecution of the work. 27 28 1.02 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS 29 30 A. Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those 31 designated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall locate and protect control 32 points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference 33 points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or 34 reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any 35 such markers. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed 36 due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them 37 referenced and reset by a Registered Land Surveyor. 38 39 1.03 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS 40 41 A. The Contractor shall engage the services of a Florida Registered Land 42 Surveyor to establish all lines and grades on the Drawings necessary to fully 43 construct the work in accordance with Chapter 5J-17 of the Florida 44 Administrative Code. 45 46 B. The Registered Land Surveyor shall establish and stake all pipeline right-of- FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING 01050-1 01/07/11 way adjacent to construction at 100' intervals on tangents, 50' intervals on ' curves and at all changes in direction. The surveyor shall place lath and hub at such points with stations indicated. Tack in hub shall not be permitted. 1. The Registered Land Surveyor shall utilize current right-of-way maps, , plats and property deeds, all being of public record, in conjunction with ' existing monumentation to establish the existing right-of-way lines and utility easement boundaries. C. The Registered Land Surveyor shall establish a temporary benchmark system ' in accordance with Chapter 5J-17 F.A.C. and shall provide a written list to the Contractor for his use. D. The Contractor shall provide an as-built survey of all critical water level control structures and instruments under the project that shall be signed and sealed , by a Florida Registered Surveyor and Mapper. At minimum, the As-Built Survey shall include: 1. Weir elevations for the inlet weir on all filters. , 2. Weir elevations for the influent trough on all filters. 3. Elevations for all control floats for all filters, the clearwell, the influent ' channel, the mudwell, and the chemical clean tank. 1.04 RECORDS i A. Contractor shall maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey work as construction progresses. Survey notes indicating the information and , measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the Record Drawings. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit name and address of surveyor to the Engineer. B. On request of the Engineer, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING 01050-2 01/07/11 1 SECTION 01090 2 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS 4 5 PART I - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Abbreviations and acronyms are used in the Contract Documents to identify 10 reference standards. 11 12 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 13 14 A. Application: When a standard is specified by reference, comply with 15 requirements and recommendations stated in that standard, except when 16 requirements are modified by the Contract Documents, or applicable codes 17 establish stricter standards. 18 19 B. Publication Date: The publication in effect on the date of issue of Contract 20 Documents, except when a specific publication date is specified. 21 22 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS, NAMES, AND ADDRESSES OF ORGANIZATIONS 23 24 Obtain copies of referenced standards direct from publication source, when needed 25 for proper performance of Work, or when required for submittal by Contract 26 Documents. 27 28 AA Aluminum Association 29 900 19th Street NW 30 Washington, DC 20006 31 32 AASHTO American Association of State Highway 33 and Transportation Officials 34 444 North Capitol Street, NW Suite 249 35 Washington, DC 20001 36 37 ACI American Concrete Institute 38 38800 Country Club Drive 39 Farmington Hills, MI 48331 40 41 Al Asphalt Institute 42 2696 Research Park Drive 43 Lexington KY 40511 44 45 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 46 One East Wacker Drive 47 Suite 3100 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090-1 01/07/11 1 Chicago, IL 60601-2001 2 3 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 4 1140 Connecticut Avenue 5 Suite 705 6 Washington DC 20036 7 8 ANSI American National Standards Institute 9 1819 L Street, NW 10 Washington, DC 20036 11 12 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 13 Three Park Avenue 14 New York, NY 10016-5990 15 16 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 17 100 BarrHarbor Drive 18 West Conshohoken, PA, 19428 19 20 AWWA American Water Works Association 21 6666 W. Quincy Avenue 22 Denver, CO 80235 23 24 AWS American Welding Society 25 550 N.W. LeJeune Road 26 Miami, FL 33126 27 28 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 29 933 N. Plum Grove Road 30 Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758 31 32 FS Federal Specification General Services 33 Administration Specifications and Consumer 34 Information Distribution Section (WFSIS) 35 470 L'enfant Plaza -Suite 8100 36 Washington, DC 20407 37 38 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association 39 1300 North 17th Street 40 Suite 1847 41 Rosslyn, VA 22209 42 43 PCA Portland Cement Association 44 5420 Old Orchard Road 45 Skokie, IL 60077 46 47 PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090-2 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 209 W. Jackson Blvd. Chicago, IL 60606 SSPC Society for Protective Coatings 4024 th Street,. 6th floor Pittsburgh, PA 15222 UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingston Road Northbrook, IL 60062 PART II - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART III - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090-3 01/07/11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090-4 01/07/11 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 SECTION 01150 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section defines the Work included in each bid item in the Proposal section of the Contract Documents. Payment will be made based on the specified items included in the description in this section for each pay item number. B. All prices included in the Bid Form / Schedule of Prices of the Proposal will be full compensation for all labor, supervision, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete the Work as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified in the Contract Documents. Actual quantities of each item bid. on a unit price basis will be determined upon completion of the construction in the manner established for each item in this section. Payment for all items listed in the Schedule of Prices will constitute full compensation for all work shown and/or specified to be performed under this project. C. Restoration is considered to be an integral part of the Work, and all bid prices shall include the cost of restoration necessitated by the Work related to that bid item. All existing structures and property that are altered, removed or damaged during construction shall be restored to the same or better condition than existed prior to construction at no additional cost to the Owner. The bidder shall hereby be advised that cleanup is an integral part of restoration process. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for all traffic maintenance requirements necessitated by the construction/installation of those specific bid items requiring traffic maintenance. The cost for this work shall be included in the specific unit price submitted for that particular bid item. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT - BASE BID WORK A. Rapid Sand Filter Rehabilitation Equipment (Pay Item 1 a) 1. The Owner has pre-negotiated the scope of supply and the price of specific items of equipment, as listed below: MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150-1 01/27/11 • Rapid Sand Filter rehabilitation equipment (Section 11366) -- Siemens B 2. The Contractor shall employ the services of the vendor of the pre- negotiated equipment and incorporate such materials and services into the project. 3. The vendor of the equipment listed above has agreed to provide the materials and services as fully described in the applicable scope of work, proposal, quotation, or other documents attached hereto as part of the Contract Documents. The pre-negotiated equipment prices will be held firm by the vendor until April 14, 2011. The Contractor shall be responsible for ordering equipment and services from the Vendors by April 14, 2011. The Contractor shall bear all costs related to equipment or service price increases by the Vendor after April 14, 2011. 4. The Contractor shall provide under Bid Item 1c all work not described in the Vendor's scope of supply including, but not limited to, all coordination, ordering and scheduling of the equipment delivery to the site, transportation, unloading, storage, installation in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, start-up services, O&M manuals in electronic format, and all other labor, materials, tools, appliances, supervision and incidentals not included in the aforementioned Vendors' scope of supply, proposal, quotation, etc., but necessary for the proper completion of the work included in the particular specification section. 5. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price included in the Bid Form for Rapid Sand Filter Rehabilitation Equipment shall not be made. It is intended that this equipment be deducted from the Contract by Addendum. 6. Payment: Payment of the lump sum price included under Pay Item 1 a shall not be made. It is intended that this equipment be directly purchased by the Owner in order to realize tax savings ODP - Sales Tax Savings Retained by the City (Pay Item 1 b) 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price stipulated in the Bid Form for ODP - Sales Tax Savings Retained by the City shall not be made. It is intended that this tax savings amount be deducted from the Contract by Addendum. 2. Payment: Payment of the lump sum price included under Pay Item lb shall not be made. 1 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150.2 01/27/11 1 2 C. Rapid Sand Filter Rehabilitation Complete (Pay Item 1c) 3 4 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for 5 the Marshall Street WRF Rapid Sand Filter Rehabilitation Complete 6 shall not be made and all items shall be included in the lump sum price 7 bid. 8 9 2. Payment: Payment of the lump sum price bid for Pay Item 1c shall be 10 made based on a percent complete basis in accordance with the 11 Schedule of Values and shall be full compensation for the furnishing of 12 all labor, materials, tools, equipment, including, but not limited to, 13 disassembly and removal of all filter cell components inside each cell 14 except the underdrain frames; new backwash inlet valves and 15 actuators, new backwash outlet valves and actuators; new cell effluent 16 valves and actuators; new cell influent valves and actuators and 17 actuator stands; new backwash pump throttling valves and actuators; 18 new backwash pump check valves; new local control panels; integrate 19 new local control panels into the master filter control system; new filter 20 control level sensors; integrate new filter control level sensors into the 21 master filter control system; integrate existing mudwell level signal into 22 the master filter control system; upgrade the existing master filter 23 control ladder logic program in accordance with the filter manufacturer's 24 recommendations; supply the upgraded filter control program; provide 25 installation assistance and coordinate the installation of the program in 26 the existing filter control PLC; new low pressure air system piping 27 manifold connection, manual valves, pneumatic valves, manual valve 28 actuators, pneumatic valve actuators, hangers, and supports; new high 29 pressure air system downstream of the existing receiver including the 30 dryer, pre-filter, coalescing filter, pressure regulator, piping, tubing, and 31 connections, piping supports and hangers; new chemical clean system 32 including tank, piping, pipe fittings, manual valves, motor operated 33 valves, supports, and hangers, and level switch; new eyewash and 34 shower; new media in all filter cells; repair and coat the interior walls of 35 each filter cell with a polyurethane lining system; repair and coat the 36 underdrain frames of each filter cell with the polyurethane lining system, 37 repair, coat with the polyurethane lining system, and re-install the gullet 38 covers of each filter cell, clean and install new cores and fiberglass 39 grating or re-install existing cores and grating in each filter cell, install all 40 new complete filter assemblies above the cores (except the fiberglass 41 grating as previously noted); new backwash trough assemblies; new 42 cell inlet box assemblies; new hold down beam assemblies; new 43 perimeter hold down angle assemblies; new fiberglass grating block 44 assemblies; new stainless steel wire mesh assemblies; check valves, 45 isolation valves, air release valves, all pipe supports in the mudwell 46 valve vault; new base elbows in the mudwell, sandblast and coat all MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150-3 01/27/11 new and existing piping and supports inside the mudwell valve vault with coal tar epoxy; electrical panels, electrical transformer, lights in the pipe galley; receptacles and switches in the upper filter common area, cutoff 8 bollards in the parking lot, repair of the masonry wall above the roll up door in filter building, and all supervision, inspection, startup, testing, and coordination services of the Filter Manufacturer's Authorized Representative, all pertinent Division 1 requirements and all other services necessary for the complete rehabilitation of the Marshall Street WRF Rapid Sand Filters as detailed in the Contract Documents. The Owner has pre-negotiated the scope of supply and the price of specific items of equipment and materials., as listed below and provided in Appendix A- I . Rapid Sand Filter Rehabilitation Equipment (Section 11366) The Contractor shall employ the services of the respective vendors of the pre-negotiated equipment and incorporate such materials and services into the project. The Contractor shall provide all work not described in the vendor's scope of supply_ including, but not limited to, all coordination, ordering and scheduling of the equipment delivery to the site, transportation, unloading, storage, installation in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, start-up services, O&M manuals in electronic format, and all. other labor, materials, tools, appliances, supervision and incidentals not included in the aforementioned Vendors' scope of supply, proposal, quotation, etc., but necessary for the proper completion of the work included in the particular specification section. D Additional Underdrain Core/Grating Assemblies (Pay Item 2a) 1. The Owner has pre-negotiated the scope of supply and the price of , specific items of equipment, as listed below: • Rapid Sand Filter rehabilitation equipment (Section 11366) Siemens 2. The Contractor shall employ the services of the vendor of the pre- ' negotiated equipment and incorporate such materials and services into the project. ' 3. The vendor of the equipment listed above has agreed to provide the materials and services as fully described in the applicable scope of , work, proposal, quotation, or other documents attached hereto as part MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150-4 01/27/11 1 of the Contract Documents. The pre-negotiated equipment prices will 2 be held firm by the vendor until April 14, 2011. The Contractor shall be 3 responsible for ordering equipment and services from the Vendors by 4 April 14, 2011. The Contractor shall bear all costs related to equipment 5 or service price increases by the Vendor after April 14, 2011. 6 7 4. The Contractor shall provide under Bid Item 2c all work not described in 8 the Vendor's scope of supply including, but not limited to, all 9 coordination, ordering and scheduling of the equipment delivery to the 10 site, transportation, unloading, storage, installation in strict accordance 11 with the manufacturer's instructions, start-up services, O&M manuals in 12 electronic format, and all other labor, materials, tools, appliances, 13 supervision and incidentals not included in the aforementioned 14 Vendors' scope of supply, proposal, quotation, etc., but necessary for 15 the proper completion of the work included in the particular specification 16 section. 17 18 5. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price 19 included in the Bid Form for Additional Underdrain Core/Grating 20 Assemblies shall not be made. It is intended that this equipment be 21 deducted from the Contract by Addendum. 22 23 6. Payment: Payment of the lump sum price included under Pay Item 2a 24 shall not be made. It is intended that this equipment be directly 25 purchased by the Owner in order to realize tax savings 26 27 E. ODP - Sales Tax Savings Retained by the City (Pay Item 2b) 28 29 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price 30 stipulated in the Bid Form for ODP - Sales Tax Savings Retained by 31 the City shall not be made. It is intended that this tax savings amount 32 be deducted from the Contract by Addendum. 33 34 2. Payment: Payment of the lump sum price included under Pay Item 2b 35 shall not be made. 36 37 F. Install ation of Additional Underdrain Core/Grating Assemblies Complete (Pay 38 Item 2c) 39 40 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment for furnishing and installing 41 Underdrain Core/Grating Assemblies shall be made on a per-each 42 basis for each Additional New Underdrain Core and Fiberglass Grating 43 Assembly removed and replaced, where directed by the Engineer. 44 45 2. Payment: Payment of the unit price bid for Pay Item 2c shall be full 46 compensation for the furnishing of all labor, supervision, coordination, MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150-5 01/27/11 materials, tools, equipment, rigging, testing, start-up, clean-up, demobilization, and install additional new cores and fiberglass grating and all other services necessary to perform the work described in the Contract Documents. The Owner has pre-negotiated the scope of supply and the price of specific items of equipment and materials, as listed below and provided in Appendix A: 1. Additional Underdrain Cores/Grating Assemblies (Section 11366) The Contractor shall employ the services of the vendor of this pre- negotiated equipment and incorporate such materials and services into the project. The Contractor shall provide all work not described in each Vendor's scope of supply including, but not limited to, all coordination, ordering and scheduling of the equipment delivery to the site, transportation, unloading, storage, installation in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, start-up services, O&M manuals in electronic format, and all other labor, materials, tools, appliances, supervision and incidentals not included in the aforementioned Vendors' scope of supply, proposal, quotation, etc., but necessary for the proper completion of the work included in the particular specification section. G Control Building Trench Infilling & Concrete Pad Removal (Pay Item 3) 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment for infilling of the existing Control Building trench and removal of the existing concrete pad shall be made on a lump sum basis. 2. Payment: Payment of the lump sum price bid for Pay Item 3 shall be made based on a percent complete basis in accordance with the Schedule of Values and shall be full compensation for the furnishing of all labor, supervision, coordination, materials, tools, equipment, rigging, testing, clean-up, demobilization, and all other services necessary to perform the work described on the Control Building Plan & Section Sheets M-1, S-1 & S-2 and the Contract Documents. The more stringent requirements shall govern for any conflicts between the contract documents and Control Building Plan & Section Sheets M-1, S- 1 & S-2 unless approved by the Engineer. H. Mobilization (Pay Item 4) MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150-6 01/27/11 1 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of mobilization costs shall be 2 on a lump sum basis, but the cost shall not exceed four percent (4%) of 3 the proposed Total Project Base Bid. 4 5 2. Payment: Payment of the lump sum bid for Pay Item 4 shall be full 6 compensation for all costs associated with initiating the project as 7 limited by other sections of the agreement including the Contractor's 8 Performance and Payment Bonds. Payment for these performances 9 shall be based on the terms of Section III in accordance with the 10 Schedule of Values. 11 12 I. Indemnification (Pay Item 5) 13 14 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of indemnification shall not 15 be made and all items shall be included in the lump sum. 16 17 2. Payment: Payment of the lump sum of One Hundred Dollars ($100.00) 18 for Pay Item 5 shall be full compensation for Indemnification of the 19 Owner and the Owner's Design Professional as specified in the 20 General Conditions, and shall be included in the first payment request. 21 22 J. Contingency Allowance (Pay Item 6) 23 24 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment shall be as agreed upon by 25 the Owner and Contractor. 26 27 2. Payment: Payment shall be made in accordance with the terms of the 28 authorization and, if applicable, in accordance with the Schedule of 29 Values. 30 31 3.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE WORK 32 33 A. Stainless Steel Low Pressure Air System Piping (Pay Item A) 34 35 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment for furnishing and installing 36 Stainless Steel Low Pressure Air System Piping shall not be made and 37 all items of Work shall be included in the lump sum bid. 38 39 2. Payment: Payment of the lump sum price bid for Pay Item A shall be 40 made on a percent complete basis in accordance with the Schedule of 41 Values and shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing the 42 Air Piping System including but not limited to; removal and replacement 43 of the 8-inch and 3-inch low pressure air system stainless steel piping, 44 supports, hangers, hardware, and valves upstream of the 3-inch 45 manual valve on each filter and down stream of the coupling located 46 just above the floor in the compressor room; the run along the east wall MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150-7 01/27/11 of the compressor room serving the chlorine contact chamber; all pertinent Specification Division 1 requirements, and, the furnishings of all labor, tools, equipment, . restoration, testing, start-up, clean-up, demobilization, and any other materials or items necessary for the complete construction of the Stainless Steel Low Pressure Air System. B C Air Compressor System Complete (Pay Item B) 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment for furnishing and installing a new Air Compressor System Complete shall not be made and all items of Work shall be included in the lump sum bid. 2. Payment: Payment of the lump sum price bid for Pay Item B shall be made on a percent complete basis in accordance with the Schedule of Values and shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing equipment including but not limited to; removing the existing air compressor and appurtenant equipment; furnishing and- installing a temporary air compressor capable of supplying all air required in order to maintain the filters in service while the existing compressor is replaced; furnishing and installing a new compressor including new controls, new electrical disconnects, and new receiver assembly; all pertinent Specification Division 1 requirements; and, the furnishings of all labor, tools, equipment, restoration, testing, start-up, clean-up, demobilization, and any other materials or items necessary for the complete construction of the Air Compressor System Complete. Re-Paint Upper Level Common Area Walls and Ceiling (Pay Item C) 1 Measurement: Measurement for payment for Repainting the Upper Level Common Area Walls and Ceiling shall not be made and all items of Work shall be included in the lump sum bid. 2. Payment: Payment of the lump sum price bid for Pay Item C shall be made on a percent complete basis in accordance with the Schedule of Values and shall be full compensation for cleaning and preparing the existing surfaces and for painting the walls and ceiling of the Filter Upper Level Common Area including all pertinent Specifications, Division 1 requirements, and, the furnishings of all labor, tools, equipment, restoration, clean-up, demobilization, and any other materials or items necessary for the complete repainting of the Filter Upper Level Common Area. D. Re-Paint Pipe Gallery Walls and Ceiling (Pay Item D) MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150-8 01/27/11 !J 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 .5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 E 1 Measurement: Measurement for payment for Repainting the Pipe Gallery Walls and Ceiling shall not be made and all items of Work shall be included in the lump sum bid. 2. Payment: Payment of the lump sum price bid for Pay Item D shall be shall be made on a percent complete basis in accordance with the Schedule of Values and full compensation for cleaning and preparing the existing surfaces and for painting the walls and ceiling of the Pipe Gallery including all pertinent Specifications, Division 1 requirements, and, the furnishings of all labor, tools, equipment, restoration, clean-up, demobilization, and any other materials or items necessary for the complete repainting of the Pipe Gallery. Re-Paint Air Compressor Room Walls and Ceiling (Pay Item E) 1 Measurement: Measurement for payment for Repainting the Air Compressor Room Walls and Ceiling shall not be made and all items of Work shall be included in the lump sum bid. 2. Payment: Payment of the lump sum price bid for Pay Item E shall be made on a percent complete basis in accordance with the Schedule of Values and shall be full compensation for cleaning and preparing the existing surfaces and for painting the walls and ceiling of the Pipe Gallery including all pertinent Specifications, Division 1 requirements; and, the furnishings of all labor, tools, equipment, restoration, clean-up, demobilization, and any other materials or items necessary for the complete repainting of the Air Compressor Room. END OF SECTION MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150-9 01/27/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1 01150-10 01/27/11 i 1 C 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01152 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Submit Applications for Payment to the Engineer in accordance with the approved payment schedule and in the format established by the Owner. B. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review, the proposed Application for Payment form, prior to the first Payment Request. 1.02 FORMAT AND DATA REQUIRED A. Submit applications typed on forms either provided in these Specifications, furnished by the Owner, or as approved by the Owner, with itemized data typed on 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch or 8-1/2 inch x 14-inch white paper continuation sheets. B. Provide itemized data on continuation sheet: 1. Format, schedules, line items and values: those of the Schedule of Values accepted by the Engineer. 1.03 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR EACH PROGRESS PAYMENT A. Application Form: 1. Fill in required information, including that for Change Orders executed prior to date of submittal of application. 2. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated on continuation sheets. 3. Execute certification with signature of a responsible officer of the Contractor. B. Continuation Sheets: 1. Fill in total list of all scheduled component items of work, with item number and scheduled dollar value for each item. 2. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when work has been performed or products stored. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01152-1 01/07/11 1 3. List each Change Order executed prior to date of submission, at the 2 end of the continuation sheets. 3 4 a. List by Change Order Number, and description, as for an original ' 5 component item of work. 6 7 4. To receive approval for payment on component material stored on site, ' 8 submit copies of the original invoices with the Application for Payment. 9 The application for payment must also include a table summarizing the 10 amount of each invoice and the Schedule of Values line item to which 11 the stored materials apply. 12 13 1.05 SUBSTANTIATING DATA FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS 14 15 A. Provide substantiating data, containing suitable information for review of costs , 16 requested with a cover letter identifying: 17 18 1. Project. 19 ' 20 2. Application number and date. 21 , 22 3. Detailed list of enclosures. 23 24 4. For stored products: 25 26 a. Item number and identification as shown on application. 27 , 28 b. Description of specific material. 29 30 c. Supplier invoices. 31 32 d. A table identifying stored material, amount stored, amount 33 installed, and Schedule of Values item, which the material ' 34 applies. 35 36 B. Submit one copy of data and cover letter for each copy of application. 37 38 C. The Contractor is to maintain an updated set of drawings to be used as record 39 drawings. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments, the Contractor is 40 to exhibit the updated record drawings for review by the Owner and the 41 42 Engineer. , 43 D. Contractor shall maintain an updated construction schedule in accordance 44 with the Specification. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments, 45 Contractor shall submit the updated construction schedule with the 46 applications for progress payments. If the Contractor fails to submit the APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01152-2 01/07/11 1 1-1, f_1 t 1 L C 1 I1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 required updated schedule within the time prescribed, the Engineer may withhold approval of progress payment estimates until such a time as the Contractor submits the required updated schedule. 1.06 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Fill in application form as specified for progress payments. B. Use continuation sheet for presenting the final statement of accounting as specified in the Specification. C. All appropriate information must be entered on the application form. 1. The line title, "Application Period", must indicate the dates between which all work was completed during the pay period. These dates must be consecutive with the dates of the previous Payment Request and they must not overlap. 2. All blank lines within the "Contract Data" and "Summary of Project Status" section of the application must be completed. Also, if any Change Orders have been approved, the "Change Orders" section must include that information. 3. All calculations and arithmetic must be precise to the penny. 4. The application must be signed and dated by an authorized representative of the Contractor. 1.07 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE A. Prior to submitting a completed Payment Request, the Contractor must arrange a field meeting with the Owner and/or Engineer to review and verify all installed quantities and/or stored material. Only when the Owner/Engineer and Contractor agree on installed quantities and percentages, should the Payment Request be submitted. B. Submit six (6) copies of Applications for Payment to the Engineer at the times stipulated in the General Conditions. C. When the Engineer finds Application properly completed and correct, he will transmit certificate for payment to Owner, with copy to Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01152-3 01107/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01152-4 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 SECTION 01153 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Promptly implement Change Order procedures. 1. Provide full written data required to evaluate changes. 2. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time and material/force account basis. 3. Provide full documentation to Engineer on request. B. Designate in writing the member of Contractor's organization: 1. Who is authorized to accept changes in the work. 2. Who is responsible for informing others in the Contractor's employ of the authorization of changes in the work. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Change Order: See General Conditions B. Work Directive Change: A written order to the Contractor, signed by Owner and Engineer, which amends the Contract Documents as described, authorizes Contractor to proceed with a change that affects the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, and that will be included in a subsequent Change Order. C. Engineer's Supplemental Instructions: A written order, instructions, or interpretations, signed by Engineer making minor changes in the Work not involving a change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. D. Field Order: A written order to the Contractor, signed by the Engineer and the Contractor, which is issued to interpret/clarify the Contract Documents, order minor changes in the work. The work described by a Field Order is to be accomplished without change to the Contract Sum, Contract Time, and/or claims for other costs. CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153-1 01/07/11 1 2 3 5 6 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 1.03 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES A. Owner and Engineer may initiate changes by submitting a Work Directive Change to the Contractor. Request will include: I 1. Detailed description of the change, products, and location of the change in the Project. I 2. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications. 3. The projected time span for making the change, and a specific statement as to whether overtime work is or is not authorized. 4. A specific period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. , B. Contractor may initiate changes by submitting a written notice to the Engineer, containing: 1. Description of the proposed changes. 2. Statement of the reason for making the changes. 3. Statement of the effect on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 4. Statement of the effect on the work of separate contractors. 5. Documentation supporting any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time, as appropriate. 1.04 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION ' A. A Work Directive Change will describe changes in the Work, both additions and deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the change and will designate the method of determining any change in the Contract Sum and any change in Contract Time. B. Owner and Engineer will sign and date the Work Directive Change as authorization for the Contractor to proceed with the changes. 1.05 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSALS AND CLAIMS A. Support each quotation for a lump sum proposal, and for each unit price, which has not previously been established, with sufficient substantiating data to allow the Engineer to evaluate the quotation. CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153-2 01/07/11 B. On request, provide additional data to support time and cost computations: 1. Labor required. 2. Equipment required. 3. Products required. a. Recommended source of purchase and unit cost. b. Quantities required. 4. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. 5. Credit for work deleted from Contract, similarly documented. 6. Overhead and profit. 7. Justification for any change in Contract Time. C. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time-and- material/force account basis, with documentation as required for a Lump Sum proposal, plus additional information: 1. Name of the Owner's authorized agent who ordered the work and date of the order. 2. Dates and times work was performed and by whom. 3. Time record, summary of hours worked, and hourly rates paid. 4. Receipts and invoices for: a. Equipment used, listing dates, and times of use. b. Products used, listing of quantities. C. Subcontracts. 1.06 PREPARATION OF CHANGE ORDERS AND FIELD ORDERS A. Engineer will prepare each Change Order and Field Order. B. Change Order will describe changes in the Work, both additions and deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the change. CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153-3 01/07/11 C 1 1 2 C. Change Order will provide an accounting of the adjustment in the Contract 3 4 Sum and in the Contract Time. 5 D. Field Order will describe interpretations or clarifications of Contract 6 Documents, order minor changes in the Work, and/ or memorialize trade-off 7 agreements. 8 9 E. Field Order work will be accomplished without change in the Contract Sum, 10 Contract Time, and/or claims for other costs. 11 12 1.07 LUMP SUM/FIXED PRICE CHANGE ORDER 13 14 A. Engineer initiates the form, including a description of the changes involved and 15 attachments based upon documents and proposals submitted by Contractor, 16 or requests from Owner, or both. 17 18 B. Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent 19 to Contractor for approval. After approval by Contractor, all copies should be 20 sent to Owner for approval. Engineer should make distribution of executed 21 copies. 22 23 1.08 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER 24 25 A. Content of Change Orders will be based on either: 26 27 1. Engineer's definition of the scope of the required changes. 28 29 2. Contractor's Proposal for a change, as recommended by Engineer. 30 31 3. Survey of complete work. 32 33 B. The amounts of the unit prices to be: 34 35 1. Those stated in the Agreement. 36 37 2. Those mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor. 38 39 C. When quantities of each of the items affected by the Change Order can be 40 determined prior to start of the work: 41 42 1. Owner and Engineer will sign and date a Work Directive Change as 43 authorization for Contractor to proceed with the changes. 44 45 D. When quantities of the items cannot be determined prior to start of the work: tl 46 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153-4 01/07/11 1 1. Engineer or Owner will issue a Work Directive change directing the 2 Contractor to proceed with the change on the basis of unit prices, and 3 the Engineer will cite the applicable unit prices. 4 5 2. Upon completion of the change, the Engineer will determine the cost of 6 such work based on the unit prices and quantities used. Contractor 7 shall submit documentation to establish the number of units of each 8 item and any claims for a change in Contract Time. 9 10 3. Engineer will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change 11 in Contract Sum and in Contract Time. 12 13 4. Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate their 14 agreement with the terms therein. 15 16 5. Owner will then sign the change order. 17 18 1.09 TIME AND MATERIAL/FORCE ACCOUNT CHANGE ORDER/CONSTRUCTION 19 CHANGE AUTHORIZATION 20 21 A. Engineer and Owner will issue a Work Directive Change directing Contractor 22 to proceed with the changes. 23 24 B. Upon completion of the change, the Contractor shall submit itemized 25 accounting and supporting data. 26 27 C. Engineer will determine the allowable cost of such work, as provided in 28 General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. 29 30 D. Engineer will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change in 31 Contract Sum and in Contract Time. 32 33 E. Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate agreement 34 therewith. 35 36 F. Owner will then sign the Change Order. 37 38 1.10 CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS 39 40 A. Not greater than monthly revise Schedule of Values and Request for Payment 41 forms to record each change as a separate item of work and to record the 42 adjusted Contract Sum. 43 44 B. Not greater than monthly revise the Construction Schedule to reflect each 45 change in Contract Time. Revise subschedules to show changes for other 46 items of work affected by the changes. 47 48 C. Upon completion of work under a Change Order, enter pertinent changes in 49 Record Documents. 50 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153-5 01/07/11 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) 4 5 END OF SECTION CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153-6 01/07/11 1 SECTION 01200 2 3 MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES 4 5 PART I - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 8 9 A. In accordance with the Contract Documents, prior to the commencement of 10 Work, a preconstruction conference shall be held at a mutually agreed time 11 and place. 12 13 B. The purpose of the conference shall be to designate responsible personnel 14 and establish a working relationship. Matters requiring coordination shall be 15 discussed and procedures for handling such matters established. The agenda 16 shall include as a minimum: 17 18 1. Contractor's Initial Construction Schedule 19 20 2. Procedures for Transmittal, Review and Distribution of Shop Drawings 21 22 3. Procedures for Submittal and Review of Monthly Pay Applications 23 24 4. Maintaining Record Drawings 25 26 5. Critical Work Sequencing and Construction Restrictions 27 28 6. Field Decisions and Change Orders 29 30 7. Field Office, Storage Areas and Security 31 32 8. Equipment and Material Deliveries 33 34 9. Safety Meetings and Program 35 36 10. Traffic Control Plan 37 38 11. Pre-construction Video 39 40 C. The Engineer shall preside at the conference and shall arrange for keeping 41 the minutes and distributing them to all persons in attendance. 42 43 1.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS 44 45 A. The Owner shall schedule and conduct regular project meetings at least 46 monthly and at other times as deemed necessary by the progress of the work. MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES 01200-1 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 The Contractor and the Engineer shall be represented at each meeting. The Contractor and/or Engineer may request attendance by representatives of material Supplier(s) and Subcontractor(s). B. The Engineer shall preside at the conference and shall arrange for keeping the minutes and distributing them to all persons in attendance. The purpose of the meetings shall include but not be limited to reviewing the progress of the Work, maintaining coordination of efforts, discussing changes in scheduling and resolving problems that may develop; claims review; and future scheduling. PART II - PRODUCT (Not Used) PART III - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES 01200-2 01/07/11 t 1 CJ 11 1 1 11 1 l? lJ 1 L 1 1 SECTION 01300 2 3 SUBMITTALS 4 5 1.01 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 6 7 A. Before Work is started, Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review a 8 schedule of the proposed construction operations. The construction schedule 9 shall indicate the sequence of the Work, the time of starting and completion of 10 each part, the installation date for each major item of equipment, and the time 11 for making connections to existing piping, structures, or facilities. 12 13 B. At least every 30 days the schedule shall be revised as necessary to reflect 14 changes in the progress of the Work. 15 16 C. Owner may require Contractor to add to his equipment, or construction forces, 17 as well as increase the working hours, if operations fall behind schedule at any 18 time during the construction period. 19 20 1.02 PROGRESS REPORTS 21 22 A. A progress report shall be furnished to Engineer with each application for 23 progress payment. If the Work falls behind schedule, Contractor shall submit 24 additional progress reports at such intervals as Engineer may request. 25 26 B. Each progress report shall include sufficient narrative to describe current and 27 anticipated delaying factors, their effect on the construction schedule, and 28 proposed corrective actions. Any Work reported complete, but which is not 29 readily apparent to Engineer, must be substantiated with satisfactory 30 evidence. 31 32 C. Each progress report shall also include three (3) prints of the accepted graphic 33 schedule marked to indicate actual progress. 34 35 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 36 37 A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review a Schedule of Values 38 after review of the tentative schedule and before submission of the first 39 application for payment. The schedule of values, showing the value of each 40 kind of work, shall be acceptable to Engineer before any application for 41 payment is prepared or approved. 42 43 B. The sum of the items listed in the Schedule of Values shall equal the Contract 44 Price. Such items as Bond premium, temporary construction facilities, may be 45 listed separately in the schedule of values, provided the amounts can be 46 substantiated. Overhead and profit shall not be listed as separate items. SUBMITTALS 01300-1 01/07/11 C. In addition to those items listed in Paragraph B, items that shall also be included on the Schedule of Values include O & M manuals (including electronic format), As-Builts, Start-Up and Training, and any other individualized component that the Contractor would like to separately itemize for payment. D. An unbalanced Schedule of Values providing for overpayment of Contractor on items of Work that would be performed first will not be accepted. The Schedule of Values shall be revised and resubmitted until acceptable to Engineer. Final acceptance by Engineer shall indicate only consent to the Schedule of Values as a basis for preparation of applications for progress payments and shall not constitute an agreement as to the value of each indicated item. 1.04 SCHEDULE OF PAYMENT A. Within thirty (30) days after award of the contract, Contractor shall furnish to Engineer a schedule of estimated monthly payments. The schedule shall be revised and resubmitted each time an application for payment varies more than 10 percent from the estimated payment schedule. 1.05 SURVEY DATA A. All field books, notes, and other data developed by Contractor in performing surveys required as part of the Work shall be available to Engineer for examination throughout the construction period. All such data shall be submitted to Engineer with the other documentation required for final acceptance of the Work. 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS AND ENGINEERING DATA A. Engineering data covering all equipment and fabricated materials that will become a permanent part of the Work shall be submitted to Engineer, for review. These data shall include drawings and descriptive information in sufficient detail to show the kind, size, arrangement, and operation of component materials and devices; the external connections, anchorages, and supports required; performance characteristics; and dimensions needed for installation and correlation with other materials and equipment. B. All submittals, regardless of origin, shall be stamped with the approval of Contractor and identified with the name and number of this contract, Contractor's name, and references to applicable specification paragraphs and Contract Drawings. Each submittal shall indicate the intended use of the item in the Work. When catalog pages are submitted, applicable items shall be clearly identified. The current revision, issue number, and date shall be SUBMITTALS 01300-2 01/07/11 1 1 1 L 11 1 11 11 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 indicated on all drawings and other descriptive data. 2 3 C. Contractor's stamp of approval is a representation to Owner and Engineer that 4 Contractor accepts full responsibility for determining and verifying all 5 quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, 6 and similar data, and that he has reviewed or coordinated each submittal with 7 the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. 8 9 D. All deviations from the Contract Documents shall be identified on each 10 submittal and shall be tabulated in Contractor's letter of transmittal. Such 11 submittals shall indicate, as pertinent to the deviation, essential details of all 12 changes proposed by Contractor (including modifications to other facilities that 13 may be a result of the deviation) and all required piping and wiring diagrams. 14 15 E. Contractor shall accept full responsibility for the completeness of each 16 submission, and, in the case of a resubmission, shall verify that all exceptions 17 previously noted by Engineer have been taken into account. In the event that 18 more than one resubmission is required because of failure of Contractor to 19 account for exceptions previously noted, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for 20 the charges of Engineer for review of the additional resubmissions. 21 22 F. Resubmittals shall be made within seven (7) days of the date of the letter 23 returning the material to be modified or corrected, unless within seven (7) days 24 the Contractor submits an acceptable request for an extension of the 25 stipulated time period, listing the reasons the resubmittal cannot be completed 26 within that time. 27 28 G. Any need for more than one resubmission, or any other delay in obtaining 29 Engineer's review of submittals, will not entitle Contractor to extension of the 30 Contract Time unless delay of the Work is directly caused by a change in the 31 work authorized by a'Change Order. 32 33 H. Contractor's letter of resubmittal shall list the date of his original submittal 34 letter, the date of the Engineer's letter returning the submittal, and the dates of 35 submission and return of any previous resubmittals. In addition, the Contractor 36 shall reimburse the Engineer in the amount of $200.00 for review of the 37 second resubmittal and each of any subsequent resubmitais. 38 39 I. Engineer's review of drawings and data submitted by Contractor will cover. 40 only general conformity to the drawings and specifications, external 41 connections, and dimensions which affect the layout. Engineer's review does 42 not indicate a thorough review of all dimensions, quantities, and details of the 43 material, equipment, device or item shown. Engineer's review of submittals 44 shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors, omissions, or 45 deviations, nor responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents. 46 SUBMITTALS 01300-3 01/07/11 _7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 J. Five copies of each drawing and necessary data, plus the number of copies that the Contractor wants returned, shall be submitted to Engineer. Engineer will not accept submittals from anyone but Contractor. Submittals shall be consecutively numbered in direct sequence of submittal and without division by subcontracts or trades. Resubmittals shall bear the number of the first submittal followed by a letter (A, B, etc.), to indicate the sequence of the resubmittal. If applicable, the Engineer will provide the Contractor with an electronic file of the submittal format to be followed. K. When the drawings and data are returned marked NOT ACCEPTABLE or RETURNED FOR CORRECTION, the corrections shall be made as noted thereon and as instructed by Engineer and five corrected copies (or one corrected reproducible copy) resubmitted. L. When corrected copies are resubmitted, Contractor shall in writing direct specific attention to all revisions and shall list separately any revisions made other than those called for by Engineer on previous submissions. M. When the drawings and data are returned marked EXCEPTIONS NOTED, NO EXCEPTIONS NOTED, or RECORD COPY, no additional copies need be furnished. 1.07 SCHEDULE A. Operation and maintenance data shall include the following: 1. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 2. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions. 3. Lubrication and maintenance instructions. 4. Guide to "troubleshooting". 5. Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear. B. The operation and maintenance data shall be in addition to any instructions or parts lists packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered, or which may be required by Contractor. 1.08 LAYOUT DATA A. Contractor shall keep neat and legible notes of measurements and calculations made by him in connection with the layout of the Work. Copies of SUBMITTALS 01300-4 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 such data shall be furnished to the Engineer for use in checking B. Contractor's layout as provided under Lines and Grades. All such data considered of value to Owner will be transmitted to Owner by Engineer with other records upon completion of the Work. 1.09 SUBMITTALS FOR COLOR SELECTION A. The following is a list of items that must be submitted together for color selection. No single item on this list will be approved without the submittal of all other items. 1. Paint for aboveground piping, valves, valve box covers, meter box covers, etc. 2. Paint for above ground equipment. PART II - PRODUCT (Not Used) PART III -- EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION SUBMITTALS 01300-5 01/07/11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SUBMITTALS 1 01300-6 01/07/11 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 SECTION 01310 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Construction under this contract must be coordinated to assure that construction is completed within the time allowed by the Contract Documents. The Contractor will also coordinate his activities with the other contractors to allow orderly and timely completion of all the work. B. All construction schedules shall be of the critical path method, bar chart type, and shall be prepared using SURETRACK, PRIMAVERA P3, or equal. 1.02 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Within 10 calendar days after the issuance of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a preliminary construction progress schedule. The schedule shall contain a sufficient number of tasks such that no single task has a value that exceeds 1.5% of the total Contract Amount. Partial payments will not be approved until an acceptable construction progress schedule has been approved by the Engineer. B. The schedule shall be updated monthly reflecting the approved baseline schedule and the Contractor's progress on each activity. No progress payment will be approved until the updated schedule is submitted and approved by the Engineer. C. Night work may be established by the Contractor as regular procedure only with the prior written permission of the Owner. Such permission, however, may be revoked at any time by the Owner if the Contractor fails to maintain adequate equipment and supervision for the proper execution and control of the work at night. D. The Contractor shall designate an authorized representative of his firm who shall be responsible for development and maintenance of the schedule and of progress and payment reports. This representative of the Contractor shall have direct project control and complete authority to act on behalf of the Contractor in fulfilling the commitments of the Contractor's schedule. 1.03 PROGRESS OF THE WORK CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310-1 01/07/11 1 A. The work shall be executed with such progress as may be required to prevent 2 any delay to the general completion of the work. The work shall be executed at 3 such times and in or on such parts of the project, and with such forces, materials 4 and equipment to assure completion of the work in the time established by the 5 Contract. 6 7 B. If the Contractor for his convenience and at his own expense, should desire to 8 carry on his work at night or outside regular hours, he shall submit written notice 9 to the Engineer and he shall allow ample time for satisfactory arrangements to 10 be made for inspecting the work in progress. The Contractor shall reimburse the 11 Owner for extra inspection required for work outside regular hours. The 12 Contractor shall light the different parts of the project as required to comply with 13 all applicable Federal and State regulations and with all applicable requirements 14 of the municipality in which the work is being done. 15 16 PART 2 - PROGRESS SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS 17 18 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 19 20 A. As required within the General Conditions, the Contractor shall submit a critical 21 path progress schedule as described herein. The schedule shall take into 22 considerations all work phasing and restrictions as specified elsewhere in the 23 Contract Documents. 24 25 B. The critical path progress schedule requirement will consist of a detailed 26 schedule, monthly status reports (Monthly Reports), a start-up schedule, and 27 revisions to the schedules and analyses as described. The planning, 28 scheduling, management and execution of the work are the sole responsibilities 29 of the Contractor. The progress schedule shall allow Engineer to review 30 Contractor's planning, scheduling, management and execution of the work; to 31 assist Engineer in evaluating work progress and make progress payments, to 32 allow other contractors to cooperate and coordinate their activities with those of 33 the Contractor; and to provide Owner with information about "construction 34 schedule" and "cumulative outlay schedule." 35 36 C. Engineer's review of the schedule submittals shall not relieve Contractor from 37 responsibility for any deviations from the Contract Documents unless Contractor 38 has in writing called Engineer's attention to such deviations at the time of 39 submission and Engineer has given written concurrence to the specific 40 deviations, nor shall any concurrence by Engineer relieve Contractor from 41 responsibility for errors and omissions in the submittals. 42 43 D. Float or slack time is not for the exclusive benefit of the Owner, the Engineer or 44 the Contractor. Extensions of time for performance, as specified in the General 45 and Supplementary Conditions, will be granted only to the extent that equitable 46 time adjustments for the network activity, or activities affected, exceed the total CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310-2 01/07/11 1 1 J i 1 1 1 1 C] 1 1 r? 1 1 float or slack time along the affected network paths, as shown in the precedence 2 diagram and computer printout report in effect at the instant of either (a) a notice 3 to proceed with a change, or (b) a notice of suspension of work or possession, or 4 (c) detection of a subsequently acknowledged differing site condition, or (d) 5 occurrence of cause for an excusable delay. Further, use of float time in the 6 schedule, or the allocation of float time to activities by means of special logic 7 restraints or imposed dates, shall be shared to the benefit of Owner, Engineer, 8 Contractor, and his subcontractors and suppliers in proportion of their scope of 9 responsibilities. Excessive use of float time to the detriment of succeeding 10 activities may be cause for denying an extension of time if it can be 11 demonstrated that the float along the network paths affected at the instant of the 12 delaying condition would have been larger than the delay had it not been for the 13 excessive and unreasonable float usage in violation of the sharing concept 14 required by this Specification. 15 16 E. Engineer's review of the schedule submittals shall be only for conformance with 17 the information given in the Contract Documents and shall not extend to the 18 means, methods, sequences and techniques or procedures of construction or to 19 safety precautions or programs incident thereto. Engineer's review of the 20 schedule submittals will be predicated on a Contractor's stamp of approval 21 signed off by Contractor. Contractor's stamp of approval on any schedule 22 submittals shall constitute a representation to Owner and Engineer that 23 Contractor, has either determined or verified all data on the submittal, or 24 assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that Contractor and his 25 subcontractors and suppliers have reviewed and coordinated the sequences 26 shown in the submittal with the requirements of the work under the Contract 27 Documents. 28 29 2.02 SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS 30 31 A. Graphic network diagrams shall be on a time-scaled precedence network format. 32 The graphic network diagram shall include the following format: 33 34 1. Description of each activity, or restraint, shall be brief but convey the 35 scope of work described. 36 37 2. Activities shall identify all items of work that must be accomplished to 38 achieve substantial completion, or any interim substantial completion, 39 such as the major disciplines of work; items pertaining to the approval of 40 regulatory agencies; contractor's time required for submittals, fabrication 41 and deliveries; the time required by Engineer to review all submittals as 42 set forth in the Contract Documents; items of work required of Owner to 43 support pre-operational and start-up testing; time required for the 44 relocation of utilities. Activities shall also identify interface milestones with 45 the work of other contract work under separate contracts with Owner. 46 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310-3 01/07/11 3. Any activities not shown on the graphic network diagram shall be considered to have no effect on the Contractor's ability to achieve substantial completion, or interim substantial completion, within the Contract Time. Any delays to activities that do not appear in the concurred detailed schedule shall give rise only to non-prejudicial delays. Attempts to impose after-the-fact logic constraints where none existed previously to justify time extensions will not be permitted. 4. Activity durations shall be in whole working days. 5. Graphic diagrams shall be time-scaled and sequenced by work areas. The Diagram of Activities shall show numerical values for total float and be shown on their early schedules. The diagram shall be neat and legible and submitted on sheets no larger than 24 inches by 36 inches on a medium suitable for reproduction. B. Printout reports shall contain the following data for each activity or restraint: 1. Activity identification, activity description, activity duration, activity man-days, computed or specified early start date, computed early finish date, computed late start date, computed or specified late finish date, and total float and free float. 2. Five separate reports shall be provided, including all activities and restraints, and shall be submitted monthly as follows: a. Activity, sort by early start dates in order of ascending numbers. b. Activity, sort by department. C, Float report, in order of ascending total float values. d. Successor/predecessor report. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DETAILED SCHEDULE SUBMITTAL A. Submittal shall include a time-scaled graphic diagram showing all Contract activities, computer printout reports, and a supporting narrative. The initial Detailed Schedule submittal shall be delivered within 10 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed, and shall use the Notice to Proceed as the "data date". Upon receipt of Engineer's comments, Contractor shall meet with Engineer and discuss an appraisal and evaluation of the proposed work plan. Necessary revisions resulting from this review shall be made by Contractor and the detailed schedule resubmitted within 15 calendar days after the meeting. The re- submittal, if agreed to by Owner, and unless subsequently changed with the concurrence of or at the direction of Owner, shall be the work plan to be used by the Contractor for planning, scheduling, managing and executing the work. If CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310-4 01/07/11 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 w 1 Contractor fails to provide an acceptable Detailed Schedule submittal, he will be 2 deemed not to have provided a basis upon which progress may be evaluated, 3 which will further constitute reasons for refusing to recommend payment. 4 5 B. The graphic diagram shall be formatted in accordance with.Article 2.02A above. 6 The diagram shall include (1) all detailed activities grouped by major areas of 7 work. The critical path activities shall be identified, including critical paths for 8 interim dates, if applicable, by clearly highlighting the path on the graphics 9 diagram. 10 11 C. This submittal shall include five copies of the graphic diagram, the printout 12 reports and the narrative, in accordance with Article 2.02 of these scheduling 13 requirements. 14 15 D. The narrative shall include sufficient data to explain the basis of Contractor's 16 determination of durations, describe the contract conditions and restraints 17 plugged into the schedule, and provide a "what-if' analysis pertaining to potential 18 problems and practical steps to mitigate them. Should Engineer require 19 additional data, this information shall be supplied by Contractor within ten 20 calendar days. 21 22 3.02 MONTHLY STATUS REPORTS 23 24 A. Beginning with the first month, and every month thereafter, Contractor shall 25 submit to Engineer a Monthly Status Report (based on the Detailed Schedule) 26 with data as of the last day of the pay period. The monthly Status Report shall 27 include a revised copy of the currently accepted graphic diagram, computer 28 printouts and a narrative. The Monthly Status Report will be reviewed by the 29 Engineer. The Contractor will address the Engineer's comments in the 30 subsequent Monthly Status Report. If Contractor fails to provide acceptable 31 Monthly Status Reports, he will be deemed not to have provided a basis upon 32 which progress may be evaluated, which will be reason for refusing to 33 recommend progress payments. 34 35 B. The revised diagram shall show, for the currently accepted detailed diagram, 36 percentages of completion for all activities, actual start and finish dates, and 37 remaining durations, as appropriate. Activities not previously included in the 38 currently accepted detailed schedule shall be added, except that contractual 39 dates will not be changed except by Change Order. Review of a revised 40 diagram by the Engineer will not be construed to constitute concurrence with the 41 time frames, duration, or sequencing for such added activities; instead the 42 corresponding data as ultimately incorporated into an appropriate change order 43 shall govern. 44 45 C. The narrative shall include the information shown in the following outline in a 46 narrative form: CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310-5 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 1. Construction progress (refer to activity number in the Detailed Schedule) including: a. Activities completed this reporting period; b. Activities in progress this reporting period, c. Activities scheduled to commence next reporting period. 2. Description of problem areas 3. Current and anticipated delays a. Cause of the delay; b. Corrective action and schedule adjustments to correct the delay; C. Impact of the delay on other activities, on milestones, and on completion dates. 4. Changes in construction sequence 5. Pending items and status thereof a. Permits b. Change Orders C. Time extensions d. Other 6. Contract completion date status a. Ahead of schedule and number of days b. Behind schedule and number of days 3.03 REVISIONS A. All revised Detailed Schedule submittals shall be in the same form and detail as the initial submittal and shall be accompanied by an explanation of the reasons for such revisions, all of which shall be subject to review by Engineer. The revision shall incorporate all previously made changes to reflect current as-built conditions. Minor changes to the submittal may be reviewed at monthly meetings. Changes to activities having adequate float shall be considered a minor change. B. A revised detailed work plan submittal shall be submitted for review, when required by Engineer, for one of the following reasons: 1. Owner or Engineer directs a change that affects the date(s) specified in the Agreement or alters the length of a critical path. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310-6 01/07/11 1 1 E 1 1 7L f 1 2 2. Contractor elects to change any sequence of activities so as to affect a 3 critical path of the currently accepted detailed schedule documents. 4 5 C. If, prior to agreement on an equitable adjustment to the Contract Time, Engineer 6 requires revisions to the Detailed Schedule in order to evaluate planned 7 progress, Contractor shall provide an interim revised submittal for review with 8 change effect(s) incorporated as directed. Approved interim revisions to the 9 documents will be incorporated during the first subsequent Monthly Status 10 Report. 11 12 3.04 STA RT-UP SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS 13 14 A. At least 90 calendar days prior to the date of Substantial Completion, Contractor 15 shall submit a time-scaled (days after notice to proceed) graphic diagram 16 detailing the work to take place in the period between 60 days prior to 17 Substantial Completion, together with a supporting narrative. Engineer shall 18 have 10 calendar days after receipt of the submittal to respond. Upon receipt of 19 Engineer's comments, Contractor shall make the necessary revisions and 20 submit the revised schedule within ten calendar days. If Contractor fails to 21 provide acceptable Start-up Schedule Submittals, he will be deemed not to have 22 provided a basis upon which progress may be evaluated, which will be reason 23 for refusing to recommend payment. 24 25 B. The Start-up Schedule may not be combined with the Detailed Schedule. The 26 Start-up Schedule is intended to show much greater detail than the Detailed 27 Schedule for start-up activities. Typical information required includes, but is not 28 limited to, the timing of vendor representatives, pre-op testing, individual 29 equipment start-ups, Owner's training, and performance certification testing. 30 31 C. The graphic diagram shall use the currently accepted Detailed Schedule for 32 those activities completed ahead of the last 60 calendar days prior to Substantial 33 Completion, and detailed activities for the remaining 60-day period within the 34 time frames outlined in the currently accepted Detailed Schedule. 35 36 D. Contractor will be required to continue the requirement for monthly reports, as 37 outlined in Articles 3.03 and 3.04 above. In preparing these reports, Contractor 38 must assure that the Detailed Schedule is consistent with the progress noted in 39 the Start-up Schedule. 40 41 E. In addition, Contractor will be required to submit a revised copy of the start-up 42 graphic diagram on a monthly basis with a start-up narrative. This revised 43 diagram shall highlight percentages of completion, actual start and finish dates, 44 and remaining durations as applicable. Activities not previously included in the 45 accepted detailed work plan shall be added in these submittals, except that 46 contractual dates shall not be changed except by Change Order. Reviews of CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310-7 01/07/11 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 these submittals by Engineer will not be construed to constitute concurrence with the time frames, durations or sequence of work for each added activity. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION PERIOD A. Whenever it becomes apparent from the current monthly progress evaluation and updated schedule data that any milestone and/or Contract completion date will not be met, the Contractor shall take appropriate action to bring the work back on schedule. Actions could include: 1. Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as to substantially eliminate the backlog of work; 2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per work day, work days per week, or the amount of construction equipment, or any combination of the foregoing sufficient to substantially eliminate the backlog of work; and 3. Reschedule work items to achieve concurrency of accomplishment. B. The addition of equipment or construction forces, increasing the working hours or any other method, manner, or procedure to return to the current Detailed Schedule shall be at the Contractor's own cost and shall not be considered justification for a Change Order or treated as an acceleration order. END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310-8 01/07/11 1 1 1 1 1 N I 1 [1 1 SECTION 01340 2 3 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review such working drawings, 10 shop drawings, test reports and data on materials and equipment (hereinafter 11 in this Section called data), and material samples (hereinafter in this Section 12 called samples) as are required for the proper control of work, including but 13 not limited to those working drawings, shop drawings, data and samples for 14 materials and equipment specified elsewhere in the Specifications and in the 15 Contract Drawings. 16 17 B. The Contractor shall note that there are specific submittal requirements in 18 other sections of these Specifications. 19 20 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS 21 22 A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "shop drawings" shall be 23 considered to mean Contractor's Drawings for material and equipment that will 24 become an integral part of the Project. These drawings shall be complete and 25 detailed. Shop drawings shall consist of fabrication, erection and setting 26 drawings and schedule drawings, manufacturer's scale drawings, bills of 27 material, wiring and control diagrams, and inspection and test reports including 28 performance curves and certifications as applicable to the Work. 29 30 B. All details on shop drawings submitted for review shall show clearly the 31 elevations of the various parts to the main members and lines of the structure 32 and/or equipment, and where correct fabrication of the work depends upon 33 field measurements, such measurements shall be made and noted on the 34 shop drawings before being submitted for review. 35 36 C. See Shop Drawing Schedule requirements in Subparagraph 1.07 37 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY. 38 39 1.03 PRODUCT DATA 40 41 A. Product data as specified in individual sections, include, but are not 42 necessarily limited to, standard prepared data for manufactured products 43 (sometimes referred to as catalog data), such as the manufacturers product 44 specification and installation instructions, availability of colors and patterns, 45. manufacturer's printed statements of compliances and applicability, roughing- 46 in diagrams and templates, catalog cuts, product photographs, standard wiring 47 diagrams, printed performance curves and operational-range diagrams, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340-1 01/07/11 production or quality control inspection and test reports and certifications, mill reports, product operating and maintenance instructions and recommended spare-parts listing storage instructions, and printed product warranties, as applicable to the work. 1.04 WORKING DRAWINGS A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "working drawings" shall be considered to mean the Contractor's Drawings for temporary structures such as temporary bulkheads, support of open cut excavation, support of utilities, ground water control systems, forming and falsework; for underpinning; and for such other work as may be required for construction but does not become an integral part of the Project. B. Working drawings shall be signed and sealed by a registered Professional Engineer, currently licensed to practice in the State and shall convey, or be accompanied by, calculations or other sufficient information to completely explain the structure, machine, or system described and its intended manner of use. Prior to commencing such work, working drawings must have been reviewed without specific exceptions by the Engineer. Such review will be for general conformance and will not relieve the Contractor in any way from his responsibility with regard to the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. All risks of error are assumed by the Contractor. The Owner and Engineer shall have no responsibility for errors on the working drawings or the finished work. 1.05 SAMPLES A. The Contractor shall furnish, for review of the Engineer, samples required by the Contract Documents or requested by the Engineer. Samples shall be delivered to the Engineer as specified or directed and in quantities and sizes as specified. A minimum of two samples of each item shall be submitted unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall prepay all shipping charges on samples. Materials or equipment for which samples are required shall not be used in work until reviewed by the Engineer. B. Samples specified in individual sections, include, but are not necessarily limited to, physical examples of the work such as sections of manufactured or fabricated work, small cuts or containers of materials, complete units of repetitively-used products, color/texture/pattern swatches and range sets, specimens for coordination of visual effect, graphic symbols, and units of work to be used by the Engineer or Owner for independent inspection and testing, as applicable to the Work. C. The Contractor shall prepare a transmittal letter for each shipment of sample, shall enclose a copy of this letter with the shipment, and shall send a copy of this letter to the Engineer. Review of a sample shall be only for the SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340-2 01/07/11 1 1 i [J 1 1 [J 1 z 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 characteristics or use named in such review and shall not be construed to change or modify any Contract requirements. 1.06 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall review, approve, and submit, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence, so as to cause no delay in the Contract Work or in the Work of the Owner or any separate contractor, all shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples required by the Contract Documents. B. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer five (5) copies of all shop drawings, plus the number of copies he wants returned. The Engineer will review the submittal and return to the Contractor marked-up copies of the shop drawings with the appropriate review comments. C. Shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples shall be furnished with the following information: 1. Number and title of the drawing. 2. Date of drawing or revision. 3. Name of project building, facility or system. 4. Name of contractor, subcontractor, and manufacturer submitting drawing. 5. Clear identification of contents, location of the work, and the sheet numbers where the product is found in the contract drawings. 6. Contractor Certification Statement. 7. Submittal Identification Number. 8. Contract Drawing Number Reference. 9. . Statement indicating any deviations from the Contract Documents. D. All items specified are not necessarily intended to be a manufacturer's standard product. Variations from specified items will be considered on an "or equal" basis. If submittals show variations from Contract requirements because of standard shop practice or for other reasons, the Contractor shall describe such variations in his letter of transmittal and on the shop drawings along with notification of his intent to seek contract adjustment. If acceptable, proper adjustment in the Contract shall be implemented where appropriate. If the Contractor fails to describe such variations he shall not be relieved of the responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the Contract, even SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340-3 01/07/11 u though such drawings have been reviewed. Variations submitted but not described may be cause for rejection. Any variations initiated by the Contractor will not be considered as an addition to the scope of work unless specifically noted and then approved as such in writing by the Engineer. E. Data on materials and equipment shall include materials and equipment lists giving, for each item thereon, the name and location of the supplier or manufacturer, trade name, catalog reference, material, size, finish and all other pertinent data. F. For all mechanical and electrical equipment, the Contractor shall provide a single list that includes the equipment name, and address and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service company, so that service and/or spare parts can be readily obtained. In addition, a maintenance and lubrication schedule for each piece of equipment shall be submitted as specified in Section 01730. 1 F 1 1 G. The Contractor shall use the color "green" to make his remarks on the Submittals. Only the Engineer will utilize the color "red" in marking submittals. 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A. It is the duty of the Contractor to check, and coordinate with the work of all trades, all drawings, data, schedules and samples prepared by or for him before submitting them to the Engineer for review. Each copy of every drawing or data sheet 11"x17" and larger shall bear Contractor's stamp showing that they have been so checked and approved. Drawings or data sheets 11"x17" and smaller shall be bound together in an orderly fashion and bear the Contractor's stamp on the cover sheet. The cover sheet shall fully describe the packaged data and include a list of all sheet numbers within the package. Shop drawings submitted to the Engineer without the Contractor's stamp will be returned to the Contractor, without review at the Engineer's option. B. The Contractor shall review shop drawings, product data, and samples prior to submission to determine and verify the following: 1. Field measurements. 2. Field construction criteria. 3. Manufacturer's catalog numbers and similar data. 4. Conformance with Specifications. C. Shop drawings shall indicate any deviations in the submittal from the requirements of the Contract Documents. SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340-4 01/07/11 1 2 D. At a time decided upon at the pre-construction meeting the Contractor shall 3 furnish the Engineer a Shop Drawing schedule fixing the respective dates for 4 the initial submission of shop and working drawings, the beginning of 5 manufacture, testing and installation of materials, supplies and equipment. 6 This schedule shall be provided as a separate entity and indicate those 7 submittals that are critical to the progress schedule. The Contractor shall 8 prepare and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performing the 9 related work or other applicable activities, or within the time specified in the 10 individual work sections of the Specifications, so that the installation will not be 11 delayed by processing times including disapproval and resubmittal (if 12 required), coordination with other submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication, 13 delivery, and similar sequenced activities. No extension of time will be 14 authorized because of the Contractor's failure to transmit complete and 15 acceptable submittals sufficiently in advance of the Work. 16 17 E. The Contractor shall not begin any work affected by a submittal returned, 18 "Rejected. Revise as indicated and resubmit". Before starting this work, all 19 revisions must be corrected by the Contractor. After resubmittal they will be 20 reviewed and returned to him by the Engineer. If returned marked, "No 21 exceptions noted" or "Exceptions as noted", then the Contractor may begin 22 this work. Any corrections made to the shop drawings are to be followed 23 without exception. 24 25 F. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all shop drawings and data 26 sufficiently in advance of construction requirements to provide no less than 27 twenty-one (21) calendar days for Engineer's review from the time the 28 Engineer receives them. 29 30 G. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear all cost of damages that may 31 result from the ordering of any material or from proceeding with any part of 32 work prior to review by the Engineer of the necessary shop drawings. 33 34 H. All shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples submitted by 35 subcontractors for review shall be sent directly to the Contractor for checking. 36 The Contractor shall be responsible for their submission according to the 37 approved shop drawing schedule so as to prevent delays in delivery of 38 materials and project completion. 39 40 I. The Contractor shall check all subcontractor's shop drawings, product data, 41 working drawings and samples regarding measurements, size of members, 42 materials, and details to satisfy himself that they are in conformance to the 43 Contract Documents. Shop drawings found to be inaccurate or otherwise in 44 error shall be returned to the subcontractors for correction before submission 45 to the Engineer. 46 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340-5 01/07/11 1 1.08 ENGINEER'S REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING , 2 DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 3 4 A. The Engineer's review is for general conformance with the design concept and 5 contract drawings. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving 6 the Contractor from compliance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications 7 or departures thereof. The Contractor remains responsible for details and , 8 accuracy, for coordinating the work with all other associated work and trades, 9 for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly, and for 10 performing work in a safe manner. 11 12 B. The review of shop drawings, data, and samples will be general. They shall 13 not be construed: 14 15 1. As permitting any departure from the Contract requirements; 16 17 2. As relieving the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, including 18 details, dimensions, and materials; 19 20 3. As approving departures from details furnished by the Engineer, except 21 as otherwise provided herein. 22 23 C. If the shop drawings, data or samples as submitted describe variations per 24 subparagraph (1.07H), and show a departure from the Contract Documents, 25 which Engineer finds to be in the interest of the Owner and to be so minor as 26 not to involve a change in Contract Price or time for performance, the 27 Engineer may return the reviewed drawings without noting an exception. 28 29 D. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor under one of the following: 30 31 "NO EXCEPTIONS NOTED" is assigned when there are no notations or 32 comments on the submittal. When returned under this code the Contractor 33 may release the equipment and/or material for manufacture. ' 34 35 "EXCEPTIONS AS NOTED" is assigned when notations or comments have 36 been made on the submittal pointing out minor discrepancies as compared 37 with the Contract Documents. Resubmittal or confirmation is not necessary 38 prior to release for manufacturing. 39 40 "EXCEPTIONS AS NOTED/CONFIRM." This combination of codes is 41 assigned when a confirmation of the notations and comments is required from 42 the Contractor. The Contractor may release the equipment or material for 43 manufacture; however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into 44 the final product addressing the omissions and/or nonconforming items that 45 were noted. Only the items to be "confirmed" need to be resubmitted. 46 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340-6 01/07/11 1 1 "EXCEPTIONS AS NOTED/RESUBMIT." This combination of codes is 2 assigned when a resubmittal is required by the Contractor. The Contractor 3 may release a portion of the equipment or material for manufacture., however, 4 all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final submittal. This 5 resubmittal is to address the omissions and/or nonconforming items that were 6 7 noted. 8 "REJECTED. REVISE AS INDICATED AND RESUBMIT. This combination 9 of codes is assigned when the submittal is in noncompliance with the Contract 10 Documents and must be corrected and the entire package resubmitted. This 11 code generally means that the equipment or material cannot be released for 12 manufacture unless the Contractor takes full responsibility for providing the 13 submitted items in accordance with Contract Documents. 14 15 "FOR YOUR INFORMATION" is assigned when the package provides 16 information of a general nature that may or may not require a response. 17 18 19 E. Resubmittals will be handled in the same manner as first submittals. On resubmittals the Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing, on the 20 letter of transmittal and on resubmitted shop drawings by use of revision 21 triangles or other similar methods, to revisions other than the corrections 22 requested by the Engineer on previous submissions. Any such revisions that 23 are not clearly identified shall be made at the risk of the Contractor. The 24 Contractor shall make corrections to any work done because of this type 25 revision that is not in accordance to the Contract Documents as may be 26 required by the Engineer. 27 28 F. If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the shop drawings to 29 constitute a change to the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall give 30 written notice thereof to the Engineer at least seven (7) working days prior to 31 release for manufacture. 32 33 G The Engineer will review a submittal/resubmittal a maximum of two (2) times 34 . after which cost of review will be borne by the Contractor. The cost of 35 engineering shall be equal to the Engineer's charges to the Owner under the 36 terms of the Engineer's agreement with the Owner. 37 38 H. When the shop drawings have been completed to the satisfaction of the 39 Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out the construction in accordance ' 40 therewith and shall make no further changes therein except upon written 41 instruction from the Engineer. 42 43 I. Partial submittals may not be reviewed. The Engineer will be the only judge 44 as to the completeness of a submittal. Submittals not complete will be 45 returned to the Contractor. The Engineer may at his option provide a list or 46 mark the submittal directing the Contractor to the areas that are incomplete. 47 ' 48 ES SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPL 01340-7 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.02. SHOP DRAWINGS Final approved shop drawings shall be submitted in electronic format.. PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340-8 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 SECTION 01385 COLOR AUDIO-VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS PART I - GENERAL 1.01 . DESCRIPTION A. Scope The Contractor shall prepare color audio/video DVDs of all work areas within 20 days of the Notice to Proceed. B. Requirements Included Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video DVD recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas, including access to the site of the work. Streets, easements, rights-of way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of pre-construction conditions. One copy of DVD recordings and video log will be submitted to the Owner. The Engineer will designate those areas, if any, to be omitted from or added to the audio-visual coverage. All DVDs and written records will become property of the Owner. C. Scheduling No construction shall begin prior to review and approval of the DVDs covering the Project construction area(s) by the Owner. The Owner will have the authority to reject all or any portion of video DVD not conforming to specifications and order that it be redone at no additional charge. The Contractor shall reschedule unacceptable coverage within seven days after being notified. DVD recordings shall not be made more than 20 days after Notice to Proceed. D. Videographer Qualifications The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of preconstruction color audio-video DVD documentation. The videographer, through the Contractor, shall furnish to the Engineer a list of all equipment to be used for the audio-video recording, i.e., manufacturer's name, model number, specifications and other pertinent information. Additional information to be furnished by the videographer is the names and addresses of two references that the videographer has performed color audio- video recording on projects of a similar nature within the last 12 months. COLOR AUDIO-VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 01385-1 01/07/11 Engineer's approval of the selected videographer is required prior to taking first audio-video DVD. E F G Equipment The Contractor shall finish all equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service. The total audio-video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio-video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. The color video camera used in the recording shall be of Industrial Grade and shall have EIA Standard NTSC type color - 1.OV 75 OHMS. Video output from camera shall be capable of horizontal resolution of 350 lines at center and utilize a minimum of 8:1 zoom with a 2/3 Newvicon tube or CCD pick-up element for optimum color imagery plus minimum lag through of one foot candle. The recording shall be made with Industrial Grade recorder. The recordings shall be high resolution, extended still frame capable, in color. The recorded video DVDs shall be compatible for playback with any American TV Standard DVD player. Recorded Information, Audio Each DVD shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video DVD shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. Recorded Information, Video All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom-in and zoom-out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during video DVD playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video COLOR AUDIO-VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 01385-2 01/07111 1 level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly 2 controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction 3 documentation shall be recorded in SP mode. 4 5 H. Viewer Orientation 6 7 The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer 8 orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and 9 business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed 10 construction location will not be readily apparent to the video DVD viewer, 11 highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion 12 as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When 13 conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording 14 system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall 15 not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of 16 the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. 17 18 I. Lighting 19 20 All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No recording shall be 21 done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when 22 sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording 23 and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 24 25 J. Speed of Travel 26 27 The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be 28 directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features 29 within that construction areas zone of influence. Where applicable, the rate.of 30 speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during recording 31 shall not exceed 44 feet per minute. 32 33 K. Video Log/Index 34 35 All video DVDs shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified 36 by video DVD number and project title. Each video DVD shall have a log of 37 that video DVD's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of 38 coverage contained on the video DVD in terms of the names of the streets or 39 location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, 40 video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if 41 reasonably available) and the date. 42 43 L. Area of Coverage 44 45 DVD coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of 46 influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such 47 coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, COLOR AUDIO-VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 01385-3 01/07/11 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc. within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. DVD coverage shall be limited to one side of the site, street, easement or right-of-way at any one time. PART II - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Prior to requesting Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall review the pre-construction video with the Owner/Engineer and identify any work needed to restore the site to pre-construction conditions. END OF SECTION COLOR AUDIO-VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 01385-4 01/07/11 1 11 1 SECTION 01500 2 3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 4 5 PART I - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SANITARY FACILITIES 8 9 A. Contractor shall furnish temporary separate male and female sanitary facilities 10 at the site, as provided herein, for the needs of all construction workers and 11 others performing work or furnishing services on the Project. 12 13 B. Sanitary facilities shall be of reasonable capacity, properly maintained 14 throughout the construction period, and obscured from public view to the 15 greatest practical extent. If toilets of the chemically treated type are used, at 16 least one toilet will be furnished for each 20 men. Contractor shall enforce the 17 use of such sanitary facilities by all personnel at the site. 18 19 1.02 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC 20 21 A. Contractor shall conduct his work to interfere as little as possible with public 22 travel, whether vehicular or pedestrian. Whenever it is necessary to cross, 23 obstruct, or close roads, driveways and walks, whether public or private, 24 Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, or 25 other temporary expedients for the accommodation of public and private 26 travel, and shall give reasonable notice to owners of private drives before 27 interfering with them. Driveway access to commercial properties shall be 28 maintained at all times. Such maintenance of traffic shall not be required 29 when Contractor has obtained permission from the owner and tenant of private 30 property, or from the authority having jurisdiction over public property involved, 31 to obstruct traffic at the designated point. At all times, the Contractor shall 32 perform the Work in accordance with the permits and easement agreements. 33 34 B. Traffic control shall be in accordance with DOT Roadway and Traffic Design 35 Standards for Traffic Control Through Work Zones. All local Traffic 36 Regulations shall be followed. 37 38 C. In making open-cut street crossings, the Contractor shall not block more than 39 one-half of the street at a time. Whenever possible, Contractor shall widen the 40 shoulder on the opposite side to facilitate traffic flow. Temporary surfacing 41 shall be provided as necessary on shoulders. 42 43 1.03 BARRICADES AND LIGHTS 44 45 A. All streets, roads, highways, and other public thoroughfares that are closed to 46 traffic shall be protected by effective barricades on which shall be placed 47 acceptable warning signs. Barricades shall be located at the nearest TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500-1 01/07/11 intersecting public highway or street on each side of the blocked section B. All open trenches and other excavations shall have suitable barricades, signs, and lights to provide adequate protection to the public. Obstructions such as material piles and equipment shall be provided with similar warning signs and lights. Contractor shall be responsible for public safety within the construction area. C. All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated with warning lights from sunset to sunrise. Material storage and conduct of the Work on or alongside public streets and highways shall cause the minimum obstruction and inconvenience to the traveling public. All barricades, signs, lights and other protective devices shall be installed and maintained in conformity with applicable statutory requirements and, where within railroad and highway rights-of-way, as required by the authority having jurisdiction thereof. D. Open trenches and other excavations shall not be left open over weekends and holidays, or greater than one calendar day, except during extreme weather conditions. 1.04 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PRIVATE PROPERTY A. Contractor shall protect, shore, brace, support, and maintain all underground pipes, conduits, drains, and other underground construction uncovered or otherwise affected by his construction operations. All pavement, surfacing, driveways, curbs, walks, buildings, utility poles, guy wires, fences, and other surface structures affected by construction operations, together with all sod and shrubs in yards and parking areas, shall be restored to their original condition, whether within or outside the easement. All replacements shall be made with new materials. 1.05 PARKING A. Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable parking areas for the use of all construction workers and others performing work or furnishing services in connection,with the Project, as required to avoid any need for parking personal vehicles where they may interfere with public traffic, Owner's operations, or construction activities, where indicated on the drawings or directed by the Engineer. 1.06 DUST CONTROL A. Contractor shall take reasonable measures to prevent unnecessary dust. Earth surfaces subject to dusting shall be kept moist with water or by application of a chemical dust suppressant. Dusty materials in piles or in transit shall be covered when practicable to prevent blowing. TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500-2 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 B. Buildings or operating facilities that may be adversely affected by dust shall be adequately protected from dust. Existing or new machinery, motors, instrument panels or similar equipment, shall be protected by suitable dust screens. Proper ventilation shall be included with dust screens. 1.07 SWEEPING A. The Contractor shall sweep loose material from all pavement at the end of each workday. 1.08 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Contractor shall prevent the pollution of drains and watercourses by sanitary wastes, sediment, debris and other substances resulting from construction activities. No sanitary wastes will be permitted to enter any drain or watercourse other than sanitary sewers. No sediment, debris or. other substance will be permitted to enter sanitary sewers and reasonable measures will be taken to prevent such materials form entering any drain or watercourse. PART II - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART III - EXECUTION Not Used) END OF SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500-3 01/07/11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500-4 01/07/11 i 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 SECTION 01505 MOBILIZATION PART I - GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITION AND SCOPE A. Mobilization shall include the obtaining of all permits, insurance, and bonds; moving onto the site of all plant and equipment; furnishing and erecting plants, temporary facilities, and other construction facilities; all as required for the proper performance and completion of the Work. Mobilization shall include, but not be limited to, the following principal items: 1. Move onto the site all plant and equipment required for first month's operations. 2. Install temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities. 3. Establish fire protection plan and safety program. 4. Secure construction water supply. 5. Provide on-site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities. 6. Arrange for and erect Contractor's work and storage yard and employees' parking facilities. 7. Submit all required insurance certificates and bonds. 8. Obtain all required permits. 9. Post all OSHA, Environmental Protection Agency, Department of Labor, and all other required notices. 10. Have superintendent at the job site full time. 11. Submit a detailed construction schedule acceptable to the Engineer. 12. If required, erect project construction sign(s). 13. Submit a finalized Schedule of Values of the Work acceptable to the Owner. 14. Submit a finalized schedule of submittals. 15. Construct, maintain, and restore temporary access and haul roads. MOBILIZATION 01505-1 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 16. Provide a continuous color audio-videotape recording of existing conditions. PART II - PRODUCT (Not Used) PART III - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION MOBILIZATION 01505-2 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 SECTION 01510 TEMPORARY UTILITIES PART I - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required for construction, remove on completion of Work. 1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with National Electric Code. B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and regulations and with utility company requirements. C. Comply with Municipal and County Health Department Regulations. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. 2.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING A. Arrange with utility company and Owner to provide service required for power and lighting, and pay all costs for service and for power used in the construction, testing and trial operation prior to final acceptance of the work by the Owner. All cost associated with obtaining temporary and permanent power will be at Contractor expense. B. Provide adequate artificial lighting for all areas of work when natural light is not adequate for work, and for areas accessible to the public. 2.03 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Arrange with local telephone service-company to provide direct line telephone service at the construction site for the use by personnel and employees. B. Pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal, and service charges. TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01510-1 01/07/11 1 C. In lieu of direct telephone service, provide cellular phone service for site 2 superintendent(s). 3 4 2.04 TEMPORARY WATER 5 6 A. The Contractor shall install at each connection to the local water supply 7 system a backflow preventer and meter meeting local utility requirements. 8 9 B. The Contractor shall pay for all temporary water facilities, including the 10 backflow preventers and meters, and the actual amount of water used during 11 construction. 12 13 2.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES 14 15 A. Provide sanitary facilities in compliance with laws and regulations. 16 17 B. Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures. 18 19 PART III - EXECUTION 20 21 3.01 GENERAL 22 23 A. Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service. 24 25 B. Modify and extend systems as work progress requires. 26 27 C. Allow the Owner and Engineer reasonable use of all temporary utilities. 28 29 3.02 REMOVAL 30 31 A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no 32 longer required as determined by the Engineer. 33 34 B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of 35 temporary facilities. 36 37 38 END OF SECTION TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01510-2 01/07/11 1 1 J F L SECTION 01600 2 3 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED Material and equipment incorporated into the Work: A B C D Conform to applicable specifications and standards. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing by the Engineer. Manufactured and Fabricated Products: 1. Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best engineering and shop practices. 2. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, to be interchangeable. 3. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same manufacturer. 4. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. 5. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or is specified. 1.02 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS A. All materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to the inspection and approval of the Engineer. No material shall be delivered to the work without prior review of the Engineer. B. Facilities and labor for handling and inspection of all materials and equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor. If the Engineer requires, either prior to beginning or during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall submit samples of materials for such special tests as may be necessary to demon- strate that they conform to the specifications. Such samples shall be furnished, stored, packed, and shipped as directed at the Contractor's MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-1 01/07/11 1 expense. Except as otherwise noted, the Owner will make arrangements for t 2 and pay for the tests. 3 4 C. The Contractor shall submit data and samples sufficiently early to permit , 5 consideration and review before materials are necessary for incorporation in 6 the work. Any delay resulting from the Contractor's failure to submit samples 7 or data promptly shall not be used as a basis of claims against the Owner or 8 the Engineer. 9 10 D. The materials and equipment used an the work shall correspond to the ' 11 approved samples or other data previously submitted to the Engineer for 12 review. 13 ' 14 1.03 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION 15 16 A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with , 17 manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such 18 instructions to parties involved in the installation, including four copies to the 19 Engineer. ' 20 21 1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during 22 installation and until completion. , 23 24 B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord 25 with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements. 26 27 1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with 28 manufacturer's instructions, consult with Engineer for further 29 instructions. 30 , 31 2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions. 32 33 C. Perform work in accord with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any ' 34 preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or 35 exempted by Contract Documents. 36 37 1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING 38 39 A. Arrange deliveries of Products in accord with construction schedules, ' 40 coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site. 41 42 1. Deliver Products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original , 43 containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 44 45 2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with , 46 requirements of Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that 47 Products are properly protected and undamaged. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-2 01/07/11 1 1 1 1 1 2 B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent 3 soiling or damage to Products or packaging. 4 5 1.05 STO RAGE AND PROTECTION 6 7 A. The Contractor shall furnish a covered, weather-protected storage structure 8 providing a clean, dry, non-corrosive environment for all mechanical 9 equipment, valves, architectural items, electrical and instrumentation 10 equipment, and special equipment to be incorporated into this project. 11 Storage of equipment shall be in strict accordance with the "instructions for 12 storage" of each equipment supplier and manufacturer including connection of 13 heaters, placing of storage lubricants in equipment, etc. The Contractor shall 14 furnish a copy of the manufacturer's instructions for storage to the Engineer 15 prior to storage of all equipment and materials. Corroded, damaged or 16 deteriorated equipment and parts shall be replaced before acceptance of the 17 project. Equipment and materials not properly stored will not be included in a 18 payment estimate. 19 20 B. Store Products in accord with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and 21 labels intact and legible. 22 23 1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weather tight 24 enclosures. 25 26 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by 27 manufacturer's instructions. 28 29 3. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids, 30 prevent soiling or staining. Cover products which are subject to 31 deterioration with impervious sheet coverings, provide adequate 32 ventilation to avoid condensation. 33 34 4. Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on solid surfaces 35 to prevent mixing with foreign matter. 36 37 C. All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work shall be handled 38 and stored by the Contractor before, during, and after shipment in a manner to 39 prevent warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting, and any injury, 40 theft or damage of any kind whatsoever to the material or equipment. 41 42 D. Cement, sand and lime shall be stored under a roof and off the ground and 43 shall be kept completely dry at all times. All miscellaneous steel, and 44 reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground or otherwise to prevent 45 accumulations of dirt or grease, and in a position to prevent accumulations of 46 standing water and to minimize rusting. Precast concrete sections shall be 47 handled and stored in a manner to prevent accumulations of dirt, standing MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-3 01/07/11 water, staining, chipping or cracking. Brick, block and similar masonry products shall be handled and stored in a manner to reduce breakage, chipping, cracking, and spilling to a minimum. E. All materials that, in the opinion of the Engineer, have become so damaged as to be unfit for the use intended or specified shall be promptly removed from the site of the work, and the Contractor shall receive no compensation for the damaged material or its removal. F. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored Products to assure that Products are maintained under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration. G. Protection After Installation- 1 . Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove covering when no longer needed. H. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, equipment, and supplies sold and delivered to the Owner under this Contract until final inspection of the work and acceptance thereof by the Owner. In the event any such material, equipment, and supplies are lost, stolen, damaged, or destroyed prior to final inspection and acceptance, the Contractor shall replace same without additional cost to the Owner. Should the Contractor fail to take proper action on storage and handling of equipment supplied under this Contract within seven days after written notice to do so has been given, the Owner retains the right to correct all deficiencies noted in previously transmitted written notice and deduct the cost associated with these corrections from the Contractor's Contract. These costs may be comprised of expenditures for labor, equipment usage, administrative, clerical, engineering and any other costs associated with making the necessary corrections. 1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Contractor's Options: 1. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard. 2. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, submit the products or manufacturers named in the Proposal, which complies with the specifications. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-4 01/07/11 1 3. For products specified by naming one or more products or 2 manufacturers and "or equal", Contractor shall submit a request as for 3 substitutions for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. 4 5 B. Substitutions: 6 7 1. After the Effective Date of the Agreement, the Engineer will consider 8 written requests from Contractor for substitution of products. 9 10 2. Submit a separate request for each product, supported with complete 11 data, with drawings and samples as appropriate, including: 12 13 a. Comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution with that 14 specified. 15 16 b. Changes required in other elements of the work because of the 17 substitution. 18 19 c. Effect on the construction schedule. 20 21 d. Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the product 22 specified. 23 24 e. Any required license fees or royalties. 25 26 f. Availability of maintenance service, and source of replacement 27 materials. 28 29 3. The Engineer will be the judge of the acceptability of the proposed 30 substitution. 31 32 C. Contractor's Representation: 33 34 1. A request for a substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor: 35 36 a. Has investigated the proposed Product and determined that it is 37 equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 38 39 b. Shall provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution 40 as for the product specified. 41 42 c. Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into 43 the Work, and make such other changes as may be required to 44 make the Work complete in all respects. 45 46 d. Waives all claims for additional costs, under his responsibility, 47 which may subsequently become apparent. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-5 01/07/11 1 2 1.07 SPECIAL TOOLS 3 4 A. Manufacturers of equipment and machinery shall furnish any special tools 5 (including grease guns or other lubricating devices) required for normal 6 adjustment, operations and maintenance, together with instructions for their 7 use. The Contractor shall preserve and deliver to the Owner these tools and 8 instructions in good order no later than upon completion of the Contract. 9 10 1.08 WARRANTY 11 12 A. For all major pieces of equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment 13 manufacturer as specified in Section 01740. The manufacturer's warranty 14 period shall be concurrent with the Contractor's for one (1) year after the date 15 of Substantial Completion and acceptance. 16 17 1.09 SPARE PARTS 18 19 A. Spare parts for certain equipment have been specified in the pertinent 20 sections of the Specifications. The Contractor shall collect and store all spare 21 parts so required in an area to be designated by the Engineer. In addition, the 22 Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer an inventory listing all spare parts, the 23 equipment they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier, 24 and the delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item 25 shall be furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivered cost. 26 27 1.10 GREASE, OIL, AND FUEL 28 29 A. All grease, oil, and fuel required for testing of equipment shall be furnished 30 with the respective equipment. The Owner shall be furnished with a year's 31 supply of required lubricants including grease and oil of the type 32 recommended by the manufacturer with each item of equipment supplied. 33 34 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for changing the oil in all drives and 35 intermediate drives of each mechanical equipment after initial break-in of the 36 equipment, which in no event shall be any longer than three weeks of 37 operation. 38 39 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 40 41 PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) 42 43 END SECTION MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-6 01/07/11 1 1 1 1 11 w 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01625 2 3 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING PART I - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Prior to requesting issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall perform start-up testing services as specified herein. B. Start-up of the facilities and appurtenances will require completion of all structures, installation of all equipment, and all connections to existing systems. All components of the new system shall be installed as if each were ready for use by the Owner for their intended purposes. The Contractor shall provide a written startup plan, for approval by the Engineer, for individual facilities and systems. As applicable, the startup plan shall be in accordance with the construction phasing plan described in the Contractor's Schedule described in Section 01310. C. All equipment will be tested, approved, and accepted by the Engineer prior to placement of the new facilities into operation. D. All lubricants, water, air, fuel and power necessary for initial operation and tests shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. E. In addition to furnishing, delivering, installing, and testing each piece of equipment, the Contractor shall provide the services of competent factory certified representatives for the periods indicated in other sections of these Specifications. Such representatives shall assist the Engineer by instructing the operating personnel of the Owner in the maintenance and operation of the equipment, conducting tests, and making recommendations for producing the most efficient results. These services shall be made during the initial operation of the completed facilities and be in addition to services necessary during erection or to correct defective materials or workmanship during the guarantee period. These representatives shall be specially trained and qualified to provide installation services, adjustment, start-up, and testing work and shall not be sales representatives only. The cost of such representation, including subsistence and travel, shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. PART II - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART III - EXECUTION START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625-1 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 3.01 PRELIMINARY MATTERS A. General Requirements- 1 . Successfully execute the start-up of the system and demonstrate satisfactory performance of the intended use thereof. The start-up and performance demonstration shall be successfully executed prior to the Engineer's issuance of Substantial Completion. 2. Field acceptance tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer. At least thirty (30) calendar days prior to testing, Contractor shall submit details of all test procedures to the Engineer for review, comment, and approval. Test procedures shall be submitted to the Engineer in accordance with Specification Section 01340. This notification shall be shown on the Progress Schedule. 3. All performance tests and inspections shall be scheduled at least ten (10) working days in advance with the Engineer. All performance tests and inspections shall be conducted during the normal work week of Monday through Friday, unless otherwise authorized, in writing, by the Engineer. 4. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment during start-up systems testing and shall neither have nor make any claim for damage that may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner takes over the operation thereof. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing all necessary valves, whether shown on the Drawings or not, in order to facilitate testing of pumping systems, tanks, and all other system start- up testing, at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Preparation for Systems Start-Up: 1. All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be checked to ensure that each component is in good working order and properly installed and connected. All systems shall be purged as required. All sumps, tanks, basins, chambers, wet wells, and pipelines that are hydraulically checked shall be drained and returned to their original condition once the water testing is complete. All pipelines that have been filled and flushed shall be drained clean. 2. All instruments and controls shall be calibrated through their full operational distribution range. Any other adjustments required for proper operation of all instrumentation and control equipment shall be made and confirmed by the specific factory authorized service representative. START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625-2 01/07/11 _? 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3. The Contractor shall work with each factory certified technician to 3 complete any remaining tasks, connections, adjustments, and 4 preparations needed to ensure proper equipment and/or system 5 operation. 6 7 4. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Engineer has 8 confirmed that all specified safety equipment has been installed and is 9 in good working order. 10 11 5. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Engineer has 12 verified that all maintenance equipment, spare parts, and approved 13 equipment Operation and Maintenance manuals have been furnished 14 as specified. 15 16 6. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the factory certified 17 technician for that particular component has confirmed that all 18 lubricants, electrical connections, drains, fuel and exhaust systems 19 have been provided and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's 20 recommendations. 21 22 3.02 PRESSURE TESTS 23 24 A. Field pressure tests shall be made to confirm compliance with the Contract 25 Documents. The Contractor shall perform field tests as herein specified. All 26 tanks, water mains, piping and equipment shall be tested in the field in the 27 presence of the Engineer or his authorized agent. 28 29 B. Hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be performed in accordance with the 30 applicable sections of the American Water Works Association Standard for 31 Installation of Cast Iron/Ductile Iron Water Mains, AWWA C-600, Concrete 32 Pressure Pipe, AWWA M9, and Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride 33 (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water Mains, AWWA C-605, except as 34 herein modified. 35 36 C. The Contractor shall submit his plan for pressure testing to the Engineer for 37 review at least ten (10) days before starting the work. The Contractor shall 38 remove and adequately dispose of all blocking material and equipment after 39 completion and acceptance of the field hydrostatic test, unless otherwise 40 directed by the Engineer. Any damage to the pipe shall be repaired by the 41 Contractor. 42 43 D. After completion of all work and before final acceptance, a hydrostatic and 44 leakage test shall be conducted. Water required for testing new pipelines will 45 be provided by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Water mains shall 46 be tested with potable water and force mains and storm water lines shall be 47 tested with reclaimed water, if available. Where applicable, the Contractor START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625-3 01/07/11 11 shall coordinate the development of the water supply with the pipeline work in order that water will be available to meet these requirements. At no time are valves on the water supply system to be operated without the prior authorization of the Engineer. E. Each newly installed pressure main shall be tested at a pressure equal 1.5 times the pipeline design pressure or 150 psi; whichever is greater. The duration of each test shall be a minimum of two (2) hours. F. Any test pump(s), piping connections, taps, fittings, pressure gauges, compressors, and all necessary components thereof which might be required for the hydrostatic tests, shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. G. All exposed pipe, fittings, valves, air valves, blow-offs and joints shall be carefully examined during the test, and all joints showing a visible leakage shall be made tight. All defective pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be removed from the line and replaced by the Contractor with new components at no additional cost to the Owner. H J The Contractor may backfill the trench before testing the line, but he shall open up the trench at his own expense to repair any leaks. All visible leaks shall be corrected regardless of the total leakage revealed by the test as compared to the allowable calculated losses. All lines that fail to meet the test shall be repaired and retested as necessary, until test requirements are complied with. All repairs and retests shall be performed at the Contractor's own expense with no additional cost to the Owner. The installation will not be accepted until the leakage is equal to or less than the allowable leakage as determined by the formula below- L = S_._D(P12 133,200 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 in which "L" equals the allowable leakage, in gallons per hour; "S" is the length of the pipe tested, in feet; "D" is the nominal pipe diameter, in inches; and "P" is the average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square inch, gauge. K. All tests shall be made under the supervision of the Engineer or authorized agents thereof. No additional compensation will be paid to the Contractor for performing the above required tests; the cost of all labor, materials, lubricants, fuels, power, necessary appliances, and the coordination for testing purposes shall be included in the unit price or prices bid for the various items of work. L. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a minimum of 72 hours advance notice for scheduling hydrostatic and leakage tests. , START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625-4 01/07/11 1 1 1 L 1 1 1 Ll 1 1 1 2 3.03 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER LINES 3 4 A. Prior to disinfection, the lines shall be cleaned and flushed. Flushing and 5 cleaning shall occur after all hydrostatic and leak tests have been performed 6 and approved. Lines shall be disinfected in accordance with the applicable 7 requirements of AWWA C651 and as described hereinafter. 8 9 B. Before being placed in service, all potable water pipelines installed under this 10 Contract shall be disinfected by chlorination in accordance with AWWA 11 Standards. Either of the following disinfectants may be allowed upon written 12 authorization from the Engineer. 13 14 1. Liquid Chlorine: A chlorine gas-water mixture shall be applied by 15 means of a solution-feed chlorination device. The device must provide 16 a means to prevent the backflow of water into the chlorine cylinder. 17 18 2. Calcium Hypochlorite Solution: A solution consisting of 5 percent 19 calcium hypochlorite powder and 95 percent water by weight shall be 20 prepared and this solution will be injected or pumped into the line. 21 22 C. The point of application of the chlorinating agent shall be at the beginning of 23 the pipeline extension and through a corporation stop inserted in the top of the 24 newly installed pipe. The water injector for delivering the chlorine-bearing 25 water into the pipe may be supplied from a tap on the pressure side of the 26 valve controlling the flow into the pipeline extension. 27 28 D. Water from the existing distribution system or other source of supply shall be 29 controlled so as to flow slowly into the newly installed pipeline during the 30 application of chlorine. The Contractor shall not allow the chlorine solution in 31 the line being treated to flow back into the line supplying the water. 32 33 E. Treated water shall be retained in the new pipeline at least 24 hours, after 34 which the chlorine residual in the line shall be at least 50 mg/I. Should the 35 initial procedure fail to result in the conditions specified, the chlorination 36 procedure shall be repeated until acceptable results are obtained, at the 37 Contractor's expense. 38 39 F. The Contractor shall tap the lines at points designated by the Engineer and 40 provide necessary piping to discharge water from the line to a designated 41 location as directed by the Engineer. 42 43 G. Following chlorination, all treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the 44 line, at its extremities, until the replacement water throughout its length, upon 45 testing, is proved comparable to the quality of water in the existing distribution 46 system. 47 START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625-5 01/07/11 H. Water for flushing will be provided through connections to the Owner's piping systems. The Contractor shall pay for all water used in flushing the pipelines. At no time are valves on the distribution system to be operated without the presence of a duly qualified representative of the Engineer. After the water lines have been disinfected and flushed, samples of water shall be taken from several points in sterilized containers, and samples forwarded to the Engineer, or its designated representative, for bacterial examination. If repeated tests of such samples show the presence of coliform organisms, the disinfection shall be repeated or continued until tests indicate absence of contamination. Final approval of the bacterial samples shall be received prior to placing the system into operation. J. The Contractor shall submit his plan for disinfection of the potable water pipelines to the Engineer for review at least ten (10) days before starting the work. Lines shall be totally free and clean prior to final acceptance. 3.04 LEAKAGE TEST - GRAVITY SEWERS AND OTHER PIPELINES A. All gravity sewer will be tested by the Contractor prior to final acceptance of the work. All tests will be conducted in a manner to minimize any interference with the Contractor's work or progress. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer 72 hours in advance of such tests and, at his option, the Engineer shall witness such tests. B. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when the work is ready for testing, and tests shall be made as soon thereafter as practicable, under the observation of the Engineer. Reading meters, gauges or other measuring devices shall be new and furnished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish all other labor, materials, services and equipment including power, fuel, meters and gauges; water and other items and apparatus necessary for making leakage tests, preparing guidelines for testing, assembling, placing, and removing testing equipment and placing in service. C. Air Leakage Test 1. Tests by this method shall be limited to sewers 36 inches in diameter and smaller. The maximum allowable air leakage is based on pre-wetted pipe walls. The Contractor may therefore fill the pipe with clear water and then empty the pipe prior to air testing. When pipe walls are pre-wetted, air leakage tests shall be completed within 24 hours after filling the sewer section to be tested. 2. Air pressure tests shall be made by placing the sewer under 3.0 psig air pressure and measuring the volume of air required to maintain this pressure. The rate of air leakage shall be determined when the system START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625-6 01/07/11 ?I 1 1 1 C 1 1 1 1 reaches an equilibrium state and air flow shall be read by means of an 2 approved rotometer. 3 4 3. The maximum rate of air loss shall be 0.003 cfm per square foot of 5 interior pipe surface and the maximum air flow shall not exceed 2.0 cfm 6 when the total pressure on the sewer is maintained at 3.0 psig. When 7 the groundwater level is above the invert of the sewer, but below a level 8 adequate for infiltration testing, the maximum air loss shall be reduced 9 6 percent for each foot of groundwater above the sewer invert. 10 11 4. Air testing equipment shall be arranged so that compressors, valving, 12 gauges, and other test devices are located at the ground surface. Air 13 testing equipment shall have an approved air relief arrangement to 14 prevent the sewer from being pressurized to greater than 10.0 psig. 15 16 D. Manhole Vacuum Tests: Each manhole shall be visually inspected for leakage 17 or evidence thereof after assembly, installation, and backfilling activities have 18 been completed. This inspection shall occur by the Engineer or the Engineer's 19 authorized agent. The Contractor shall demonstrate the integrity of the 20 installed materials and construction procedures by conducting a vacuum test 21 in accordance with ASTM C1244-93. If the manhole shows signs of leakage, 22 it shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost to 23 the Owner. 24 25 E. Repairing Leaks: When leakage occurs in excess of the specified amount, 26 defective manholes, pipe, pipe joints, or other appurtenances shall be located 27 and repaired at the expense of the Contractor. If the defective portions cannot 28 be located, the Contractor shall remove, reconstruct, and retest as much of the 29 original work as necessary to obtain satisfactory test results. 30 31 3.05 SYSTEM START-UP 32 33 A. Contractor Responsibilities 34 35 1. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer ten (10) days notice in writing 36 of his intent to perform systems start-up. 37 38 2. The Contractor shall provide sufficient personnel to test equipment, 39 monitor and record data, as directed by the Engineer. 40 41 3. The Contractor shall obtain, install, calibrate and operate all test 42 equipment, gauges, pressure recorders, communications systems, etc., 43 as directed by the Engineer. 44 45 4. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer, provide access to the 46 work, provide all incidental labor and facilities, and provide any 47 temporary utilities or construction aids required. START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625-7 01/07/11 B 5. The Contractor shall ensure that all equipment, subsystems, and other separable parts of the Work have been adjusted and balanced and that any and all field tests have been conducted and demonstrated to be in proper operating condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Start-Up Tests ' 1. Start-Up Systems Testing shall include, but not be limited to the following: , a. The Contractor shall verify that all valves (new and existing, manual and automatic) are in their proper operating position in accordance with the specific operating scenario being tested. b. The Contractor shall fill the pipes with water, in an approved , manner, taking care to allow the gradual release of air from all high points. C. The Contractor shall manually start-up and cycle each filter through its full flow range and through all operational and backwash phases. Data records shall be kept by the Contractor. ' This information shall be submitted to the Engineer for review at the end of the two (2) day test period. d. The Contractor shall demonstrate proper operation of all the flow, level and pressure sensors and all other sensors, controllers and automatic systems. The Contractor shall be ' responsible for calibrating and verifying the accuracy of all new instruments. The Contractor shall demonstrate the proper operation of all auto-shutdown features and standby power systems or devices. , e. Following the successful completion of these tests, the . Contractor shall demonstrate automatic, controlled operation of all facilities over a period of not less than 72 hours of continuous ' successful operation. f. The Contractor shall also be responsible for performing all tests , outside of those previously described as may be required by the manufacturers for all pumps and control valves. 2. Should the Contractor fail to demonstrate satisfactory performance on , the first and any subsequent attempt, he shall make all necessary alterations, adjustments, repairs and replacements. When the facility is , again ready for operation, it shall be brought on line and new tests shall be started. This procedure shall be repeated as often as necessary START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING ' 01625-8 01/07/11 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 3 until the facility has operated continuously to the satisfaction of the Engineer, for the specified test duration. The Contractor shall demonstrate proper operation of all aspects of the Control System, PLC's, Operator Interface Terminals, and all hardware and software furnished. If applicable, the Contractor shall also demonstrate the full integration of the SCADA System with the Owner's existing network. The Contractor shall make modifications to the existing HMI screens as required for a fully functional system. END OF SECTION START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625-9 01/07/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625-10 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 SECTION 01640 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance and control of installation. B. References. C. Field samples. D. Mock-up. E. Inspection and testing laboratory services. F. Manufacturers' field services and reports. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and Certificates. C. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized QUALITY CONTROL 01640-1 01/07/11 1 to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. 2 3 1.04 REFERENCES 4 5 A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Owner Bids. 6 7 B. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, 8 request clarification for Engineer before proceeding. 9 10 C. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered 11 from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any 12 reference document. 13 14 1.05 FIELD SAMPLES 15 16 A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications Sections 17 for review. 18 19 B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work. 20 21 C. Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear 22 area after field sample has been accepted by Engineer. 23 24 1.06 MOCK-UP 25 26 A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section, 27 28 B. Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage 29 devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. 30 31 C. Where mock-up is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area 32 after mock-up has been accepted by Engineer. 33 34 1.07 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 35 36 A. Owner will appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to 37 perform inspection and testing. 38 39 B. The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services 40 specified in individual specification Sections and as required by the Engineer. 41 42 C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Engineer, in 43 duplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating 44 compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. 45 46 D. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, 47 equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested. QUALITY CONTROL 01640-2 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 1. Notify Engineer and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's use. E. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the Engineer. Payment for retesting will be charged to the Contractor by deducting inspection or testing charges from the Contract Price. 1.08 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS A. Submit qualifications of observer to Engineer 30 days in advance of required observations. Observer shall be subject to approval of Engineer and Owner. B. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. C. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. D. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Engineer for review. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION QUALITY CONTROL 01640-3 01/07/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK QUALITY CONTROL 01640-4 01/07/11 1 1 1 1 1 `'`I LJ 1 1 1 1 1 i t 1 2 3 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 SECTION 01670 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. General: 1. This section covers furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and performing all work and services for furnishing, submission, processing and handling of requests for substitution and product options. See items as indicated on drawings and as specified. Any substitution or option shall be in accord with provisions of Contract Documents, and completely coordinated with work of other trades. 2. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. 3. See appropriate sections for specific items specified. See General Conditions for additional information. B. Procedure: 1. For equipment and materials that are to be listed in the proposal, observe procedures outlined in the General Conditions. 2. For products, equipment, and materials which are named in drawings or specifications for which a request for substitution is made, observe procedures outlined in these specifications. C. Costs: Cost incurred by requester in providing information, catalogs, and samples - including but not limited to labor, materials, freight postage, and transportation - are sole cost of "Requestor" with no cost assessed Owner or Engineer. 1.02 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION - GENERAL: A. Base all bids on materials, equipment and procedures specified. B. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in specifications by means of trade names and catalog numbers and/or manufacturer's names. Where this occurs, it was not intended to exclude from consideration such types of equipment and kinds of material bearing other trade names, catalog numbers and/or manufacturer's names, capable of SUBSTITUTION AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01670-1 01/07/11 1 accomplishing purpose of types of equipment or kinds of material specifically 2 indicated. 3 4 C. Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable to Owner 5 and Engineer. 6 7 D. Types of equipment, kinds of material and methods of construction, if not 8 specifically indicated must be approved in writing by Engineer and be agreed 9 upon by Owner. 10 11 E. Conditional bids will not be accepted. 12 13 1.03 SUBMISSION OF REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION: 14 15 A. Within no more than 30 days after award of the Contract, the Engineer will 16 consider requests for substitutions of products, materials, systems or other 17 items. Requests must be received by Engineer within 30 calendar days after 18 the date of Contract award. All requests for substitution shall be completed as 19 specified below. 20 21 B. Substitute items must comply with color and pattern of base specified items 22 unless specifically approved otherwise. 23 24 C. Submit two (2) copies of request for substitution. Include in request: 25 26 1. Name of product located by Drawing Number or Specification Number., 27 followed by a detail or line number the particular item(s) for which 28 request for substitution is initiated. 29 30 2. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with 31 Contract Documents. 32 33 3. For Products: 34 35 a. Product identification by schedule or tag no., including 36 manufacturer's name. 37 38 b. Manufacturer's literature, marked to indicate specific model, 39 type, size, and options to be considered: 40 41 1) Product Description 42 2) Performance and test data 43 3) Reference standards 44 45 4) Difference in power demand 5) Dimensional differences for specified unit 46 47 G. Submit samples, full size if so required. Engineer reserves right SUBSTITUTION AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01670-2 01/07/11 n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 to impound sample until physical units are installed on project for comparison purposes. All costs of furnishing and return of samples shall be paid by requester. Engineer is not responsible for loss of or damage to samples. d. Name and address of similar projects where product was used, date of installation, and field performance data on installation. 4. For construction methods: a. Detailed description of proposed method. b. Drawings illustrating methods. 5. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified. 6. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. 7. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product or method specified. 8. Include with any request a specific statement defining changes in contract time or amount. D. In making request for substitution, or in using an approved substitute item, Supplier/Manufacturer represents: 1. He has personally investigated proposed product or method, and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified, and that it will perform function for which it is intended. 2. Will provide same or better warranty for substitute item as for product or method specified. 3. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into work, to include but not be limited to the following: a. Building and structure modifications as necessary; b. Additional ancillary equipment to accommodate change; C. Piping, valving, mechanical, electrical, or instrumentation changes, and d. All other changes required for work to be complete in all respects SUBSTITUTION AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01670-3 01/07/11 1 to permit incorporation of substitution into project. 2 3 4. Waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which 4 subsequently become apparent. 5 6 E. Written acceptance or rejection of items presented for alternative 7 consideration will be given within two weeks after request is received. 8 9 10 F. In the event the acceptance of an alternate results in a change in contract price or time, or is a deviation from the Contract Documents, a change order 11 will be issued to reflect such change. In the event the acceptance of an 12 alternate does not result in a change in Contract price or time, a field order 13 shall be issued. 14 15 G. Alternates may be rejected for the following reasons: 16 17 1. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents or 18 building spaces. 19 20 2. If they are in Engineer's opinion, not equal to base product specified, or 21 will not adequately perform function for which intended. 22 23 3. If request is not initiated by the Contractor in accordance with this 24 specification section. 25 26 1.04 SUBSTITUTION DUE TO UNAVAILABILITY 27 28 A. Unavailability of specified item due to strikes, lockouts, bankruptcy, 29 discontinuance of production, proven shortage, or similar occurrences are 30 reasons for substitution after Contract award. 31 32 B. Notify Engineer in writing, as soon as condition of unavailability becomes 33 apparent; include substantiating data. Submit request for substitution ' 34 sufficiently in advance to avoid delays. 35 36 C. Submit data as required in paragraph 1.03 above. 37 38 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 39 , 40 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) 41 42 END OF SECTION SUBSTITUTION AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01670-4 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Comply with requirements stated in General Conditions and in Specifications for administrative procedures in closing out the Work. B. Electronic Shop Drawings and O&M Manuals 1. The Contractor shall furnish final approved Shop Drawings and Operations and Maintenance Data in electronic ".pdf" format for all equipment furnished under all Specification Sections. 2. The Contractor shall organize all electronic Shop Drawings and Operations and Maintenance Data by specification division and section number, and submit two (2) copies on compact disk media (CDROM). 1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. When Contractor considers the Work is substantially complete, he shall submit to the Engineer: 1. A written notice that the Work, or designated portion thereof, is substantially complete. 2. A list of items to be completed or corrected. B. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, the Engineer will make an inspection to determine the status of completion. C. Should the Engineer determine that the Work is not substantially complete: 1. The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor, in writing, giving the reasons therefore. 2. Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work, and send a second written notice of substantial completion to the Engineer. 3. The Engineer will re-inspect the Work. D. When the Engineer finds that the Work is substantially complete, he will: CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-1 01/07/11 1 1. Prepare and deliver to Owner a tentative Certificate of Substantial 2 Completion with a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected 3 4 before final payment. 5 2. After consideration of any objections made by the Owner as provided in 6 General Conditions, and when the Engineer considers the Work 7 substantially complete, he will execute and deliver to the Owner and the 8 Contractor a definite Certificate of Substantial Completion with a 9 revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected. 10 , 11 1.03 FINAL INSPECTION 12 13 A. When Contractor considers the Work is complete, he shall submit written 14 certification that: 15 16 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 17 18 2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 19 20 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 21 22 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the 23 Owner's representative and are operational. 24 25 5. Work is completed and ready for final inspection. 26 27 B. The Engineer will make an inspection to verify the status of completion with 28 reasonable promptness after receipt of such certification. 29 30 C. Should the Engineer consider that the Work is incomplete or defective: 31 32 1. The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the 33 incomplete or defective work. , 34 35 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated 36 deficiencies, and send a second written certification to the Engineer that 37 the Work is complete. 38 39 3. The Engineer will re-inspect the Work. 40 41 D. When the Engineer finds that the Work is acceptable under the Contract 42 Documents, he shall request the Contractor to make closeout submittals. 43 44 1.04 PARTIAL SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ACCEPTANCE 45 46 A. For the purpose of construction phasing and for the commencement of the 47 warranty period for equipment, the Owner shall accept Partial Substantial CONTRACT CLOSEOUT , 01700-2 01/07/11 1 Completion of process systems. Partial Substantial Completion shall be 2 allowed for a complete process system only, or combination of process 3 systems working together, and the Owner shall only consider for partial 4 substantial completion those systems as specified herein. 5 6 B. The following general requirements must be completed prior to the Owner 7 accepting partial substantial completion of a system. Owner shall accept 8 stand-alone ancillary systems for consideration of partial substantial 9 acceptance. 10 11 1. An equipment manufacturer representative shall be present for all initial 12 start-up and testing as specified in Section 01625 and all other start-up 13 and testing as required in the equipment specifications in Division 11. 14 15 2. The Contractor shall provide training of Owner personnel in the 16 operation of new equipment, according to the equipment specifications 17 outlined in Division 11. 18 19 3. Contractor shall provide Operating and Maintenance Data to the Owner 20 as required by Section 01730. 21 22 4. All electrical equipment including controls, conduit, wiring and safety 23 interlocks for each piece of equipment as shown on the Drawings must 24 be completed as outlined in Divisions 13 and 16. 25 26 5. All Control System equipment must be installed and operational for the 27 system that is being tested for partial substantial completion as outlined 28 in Divisions 13 and 16. 29 30 6. All inlet and discharge piping must be connected and tested for each 31 system that is being tested for partial substantial completion in 32 compliance with Division 01. 33 34 7. Certifications of Proper Installation shall be furnished, along with spare 35 parts, calibration certificates, and the results of all tests. 36 37 1.05 RE-INSPECTION FEES 38 39 A. Should the Engineer perform re-inspections, due to failure of the Work, to 40 comply with the claims of status of completion made by the Contractor: 41 42 1. Owner will compensate the Engineer for such additional services. 43 44 2. Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final 45 payment to the Contractor. 46 47 3. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-3 01/07/11 1 2 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO ENGINEER 3 4 A. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities. 5 6 B. Project Record Documents. 7 8 C. Operating and Maintenance Data, Instructions to Owner's Personnel. 9 10 D. Warranties and Bonds. 11 12 E. Keys and Keying Schedule. 13 14 F. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials. 15 16 G. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens. 17 18 H? Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations. 19 20 I. Contractor's Final Affidavit. 21 22 J. Lien Waivers from Subcontractors and Suppliers. 23 24 K. Consent of Surety from the bonding company. 25 26 L. Contractor's Guarantee. 27 28 1.07 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS 29 30 A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Engineer. 31 32 B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contract Sum: 33 34 1. The original Contract Sum. 35 36 2. Additions and deductions resulting from: 37 38 a. Previous Change Orders. 39 40 b. Unit Prices. 41 42 c. Deductions for uncorrected Work. 43 44 d. Penalties and Bonuses. 45 46 e. Deductions for liquidated damages. 47 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-4 01/07/11 1 f. Deductions for re-inspection payments. 16 A. Contractor shall submit the final Application for Payment in accordance with 17 procedures and requirements stated in the General Conditions. 13 14 1.08 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 15 11 C. Engineer will prepare a final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to 12 the Contract Sum, which were not previously made by Change Orders. 6 7 4. Payments. 8 9 5. Sum remaining due. 10 2 3 g. Other adjustments. 4 5 3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted. 18 19 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 20 21 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) 22 1 1 1 1 1 23 END OF SECTION CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-5 01/07/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-6 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of: 1. Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract 5. Engineer's Field Orders or written instructions 6. Approved Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples 7. Field Test Records 8. Construction Photographs, if provided 9. Detailed progress schedule 1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction. 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. 2. Provide locked cabinet of secure storage space for storage of samples. B. File documents and samples in accordance with CSI format. C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. D. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the Engineer. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-1 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 E. As a pre-requisite for monthly progress payments, the Contractor is to exhibit the currently updated "record documents" for review by the Engineer and Owner. 1.03 MARKING DEVICES A. Provide felt tip marking pens for recording information in the color code designated by the Engineer. 1.04 RECORDING A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters B. Record information concurrently with construction progress. 1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. C. Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction: 1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Denote all underground piping elevations and dimensions; all changes to piping location; horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, all referenced to permanent surface improvements. Actual installed pipe material, class, etc. 3. Locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the structure. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. 6. Details not on original Contract Documents. 7. Equipment and piping relocations. 8. Major architectural and structural changes including relocation of doors, windows, etc. 9. Architectural schedule changes according to Contractor's records and shop drawings. D. Specifications and Addenda; legibly mark each Section to record: PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-2 01/07/11 1 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each 2 product and item of equipment actually installed. 3 4 2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. 5 6 E. Shop Drawings (after final review and approval): 7 8 1. Five (5) sets of record drawings for each piece of process equipment, 9 piping, electrical and instrumentation system. 10 11 1.05 SUBMITTAL 12 13 A. At contract close-out, deliver Record Documents to the Engineer for the 14 Owner. 15 16 B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing: 17 18 1. Date, 19 20 2. Project title and number, 21 22 3. Contractor's name and address, 23 24 4. Title and number of each Record Document, and 25 26 5. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative. 27 28 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 29 30 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) 31 32 33 END SECTION PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-3 01/07/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-4 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 4p 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 SECTION 01730 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART I - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished by the Contractor. 1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in maintenance of products and in operation of equipment and systems. C. Furnish the Owner five (5) approved complete hardcopy sets of operation and maintenance data and two (2) approved complete set of operation and maintenance data in electronic "pdf' format as specified herein for the project. D. The Contractor shall organize all electronic operation and maintenance data by specification division and section number, and shall submit on compact disc (CD) media. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel: 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. 2. Familiar with requirements of this Section. 3. Skilled and technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data. 4. Skilled as draftspersons competent to prepare required Drawings. 1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. B. Format: 1. Size: 8-1/2 inches x 11-inches. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730-1 01/07/11 1 2. Paper: 20 pound minimum white, for typed pages. 2 3 3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten. 4 5 4. Drawings: 6 7 a. Provide reinforced punched binder tabs, bind in with text. 8 9 b. Reduce larger Drawings and fold to size of text pages but not 10 larger than 14-inches x 17-inches. 11 12 5. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating 13 equipment. 14 15 a. Provide typed description of product, and major component parts 16 of equipment. 17 18 b. Provide indexed tabs. 19 20 6. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING 21 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS." List: 22 23 a. Title of Project 24 25 b. Identity of separate structure as applicable. 26 27 c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. 28 29 C. Binders: 30 31 1. Commercial quality three-post binders with durable and cleanable 32 plastic covers. 33 34 2. Maximum post width: 2-inches. 35 36 3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related 37 consistent groupings. 38 39 D. Refer to Specification Section 00120 for additional submittal requirements. 40 41 1.04 CONTENT OF MANUAL 42 43 A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic 44 order. 45 46 1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone 47 number. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730-2 01/07/11 2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. 3. List, with each product, name, address and telephone number of: a. Subcontractor or installer. b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. C. Identify area of responsibility of each. d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. 4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. B. Product Data, 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. 2. Annotate each sheet to: a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed. b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation. C. Delete references to inapplicable information. C. Drawings: 1. Supplement product data with Drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. b. Control and flow diagrams. 2. Coordinate Drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. D. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: 1. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730-3 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 2. Provide logical sequence of instructions of each procedure. E. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. 1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give: a. Proper procedures in event of failure. b. Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds 1.05 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems. B. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction. 1. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. C. Two weeks prior to the schedule vendor's training, a detailed lesson plan shall be submitted to the Engineer for review that is representative of the material to be covered during the training period. PART II - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART III -- EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730-4 01/07/11 SECTION 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Compile warranties and bonds, as specified in Section III and Section V. B. Co-execute submittals when so specified. C. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. D. Submit to the Engineer for review and transmittal to Owner. 1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Assemble warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors. B. Number of original signed copies required. Two each. C. Table of Contents. Neatly typed in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for each item. 1. Product or work item. 2. Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number. 3. Scope. 4. Date of beginning warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. 5. Duration of warranty, bond or service maintenance contract. 6. Provide information for Owner's personnel: a. Proper procedure in case of failure. b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond. 7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740-1 01/07/11 1.03 WARRANTY SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. For all major pieces of equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment manufacturer. The manufacturer's warranty period shall be concurrent with the Contractor's for one (1) year, unless otherwise specified, commencing at the time of substantial completion and/or final acceptance by the Owner, whichever is later. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining certificates for equipment warranty for all major equipment that has a 1 HP motor or that has a list price of more than $1,000. The Engineer reserves the right to request warranties for. equipment not classified as major. The Contractor shall still warrant equipment not considered to be "major" in the Contractor's one-year warranty period even though certificates of warranty may not be required. C. In the event that the equipment manufacturer or supplier is unwilling to provide a one-year warranty commencing at the time of Owner acceptance, the Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer a three (3) year warranty commencing at the time of equipment delivery to the job site. The two-year warranty from the manufacturer shall not relieve the Contractor of the one-year warranty starting at the time of Owner acceptance of the equipment. 1.04 WARRANTY START DATE A. No warranty shall start until the Engineer has issued a "Notice of Substantial ' Completion". PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740-2 01107/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 SECTION 02062 REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, tools, equipment, materials, and incidentals required to remove all existing tankage, structures, equipment, pipe, fittings, valves, and appurtenances as noted on the Contract Drawings, as reasonably inferred and as required for the proper rehabilitation of the existing filters. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall not proceed with the removal of any equipment, piping, or appurtenances without specific approval of the Engineer. Any equipment, piping or appurtenances removed without proper authorization, which are necessary for the operation of the existing plant or of the new facilities, shall be replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the Contractor's expense. B. All existing tubing, insulation, hangers, and supports not required to be reused shall become the property of the Contractor immediately upon removal from their present locations. The Contractor shall remove such material from the plant site at his own expense and it shall not be reused. C. All existing valves, and other special line elements, greater than 3-inch diameter, removed and not required to be reused shall remain the property of the Owner. The Contractor shall furnish all labor and material to identify, clean, protect, crate, box and store them at the plant site or remove them from the plant site. D. Pieces of equipment weighing 150 Ibs or more shall be mounted on suitable skids before storing. E. Wherever piping is removed for disposition, adjacent pipe and headers that are to remain in service shall be blanked off or plugged and then supported or anchored in an approved manner. F. Equipment to be retained by the Owner shall be carefully removed from the present location, cleaned, and immediately stored on-site as designated by the Owner. REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT 02062-1 01/07/11 2 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 1 REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT ' 02062-2 01/07/11 G. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions against damaging the material and ' equipment to be stored and reused. The Contractor shall repair any damage resulting from his operations, as directed by and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Itemized lists of materials removed and stored shall be given to the Owner's Representative daily. A final typed itemized list shall be furnished to the Engineer in 6 copies at the completion of construction. The list shall include items, method of packaging, and ' place of storage. 3.02 EQUIPMENT TO BE RETAINED A. All equipment removed shall remain the property of the Owner unless designated otherwise by the Owner. B. If the Owner elects not to retain ownership of a certain item, the item shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the plant site at the Contractor's I expense. END OF SECTION ' SECTION 02064 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to modify, alter and/or convert existing structures as shown or specified and as required for the installation of new mechanical equipment, piping, and appurtenances. Existing piping and equipment shall be removed and dismantled as necessary for the performance of structural alterations in accordance with the requirements herein specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall cut, repair, reuse, excavate, demolish, or otherwise remove parts of the existing structures or appurtenances, as indicated on the Contract Drawings, herein specified, or necessary to permit completion of the work under this Contract. He shall dispose of surplus materials resulting from the above work in an approved manner. The work shall include all necessary cutting and bending of reinforcing steel, structural steel, or miscellaneous metal work found embedded in the existing structures. Any item called for to be removed shall be assumed to include connecting conduit, wiring and supports, unless as otherwise directed by the Engineer. B. The Contractor shall dismantle and remove all existing equipment, piping and other appurtenances required for the completion of the work. Where called for or required, the Contractor shall cut existing pipelines for the purpose of making connections thereto. Anchor bolts for equipment and structural steel removed shall be cut off one inch below the concrete surface. Surface shall be finished as specified in Specification 03740. C. At the time that a new connection is made to an existing pipeline, additional new piping, extending to and including a new valve, shall be installed. D. No existing structure, equipment, or appurtenance shall be shifted, cut, removed, or otherwise altered except with the express approval of and to the extent approved by the Engineer. E. When removing materials or portions of existing structures, and when making openings in walls and partitions, the Contractor shall take all precautions and use all necessary barriers and other protective devices so as not to damage the structures MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 02064-1 01/07/11 t beyond the limits necessary for the new work, and not to damage the structures or contents by falling or flying debris. Unless otherwise permitted, line drilling will be required in cutting existing concrete. , F. Materials and equipment removed in the course of making alterations and additions shall remain the property of the Owner, except that items not salvageable, as determined by the Engineer and the Owner, shall become the property of the Contractor to be disposed of by him off the work site at his own place of disposal and at his own cost. Operating equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, lubricated, and greased for protection during prolonged storage. G. All alterations to existing structures shall be done at such time and in such manner as will comply with the approved time schedule. So far as possible before any part of the work, is started, all tools, equipment and materials shall be assembled and made ready ' so that the work can be completed without delay. H. All workmanship and new materials involved in constructing the alterations shall conform to the General Specifications for the classes of work insofar as such specifications are applicable. All cutting of existing concrete or other material to provide suitable bonding to new , work shall be done in a manner to meet the requirements of the respective section of these Specifications covering the work. When not covered, the work shall be carried ' on in the manner and to the extent directed by the Engineer. J. Surfaces of seals visible in the completed work shall be made to match as nearly as possible the adjacent surfaces. K. Non-shrink grout shall be used for setting wall castings, sleeves, leveling pump bases, I doweling anchors into existing concrete and elsewhere as shown. L. Where necessary or required for the purpose of making connections, the Contractor ' shall cut existing pipelines/couplings in a manner to provide an approved joint. Where required, the Contractor shall weld beads, flanges, or provide restrained or unrestrained Dresser Couplings or equal, all as required. M. The Contractor shall provide flumes, hoses, piping, and other related items to divert or provide suitable plugs, bulkheads, or other means to hold back the flow of water or ' other liquids, all as required in the performance of the Work under this Contract. N. Blasting will not be permitted to complete any work under this Contract, Care shall be ' taken not to damage any part of existing buildings or foundations or outside structures. MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 02064-2 01/07/11 1 3.02 CONNECTING TO EXISTING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor shall verify exact location, material, alignment, joint, etc. of existing piping and equipment prior to making the cuts or connections called out in the Drawings. The verifications shall be performed with adequate time to correct any potential alignment or other problems prior to the actual time of connection. 3.03 CLEANING EXISTING STRUCTURES A. After dewatering and before commencing work on any tank, structure, channels, clarifier, conduit, filter cell or other structures, the Contractor shall remove and dispose of the grit and other solids remaining in such structures in a lawful manner. END SECTION MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 02064-3 01/07/11 I THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ' MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ' 02064-4 01/07/11 SECTION 03600 GROUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install grout complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, shop drawings and product data showing materials of construction and details of installation for: 1. Commercially manufactured non-shrink cementitious grout. The submittal shall include catalog cuts, technical data, storage requirements, product life, working time after mixing, temperature considerations, conformity to required ASTM standards and Material Safety Data Sheet. 2. Commercially manufactured non-shrink epoxy grout. The submittal shall include catalog cuts, technical data, storage requirements, product life, working time after mixing, temperature considerations, conformity to required ASTM standards and Material Safety Data Sheet. 3. Cement grout. The submittal shall include the type and brand of the cement, the gradation of the fine aggregate, product data on any proposed admixtures and the proposed mix of the grout, 4. Concrete grout. The submittal shall include the mix design, constituent quantities per cubic yard, the water/cement ratio, and fiber reinforcement. B. Laboratory Test Reports 1. Submit laboratory test data as requested by the Engineer. C. Certifications 1. Where applicable, certify that commercially manufactured grout products and concrete grout admixtures are suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days curing. GROUT 03600-1 01/07/11 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 D. Qualifications 1. Grout manufacturers shall submit documentation that they have at least 10 , years experience in the production and use of the proposed grouts to be supplied. , 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A, American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ' 1. ASTM C531 - Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes 2. ASTM C579 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes 3. ASTM C827 - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures , 4. ASTM C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink) ' B. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Standard (CRD) 1. CRD C-621 - Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-shrink Grout , C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards the revision in effect at the , time of bid opening shall apply. ' 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Grout manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the ' production and use of the type of grout proposed for the work. B. Pre-installation Conference , 1. Well in advance of grouting, hold a pre-installation meeting to review the ' requirements for surface preparation, mixing, placing and curing procedures for each product proposed for use. Parties concerned with grouting shall be notified of the meeting at least 10 days prior to its scheduled date. , GROUT 03600-2 01/07/11 I? 1 1 11 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 C. Services of Manufacturer's Representative 1. A qualified field technician of the non-shrink grout manufacturer, specifically trained in the installation of the products, shall attend the pre-installation conference and shall be present for the initial installation of each type of non-- shrink grout. Additional services shall also be provided, as required, to correct installation problems. D. Field Testing 1. All field testing and inspection services required shall be provided by the Owner. The Contractor shall assist in the sampling of materials and shall provide any ladders, platforms, etc, for access to the work. The methods of testing shall comply in detail with the applicable ASTM Standards. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the jobsite in original, unopened packages, clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, product identification, batch numbers and printed instructions. B. Store materials in full compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Total storage time from date of manufacture to date of installation shall be limited to 6 months or the manufacturer's recommended storage time, whichever is less. C. Material that becomes damp or otherwise unacceptable shall be immediately removed from the site and replaced with acceptable material at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Non-shrink, cement-based grouts shall be delivered as pre-blended, prepackaged mixes requiring only the addition of water. E. Non-shrink epoxy grouts shall be delivered as pre-measured, prepackaged, three component systems requiring only blending as directed by the manufacturer. 1.06 DEFINITIONS A. Non-shrink Grout: A commercially manufactured product that does not shrink in either the plastic or hardened state, is dimensionally stable in the hardened state and bonds to a clean base plate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The use of a manufacturer's name and product or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality desired. GROUT 03600-3 01/07/11 B Like materials shall be the products of one manufacturer or supplier in order to provide standardization of appearance. 2.02 MATERIALS A B C Non-shrink Cementitious Grout 1. Non-shrink cementitious grouts shall meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM C1107, Grades B or C and CRD C-621. Grouts shall be Portland cement based, contain a pre-proportioned blend of selected aggregates and shrinkage compensating agents and shall require only the addition of water. Non-shrink cementitious grouts shall not contain expansive cement or metallic particles. The grouts shall exhibit no shrinkage when tested in conformity with ASTM C827. 2. General purpose non-shrink cementitious grout shall conform to the standards stated above and shall be SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corp.; Set Grout by Master Builders, Inc.; Gilco Construction Grout by Gifford Hill & Co.; Euco NS by The Euclid Chemical Co.; NBEC Grout by U. S. Grout Corp. or equal. 3. Flowable (Precision) non-shrink cementitious grout shall conform to the standards stated above and shall be Masterflow 928 by Master Builders, Inc.; Hi-Flow Grout by the Euclid Chemical Co.; SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corp., Supreme Grout by Gifford Hill & Co.; Five Star Grout by U. S. Grout Corp. or equal. Non-shrink Epoxy Grout 1. Non-shrink epoxy-based grout shall be a pre-proportioned, three component, 100 percent solids system consisting of epoxy resin, hardener, and blended aggregate. It shall have a compressive strength of 14,000 psi in 7 days when tested in conformity with ASTM D695 and have a maximum thermal expansion of 30 x 10-6 when tested in conformity with ASTM C531. The grout shall be Ceilcote 648 CP by Master Builders Inc.; Five Star Epoxy Grout by U.S. Grout Corp.; Sikadur 42 Grout-Pak by Sika Corp.; High Strength Epoxy Grout by the Euclid Chemical Co. or equal. Cement Grout 1. Cement grouts shall be a mixture of one part portland cement conforming to ASTM C150, Types I, II, or III and 1 to 2 parts sand conforming to ASTM C33 with sufficient water to place the grout. The water content shall be sufficient to impart workability to the grout but not to the degree that it will allow the grout to flow. GROUT 03600-4 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 D. Concrete Grout 1. Concrete grout shall proportioned with cement, [pozzalan,] coarse and fine aggregates, water, water reducer and air entraining agent to produce a mix having an average strength of 2900 psi at 28 days, or 2500 psi nominal strength. Coarse aggregate size shall be [3/8] [1/2]-in maximum. Slump should not exceed 5-in and should be as low as practical yet still retain sufficient workability. 2. Synthetic reinforcing fibers shall be added to the concrete grout mix at the rate of 1.5 Ibs of fibers per cubic yard of grout. Fibers shall be added from the manufacturer's premeasured bags and according to the manufacturer's recommendations in a manner that will ensure complete dispersion of the fiber bundles as single monofilaments within the concrete grout. E. Water 1. Potable water, free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious substances. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Grout shall be placed over cured concrete which has attained its full design strength unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. B. Concrete surfaces to receive grout shall be clean and sound; free of ice, frost, dirt, grease, oil, curing compounds, laitance and paints and free of all loose material or foreign matter that may affect the bond or performance of the grout. C. Roughen concrete surfaces by chipping, sandblasting, or other mechanical means to ensure bond of the grout to the concrete. Remove loose or broken concrete. Irregular voids or projecting coarse aggregate need not be removed if they are sound, free of laitance and firmly embedded into the parent concrete. 1. Air compressors used to clean surfaces in contact with grout shall be the oil- less type or equipped with an oil trap in the air line to prevent oil from being blown onto the surface. D. Remove all loose rust, oil or other deleterious substances from metal embedments or bottom of base plates prior to the installation of the grout. E. Concrete surfaces shall be washed clean and then kept moist for at least 24 hours GROUT 03600-5 01/07/11 I 1 1 prior to the placement of cementitious or cement grout. Saturation may be achieved 2 3 by covering the concrete with saturated burlap bags, use of a soaker hose, flooding the surface, or other method acceptable to the Engineer. Upon completion of the 24 hour ' 4 period, visible water shall be removed from the surface prior to grouting. The use of an 5 adhesive bonding agent in lieu of surface saturation shall only be used when approved 6 by the Engineer for each specific location of grout installation. 7 8 F. Epoxy-based grouts do not require the saturation of the concrete substrate. Surfaces 9 in contact with epoxy grout shall be completely dry before grouting. , 10 11 G. Construct grout forms or other leak-proof containment as required. Forms shall be 12 lined or coated with release agents recommended by the grout manufacturer. Forms ' 13 shall be of adequate strength, securely anchored in place and shored to resist the 14 forces imposed by the grout and its placement. 15 , 16 1. Forms for epoxy grout shall be designed to allow the formation of a hydraulic 17 head and shall have chamfer strips built into forms. 18 19 H. Level and align the structural or equipment bearing plates in accordance with the 20 structural requirements and the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer. ' 21 22 I. Equipment shall be supported during alignment and installation of grout by shims, 23 wedges, blocks or other approved means. The shims, wedges and blocking devices 24 shall be prevented from bonding to the grout by appropriate bond breaking coatings 25 and removed after grouting unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 26 , 27 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL 28 29 A. Mix, apply and cure products in strict compliance with the manufacturer's , 30 recommendations and this Section. 31 32 B. Have sufficient manpower and equipment available for rapid and continuous mixing ' 33 and placing. Keep all necessary tools and materials ready and close at hand. 34 35 C. Maintain temperatures of the foundation plate, supporting concrete, and grout between ' 36 40 and 90 degrees F during grouting and for at least 24 hours thereafter or as 37 recommended by the grout manufacturer, whichever is longer. Take precautions to 38 minimize differential heating or cooling of base plates and grout during the curing ' 39 period. 40 41 D. Take special precautions for hot weather or cold weather grouting as recommended by ' 42 the manufacturer when ambient temperatures and/or the temperature of the materials 43 in contact with the grout are outside of the 60 and 90 degrees F range. 44 , 45 E. Install grout in a manner that will preserve the isolation between the elements on either GROUT 03600-6 01/07/11 1 1 r-7 L 11 [l 1 1 side of the joint where grout is placed in the vicinity of an expansion or control joint. 2 3 F. Reflect all existing underlying expansion, control and construction joints through the 4 grout. 5 6 3.03 INS TALLATION - CEMENT GROUTS AND NONSHRINK CEMENTITIOUS GROUTS 7 8 A. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not add cement, sand, 9 pea gravel or admixtures without prior approval by the Engineer. 10 11 B. Avoid mixing by hand. Mixing in a mortar mixer (with moving blades) is recommended. 12 Pre-wet the mixer and empty excess water. Add premeasured amount of water for 13 mixing, followed by the grout. Begin with the minimum amount of water recommended 14 by the manufacturer and then add the minimum additional water required to obtain 15 workability. Do not exceed the manufacturer's maximum recommended water content. 16 17 C. Placements greater than 3-in in depth shall include the addition of clean, washed pea 18 gravel to the grout mix when approved by the manufacturer. Comply with the 19 manufacturer's recommendations for the size and amount of aggregate to be added. 20 21 D Place grout into the designated areas in a manner that will avoid segregation or 22 entrapment of air. Do not vibrate grout to release air or to consolidate the material. 23 Placement should proceed in a manner that will ensure the filling of all spaces and 24 provide full contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces. Provide grout holes as 25 necessary. 26 27 E. Place grout rapidly and continuously to avoid cold joints. Do not place cement grouts 28 in layers. Do not add additional water to the mix (retemper) after initial stiffening. 29 30 F. Just before the grout reaches its final set, cut back the grout to the substrate at a 45 31 degree angle from the lower edge of bearing plate unless otherwise approved by the 32 Engineer. Finish this surface with a wood float (brush) finish. 33 34 G. Begin curing immediately after form removal, cutback, and finishing. Keep grout moist 35 and within its recommended placement temperature range for at least 24 hours after 36 placement or longer if recommended by the manufacturer. Saturate the grout surface 37 by use of wet burlap, soaker hoses, ponding or other approved means. Provide 38 sunshades as necessary. If drying winds inhibit the ability of a given curing method to 39 keep grout moist, erect wind breaks until wind is no longer a problem or curing is 40 finished. 41 42 3.04 INSTALLATION - NONSHRINK EPOXY GROUTS 43 44 A. Mix in accordance with the procedures recommended by the manufacturer. Do not 45 vary the ratio of components or add solvent to change the consistency of the grout mix. GROUT 03600-7 01/07/11 1 Do not overmix. Mix full batches only to maintain proper proportions of resin , 2 hardener and aggregate- 3 4 B. Monitor ambient weather conditions and contact the grout manufacturer for special 5 placement procedures to be used for temperatures below 60 or above 90 degrees F. 6 7 C. Place grout into the designated areas in a manner which will avoid trapping air. 8 Placement methods shall ensure the filling of all spaces and provide full contact 9 between the grout and adjoining surfaces. Provide grout holes as necessary. , 10 11 D. Minimize "shoulder" length (extension of grout horizontally beyond base plate). In no 12 case shall the shoulder length of the grout be greater than the grout thickness. , 13 14 E. Finish grout by puddling to cover all aggregate and provide a smooth finish. Break 15 bubbles and smooth the top surface of the grout in conformity with the manufacturer's ' 16 recommendations. 17 18 F. Epoxy grouts are self curing and do not require the application of water. Maintain the ' 19 formed grout within its recommended placement temperature range for at least 24 20 hours after placing, or longer if recommended by the manufacturer. ' 21 22 3.05 INSTALLATION - CONCRETE GROUT 23 ' 24 A. Screed underlying concrete to the grade shown on the Drawings. Provide the surface 25 with a broomed finish, aligned to drain. Protect and keep the surface clean until 26 placement of concrete grout. , 27 28 B. Remove the debris and clean the surface by sweeping and vacuuming of all dirt and 29 other foreign materials. Wash the tank slab using a strong jet of water. Flushing of , 30 debris into tank drain lines will not be permitted. 31 32 C. Saturate the concrete surface for at least 24 hours prior to placement of the concrete ' 33 grout. Saturation may be maintained by ponding, by the use or soaker hoses, or by 34 other methods acceptable to the Engineer. Remove excess water just prior to 35 placement of the concrete grout. Place a cement slurry immediately ahead of the ' 36 concrete grout so that the slurry is moist when the grout is placed. Work the slurry 37 over the surface with a broom until it is coated with approximately 1/16 to 1/8-in thick 38 cement paste. A bonding grout composed of 1 part portland cement, 1.5 parts fine , 39 sand, an approved bonding admixture and water, mixed to achieve the consistency of 40 thick paint, may be substituted for the cement slurry. 41 ' 42 D. Place concrete grout to final grade using the scraper mechanism as a guide for surface 43 elevation and to ensure high and low spots are eliminated. Unless specifically 44 approved by the equipment manufacturer, mechanical scraper mechanisms shall not , 45 be used as a finishing machine or screed. GROUT 03600-8 01/07/11 1 ' 2 E. Provide grout control joints as indicated on the Drawings. 3 4 F. Finish and cure the concrete grout as specified for cast-in-place concrete. 6 106 SCHEDULE 5 S A. The following list indicates where the particular types of grout are to be used- 9 10 1. General purpose non-shrink cementitious grout: Use at all locations where non 11 shrink grout is called for on the plans except for base plates greater in area than 12 3-ft wide by 3-ft long and except for the setting of anchor rods, anchor bolts or 13 reinforcing steel in concrete. i] 1 1 2. Flowable non-shrink cementitious grout: Use under all base plates greater in area than 3-ft by 3-ft. Use at all locations indicated to receive flowable non- shrink grout by the Drawings. The Contractor, at his/her option and convenience, may also substitute flowable non-shrink grout for general purpose non-shrink cementitious grout. 3. Non-shrink epoxy grout: Use for the setting of anchor rods, anchor bolts and reinforcing steel in concrete and for all locations specifically indicated to receive epoxy grout. 4. Cement grout: Cement grout may be used for grouting of incidental base plates for structural and miscellaneous steel such as post base plates for platforms, base plates for beams, etc. It shall not be used when nonshrink grout is specifically called for on the Drawings or for grouting of primary structural steel members such as columns and girders. 5. Concrete grout: Use for overlaying the base concrete under scraper mechanisms of clarifiers to allow more control in placing the surface grade. END OF SECTION GROUT 03600-9 01/07/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 t GROUT 03600-10 01/07/11 1 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 ' 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ' 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 ' 40 41 42 43 44 45 ' 46 47 1 48 SECTION 03740 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and cut, remove, repair or otherwise modify parts of existing concrete structures or appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Work under this Section shall also include bonding new concrete to existing concrete. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, a Schedule of Demolition and the detailed methods of demolition to be used at each location. B. Submit manufacturer's technical literature on all product brands proposed for use, to the Engineer for review. The submittal shall include the manufacturer's installation and/or application instructions. C. When substitutions for acceptable brands of materials specified herein are proposed, submit brochures and technical data of the proposed substitutions to the Engineer for approval before delivery to the project. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. 2. ASTM C882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Sheer. 1 ASTM C883 - Standard Test Method for Effective Shrinkage of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with Concrete. 4. ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. 5. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 6. ASTM D695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. 7. ASTM D732 - Standard Test Method for Shear Strength of Plastics by Punch Tool. MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740-1 01/07/11 1 1 2 8. ASTM D790 -Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced 3 and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 4 5 B, Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the 6 time of bid opening shall apply. 7 8 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE , 9 10 A. No existing structure or concrete shall be shifted, cut, removed, or otherwise altered 11 until authorization is given by the Engineer. ' 12 13 B. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when making openings 14 in existing structures, all precautions shall be taken and all necessary barriers, shoring 15 and bracing and other protective devices shall be erected to prevent damage to the 16 structures beyond the limits necessary for the new work, protect personnel, control 17 dust and to prevent damage to the structures or contents by falling or flying debris. 18 Unless otherwise permitted, shown or specified, line drilling will be required in cutting 19 existing concrete. 20 21 C, Manufacturer Qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified products shall have a 22 minimum of 10 years experience in the manufacture of such products and shall have 23 an ongoing program of training, certifying and technically supporting the Contractor's ' 24 personnel. 25 26 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 27 28 A. Deliver the specified products in original, unopened containers with the manufacturer's 29 name, labels, product identification and batch numbers. , 30 31 B. Store and condition the specified product as recommended by the manufacturer. 32 ' 33 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 34 35 2.01 MATERIALS 36 37 38 A. General , 39 1. Materials shall comply with this Section and any state or local regulations. 40 41 B. Epoxy Bonding Agent , 42 43 1. General 44 , 45 a. The epoxy bonding agent shall be a two-component, solvent-free, 46 asbestos-free moisture insensitive epoxy resin material used to bond 47 plastic concrete to hardened concrete complying with the requirements , 48 of ASTM C881, Type II and the additional requirements specified herein. 49 ' MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740-2 01/07/11 ' 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 ' 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 ' 37 38 39 r 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 1 48 2 Material a. Properties of the cured material: 1) Compressive Strength (ASTM D695): 8500 psi minimum at 28 days. 2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 4000 psi minimum at 14 days. 3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture): 6,300 psi minimum at 14 days. 4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 5000 psi minimum at 14 days. 5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570 - 2 hour boil): One percent maximum at 14 days. 6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882) Hardened to Plastic: 1500 psi minimum at 14 days moist cure. 7) Effective Shrinkage (ASTM C883): Passes Test. 8) Color: Gray. 3 Approved manufacturer's include: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ - Sikadur 32, Hi-Mad; Master Builder's, Cleveland, OH - Concresive Liquid (LPL) or equal. C. Epoxy Paste 1. General a_ Epoxy Paste shall be a two-component, solvent-free, asbestos free, moisture insensitive epoxy resin material used to bond dissimilar materials to concrete such as setting railing posts, dowels, anchor bolts and all-threads into hardened concrete and shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C881, Type I, Grade 3 and the additional requirements specified herein. It may also be used to patch existing surfaces where the glue line is 1/8-in or less.. 2. Material a. Properties of the cured material: 1) Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi minimum at 28 days. 2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 3,000 psi minimum at 14 days. Elongation at Break - 0.3 percent minimum. MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740-3 01/07/11 1 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture): 3,700 psi minimum at 14 days. 4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 2,800 psi minimum at 14 days. 5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570): 1.0 percent maximum at 7 I days. 6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,000 psi at 14 days moist cure 7) Color: Concrete grey. 3. Approved manufacturers include: a. Overhead applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ - Sikadur Hi-mod LV 31; Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH - Concresive 1438 or equal. b. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, N.J. - Sikadur Hi-mod LV 32; Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH - Concresive 1438 or equal. D. Non-Shrink Precision Cement Grout, Non-Shrink Cement Grout, Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout and Polymer Modified mortar are included in Section 03600 GROUT. E. Adhesive Capsule type anchor system shall be equal to the HVA adhesive Anchoring System by Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK. The capsule shall consist of a sealed glass capsule containing premeasured amounts of a polyester or vinylester resin, quartz sand aggregate and a hardener contained in a separate vial within the capsule. F. Acrylic Latex Bonding Agent G. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive 1. General a. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive shall be a two-component, solvent-free, moisture insensitive epoxy resin material suitable for crack grouting by injection or gravity feed. It shall be formulated for the specific size of opening or crack being injected. b. All concrete surfaces containing potable water or water to be treated for potable use that are repaired by the epoxy adhesive injection system shall be coated with an acceptable epoxy coating approved by the FDA for use in contact with potable water. MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740-4 01/07/11 1 2. Material a. Properties of the cured material 1) Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi minimum at 28 days. 2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 5,300 psi minimum at 14 days. Elongation at Break - 2 to 5 percent. 3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture): 12,000 psi minimum at 14 days (gravity); 4,600 psi minimum at 14 days (injection) 4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 3,700 psi minimum at 14 days. 5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570 - 2 hour boil): 1.5 percent maximum at 7 days. 6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,400 psi at 2 days dry; 2,000 psi at 14 days dry plus 12 days moist. 7) Effective Shrinkage (ASTM 883): Passes Test. 1 Approved manufacturers include: a. For standard applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ - Sikadur Hi-Mod; Master Builders Inc., Cleveland, OH - Concressive 1380 or equal. b. For very thin applications; Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ - Sikadur Hi-Mod LV; Master Builders Inc., Cleveland, OH - Concressive 1468 or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Cut, repair, reuse, demolish, excavate or otherwise modify parts of the existing structures or appurtenances, as indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, or necessary to permit completion of the Work. Finishes, joints, reinforcements, sealants, etc, are specified in respective Sections. All work shall comply with other requirements of this of Section and as shown on the Drawings. B. All commercial products specified in this Section shall be stored, mixed and applied in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740-5 01/07/11 1 C. In all cases where concrete is repaired in the vicinity of an expansion joint or control 2 joint the repairs shall be made to preserve the isolation between components on either 3 side of the joint. 4 , 5 D. When drilling holes for dowels/bolts at new or existing concrete, drilling shall stop if 6 rebar is encountered. As approved by the Engineer, the hole location shall be 7 relocated to avoid rebar. Rebar shall not be cut without prior approval by the Engineer. 8 Where possible, rebar locations shall be identified prior to drilling using "rebar 9 locators" so that drilled hole locations may be adjusted to avoid rebar interference. 10 11 3.02 CONCRETE REMOVAL 12 13 A. Concrete designated to be removed to specific limits as shown on the Drawings or 14 directed by the Engineer, shall be done by line drilling at limits followed by chipping or 15 jack-hammering as appropriate in areas where concrete is to be taken out. Remove 16 concrete in such a manner that surrounding concrete or existing reinforcing to be left in 17 place and existing in place equipment is not damaged. Saw-cutting at limits of , 18 concrete to be removed shall only be done if indicated on the Drawings, or after 19 obtaining written approval from the Engineer. 20 21 B. Where existing reinforcing is exposed due to saw cutting/core drilling and no new 22 material is to be placed on the saw-cut surface, a coating or surface treatment of 23 epoxy paste shall be applied to the entire cut surface to a thickness of 1/4-in. 24 25 C. In all cases where the joint between new concrete or grout and existing concrete will 26 be exposed in the finished work, except as otherwise shown or specified, the edge of 27 concrete removal shall be a 1-in deep saw cut on each exposed surface of the existing 28 concrete. 29 , 30 D. Concrete specified to be left in place that is damaged shall be repaired by approved 31 means to the satisfaction of the Engineer. ' 32 33 E. The Engineer may from time to time direct the Contractor to make additional repairs to 34 existing concrete. These repairs shall be made as specified or by such other methods ' 35 as may be appropriate. 36 37 3.03 CONNECTION SURFACE PREPARATION 38 , 39 A. Connection surfaces shall be prepared as specified below for concrete areas requiring 40 patching, repairs or modifications as shown on the Drawings, specified herein, or as 41 directed by the Engineer. 42 43 B. Remove all deteriorated materials, dirt, oil, grease, and all other bond inhibiting 44 materials from the surface by dry mechanical means, i.e. - sandblasting, grinding, etc, 45 as approved by the Engineer. Be sure the areas are not less than 1/2-in in depth. 46 Irregular voids or surface stones need not be removed if they are sound, free of 47 laitance, and firmly embedded into parent concrete, subject to the Engineer's final 48 inspection. 49 ' MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740-6 01/07/11 , 1 C. If reinforcing steel is exposed, it must be mechanically cleaned to remove all 2 contaminants, rust, etc, as approved by the Engineer. If half of the diameter of the 3 reinforcing steel is exposed, chip out behind the steel. The distance chipped behind 4 the steel shall be a minimum of 1/2-in. Reinforcing to be saved shall not be damaged 5 during the demolition operation. 6 7 D. Reinforcing from existing demolished concrete which is shown to be incorporated in 8 new concrete shall be cleaned by mechanical means to remove all loose material and 9 products of corrosion before proceeding with the repair. It shall be cut, bent or lapped 10 to new reinforcing as shown on the Drawings and provided with 1-in minimum cover all 11 around. 12 13 E. The following are specific concrete surface preparation "methods" to be used where 14 called for on the Drawings, specified herein or as directed by the Engineer. 15 ' 16 1. Method A: After the existing concrete surface at connection has been 17 roughened and cleaned, thoroughly moisten the existing surface with water. 18 Brush on a 1/16-in layer of cement and water mixed to the consistency of a 19 heavy paste. Immediately after application of cement paste, place new 20 concrete or grout mixture as detailed on the Drawings. 22 2. Method B: After the existing concrete surface has been roughened and 23 cleaned, apply epoxy bonding agent at connection surface. The field 24 preparation and application of the epoxy bonding agent shall comply strictly with 25 the manufacturer's recommendations. Place new concrete or grout mixture to 26 limits shown on the Drawings within time constraints recommended by the M 27 28 manufacturer to ensure bond. 29 3. Method C: Drill a hole 1/4-in larger than the diameter of the dowel. The hole 30 31 shall be blown clear of loose particles and dust just prior to installing epoxy. The drilled hole shall first be filled with epoxy paste and dowels/bolts shall be 32 buttered with paste and then inserted by tapping. Unless otherwise shown on 33 34 the Drawings, deformed bars shall be drilled and set to a depth of ten bar diameters and smooth bars shall be drilled and set to a depth of fifteen bar 35 diameters. If not noted on the Drawings, the Engineer will provide details 36 37 regarding the size and spacing of dowels. 38 4. Method D: Combination of Method B and C. 1) Z) 40 5. Method E: Capsule anchor system shall be set in existing concrete by drilling 41 holes to the required depth to develop the full tensile and shear strengths of the 42 anchor material being used. The anchor bolts system shall be installed per the 43 manufacturer's recommendation in holes sized as required. The anchor stud 44 bolt, rebar or other embedment item shall be tipped with a double 45 degree 45 chamfered point, securely fastened into the chuck of all rotary percussion 46 hammer drill and drilled into the capsule filled hole. The anchor may be 47 installed in horizontal, vertical and overhead positions. ' 48 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740-7 01/07/11 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 3.04 GROUTING ' A. Grouting shall be as specified in Section 03600- 3.05 CRACK REPAIR A. Cracks on horizontal surfaces shall be repaired by gravity feeding crack sealant into cracks per manufacturer's recommendations. If cracks are less than 1/16-in in thickness they shall be pressure injected. B. Cracks on vertical surfaces shall be repaired by pressure injecting crack sealant through valves sealed to surface with crack repair epoxy adhesive per manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION ' 1 ' MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740-8 01/07/11 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 SECTION 06600 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section includes all Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Products and Fabrications, including but not limited to: 1. FRP Weir Plates 2. FRP Filter Inlet Channel Overflow Duct 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as required for the provision and proper installation of all of the FRP Products as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. All anchor bolts, gaskets, sealants, and other accessories and appurtenances, required for a complete and operating installations shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. B. ANSI/AWWA F101 - Contact-Molded, Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic Wash Troughs and Launders C. ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. D. ASTM D 695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics E. ASTM D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All FRP Products and Fabrications shall be supplied by an experienced firm who has continually engaged in the manufacture and/or fabrication of fiberglass reinforced plastics. Firms not listed in this specification must clearly document a minimum of five years experience with similar projects of equal scope or design. B. The Contractor shall assure that all field dimensions are taken accurately and communicated properly to the FRP Fabricator, that other trades will not affect a proper installation of the FRP, and that all manufacturer's instructions and recommendations are followed. FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600-1 01/07/11 1 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 2 ' 3 A. All fabrication shall comply with OSHA - 29 CFR as it pertains to worker safety and 4 walking-working surfaces for stairs, ladders, handrail, and platforms. 5 6 1.06 SUBMITTALS 7 ' 8 A. Submit eight (8) sets of complete shop drawings and product data for all FRP materials 9 and fabrications as required by this scope of work. 10 11 B. Product data: 12 13 1. Manufacturers catalog data with load and deflection charts for all FRP Gratings. 14 15 2. Manufacturers catalog data for ail FRP Structural Shapes. 16 17 3. Manufacturers 6-inch square samples of FRP laminate of the same 18 construction, thickness, and color as the structural item. 19 , 20 4. Test results of FRP laminate. 21 22 5. Installation instructions and manufacturer certification that materials comply with , 23 specified requirements and are suitable for the intended application. 24 25 C. Shop drawings: , 26 27 1. Shop drawings shall show all FRP materials as required and include all 28 dimensions, connections, fasteners, structural supports, adjustments, openings, 29 anchors, tolerances, assembly and installation details as required. 30 31 PART 2 -- PRODUCTS , 32 33 34 2.01 GENERAL 35 A. All FRP materials shall be manufactured with Vinylester, with chemical formulations as 36 necessary to provide the corrosion resistance, strength and other physical properties 37 as required. 38 39 B. All structural shapes shall be constructed of continuous strand roving, continuous 40 transverse mat, and synthetic surface veil, and shall include ultraviolet (UV) inhibitors. ' 41 42 C. All structural grating & shapes shall be flame retardant per ASTM E-84 Class 1 Flame 43 Spread equal to or less than 25. 44 45 D. After fabrication of FRP, all cuts, holes, and abrasion shall be sealed according to 46 MANUFACTURER'S instructions to prevent corrosion. , 47 48 ' FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600-2 01/07/11 ' t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 2.02 FRP WEIR PLATES A. Except for bolts and hardware specified herein scum baffles and supports shall be. All weir plates, weir washers, weir splice plates, and support brackets shall be polyester plastic resin, reinforced with glass fiber molded to produce uniform smooth surfaces. B. The glass content of the finished laminate shall not be less than 30% and not more than 32% using Type E silane glass with chrome or silane finish. Final laminate thickness shall be within 10% of nominal specified thickness. C. The surface shall be resin rich, free of voids and porosity, without dry spots, crazes or unreinforced areas and shall provide for increased corrosion resistance and UV protection. All machines or cut edges shall be sealed with resin. The weirs shall be green or white in color. D. Ultraviolet resistance is required in all laminates. Surfacing veil is required on all surfaces to increase chemical resistance and provide additional uv absorption. E. The weir plates, splice plates and weir washers shall be 1/4" thick plastic laminate. Oversized mounting holes in the weir plates shall be provided for vertical and horizontal alignment of at least 2" with 5" diameter FRP weir washers to cover the holes. Cut ends of non-standard lengths shall be sealed with resin. F Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Laminate Physical Properties: Method Test Tensile Strength Flexural Strength Flexural Modulus Barcol Hardness Water Absorption Min. Value 24,000 psi 25,0006psi 1.4 x 10 psi 40 0.2% ASTM D-638 ASTM D-790 ASTM D-790 ASTM D-2583 ASTM D-570 H J onstruction shall comply with all requirements of ANSI/AWWA/NSF standards listed above, and manufacturer shall provide proof of such certification. Straight weirs shall be cut from a flat sheet. Weir notch configuration and dimensions shall be identical to the original weirs. Weir plates shall be as manufactured by Siemens, Nefco Inc., Warminster Fiberglass, Augusta Fiberglass, or approved equal. 2.03 FRP FILTER INLET CHANNEL OVERFLOW DUCT A. Except for bolts and hardware specified herein, supports and duct shall be polyester plastic resin, reinforced with glass fiber. All splice plates and support brackets shall be fiberglass reinforced plastic molded to produce uniform smooth surfaces. FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600-3 01/07/11 B. The glass content of the finished laminate shall not be less than 30% and not more ' than 32% using Type E silane glass with chrome or silane finish. Final laminate thickness shall be within 10% of nominal specified thickness. C. The surface shall be resin rich, free of voids and porosity, without dry spots, crazes or unreinforced areas and shall provide for increased corrosion resistance and UV , protection. All machines or cut edges shall be sealed with resin. The weirs and scum baffles shall be green or white in color. D. Ultraviolet resistance is required in all laminates. Surfacing veil is required on all surfaces to increase chemical resistance and provide additional uv absorption. E. Overflow duct panels and splice plates shall be 1/4" thick hand layed or contract molded FRP reinforced as required. Flanges shall be/2thick. The overflow duct shall be a 2-piece slip fit design with the top piece flange mounted to the overflow box floor. The bottom piece shall mount to the floor in the pipe gallery. F. The top piece shall be (nominal) 18" ID x 40" ID x 4' overall length with a 4"wide mounting flange at the top. The bottom piece,shall be (nominal) 18.75" X 40.75" x 9' overall length with a 4" wide mounting flange attached approximately 10" above the bottom. The top piece shall be constructed to fit inside the bottom piece with approximately 12" of overlap and 1/4" clearance in the slip fit area. The Contractor shall verify all measurements prior to submitting shop drawings. G. Expansion anchors, nuts, bolts, washers and other hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. H. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Laminate Physical Properties: Method Test Min. Value ASTM D-638 Tensile Strength 24,000 psi ASTM D-790 Flexural Strength 25,0006psi ASTM D-790 Flexural Modulus 1.4 x 10 psi ASTM D-2583 Barcol Hardness 40 ASTM D-570 Water Absorption 0.2% 40 onstruction shall comply with all requirements of ANSI/AWWA/NSF standards listed 41 above, and manufacturer shall provide proof of such certification. 42 43 J. Mounting holes shall be spaced as shown on the drawings. 44 45 K. The Overflow Duct shall be as manufactured by Augusta Fiberglass, Nefco Inc., 46 Warminster Fiberglass, or approved equal. 47 48 L. The new overflow duct shall be painted white to match the existing overflow duct. 49 50 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600-4 01/07/11 J 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Upon receipt of material at job site, the Contractor shall inspect all materials for shipping damage. Any damage is to be noted on the shipping receipt / packing list and reported promptly to the shipper. 3.02 HANDLING AND STORAGE A_ Handle all FRP materials with reasonable care to prevent damage. Use shipping pallets to move material. Do not drag FRP materials. B. If FRP materials are not to be installed immediately, then store to prevent twisting, bending, breaking, or damage of any kind. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Installing contractor to coordinate and verify that other construction trades and materials have been installed per the contract drawings, and, that they are accurate in location, alignment, elevation, and are plumb and level B. Install FRP materials in accordance with the installation drawings and instructions supplied by the FRP Supplier. C. Install materials accurately in location and elevation, level, and plumb. Field fabricate as necessary for accurate fit. D. All field cuts, holes or abrasions must be sealed with Manufacturer's sealing resin according to Manufacturers instructions to prevent corrosion. E. If the Work requires the Contractor to perform additional tasks that may damage the installed FRP materials, the Contractor shall be responsible for covering the FRP materials with plywood, or other suitable protective material. END OF SECTION FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600-5 01107/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK I FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600-6 01/07/11 , 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 f] SECTION 09865 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the surface preparation and application of shop primers necessary to complete this Contract in its entirety. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer for review, shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and data on the proposed primers and detailed surface preparation, application procedures and dry mil thickness. B. Submit representative physical samples of the proposed primers, if required by the Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Submerged Services: 1. Shop primer for ferrous metals that will be submerged or that are subject to splash action or that are specified to be considered submerged service, shall be sprayed with one coat of Tnemec Series 66 at 3.0-5.0 mils (D.F.T.), PPG Pitt- Guard Epoxy Coating 97-145 at 4.0-6.0 mils (D.F.T.), Sherwin Williams Galavapac at 2.5-3.5 mils (D.F.T.), or approved equal. 2. Voids and bugholes in concrete surfaces shall be filled with Tnemec Series 218 (up to 1/4" deep) or Tnemec Series 219 (1/4" to 1 1/2" deep) or approved equal recommended by manufacturer of approved paint system. B. Non-submerged Services: 1 1. Shop primer for ferrous metals other than those covered by Paragraph 2.01A shall be sprayed with one coat of Tnemec Series 66 Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94- 109 (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.), Sherwin Williams Galavapac at 2.5-3.5 mils (D.F.T.), or approved equal. C. Non-primed Surfaces- 1 . Gears, bearings surfaces, and other similar surfaces that are obviously not to .be painted shall be given a heavy shop coat of grease or other suitable SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING 09865-1 01/07/11 1 rust-resistant coating. This coating shall be maintained as necessary to prevent 2 corrosion during all periods of storage and erection and shall be satisfactory to 3 the Engineer up to the time of the final acceptance test. 4 5 D. Compatibility of Coating Systems: 6 7 1. Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the 8 manufacturer to be compatible with the corresponding primers and finish coats 9 specified in Section 09900 for use in the field and that are recommended for 10 use together. , 11 12 PART 3 - EXECUTION 13 14 3.01 APPLICATION 15 16 A. Surface Preparation and Priming: ' 17 18 1. Nonsubmerged components scheduled for priming, as defined above, shall be 19 sandblasted clean in accordance with SSPC-SP-6, Commercial Grade, A 20 immediately prior to priming. Submerged components scheduled for priming, 21 as defined above, shall be sandblasted clean in accordance with SSPC-SP-10 22 Near-White, immediately prior to priming. 23 24 2. Surfaces shall be dry and free of dust, oil, grease, dirt, rust, loose mill scale, 25 and other foreign material before priming. Concrete surfaces shall be prepared , 26 in accordance with ICRI CSP 4-6. 27 28 3. Shop prime in accordance with approved paint manufacturer's 29 recommendations. 30 31 4. Priming shall follow sandblasting before any evidence of corrosion has occurred 32 and within 24 hours. 33 34 5. Allow all new concrete to cure for a minimum of 28 days. Test for moisture by ' 35 plastic film tape down test (ASTM D4263). 36 37 38 END OF SECTION SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING 09865--2 01/07/11 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 ' 48 49 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work of this section consists of furnishing all materials, labor, equipment and incidentals required and performing all the painting necessary to complete this Contract in its entirety. B. It is the intent of these Specifications to paint all concrete where scheduled, exposed miscellaneous metal, pipe, fittings, supports, valves, equipment and all other work obviously required to be painted unless otherwise specified. Minor items omitted in the schedule of work shall be included in the work of this Section where they come within the general intent of the Specifications as stated herein. C. The following surfaces or items are not required to be painted: 1. Portions of metal, other than aluminum, embedded in concrete. This does not apply to the back face of items mounted to concrete or masonry surfaces that shall be painted before erection. Aluminum to be embedded in or in contact with concrete or masonry shall be coated to prevent electrolysis. 2. Stainless steel. 3. Fencing 4. Concealed surfaces of pipe or crawl spaces. 5. Acoustical ceilings. 6. Tile. 7. Fiberglass other than piping. 8. Packing glands and other adjustable parts and nameplates of mechanical equipment. 9. Electrical switchgear, motor control centers, lighting and power panels, and control panels. 10. Polyethylene chemical storage tanks. 1.02 REFERENCES A.... Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) PAINTING 09900-1 01/07/11 1 1 1. SSPC-SP--1 through SSPC-SP-10 Surface Preparation Specifications 2 1 3 B. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) 4 5 A. ICRI CSP - 3 through ICRI CSP - 6 Concrete Surface Preparation ' 6 Standards. 7 8 1.03 SUBMITTALS 9 10 A. Submit to the Engineer for review in accordance with the General Conditions, shop 11 drawings, working drawings and product data including manufacturer's specifications 12 and data on the proposed paint systems and detailed surface preparation, application 13 procedures and dry film thickness. 14 15 B. Submit to the Engineer for review in accordance with the General Conditions, color 16 cards, including standard and special colors, for initial color selections. 17 18 C. Schedule of Painting Operations; Submit to the Engineer for review and approval a 19 complete Schedule of Painting Operations in a timely manner and properly notify and 20 coordinate the fabricators' surface preparation and painting operations with these 21 Specifications. This Schedule shall include for each surface to be painted, the brand 22 name, the percent volume of solids, the coverage and the number of coats the , 23 Contractor proposes to use in order to achieve the specified dry film thickness, and 24 color charts. When the Schedule has been approved, apply all material in strict 25 accordance with the approved Schedule and the manufacturer's instructions. Wet and , 26 dry paint film gages shall be made available to the Engineer to verify the proper 27 application while work is in progress. 2$ 29 1.04 SPARE MATERIAL 30 31 A. Furnish one unopened gallon can of each type and each color of paint used t 32 . 33 1.05 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS 34 ' 35 A. Contractor shall submit a list of projects successfully completed during the past 3 years 36 of similar projects. Contractor shall also supply record of Certificates of Approval from 37 Manufacturers to show they have completed technical product and application training. ' 38 Contractors shall submit a list of surface preparation and application equipment 39 sufficient to mix and apply the products specified. 40 , 41 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 42 43 2.01 MATERIALS ' 44 45 A. All painting materials shall be fully equal to those manufactured by the Tnemec 46 Company Inc., Carboline, PPG/Porter Coatings, and Sherwin Williams. The painting 47 schedule has been prepared on the basis of these products and recommendations for 48 applications. No brand other than those named will be considered for approval, unless 49 the brand and type of paint proposed for each item in the following schedule, together ' PAINTING 09900-2 01/07/11 1 with sufficient data substantiated by certified tests conducted at no expense to the 2 Owner, to demonstrate its equality to the paint(s) named, is submitted in writing to the 3 Engineer for approval within 30 days after the issuance of the Notice to Proceed. The 4 type and number of tests performed shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. 5 6 B. All painting materials shall be delivered to the mixing room in unbroken containers, 7 bearing the manufacturer's brand, date of manufacturer, batch number, and name. 8 They shall be used without adulteration and mixed, thinned, and applied in strict 9 accordance with manufacturer's directions for the applicable materials and surface and 10 with the Engineer's approval before using. 11 12 C. Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the manufacturer to be 13 compatible with the finish paints to be used. 14 15 D. No paint containing lead will be allowed. Oil shall be pure boiled linseed oil. 16 17 E. Work areas will be designated by the Engineer for storage and mixing of all painting 18 materials. Materials shall be in full compliance with the requirements of pertinent 19 codes and fire regulations. Proper containers outside of the buildings shall be 20 provided and used for painting wastes, and no plumbing fixture shall be used for this 21 purpose. 22 23 F. All recommendations of the paint manufacturer in regard to the health and safety of 24 workmen shall be followed. 21 26 2.02 PAINTING SYSTEMS 27 28 A. Colors for pipe shall match that of existing connected piping. Colors for structural steel 29 shall match that of existing connected structural steel. 30 31 B. The following surfaces shall have the types of paint scheduled below applied at the dry 32 film thickness (D.F.T.) in mils per coat noted. Some of the painting systems listed 33 below may not be used in this project. Some colors will require an additional coat 34 beyond that listed below to obtain the proper color coverage. 35 36 1. Non-submerged concrete and precast concrete walls and ceilings: 37 38 a. Tnemec 39 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.) 40 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.) 41 42 b. Carboline 43 1st Coat : Carboguard 890 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.) 44 2nd Coat : Carboguard 890 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.) 45 46 c. PPG/HPC 47 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.) 48 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.) 49 PAINTING 09900-3 01/07/11 1 1 d. Sherwin Williams 2 1st Coat: Concrete and Masonry Primer 3 2nd Coat: Loxon Topcoat 4 5 2. Sub merged Concrete ' 6 7 a. Tnemec 8 1St Coat: Tnemec Series N69 (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.) 9 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series N69 (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F_T_) 1 11 1 b. Carboline , 12 1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0-14.0 mils D.F.T.) 13 14 c. PPG/HPC 15 2 Coats: Pitt-Guard All Weather D-T-R Epoxy Coating 97-946/949 16 Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) 17 18 d. Sherwin Williams 19 1St Coat: Cor Cote FRE (80-100 mils D.F.T 20 21 3. Interior Exposed Masonry (above grade and interior partitions) 22 23 a. Tnemec 24 1St Coat: Tnemec Series 54-660- (80-100 sq. ft. per gal.) 25 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.) 26 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.) , 27 28 b. Carboline 29 1 Coat: Sanitile 600/60OTG (60-80 sq. ft. per gal.) 30 2 Coats: Sanitile 655 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) 31 32 c. PPG/HPC 33 1 Coat: Aquapon Polyamide Epoxy Block Filler 97-685/686 (40 to 80 sq. 34 ft. per gal @ 12.0-24.0 mils D.F.T.) 35 2 Coats: Aquapon High Build Semi-Gloss Polyamide Epoxy Coating 36 97-130 Series. (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) 37 38 d. Sherwin Williams , 39 1st Coat: Concrete and Masonry Primer 40 2nd Coat: Loxon Topcoat 41 ' 42 4. Inter ior and Exterior Exposed Masonry (Unpainted) 43 44 a. Tnemec 45 Regular CMU , 46 2 Coats: Prime a Pell 200 @ 75-100 SF/gallon/coat 47 Split face CMU 48 2 Coats: Prime a Pell Plus @ 65-80 SF/gallon/coat 49 50 b. Carboline 51 CMU ' PAINTING 09900-4 01/07/11 ' 1 1 Coat: Carbocrete Sealer WB @ 60-80 SF/gallon 2 Split Face CMU 3 2 Coats: Carbocrete Sealer WB, 1 st coat @ 40-60 SF/gallon & 2nd coat 4 @ 80-120 SF/gallon 5 6 c. PPG/HPC 7 2 Coats: PPG/HPC Canyon Tone Stain Clear at 100 to 150 SF per 8 gallon. 9 10 5. Exterior Exposed Stuccoed Walls 11 12 a. Tnemec 13 1St Coat: Tnemec Series 180 smooth (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.) 14 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 180 smooth (4.0 -6.0 mils D-F-T.) 15 16 17 b. Carboline 1st Coat: Sanitile 100 (10.0-12.0 mils D.F.T.) 18 2nd Coat: Sanitile 155 (2.0-3.0 mils DFT) 19 3rd Coat: Sanitile 155 (2.0-3.0 mils D.F.T.) - OPTIONAL 20 21 c. PPG/HPC 22 1st Coat Pitt-Flex Elastomeric Coating 4-110 (5.5-7.3 mils D.F.T,) ' 23 2nd Coat Pitt-Flex Elastomeric Coating 4-110 (5.5-7.3 mils D.F.T.) 24 25 6. Ferrous metals submerged or subject to splashing 26 27 a. Tnemec 28 1St Coat: Tnemec Series 104-1211 High Solids Catalyzed Epoxy 29 Coating (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.) 30 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 104-Color High Solids Catalyzed Epoxy 31 Coating (8.0 - 10.0 mils D.F.T.) 32 33 b. Carboline 34 1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0-14.0 mils D.F.T.) 35 36 c. PPG/HPC 37 1 Coat: Pitt-Guard All Weather D-T-R Epoxy Coating 97-946/949 38 Series. (5.07.0 mils D.F.T per coat) 39 1 Coat: Pitt-Guard All Weather D-T-R Epoxy Coating 97-946/949 Series. 40 (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T per coat) 41 42 d. Sherwin Williams 43 1st Coat: Car-Cote HB 6.0-9.0 mils (D.F.T.) 44 2nd Coat: Cor-Cote HB 6,0-9.0 mils (D.F.T.) 45 46 47 7. Exterior non-submerged ferrous metals: 48 49 a. Tnemec 50 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.) 51 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.) PAINTING 09900-5 01/07/11 1 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 1074 (2.5 - 4.5 mils D.F.T.) 2 3 b. Carboline 4 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.) 5 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.) ' 6 3rd Coat : Carbothane 133HB (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.) 7 8 c. PPG/HPC r 9 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94-109 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.) 10 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T,) 11 3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi-Gloss Urethane 95-8800 (2,0-6.0 mils r 12 D.F.T.) 13 14 d. Sherwin Williams 15 1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 (3.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.) 16 2nd Coat: HiSolids Polyurethane (2.0-4.0 mils (D.F.T.) 17 ' 18 8. Inte rior non-submerged ferrous metals: 19 20 a. Tnemec 21 1st Coat. Tnemec Series 66 Color (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.) 22 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.) 23 , 24 b. Carboline 25 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.) 26 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T) 27 28 c. PPG/HPC 29 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94-109 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.) 30 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.) 31 32 9. Exterior galvanized and non-ferrous metal: 33 34 a. Tnemec 35 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2,5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 36 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 1074 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 37 38 b. Carboline: ' 39 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.) 40 2nd Coat : Carbothane 133HB (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.) 41 42 c. PPG/HPC 43 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94-109 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.) 44 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.) 45 3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi-Gloss Urethane 95-8800 (2.0-6.0 mils 46 D. F. T.) 47 48 d. Sherwin Williams 49 1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 (2.5-3.5 mils D.F.T,) 50 2nd Coat: H-Solids Polyurethane (2.5-3.5 mills D.F.T.) 51 ' PAINTING 09900-6 01/07/11 10 II 12 Interior galvanized and non-ferrous metals: a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline: 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.) C. PPG/HPC 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T,) 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.) Galvanized and non-ferrous metal submerged or subject to splashing: a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0-14.0 mils D.F.T.) C. PPG/HPC 1 st Coat: PPG Pitt-Guard All Weather D-T-R Epoxy Coating 97-946/949 Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T per coat) 2nd Coat: PPG Pitt-Guard All Weather D-T-R Epoxy Coating 97- 946/949 Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F,T per coat) 3rd Coat: PPG Pitt-Guard All Weather D-T-R Epoxy Coating 97-946/949 Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T per coat) Metal surfaces exposed to temperatures above 250°F: a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 39-1261(0,7 - 1.5 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 39-1261(0.7 - 1.5 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 1 Coat: Thermaline 450, up to 450°F (8.0-10.0 mils D.F.T.) or 1st Coat: Carbozinc 11 or 11 HS (2.0-3.0 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Thermaline 4700, 400-1000°F (2.0 mils D.F.T.) C. PPG/HPC 2 Coats: Speed hide Int/Ext Aluminum Paint 6-230. (1.0 -1.3 mils D,F.T. per coat) PAINTING 09900-7 01/07/11 1 13. Insulated Pipe: 2 3 a. Tnemec 4 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 -- 3.0 mils D.F.T.) 5 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 - 3.0 mils D.F.T.) r 6 7 b. Carboline 8 2 Coats: Sanitile 155 (2.0-3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) 9 10 c. PPG/HPC 11 2 Coats: PITT-TECH Interior/Exterior Satin DTM Industrial Enamels 90- , 12 474 Series.(2.0-3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) 13 14 14. Aluminum in contact with dissimilar metals: 15 16 17 a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 18 2nd Coat. Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 19 20 b. Carboline 21 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.) 22 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.) 23 ' 24 25 c. PPG/HPC 26 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94-109 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.) 27 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.) 28 29 15. Plastic Piping - Interior: 30 31 32 a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 33 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 34 35 b. Carboline 36 1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0-2.0 mils D.F.T.) 37 2 Coats : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) 38 ' 39 c. PPG/HPC 40 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.) 41 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.) 42 43 16. Plastic Piping - Exterior 44 45 a. Tnemec 46 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 73 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 47 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 73 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 48 49 b. Carboline 50 1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0-2.0 mils D.F.T.) PAINTING 09900-8 01/07/11 2 Coats : Carbothane 133HB (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) 17 18 C. PPG/HPC 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils D_F.T.) 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.) 3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi-Gloss Urethane 95-8800 (2.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.) d. Sherwin Williams 1st Coat: Hi-Solids Polyurethane (2.5-3.5 mils D.F.T) 2nd Coat: Hi-Solids Polyurethane (2.5-3.5 mils D.F.T) Interior Drywall and Plaster-Industrial Areas a_ Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 51-792 (1.0 - 1.5 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0-2.0 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat : Sanitile 655 (4.0-5.0 mils DFT) 3rd Coat : Sanitile 655 (4.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.) G. PPG/HPC 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.) Interior Drywall and Plaster-Office Areas a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 51-792 (1.0 - 1.5 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 -- 3.0 mils D.F.T.) 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 -- 3.0 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0-2.0 mils D.F.T.) 2 Coats: Sanitile 155 (2.0-3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) C. PPG/HPC 15t Coat: Speedhide Interior Latex Primer/Sealer 6-2 (1 mil DFT) 2 Coats: Speedhide Int Latex Eggshell 6-411 (2 mils D.F.T. per coat) 19. Interior Concrete Floors a. Tnemec 15t Coat: Tnemec Series 201 (5.0 -- 7.0 mils D.F.T>) 2nd Coat: Tenemec Series 280 (8.0 - 10.0 mils D.F.T.) PAINTING 09900-9 01/07/11 I Note: Apply 50 -- 70 mesh silica sand at 5 lbs. per 150 sq, ft. between 1st and 2" d coat to provide non-slip surface. 20 b. Carboline 1st Coat: Carboguard 1340 (1.0-2.0 mils D.F.T.) 2 Coats: Carboguard 890 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) Note: Utilize 40-60 mesh silica sand to provide non-slip surface. Consult with Carboline for application details. c_ PPG/HPC ' 1st Coat: Megaseal High Solids Primer 99-6639 (5.0 -- 7.0 mils D,F.T) 2nd Coat: Megaseal Self-Leveling Epoxy 99-6680 (10.0-12.0 mils D.F.T.) M Concrete in highly Corrosive Environment Special Coating a. Tnemec I 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 434 Perma-Shield H2S (125 mils D.F.T.) 2"d Coat: Tnemec Series 435 Perma-Glaze (12.0-15.0 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 1st Coat: Plasite 5371 (125 mils) 2nd Coat: Plasite 4500S (12.0-15.0 mils D.F.T.) C. PPG/HPC/Polyspec (Concrete Headworks) 1st Coat: 300EX Epoxy Primer 2nd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner (100 mils) 3rd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner (100 mils) PPG/HPC/Polyspec (Manholes/Lift Stations-Force & Gravity Mains) 1 st Coat: 300EX Epoxy Primer 2nd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner (100 mils) 3rd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner (100 mils) PPG/HPC/Enviroline (Concrete Headworks) 1 st Coat #54 High Solids Epoxy Primer (3-5 mils DFT) 2nd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (20-40 mils DFT) 3rd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (20-40 mils DFT) PPG/HPC/Enviroline (Manholes/Lift Stations-Force & Gravity Mains) 1 st Coat #54 High Solids Epoxy Primer (3-5 mils DFT) 2nd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (20-40 mils DFT) 3rd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (20-40 mils DFT) d. Sherwin Williams 1st Coat: CorCote FIRE (80-100 mils D.F.T) PAINTING 09900-10 01/07/11 1 21 22 Metals submerged or subject to splashing in highly Corrosive Environment Special Coating a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 435 Perma-Shield H2S (30 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 1 Coat: Plasite 4500S (35.0-40.0 mils D.F.T.) C_ PPG/HPC/Polyspec 1 st Coat: 2nd Coat: d. Sherwin Williams 1st Coat: Cor Cote HB (6.0-9.0 mils D_F.T) 2nd Coat: Cor Cote HB (6.0-9.0 mils D.F.T) Secondary Containment Concrete 12.5% Sodium Hypochlonte a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 61-5002 Tenemeliner (8.0-10.0 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 61-5001 Tenemeliner (8.0-10.0 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 1 st Coat: Semstone 800 primer Finish Coats: Semstone 870 (reference Semstone 870 application spec for installation details) C. PPG/HPC/Polyspec 1 st Coat: 23. Buried Pipe Appurtenances (Coal Tar Epoxy / Bitumastic Coating) a. Tnemec 15t Coat Tnemec Series 46H-413 Tneme-Tar (14.0-20.0 mils D.F.T) 2nd Coat Tnemec Series 46H-413 Tneme-Tar (14.0-20.0 mils D.F.T) b. Carboline 1st Coat Carboline Bitumastic 300M (14.0-20.0 mils D.F.T) 2"d Coat Carboline Bitumastic 300M (14.0-20.0 mils D.F.T) C. Sherwin Williams 1st Coat: Tar-Guard (16-20 mils D.F.T) 2nd Coat: Tar-Guard (16-20 mils D.F.T) PAINTING 09900-11 01/07/11 1 C. Any surfaces not specifically named in the Schedule and not specifically excepted shall 2 be prepared, primed and painted in the manner and with materials consistent with 3 these Specifications. The Engineer shall select which of the manufacturer's products, 4 whether the type is indicated herein or not, shall be used for such unnamed surfaces. 5 No extra payment shall be made for this painting. 6 .7 2.03 COLOR CODING FOR PIPES AND EQUIPMENT 8 9 A. Color coding shall consist of color code painting and identification of all exposed 10 conduits, through items and pipelines for the transport of gases, liquid and semi-liquids 11 including all accessories such as valves, insulated pipe coverings, fittings, junction 12 boxes, bus bars, connectors and all operating accessories that are integral to be whole 13 functional mechanical pipe and electrical conduit system. Colors shall be as noted in 14 the Paint and Color Coding Schedules attached at the end of this Section. 15 16 B. All hangers and pipe support floor stands shall be painted the same color and with the 17 same paint as the pipe it supports. The system shall be painted up to, but not 18 including, the flanges attached to the mechanical equipment nor the flexible conduit 19 connected to electrical motors. When more than one pipe system is supported on the 20 same bracket, the bracket shall be painted the same color as the adjacent wall or 21 ceiling. Colors shall be as noted in the Paint and Color Coding Schedule. 22 23 C. All systems which are an integral part of the equipment, that is originating from the 24 equipment and returning to the same piece of equipment, shall be painted between 25 and up to, but not including, the fixed flanges or connections on the equipment. 26 27 2.04 LETTERING OF TITLES 28 29 A. Each pipe system shall be labeled with the name of the materials in each pipeline and 30 alongside this an arrow indicating the direction of flow of liquids. Titles shall be as so 31 described in attached schedule. Titles shall not be located more than twenty (20) 32 linear feet apart and shall also appear directly adjacent to each side of any wall the 33 pipeline breaches, adjacent to each side of the valve regulator, flowcheck, strainer 34 clean-out, and all pieces of equipment. 35 36 B. Titles shall identify the contents by complete name. Identification title locations shall 37 be determined by the Engineer but, in general, they shall be placed where the view is 38 unobstructed and on the two lower quarters of pipe or covering where they are 39 overhead. Title should be clearly visible from operating positions especially those 40 adjacent to control valves. 41 42 C. Titles on equipment shall be applied at eye level on machines, where possible, or at 43 the uppermost broad vertical surface of low equipment. Where more than one piece of 44 the equipment item to be titled exists, the items shall be numbered consecutively, as 45 indicated on the mechanical drawings, or as directed by the. Engineer; for example 46 Pump No. 1, Pump No. 2, etc. Titles shall be composed and justified on the left hand 47 side as follows: Pump No. 1. 48 49 D. Application of titles. PAINTING 09900-12 01/07/11 1. The color of the titles shall be black or white, as approved, to best contrast with the color of the pipes and equipment and shall be stencil applied. 2. Stencil text is to be in ALL CAPS worded exactly as shown in the Schedule. Titles are to be printed in a single line. 3. Letter sizes. Outside Diameter of Pipe or Coverina (inches) Size of Legend Letters (inches) 3/4 to 1-1/4 1-1/2 to 2 2-1/2 to 6 8 to 10 More than 10 1/2 3/4 1-1/4 2-1/2 3-1/2 Equipment titles are to be two inches high. 4. Arrow sizes. Where "a" is equal to 3/4 of outside diameter of pipe or covering, the arrow shaft shall be 2 "a" long by 3/8 "a" wide. The arrow head shall be an equilateral triangle with sides equal to "a." Maximum "a" dimension shall be 6 inches. 5. When using direction arrows, point arrowhead away from pipe markers and in direction of flow. If flow can be in both directions, use a double-headed directional flow. 2.05 FABRICATED EQUIPMENT A. Unless otherwise indicated, all fabricated equipment shall be shop primed and shop or field finished. B. All items to be shop primed shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose material prior to priming. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, any prime coating shall have been improperly applied or if material contrary to these Specifications shall have been used, that coating shall be removed by sandblasting to white metal and re-primed in accordance with these Specifications. C. All shop prime coats shall be of the correct materials and applied in accordance with these Specifications. Remove any prime coats not in accordance with these Specifications by sandblasting and apply the specified prime coat at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Shop primed surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly and damaged or bare spots retouched with the specified primer before the application of successive paint coats in the field. PAINTING 09900-13 01/07/11 r-7 J E. Be responsible for and take whatever steps are necessary to properly protect the shop ' prime and finish coats against damage from weather or any other cause. F. A shop finish coat shall be equal in appearance and protection quality to a field applied finish coat. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a shop finish coat does not give the appearance and protection quality of other work of similar nature, prepare the surfaces , and apply the coat or coats of paint, as directed by the Engineer, to accomplish the desired appearance and protection quality. Submit to the Engineer sufficient evidence that the standard finish is compatible with the specified finish coat. ' G. Wherever fabricated equipment is required to be sandblasted, protect all motors, drives, bearings, gears, etc., from the entry of grit. Any equipment found to contain grit ' shall be promptly and thoroughly cleaned. PART 3 - EXECUTION , 3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared, as specified herein or in Section 09865, and shall be dry and clean before painting. Special care shall be given to thoroughly clean interior concrete and concrete block surfaces of all marks before application of finish. B. All metal welds, blisters, etc., shall be ground and sanded smooth in accordance with SSPC-SP-3 or in difficult and otherwise inaccessible areas by hand cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP-2. All pits and dents shall be filled and all imperfections shall be corrected so as to provide a smooth surface for painting. All rust, loose scale, oil, grease and dirt shall be removed by use of approved solvents, wire brushing or sanding. C. Concrete surfaces shall be finished as specified in Division 3. Report unsatisfactory surface conditions to the Engineer. Concrete shall be free of dust, oil, curing compounds, and other foreign matter. Concrete surfaces shall have any laitance or weak layers removed prior to install of coatings or linings using captive shot blasting systems. Concrete shall have a minimum surface tensile strength of at least 300 PSI per ASTM D-4541 standard. Testing is required to confirm this strength using ASTM D-4541 standard and methods. Surface profile shall be CSP-3 to CSP-6 meeting ICRI (International Concrete Repair Institute) standard guideline #03732 for Coating, Concrete, producing an anchor profile equal to 60-grit sandpaper or coarser. Prepare concrete surfaces by mechanical (captive shot blast) means to achieve this desired profile. Moisture Vapor Transmission should be 3 pounds or less per 1,000 square feet over 24 hourtimeframe as confirmed through a calcium chloride test as per ASTM E-1907. Quantitative relative humidity (RH) testing, ASTM F-2170, should confirm concrete RH results < 75%. Application of coatings and linings should be made when out gassing of concrete is declining during periods when surface temperatures of the concrete is falling. Use of a surface thermometer to determine when surface temperatures are falling is required. When in doubt, double priming may be required. All surface irregularities, cracks, expansion joints and control joints should be properly PAINTING 09900-14 01/07/11 1 1 addressed prior to application of coatings and linings. Remove all contaminates and contaminated surface layers prior to application of coatings and linings. D. Concrete block surface shall be smooth and cleaned of all dust, efflorescence, chalk, loose mortar, dirt, grease, oil, tar and other foreign matter. E. All plastic pipe surfaces shall be lightly sanded before painting. F. Wood surfaces shall be dry. Sand to obtain a smooth surface. All encrustations shall be removed. G. Exposed Pipe: Bituminous coated pipe shall not be used in exposed locations. Pipe that will be exposed after project completion shall be primed in accordance with the requirements herein. Any bituminous coated pipe that is inadvertently installed in exposed locations shall be sandblasted clean before priming and painting. After installation all exterior, exposed flanged joints shall have the gap between adjoining flanges sealed with a single component polysulfide sealant to prevent rust stains. H. Primed or Previously Painted Surfaces and Nonferrous Surfaces: All coated surfaces shall be cleaned prior to application of successive coats. All nonferrous metals not to be coated shall be cleaned. This cleaning shall be done in accordance with SSPC-SP- 1, Solvent Cleaning. Shop-Finished Surfaces: All shop-coated surfaces shall be protected from damage and corrosion before and after installation by treating damaged areas immediately upon detection. Abraded or corroded spots on shop-coated surfaces shall be "Hand Cleaned" and then touched up with the same materials as the shop coat. All shop coated surfaces which are faded, discolored, or which require more than minor touch-up, in the opinion of the Engineer, shall receive new surface preparation before being repainted. Cut edges of galvanized sheets and exposed threads, and cut ends of galvanized piping, electrical conduit and metal pipe sleeves, that are not to be finished painted, shall be "Solvent Cleaned" and primed with zinc dust-zinc oxide metal primer. J. Galvanized and Zinc-Copper Alloy Surfaces: These surfaces to be painted shall be "Solvent Cleaned" and treated as hereinafter specified. Such surfaces not to be painted shall be "Solvent Cleaned." Brush off blasting per SSPC-SP7 galvanized surfaces to insure optimum coating adhesion. K. Aluminum embedded or in contact with concrete must be painted with one shop coat of zinc chromate followed by one heavy coat of aluminum pigmented asphalt paint. Brush off blasting per SSPC-SP7 of galvanized surfaces to insure optimum coating adhesion. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP A. General: PAINTING 09900-15 01/07/11 1. Primer (spot) and paint used for a particular surface shall, in general, be as scheduled for that type of new surface. Confirm with the paint manufacturer that the paint proposed for a particular repaint condition will be compatible with the existing painted surface. Sample repainted areas on the actual site will be required to insure this compatibility. Finished repainted areas shall be covered by the same guarantee specified for remainder of work. B 2. At the request of the Engineer, samples of the finished work prepared in strict accordance with these Specifications shall be furnished and all painting shall be equal in quality to the approved samples. Finished areas shall be adequate for the purpose of determining the quality of workmanship. Experimentation with color tints shall be furnished to the satisfaction of the Engineer where standard chart colors are not satisfactory. 3. Protection of furniture and other movable objects, equipment, fittings and accessories shall be provided throughout the painting operations. Canopies of lighting fixtures shall be loosened and removed from contact with surface, covered and protected and reset upon completion. Remove all electric plates, surface hardware, etc., before painting, protect and replace when completed. Mask all machinery name plates and all machined parts not receiving a paint finish. Dripped or spattered paint shall be promptly removed. Lay drop cloths in all areas where painting is being done to adequately protect flooring and other work from all damage during the operation and until the finished job is accepted. 4. On metal surfaces apply each coat of paint at the rate specified by the manufacturer to achieve the minimum dry mil thickness required. If material has thickened or must be diluted for application by spray gun, the coating shall be built up to the same film thickness achieved with undiluted material. One gallon of paint as originally furnished by the manufacturer shall not cover a greater area when applied by spray gun than when applied unthinned by brush. Deficiencies in film thickness shall be corrected by the application of an additional coat(s). On masonry, application rates will vary according to surface texture, however, in no case shall the manufacturer's stated coverage rate be exceeded. On porous surfaces, it shall be the painter's responsibility to achieve a protective and decorative finish either by decreasing the coverage rate or by applying additional coats of paint. 5. Paints shall be mixed in proper containers of adequate capacity. All paints shall ' be thoroughly stirred before use and shall be kept stirred while using. No unauthorized thinners or other materials shall be added to any paint. 6. Only skilled painters shall be used on the work and specialists shall be employed where required. Field Priming: , 1. Steel members, metal castings, mechanical and electrical equipment and other , metals that are shop primed before delivery at the site will not require a prime PAINTING 09900-16 01/07/11 1 coat on the job. All piping and other bare metals to be painted shall receive one ' 2 coat of primer before exposure to the weather, and this prime coat shall be the 3 first coat as specified in the painting schedule. ' 4 5 2. Equipment which is customarily shipped with abaked-on enamel finish or with a 6 standard factory finish shall normally be field painted unless the prefinished ' 7 equipment is specifically color selected and unless the finish has not been 8 damaged in transit or during installation. Surfaces that have been shop painted 9 and have been damaged, or where the shop coats or coats of paint have ' 10 deteriorated, shall be properly cleaned and retouched before any successive 11 painting is done on them in the field. All such field painting shall match as 12 nearly as possible the original finish. 13 14 C. Field Painting: ' 15 16 1. All painting at the site shall be designated as Field Painting. 17 18 2. All paint shall be at room temperature before applying, and no painting shall be 19 done when the temperature is below 50°F, in dust-laden air, when rain or snow 20 is falling, or until all traces of moisture have completely disappeared from the i 21 22 surface to be painted. 23 1 Successive coats of paint shall be tinted so as to make each coat easily 24 distinguishable from each other with the final undercoat tinted to the shade of the finished coat i t 25 . ma e approx 27 4. Finish surfaces shall not show brush marks or other irregularities. Undercoats ' 28 shall be thoroughly and uniformly sanded with No. 00 sandpaper or equal to 29 remove defects and provide a smooth even surface. Top and bottom edges of ' 30 doors shall be painted and all exterior trim shall be back-primed before 31 installation. 33 5. Painting shall be continuous and shall be accomplished in an orderly manner so 34 as to facilitate inspection. All exterior concrete and masonry paint shall be 35 performed at one continuous manner structure by structure. Materials subject 36 to weathering shall be prime coated as quickly as possible. Surfaces of ' 37 exposed members that will be inaccessible after erection shall be cleaned and 38 painted before erection. 39 ' 40 6. All materials shall be brush painted unless spray painting is specifically 41 approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage ' 42 caused by overspray or drifting. 43 44 7. All surfaces to be painted, as well as the atmosphere in which painting is to be ' 45 done, shall be kept warm and dry by heating and ventilation, if necessary, until 46 each coat of paint has hardened. Any defective paint shall be scraped off and 47 repainted in accordance with the Engineer's directions. ' 48 PAINTING ' 09900-17 01/07/11 1 8. Before final acceptance of the work, all damaged surfaces of paint shall be , 2 cleaned and repainted as directed by the Engineer. 3 4 9. Any pipe scheduled to be painted and having received a coating of a tar or , 5 asphalt-compound shall be painted with two coats of PPG/HPC PITT-GUARD® 6 Epoxy Penetrating Sealer 95-2328 or equal before successive coats are applied 7 per the schedule. Tnemec recommends using 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline over tar, 8 but a test patch must be run initially to test the paint's compatibility with the tar. 9 Carboline does not recommend application of their coatings over tar. Instead, 10 Carboline recommends removal of the tar followed by the application of suitable , 11 coatings based on the substrate and intended service application. 12 13 3.03 CLEANUP ' 14 15 A. The premises shall at all times be kept free from accumulation of waste material and 16 rubbish caused by employees or work. At the completion of the painting remove all ' 17 tools, scaffolding, surplus materials, and all rubbish from and about the buildings and 18 leave work "broom clean" unless more exactly specified. 19 1 20 B. Upon completion, remove all paint where it has been spilled, splashed or splattered on 21 all surfaces, including floors, fixtures, equipment, furniture, etc., leaving the work ready .22 for inspection. 23 24 25 C. All cloths and waste that might constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in closed metal containers or destroyed at the end of each day. Upon completion of the work, the ' 26 entire job left clean and acceptable to the Engineer. 27 28 3.04 INSPECTION, TESTING EQUIPMENT AND PROCEDURES ' 29 30 A. Inspection 31 , 32 1. All phases of the work are subject to inspection by the Engineer to assure 33 proper performance and compliance with the specifications. 34 35 2. The Engineer shall be advised of the propertime to inspect surface preparation, 36 prime coat and each succeeding coat. The Contractor shall apply additional 37 coats only after the previous coat has been approved by the Engineer or , 38 Owner's representative. 39 40 B. Testing ' 41 42 1. The Contractor shall have on the project site the following testing equipment. , 43 Equipment shall be in calibration and proper working order. Equipment shall be 44 used in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions or as directed by the 45 Engineer. , 46 47 a. Sling Psychrometer: Relative humidity and dew point readings shall be 48 taken at intervals throughout the days work. Readings shall be taken at 49 the start of the mornings work, mid day and afternoon. Should PAINTING 09900-18 01/07/11 ' t ' 1 environmental conditions change, additional reading shall be taken to 2 assure that coatings are being applied under the conditions as outlined 3 by the coatings manufacturer. b. Surface Temperature Thermometer, Surface temperatures shall be taken in areas where work is being performed. Surface temperature shall be that as specified by the coatings manufacturer. C. Replica Tape & Micrometer: Testex X-Course Replica Tape shall be employed to determine the surface profile of blasted surfaces. Surface profile shall be as specified. d. D Film Thickness Measurements: Dry film thickness reading shall be taken with a properly calibrated (per the manufacturer's instructions) Type 1 (magnetic) or Type 2 (electromagnetic) instrument. Dry film thickness reading will be taken and recorded in the in a frequency and manner as dictated by the Engineer. e. Holiday Detection: After completion of immersion coating systems on steel surfaces, all surfaces shall be holiday detected in accordance with ASTM G 62 low voltage holiday detection. Holiday detector shall be a Tinker & Rasor Model M-1 or equal. Areas found to have holidays shall be marked and repaired in accordance with the paint manufacturer's instructions. The Engineer shall be notified of time of testing so that he might be present to witness testing. The Contractor shall provide ladders, rigging, etc. as necessary to allow the Engineer to spot check paint thickness of each coat. 3.05 PAINT A. General Notes & Guidelines: 1. All color numbers and names herein refer to master color card. Colors of specified equal manufacturers may be substituted with approval of the Engineer. 2. Pipe lines, equipment, or other items which are not listed here shall be assigned a color by the Engineer and shall be treated as an integral part of the Contract. 3. When color coding is specified or directed by the Engineer, it shall consist of color code painting and identification of all exposed conduits, through lines and pipelines for the transport of gases, liquids or semi-liquids, including all accessories such as valves, insulated pipe coverings, fittings, junction boxes, bus bars, connectors and any operating accessories which are integral to a whole functional mechanical pipe and electrical conduit systems. 4. The colors of the Finish Schedule shall be interpreted as follows: COLORS TNEMEC # COLORS TNEMEC # PAINTING 09900-19 01/07/11 1 White 11 WH Tank Blue 25BL ' 2 Ivory 01 BR Blue 11 SF 3 Red 06SF D_ Blue 78BL 4 L. Green 52GN L. Blue 26BL ' 5 Green 09SF Aqua 10GN 6 D. Green 08SF 7 ' 8 COLORS TNEMEC # COLORS TNEMEC # 9 L. Brown 06BR Inter. Orange 05SF 10 Brown 84BR Orange 04SF ' 11 Bronze 86BR Tan 04BR 12 L. Gray 31 GR Yellow 03SF 13 M. Gray 33GR Safety Yellow 02SF ' 14 D. Gray 34GR 15 16 5. All moving parts, drive assemblies, and covers for moving parts which are ' 17 potential hazards, shall be Safety Orange 04SF. 18 19 6. All safety equipment shall be painted in accordance with OSHA standards. 20 21 7. All in-line equipment and appurtenances not assigned another color shall be 22 painted the same base color as the piping. The pipe system shall be painted , 23 with the pipe color up to, but not including, the flanges attached to pumps and 24 mechanical equipment assigned another color. Tanks shall be painted the color 25 of the piping system that they serve, unless the tank is fiberglass or , 26 polyethylene. 27 28 8. All conduits shall be painted to match its background surface. , 29 30 9. Building surface colors shall be painted, as scheduled in the Finish Schedule, or 31 as selected by the Engineer. ' 32 33 10. Control panels shall be factory finished. 34 35 3.06 GUARANTEE AND ANNIVERSARY INSPECTION 36 37 A. All work shall be warranted for a period of one year from date of acceptance of the , 38 project. 39 40 B. The Owner will notify the Contractor at least 30 days prior to the anniversary date and , 41 shall establish a date for the inspection. Any defects in the coating system shall be 42 repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Should a failure occur to 43 25% of the painted surface, either interior or exterior, the entire surface shall be ' 44 cleaned and painted in accordance with these specifications. 45 PAINTING ' 09900-20 01/07/11 1 3.07 PAINT AND COLOR CODING SCHEDULE 2 Piping and Legend Backwash Waste Blower Air Coagulant Compressed Air Drains Fuel Potable Water Process Sample Reclaimed Effluent Return Activated Sludge Sodium Hypochlorite Sprinkler Thickened Sludge Wastewater Waste Activated Sludge Color Bands Light Brown Green Orange Aqua Dark Green Red Black Red White Dark Blue Light Grey Red Pantone Purple 522C Brown Yellow Red Dark Brown Orange Dark Gray White Equipment and Building Exterior Equipment, Valves, Gates, Fans Interior Equipment and Pumps (including factory finished) Structural Steel (Interior) Ceiling Cranes and Hoists Ductwork Interior Air Handling and Ventilation Equipment Valve and Gate Operators Electrical Conduit and Junction Boxes Submerged Concrete 3.08 PAINT SCHEDULE Color Match System Match System White White Yellow Match Surface Mounted Match Surface Mounted Match System Match Surface Mounted Black A. The interior walls, floor, underdrain frames, and gullet covers of each filter cell shall be coated with a Tnemec Polyurethane Lining System (or equal) as described herein. The underdrain vent piping and the low pressure air supply piping inside the filter shall not be painted- 1 . Concrete Surface Preparation 42 Remove all grease, oil, dirt, dust, mold, mildew, and other soluble contaminants ' 43 by High Pressure Water Cleaning (minimum 3000 psi, 3 to 5 gallons per minute, 44 potable water. ' 46 Remove all spoiled concrete, laitance, fines, and remaining foreign 47 contaminants by Brush-off Blast cleaning (abrasive blasting) per ICRI SP4-SP6. 49 All surfaces must be clean and dry prior to the application of any coatings. All PAINTING 09900-21 01/07/11 1 1 concrete surfaces must have a surface profile equivalent to 80 grit sandpaper. 2 Apply first coat as soon as possible the same day as surface preparation to 3 avoid contamination of the surface, 4 5 2. Steel Surface Preparation ' 6 7 Remove all rust, and rust stain by Near White Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP10). , 8 Prime as soon as possible the same day with Tnemec Series 104 @ 4,0-6.0 9 mils DFT. Two coats are required for steel that is not to be topcoated with 10 Series 406. , 11 12 3. Resurfacing Spoiled Concrete 13 , 14 Repair voids, bugholes, and areas where spoiled concrete has been removed 15 with Tnemec Series 218 (for depths of 1/16" to '/4"), or Series 219 (for depths 16 greater than '/4" but less than 1 '/2"). ' 17 18 4. Polyurethane Lining System Coating 19 ' 20 Primer: Tnemec Series 401 Elasto-Prime @ 1.0-3.0 mils DFT 21 22 Finish: Tnemec Series 406 Elasto-Shield @ 75.0-100.0 mils DFT , 23 24 B. Other items to be painted are as noted on the drawings and/or in the Specifications. 25 ' 26 27 END OF SECTION PAINTING 09900-22 01/07/11 ' SECTION 11366 RAPID SAND FILTERS 1 1 1 J 77 J PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A_ The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to disassemble, inspect, rehabilitate, re-assemble, and field test complete, ready for operation, twelve (12) existing rapid sand filters as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of the work required, but do not cover all details. It is, however, intended to cover the furnishing, the shop testing, the delivery, complete installation and field testing, of all materials, equipment and all appurtenances for the complete rehabilitation of the existing filter system as shown on the Drawings or herein specified, whether specifically mentioned in these Specifications or not. C The Work involves rehabilitating the filters and upgrading the PLC program that operates the filters in an active wastewater treatment plant. See Section IV, Paragraph 1.0 "Scope of Work" for construction phasing and other restrictions. D. The rehabilitation work inside each filter cell and in the pipe gallery shall be completed before the upgraded PLC program is installed. The filters shall continue to be operated using the existing PLC and the existing PLC program until the filter rehabilitation work is complete. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS A. The existing filters are Model KK 12 x 30 (12) Hydro Clear Rapid Sand Filters as originally manufactured by Zimpro/Passavant, Inc. These filters were installed and became operational on or about 1990. The company is presently owned by Siemens Water Technology Corp. B. The filters share a common influent channel and utilize conventional downflow technology for forward flow and upflow for backwash flow. Filtered water is collected in a common clearwell that also serves as the source for backwash water (washwater). Spent backwash water (waste washwater) is collected in a common mudwell and returned to the treatment plant. C. The filters are controlled automatically by an existing PLC or manually by the plant operators. The automatic backwash system uses butterfly valves to control flow. Similar valves are also used for a low pressure air scour of the filter surface. All automatic valves in the filter control system are pneumatically-actuated using high pressure air. RAPID SAND FILTERS ' 11366-1 01/07/11 D. The primary components of the filtration complex include- 1 . Twelve (12) 12'x30' filter cells. 2. One (1) high pressure air system. 3. One (1) low pressure air system. 4. Backwash water pumping systems with submersible pumps, check valves, and butterfly throttling valves. 5. Mudwell pumping system with submersible pumps, check valves, isolation valves and air release valves. 6. Six (6) local filter control consoles. 7. One (1) main filter control panel and water level switches and sensors. 8. One (1) chemical clean system. 9. One (1) motor control center (MCC). E. Each rapid sand filter consists of an atmospherically vented underdrain system supported on a concrete structure with the following primary components- 1 . Six (6) carbon steel gullet covers. 2. Six (6) carbon steel underdrain frame assemblies, grouted in place. 3. Eighteen (18) PVC underdrain core assemblies. 4. Six (6) stainless steel wire mesh blankets. 5. Eighteen (18) squares of 1-inch thick fiberglass grating. 6. Twenty Four (24) 2" x 1-'/2" x'/4" perimeter hold down angle iron pieces. 7. Thirty Six (36) structural I-beam hold down pieces. 8. One (1) carbon steel distribution/trough assembly with splash plates and weirs. 9. One (1) inlet box with weir assembly. 10. Ten (10)-inches of quartz filter media. F. All or portions of the components mentioned in Sections D and E above shall be replaced or rehabilitated as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. Replacement items shall be supplied by the manufacturer of the original filtration equipment: Hydro Clear Rapid Sand Filter Equipment by Siemens/Zimpro. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of the equipment herein specified shall be in accordance with the standards of the below listed organizations, except as otherwise shown or specified. Where reference is made to a standard of one of these or.other organizations the version of the standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1. NSF - Standard 61 - Drinking Water Systems Components - Health Effects. 2. AWWA B100 Water Treatment Filtering Material latest edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS RAPID SAND FILTERS ' 11366-2 01/07/11 2 3 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ' 16 17 18 ' 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 ' 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 ' 40 41 42 ' 43 44 45 ' 46 47 r, 1 A. Copies of all materials required to establish compliance with the specifications shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents. Submittals shall include at least the following.- 1 . Certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of construction, dimensions and anchor bolt locations. 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins and/or catalogs of the equipment. 3. A complete, total bill of materials for all equipment with the O&M manual. 4. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts with the manufacturer's current price for each item. B. Filter media submittals shall include the following information as a minimum: 1. Supplier's Name 2. Gradation of Each Media Type 3. Date of Sampling/Lot Number 4. Samples of Each Media Type 5. Representative Sample Analysis, (i.e. effective size, uniformity coefficient, specific gravity, acid solubility) 6. Material Quantities 7. Estimated Shipping Schedule 8. Media Loading Procedure 9. All testing shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition of AWWA B100. 1.05 UPDATED OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Complete copies of the updated Operating and Maintenance Manuals (O&M Manuals) shall be furnished in accordance with the specifications. The manuals shall be identical to the original O&M Manuals with new information inserted and old information excluded as appropriate. There shall be a new section added to the original O&M Manual describing the details of the work performed. The new section shall contain the start up report for each filter cell. The manuals shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, etc. that are required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. Five(5)copies of these updated O&M Manuals shall be submitted. B. Two (2) copies of the updated O&M Manual in electronic formats (MSWord and pdo shall be submitted. C. Five (5) copies of the final approved ladder logic program for operation/backwash of the filters shall be provided to the Owner in CD-ROM format. RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366-3 01/07/11 1 1.06 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS 2 ' 3 A. Furnish one (1) set of all special tools required for normal operation and maintenance. 4 5 B. Furnish one (1) set of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts for the rapid sand 6 filter system. All spare parts shall be properly protected for prolonged periods of 7 storage and packed in suitable containers which are clearly identified with indelible 8 markings as to contents. , 9 10 1.07 WARRANTY , 11 12 A. The Contractor shall provide a twelve (12) month warranty commencing from the time 13 of Substantial Completion as outlined in the Contract Documents- The guarantee shall 14 indicate that the equipment furnished is suitable for the purpose intended and free 15 from defects of design, material and workmanship. In the event the equipment fails to 16 perform as specified, the Contractor shall promptly repair or replace the defective ' 17 equipment without any cost to the Owner (including handling and shipment costs). 18 19 1.08 STORAGE AND HANDLING ' 20 21 A. All equipment shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur 22 during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and ' 23 the units and equipment are ready for operation. 24 25 B. The Contractor shall replace, at no charge to Owner, all materials and ancillary ' 26 equipment damaged during storage and delivery, including filter media. 27 28 C. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing the filter media off-site as soon as it 29 is removed from the individual filter cells. Stockpiling of the existing media on the 30 treatment plant site shall not be permitted. The Contractor shall be responsible for any 31 ground or groundwater contamination, or other claims, caused by his failure to , 32 promptly remove and dispose of the existing filter media. 33 34 PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 35 36 37 2.01 GENERAL 38 A. The material covered by these Specifications is intended to be standard equipment of 39 proven ability and as manufactured by the original equipment manufacturer. The 40 equipment furnished shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with 41 best practice and methods and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on 42 the Drawings. ' 43 44 B. The filter system shall be as manufactured by Siemens/Zimpro Hydro-Clear Rapid 45 Sand Filters. 46 ' 47 RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366-4 01/07/11 ' 1 z 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ' 16 17 18 ' 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 142 43 44 45 146 47 1 48 2.02 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. General Requirements 1. The filter underdrain system shall be designed and installed to ensure long term stability in its operating characteristics. It shall be resistant to changes in head loss, flow uniformity, and any other effects which would in time cause loss of efficiency or effectiveness in its operation. 2. The underdrain system shall allow for the uniform collection of filtered water and uniform distribution of backwash water over the total area of the filter floor. 3. The backwash system shall allow for separate air scouring and water backwashing and for the simultaneous use of air and water at the specified rates. 4. The system shall be designed to avoid localized areas of excessive flow mal- distribution, which may cause mounding, lateral displacement, or other deleterious disturbances of the filter media. 5. The filters shall consist of 10-inches of silica sand quartz media supported by an underdrain system comprised of fiberglass grating, stainless steel wire mesh, PVC cores, and a steel frame system. 6. Each filter cell shall fit into the existing designated space and have 360 square feet of filtration area. B. Performance Requirements 1. Each filter cell shall meet the Performance Requirements specified in Section 3.11. C. Design Criteria: The filter system shall be furnished and installed to perform satisfactorily when operated under the following conditions: 1. Downflow of filtered water up to 4.0 gpm/sf. 2. Air-Mix air flow rate 900 cfm @ 3.0 psi. 3. Upf low of backwash water at a rate of 12 gpm/sf. 4 Quartz single grade filter media with 0.45 mm + 0.05 mm effective size and a uniformity coefficient of 1.7. D Structural Design Requirements 1. The filter underdrain system, including anchorage, supports, etc. shall be designed to safely withstand all loadings under the specified loading conditions. RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366-5 01/07/11 E. All specialty hardware, such as special anchorage, grout retaining strips, closures, ' gaskets, etc., as required for installation of the filter underdrain system, shall be furnished and shall be the products of a single manufacturer/supplier. 2.03 UNDERDRAIN A. The underdrain system for the filters shall not require new construction or structural changes to the existing concrete structure. B. The underdrain system shall support the weight of its own components, along with the weight of the media, and provide mounting points for the inlet/backwash trough. C. Each filter cell's carbon steel frame shall be cleaned and painted in place in ' accordance with specification Sections 09865 and 09900, and the manufacturer's recommended procedure. ' D. Each filter cell's carbon steel gullet covers shall be cleaned and painted prior to re- installation in accordance with specification Sections 09865 and 09900, and re- , installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedure. E. Each filter cell shall be furnished with PVC underdrain core assemblies installed in the underdain frames. Each core assembly shall be nominal 51" x 45" and weigh approximately 160 pounds. Each PVC core shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedure. ' F. Each filter cell shall be furnished with six (6) wire mesh assemblies installed above the underdrain core assemblies. Each wire mesh assembly shall be of Type 316 stainless steel, 0.010-inch wire diameter, 40 mesh screen with the same nominal dimensions as the underdrain frame. Each screen shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedure. G. Each filter cell shall be furnished with fiberglass grating sections installed above the wire mesh. Each grating section shall be 15 block x 16 block with nominal dimensions of 51" x 42" and weighing approximately 70 pounds. Each grating block shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedure. H. Each filter cell shall be furnished with 2" x 1 '/2 " x'/4 carbon steel hold-down angle supports installed around the perimeter of the fiberglass grating in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedure. Structural angle iron shall be individually prepared and painted prior to installation in accordance with specification 09865 and 09900. Each filter cell shall be furnished with S4, 7.7# carbon steel hold-down beams. Each beam shall be installed above the fiberglass grating in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedure. Each beam shall be individually prepared and painted prior to installation in accordance with specification 09865 and 09900. RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366-6 01/07/11 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 '7 2.04 UNDERDRAIN GROUT A. The Contractor shall replace/repair any loose grout supporting the underdrain assemblies. If grout work is required, the grout used shall be as described in paragraph B through E of this section. B. The Contractor shall furnish all grout/cement required for the installation of the filter underdrain system. The grout used in installing the underdrain frame blocks shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi after 30 days of curing. The grout shall be comprised of one part Portland cement and two parts clean silica sand properly mixed and wetted with a maximum water-cement ratio by weight equal to 0.50 to 0.55 for the base grout and 0.61 to 0.67 for the fill grout. C. Cement shall be standard brand Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150, Type II, for general use. Cement that has become "lumpy" shall not be used. The use of non- shrink grout is not acceptable. D. Water for mixing and curing shall be clean and clear potable water. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing the potable water at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Sand shall be clean and washed masonry sand. When tested in accordance with ASTM D2419, the sand equivalency shall not be less than 90% for an average of three samples, or less than 85% for any individual sample. 100% of sand particles shall pass No. 4 sieve and not more than 4% of sand particles shall pass No. 200 sieve. 2.05 FILTER MEDIA A. New media shall be furnished and installed in each filter cell to a uniform nominal depth of 10-inches. B. The media shall be a single grade quartz sand, durable, clean siliceous particles, free of all mica, and shall be in strict accordance with AWWA 8100 with properties as listed below: Media Depth Sand per Filter Effective Size Uniformity Coefficient Average Specific Gravity 10-inches uniform 300 cubic feet minimum 0.45 mm + 0.05 mm 1.7 2.6 C. Sufficient media shall be provided for a Y2-inch skimming allowance. D. The majority of the filter media shall be packaged in semi-bulk containers with lifting sleeves and a bottom discharge spout containing a maximum of 4,000 pounds per container. E. The makeup portion of the media shall be furnished in sealed bags suitable for manual loading. 2 3 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366-7 01/07/11 1 2 F. All new media shall be stored under roof or otherwise kept dry and covered until 3 loaded into the filter cells. 4 5 2.06 CELL INLET BOX AND WEIR ASSEMBLY 6 7 A. Each filter cell shall be furnished with one (1)'/4-inch thick carbon steel inlet box with 8 an adjustable fiberglass cipolletti weir assembly installed at the inlet. Each inlet box ' 9 shall be individually prepared and painted prior to installation in accordance with 10 specification Sections 09865 and 09900 and installed in accordance with the 11 manufacturer's recommended procedure. The weirs shall be set level with a , 12 surveyor's level. 13 14 2.07 CELL DISTRIBUTION/BACKWASH TROUGH ASSEMBLY 15 16 A. Each filter cell shall be furnished with one (1) carbon steel distribution/backwash trough , 17 assembly including adjustable weirs, trough supports, and removable splash trays 18 installed. Each trough assembly shall be 1/4" carbon steel construction with nominal 19 dimensions of 24" x 24" x 30' with up to three flanged sections that bolt together. Each , 20 carbon steel section of the trough and the supports shall be individually painted priorto 21 installation in accordance with specification Sections 09865 and 09900. The weirs 22 shall be of fiberglass construction, with 90-degree v-notches on 6-inch centers with ' 23 Type 316 stainless steel hardware and connecting plates and adjustable mounting 24 slots providing 2-inches of adjustment. The splash trays shall be fabricated of Type 25 304 stainless steel and shall be removable. All components of the ' 26 distribution/backwash trough assemblies shall be installed in accordance with the 27 manufacturer's recommended procedure. The weirs shall be set level with a 28 surveyor's level. 29 30 2.08 HARDWARE, GASKETS, AND CONSUMABLES 31 32 A. Each filter shall be furnished with stainless steel hardware, including bolts, nuts, 33 washers, clips, all thread, all thread couplings, anchors, and set screws, installed to 34 connect and anchor the various assemblies described herein. All hardware inside the ' 35 filter cell shall be Type 316 stainless steel except as otherwise specified herein. In 36 addition, a 3-inch x 3/16-inch closed cellular neoprene gasket shall be installed below 37 the screen. All miscellaneous hardware, gaskets, and consumables shall be installed , 38 in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedure: 39 40 2.09 LOCAL CONTROL CONSOLES ' 41 42 A. Six (6) new 316 stainless steel NEMA 12 free-standing and floor mounted local control 43 consoles shall be furnished and installed. Each console shall control 2 filters and shall ' 44 be designed, wired and plumbed such that it can perform the same functions as the 45 existing consoles except adjusting the number of pulse cycles. This function will now 46 be controlled only at the main filter control panel. The console shall contain all ' 47 necessary compartments, switches, status lights, terminal boards, timers, circuit 48 breakers, pilot valves, and solenoids needed to operate two (2) filters. The new RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366-8 01/07/11 1 1? 3 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ' 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 consoles shall be integrated with the main filter controller as are the existing consoles. Each console shall be pre-assembled, pre-plumbed, prewired, and tested prior to shipment from the factory- 2.10 B. The new consoles shall provide for backwashing and normal operation of the filters. Each control panel shall be identical in size and configuration and contain identical internal and external components, except as noted herein. The control panels shall be located where shown on the Drawings. MAIN FILTER CONTROL PANEL AND PLC CONTROLLER A. The existing main filter control panel and the original PLC have been modified from the original installation. The ladder logic program running the filters and the human/machine interface (HMI) has been modified. B. The filter equipment manufacturer shall develop, troubleshoot, debug and furnish to the Owner for installation by the Owner, an electronic copy of a new ladder logic PLC program specific to this filter application. The program shall be capable of operating all modes of all the filters, all ancillary controls, alarms, and equipment to support the various filter operating modes. It shall be configured to run in the existing PLC or a new PLC of the same manufacture, as designated by the City. C. The equipment manufacturer shall coordinate with the City to install and debug the new PLC ladder logic program in the existing or, if required, the new, PLC. The City will be responsible for actually loading the new program. D. The Contractor and the filter equipment manufacturer shall coordinate with the City and the Engineer and incorporate minor changes to the program that may be required to address specific operational concerns. A coordination meeting with the City and the Engineer shall be scheduled by the Contractor prior to developing the new PLC program. E. At a minimum, the new filter operating program shall perform all of the required functions of each filter including automatic filter operation, Air-Mix, Pulse-Mix, and backwashing. The new PLC program shall be configured to integrate the level signals from An existing Hydroranger ultrasonic level detector installed in the mudwell. F. The Contractor and the filter equipment manufacturer shall be responsible for coordination with the supplier of the air actuators, backwash pumps, mudwell pumps, and chemical clean system and provide all necessary programming required to operate the filters during a backwash sequence, during normal operations, and during the chemical clean operation. 2.11 LEVEL SENSORS A. New level switches shall be provided and installed in each filter cell, the inlet channel, the clearwell, the mudwell, and the chemical storage tank as listed below: RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366-9 01/07/11 1 2 • 2 in each filter cell, one for low level and one for high level ' 3 • 1 in the inlet channel 4 1 in the clearwell 5 4 in the mudwell (see 2.11 B.) 6 1 in the chemical clean storage tank 7 8 B. The four original level switches in the mudwell have been removed. A Hydroranger 9 ultrasonic detector and transducer has been installed and is functioning in place of the 10 4 level switches. The Hydroranger shall remain as the level detection device in the 11 mudwell and the Contractor shall calibrate the Hydroranger set points to correspond to 12 the original elevations represented by floats 1 thru 4. The new PLC program shall be 13 configured to integrate the level signals from the Hydroranger. , 14 15 C. The level switches shall be Hydromatic model SD50 diaphragm pressure switches or 16 approved equal and shall all be from the same manufacturer. 17 18 D. The level switches for the chemical storage tank shall be a Siemens MAC-3 19 microswitch float type level sensors or approved equal and shall be specifically 20 approved by the manufacturer for use with Sodium or Calcium Hypochlorite solutions. 21 22 E. Splices in the float level switch chords shall not be permitted. All level switches shall , 23 be supplied with sufficient chord length such that no chord splicing is required and the 24 free ends of the chord shall attach directly to a terminal strip. 25 26 F. All level switches shall be mounted in their original location using new stainless steel 27 28 hardware and configured to the elevation designated on the drawings. t 29 2.12 SURFACE AIR SYSTEM 30 31 A. Twenty-four (24) new surface air mix diffusers and clamps shall be installed in each ' 32 filter cell. The diffusers shall be W diameter schedule 80 PVC with UV inhibitors and 33 34 threaded end caps. The diffuser orientation, number, locations, and sizes shall be as specified by the filter equipment manufacturer. ' 35 36 37 2.13 CHEMICAL CLEAN SYSTEM 38 A. New components shall be provided, installed, and incorporated into the existing 39 chemical clean system as listed below: 40 41 1. One (1) new 360 gallon (nominal) linear polyethylene chemical storage tank 42 with a diameter not exceeding 48--inches. The tank shall be approved for use 43 with sodium or calcium hypochlorite solutions and shall be Chem-Tainer model 44 TC 4848 AA series with graduated markings, or Engineer approved equal. The 45 tank shall be complete with bulkhead fittings, penetrations, a hinged lid with a 46 handle, and an internal float support identical to the existing tank. 47 RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366-10 01 /07/11 ' 1 1 2. New schedule 80 PVC piping, fittings, and vented valve connecting the existing 2 pump suction header to the tank outlet shall be installed. A 1-1/2-inch PVC 3 vent pipe shall be mounted to the sidewall of the tank and shall be properly 4 supported and routed out of doors to.a location acceptable to the Engineer. 5 6 3. New schedule 80 PVC piping, fittings, and vented ball valves shall be installed 7 on the pump discharge from the existing isolation valves for each pump 8 (mounted on the wall) to the injection point for each filter. Furnish and install a 9 liberal number of unions for disassembling the piping. 10 11 4. Furnish and install twelve (12) new motor operated valves (MOVs) located 12 where shown on the filter influent piping and installed with new wire and conduit 13 to the relevant filter local control console. Each new MOV shall be furnished by 14 the filter equipment supplier and integrated into the chemical clean function of 15 the filter control PLC ladder logic. 16 17 PART 3 - EXECUTION 19 3.01 FILTER CELL EQUIPMENT REMOVAL 20 21 A. The Contractor shall carefully disassemble and remove all existing filter components, 22 hardware, and consumables inside the filter cells, including the gullet covers but 23 excluding the underdrain frames, underdrain vents, and low pressure air system 24 horizontal and vertical manifold piping, as shown on the Drawings. There are six 25 underdrain frames in each filter cell, each grouted in place. All six underdrain frames 26 in each cell shall be exposed, cleaned as directed by the Engineer and made suitable 27 for a visual evaluation but left in place for evaluation by the Engineer on a per cell 28 basis. ?n 30 3.02. CLEANING AND PROTECTION DURING INSTALLATION, TESTING, AND STARTUP 31 32 A.. The Contractor shall take all precautions recommended by the equipment 33 manufacturer or as specified herein to ensure that the filter underdrain system and any 34 piping connected thereto is completely clean and free of any debris, dirt, or other 35 foreign materials that could clog the underdrain system or interfere with flow. 36 37 Backwash air and water piping shall be thoroughly flushed clean. All loose debris and dirt within the filter cell shall be removed by brooming and vacuuming. As installation 38 progresses, partially completed portions of the work shall be protected with heavy 39 visqueen or other suitable material to maintain the cleanliness of the underdrain 40 system. Such protection shall be maintained until the media is installed. 41 42 B. Any time the underdrain is to be used as a work surface, the underdrain shall be 43 overlaid with Y2 inch minimum plywood sheeting, to distribute the load of workers, yard 44 buckets, wheel barrows, ladders, scaffolds, etc., to prevent damage to the underdrain. 45 46 3.03 UNDERDRAIN INSPECTION AND REPLACEMENT 47 48 A. The Contactor shall follow the filter manufacturer's recommended procedure for RAPID SAND FILTERS ' 11366-11 01/07/11 1 removing the underdrain cores. Removal is generally the reverse of installation as 2 described in the existing O&M Manual. The filter manufacturer's representative shall 3 be on site and provide supervision during underdrain removal and installation. 4 5 B. It is intended that the Contractor shall remove, clean, and inspect the cores, then re- 1 6 install them in the underdrain. The Contractor shall use special care when 7 disassembling, cleaning, temporarily storing, and then re-assembling the underdrain 8 cores so as to not damage them. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing 9 any cores damaged by him during disassembly of the underdrains. The Engineer and 10 equipment supplier shall inspect each core and determine if it must be replaced. 11 12 3.04 HYDROSTATIC TESTING FOR WALL PENETRATIONS 13 14 A, Prior to painting the interior walls and floor, each cell shall be filled with water to within 15 1 foot of the sidewalk and the piping penetrations shall be hydrostatically tested for 16 leaks. 17 ' 18 B. Hydrostatic testing shall be performed only after all process water valves for the 19 respective filter have been replaced. , 20 21 C. The hydrostatic test shall be conducted for a 24-hour period on each cell. The 22 Contractor shall repair all piping penetration leaks found during the testing as directed , 23 by the Engineer, and retest the filter. Repair and retesting shall continue until all wall 24 penetrations are leak free. 25 , 26 D. The Contractor shall furnish a written report of each filter test including the procedure 27 used, leaks found and repairs made to the Engineer prior to proceeding with painting 28 of the filter. 29 30 3.05 CEL L INTERIOR WALLS AND FLOOR PAINTING 31 , 32 A.. The underdrain fames, gullet covers, floor area, and walls inside each cell shall be 33 cleaned and painted with a polyurethane lining system as specified in Sections 09865 34 and 09900, The low pressure air diffusers, stainless steel manifold piping, and vent 35 piping shall not be painted. 36 37 3.06 FILT ER ASSEMBLY ' 38 39 A. The Contractor shall assemble the filter components in strict accordance with the 40 manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations and the manufacturer's 41 installation drawings; the oral and written directions provided by the manufacturer's 42 technical representative who shall be supervising and observing the work, and any 43 additional requirements specified herein. 44 45 B. All stainless steel hardware, fasteners, and anchors shall be assembled with anti-seize 46 compound specifically formulated for use with stainless steel in similar conditions and 47 applications, and approved by the Engineer. r RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366-12 01/07/11 , 1 1 3.07 MEDIA INSTALLATION 2 3 A. The filter underdrain system in each filter cell shall be thoroughly cleaned and visually 4 inspected by the equipment supplier to verify that orifices are not clogged with debris. 5 6 B. The equipment supplier shall furnish a written certification to the Engineer that the 7 equipment has been installed in strict accordance with the equipment manufacturer's 8 recommendations. Media shall not be installed until after this certification has been 9 furnished to the Engineer. ' 10 i th t i 11 C. e op gnat ng The Contractor shall place a level line on the wall of the filter des 12 elevation of the media. 13 li 14 D. er The media shall be carefully placed in a manner approved by the equipment supp 15 so as not to disturb the underdrain system. 1 16 17 E. The media shall be installed level and the bed shall be backwashed a minimum of 18 three times to remove fines. The media shall be re-leveled by scraping as required to 19 obtain the correct elevation. 20 21 F The Contractor shall measure the depth of the media after it has been backwashed 22 . and skimmed as recommended by the filter equipment manufacturer. 23 24 25 3.08 TECHNICAL DIRECTION 26 A. Install all equipment in accordance with the recommended instructions of the filter 27 equipment manufacturer. The Contractor shall furnish the services of the filter and 28 valve manufacturers' field service technicians to instruct the Contractor's personnel in 29 the proper installation of the all valves, filter components and systems. 30 31 B. Upon completion of the installation, the manufacturers' field service technicians shall 32 furnish a certificate of compliance detailing that the filter underdrain, media, and all 33 components and materials have been installed in strict accordance with the 34 manufacturer's instructions. 35 36 3.09 INSPECTION AND TRAINING 37 38 A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of the manufacturer's field service technician, 39 who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance of the equipment, 40 as required to inspect the installed equipment, supervise the initial test run and to 41 provide instruction to the plant personnel. The manufacturer's representative shall be 42 on site to inspect and supervise the installation of the filter underdrains and for startup 43 of all filters. The Contractor shall provide more time for the manufacturer's 44 representative as required during installation at no additional cost to the Owner. 45 46 B. Prior to substantial completion and activation of the new programming, at least two (2) 47 days of the field service technicians time shall be allocated solely to instruction and 48 training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of the equipment. RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366-13 01/07/11 t 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 C. The instruction period shall be scheduled at least ten (10) days in advance with the Owner and shall take place prior to start-up and acceptance by the Owner. D. Prior to initial start-up of each filter, the manufacturer's representative shall provide written certification to the Owner that the equipment has been installed, tested in accordance with the Manufacturer's approved method, and testing requirements specified herein and shall certify that the equipment is ready for permanent operation. ' 3.10 STARTUP A. Each filter shall be started up and placed on line as soon as the mechanical , rehabilitation work, pipe gallery work, and control panel replacement associated with the specific filter cell has been completed and the cell has been cleared and is ready for service. While the mechanical and electrical work is ongoing, the filters shall be operated using the existing PLC program. The Contractor and filter equipment supplier shall provide a written notice to the Owner of any potential problems the existing program may have on the operation of the rehabilitated filter before placing the filter in service. B. After the mechanical rehabilitation work, pipe gallery work, and control panel replacement associated with all the filters has been completed, the upgraded PLC program will be installed by the City and operation of the filters shall be transferred to , the new PLC program. C. After the PLC program has been installed, tested, and is operational with the sequence and times appropriate for all events, each filter cell shall be tested for performance as ' described in Section 3.11 of this Specification. 3.11 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General 1. Subject to the provisions contained herein, the filtration system shall produce effluent water of a quality that will comply with the following Performance Requirements (each filter). Values shall not be averaged for separate filters. Sampling shall be suspended during a backwash event (as specified herein). Performance Requirements Value Peak Flow Rate, gpm/ft2 4.0 Maximum. Backwash Flow Rate gpm/ft2 12 Maximum Effluent TSS, mg/L 5 Maximum Effluent Turbidity, NTU 2.5 2 Effluent Turbidity and Total Suspended Solids (TSS) water quality requirements shall be achieved concurrently at the flow rates specified above. The Owner is responsible for providing filter influent water quality with a TSS RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366-14 u 01/07/11 1 L 1 11 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 B ranging from 0-20 mg/L and 0-10 NTU turbidity for the Process Performance Test specified hereinafter. However, it is the Contractor's responsibility to determine and verify filter influent water quality. During the Process Performance Test, if any influent TSS/turbidity value is greater than 20 mg/L/10 NTU and the effluent water quality meets the Performance Requirements, the test results shall be used as part of the Process Performance Test. During the Performance Test, if any influent TSS/turbidity value is greater than 20 mg/L/10 NTU and the effluent water quality does not meet the Performance Requirements, the Owner will make such changes in the treatment process as needed to bring the influent water quality below 20 mg/L/10 NTU and the Contractor shall re-conduct the Performance Test at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor will not be required to conduct influent turbidity sampling and testing, however, but it will be assumed that the influent TSS/turbidity is below 20 mg/L/10 NTU. Process Performance Test 1. The Process Performance Test shall demonstrate the ability of each filter to meet effluent Performance Requirements identified in section 3.11 A. Immediately following start-up of each filter, the Contractor shall conduct a three (3) day Process Performance Test on each filter. The three (3) day test shall be on consecutive days. Each filter shall be tested individually for adherence to the Performance Requirements and blending of filter effluent will not be permitted. A rehabilitated filter shall demonstrate compliance with effluent water quality Performance Requirements before another filter will be permitted to be taken out of service for rehabilitation. 2. The Owner shall provide the labor necessary to operate the treatment plant during the Process Performance Test. The Owner will assist the Contractor and filter equipment manufacturer in the operation of the filter equipment in accordance with instructions from the Contractor and the equipment manufacturer. The Contractor shall be responsible for the actual operation of the filter during the Process Performance Test. 3. There is no readily available means to monitor the forward flow through each filter. Therefore, the forward flow through each filter shall be estimated by dividing the total plant flow by the number of filters in service. The number of filters in service shall correspond to the following flow rates and filter loading rates. RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366-15 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Total Total Plant Plant Number of Loading Flow Flow Filters Date MGD GPM On Line gpm/sq ft 2 1389 1 3.9 2.5 1736 .2 2.4 3 2083 2 2.9 3.5 2431 2 3.4 4 2778 2 3.9 4.5 3125 3 2.9 5 3472 3 3.2 5.5 3819 3 3.5 6 4167 3 3.9 6.5 4514 4 3.1 7 4861 4 3.4 7.5 5208 4 3.6 8 5556 4 3.9 8.5 5903 5 3.3 9 6250 5 3.5 9.5 6597 5 3.7 10 6944 5 3.9 10.5 7292 6 3.4 11 7639 6 3.5 11.5 7986 6 3.7 12 8333 6 3.9 The Owner will place filters in service and take filters out of service in order to obtain a filter loading rate below that shown above during the Process Performance Test. 4. Prior to initiating filter testing, the Contractor shall sample the filter influent flow and perform a particle size distribution analysis acceptable to the Engineer indicating the percentage of particles larger than 3 microns and shall submit the results to the Engineer. 5. The Contractor shall supply all manpower and materials needed to collect, analyze, and record results for filter influent and effluent turbidity and effluent turbidity. Sampling for filter influent and effluent TSS shall be 12 individual consecutive samples taken every 2 hours for 3 days. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the necessary analysis equipment to perform the Process Performance Test. The Owner may supply the effluent sampling and turbidity analysis equipment if it is available. Influent and effluent TSS/ turbidity samples shall be analyzed individually and blending of samples shall not be permitted. The facility is staffed by the Owner 24 hours per day. 6. The Contractor shall furnish and install sample taps on the PVC chemical clean pipes just above their connection to the filter effluent 20-inch tees. A detail of these sample taps, which shall be installed on all 12 filters, is provided in the Drawings. The taps shall be used to sample the filter effluent during the RAPID SAND FILTERS ' 11366-16 01/07/11 1 Process Performance Test. 2 3 7. In the case of continuous reading instrumentation, calibration shall be in 4 accordance with the Owner's Florida Department of Environmental Protection 5 (FDEP) approved operating protocol for the Treatment Plant and shall be 6 witnessed by the Owner. TSS/ turbidity sample collection and analysis shall be 7 performed under the supervision of an NELAC approved Environmental 8 Laboratory in accordance with the current method used to demonstrate 9 compliance with FDEP effluent TSS limits. The City of Clearwater operates an 10 NELAC approved Environmental Laboratory and may provide supervision and 11 testing analysis if available at the Contractor's expense. It is the Contractor's 12 responsibility to arrange the testing and analyses. 13 14 8. Influent and effluent TSS/ turbidity shall be determined based on the 72 total 15 hourly samples (one sample of the influent and one sample of effluent every 2 16 hours x 24 hours/day x 3 consecutive days = 72 samples per filter). Individual 17 influent and effluent samples shall be taken and recorded. At the end of the 18 three-day period, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a copy of the 1 19 test results. The Contractor will not be required to conduct influent TSS/ 20 turbidity sampling and testing, however, it will be assumed that the influent TSS/ 21 turbidity is below 20 mg/L/ 10 NTU. 22 23 9. Successful completion of the Process Performance Test shall be demonstrated 24 by the effluent water quality meeting the Performance Requirements will be ' 25 met. 26 27 10. . Individual filter effluent sampling may be suspended and postponed during and 28 immediately after a filter cell is backwashed. Individual effluent sampling may 29 be re-initiated after 60 minutes have elapsed following the last backwash cycle. 30 31 11. The Contractor shall furnish the results of all testing to the Owner and the 32 Engineer. The Contractor shall submit a record of plant flow, which will be 33 supplied by the City, sample volumes, sample times, TSS, and turbidity results 34 as part of the Process Performance Test. 35 36 12. The City's Plant Operator shall observe the testing process and note changes 37 made by the Contractor in the filter log. The City will be responsible for the 38 performance of the treatment plant. The Contractor shall coordinate with the 39 City on any and all changes made to filter operation during performance testing 40 and shall make no changes to filter operation without the consent of the City. 41 42 C. Conditions ' 43 44 The Process Performance Test and compliance with the Performance Requirements 45 set forth herein are subject to the following conditions: 46 47 1. During the test period, the filter being tested shall be operated by the Contractor 48 in accordance with 3.11 B above. RAPID SAND FILTERS ' 11366-17 01/07/11 1 2. The Owner shall be responsible for operating the treatment plant during the ' performance test period in accordance with the FDEP approved Operating Protocol. The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping such detailed records , as may be necessary for proper operation of the filter during the performance test period for the purpose of determining whether the process guarantee has been met. The said records shall be retained until the process guarantee has been satisfied and shall be comprised of all daily log sheets, operator notes, sample inspections, and instrument charts produced in the plant operation and filter operation. ' 3. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when the Process Requirements have been met, or of the failure of any filter to meet the Performance Requirements, specifying the respect in which the Performance Requirement was not met. 4. Should any effluent sample exceed the 5 mg/L TSS or 2.5 NTU turbidity Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall furnish a flocculant/coagulant chemical storage and feed system approved by the Engineer and re-conduct the Process Performance Test on that filter using the chemical feed system. 5. Following re-testing, should any effluent sample again exceed the 5 mg/L TSS or 2.5 NTU turbidity Performance Requirements, the Contractor shall perform a Particle Size Distribution Analysis of the filter influent flow. Should the percentage of particles larger than 3 microns be within 10% of the previously measured value, then the Contractor shall modify the filter and re-conduct the Process Performance Test until the filter effluent water quality meets the 5 mg/L TSS or 2.5 NTU turbidity Performance Requirements. D. Exclusive Remedy 1. In the event the Filtration System fails to meet the Process Performance Requirements, the Contractor's sole remedy shall be to replace or modify the filtration system to enable the filters to meet such Performance Requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366-18 01/07/11 1 1 1 SECTION 11370 2 3 COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEM 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 7 1.01 DESCRIPTION 8 9 A. This section describes the requirements for the compressed air system, including 10 compressors, electric motors and starters, receiver, all necessary piping, fittings, 11 valves, gages, switches and all necessary accessories, connections and equipment. 12 13 B. The compressed air system shall include a Gardner Denver-Reward Series, Duplex 14 Tank Mounted, model LHR10D-25 Reciprocating Compressor sized to deliver 75 cfm 15 at 125 psig, or approved equal. 16 17 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK 19 A. The Base Bid shall include replacement of all high pressure air system piping, fittings, 20 valves, connections, and components downstream of the existing compressor and 21 22 receiver assembly. 23 B. Additive Alternate B shall include replacement of the existing dual air compressor and 24 25 receiver assembly and the connection/integration of the air compressor into the filter operating system. Additive Alternate B shall also include the furnishing, installation 26 and operation of a temporary air compressor system suitable for operating the filters 27 28 while the existing air compressor system is replaced. The temporary system shall be removed after the new system is installed and accepted. 29 30 31 C. The components listed below are to be included in the project: 32 1. Stainless Steel Piping and Fittings (Base Bid) 33 2. '/2 - inch Polyethylene Tubing and Fittings (Base Bid) 34 3. Supporting Elements (Base Bid) 35 4. Valves (Base Bid) 36 5. Pressure Gages (Base Bid) 37 6. Air Pressure Reducing and Regulating Valve (Base Bid) 38 7. Compressed Air Dryer (Base Bid) 39 8. Compressed Air Filters (Base Bid) 40 9. Automatic Drain Valves (Base Bid) 41 10. Air Compressor and Receiver Assembly (Additive Alternate) 42 43 1.03 SUBMITTALS 45 B. Copies of all materials required to establish compliance with the specifications shall be 46 submitted in accordance with the provisions of contract. Submittals shall include at 47 least the following: 48 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM ' 11370-1 01/07/11 1. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of construction, dimensions and anchor bolt locations. 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins and/or catalogs of the equipment. 3. A complete, total bill of materials for all equipment with the O&M manual. 4. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts with the manufacturer's current price for each item. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPES, FITTINGS, AND TUBES A. Threaded stainless steel pipe and fittings in accordance with Specification 15065 shall be used in all locations upstream of the filter control consoles. B. Black polyethylene tubing, minimum 1/2-inch diameter, shall be used in all locations between the filter control consoles and the filter flow control valves. 2.02 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS A. Stainless steel flexible hose connectors shall be corrugated, stainless steel tubing with stainless steel wire braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing. The stainless steel hose connectors shall be rated at 200 psig minimum. 2.03 SPECIALTIES A. PRESSURE GAGES 1. Pressure gages shall be permanently installed in the system and listed for compressed air service. Pressure gauges shall be all stainless steel construction with a minimum 3-inch face and read from 0-150 psi. The gauges shall be Ashcroft Type 1009 with the duralife plus option or equal. B. AIR PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES 1. Air pressure regulating valves shall be furnished and installed and shall be pilot or diaphragm operated, bronze body and trim, direct acting, spring loaded manual pressure setting adjustment and rated for 150 psig inlet pressure. Air Pressure regulators shall be a New Gate Technologies R Series, a Wilkerson Model R16, or approved equal. C. SAFETY VALVES 1. Safety valves shall be furnished and installed on the air compressor system and constructed according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Code, Section VIII "Pressure Vessels," and be National Board Certified, labeled, and factory sealed. The safety valve shall be constructed of bronze body with poppet type safety valve for compressed air service. COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 11370 - 2 01/07/11 1 2 3 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 1 48 D. AUTOMATIC DRAIN VALVES 1. Automatic drain valves shall be furnished and installed with the air compressor and with the air dryer. The valves shall have stainless steel body and internal parts rated for 200 psig. The automatic drain valve shall be electrically operated and capable of automatic discharge of collected condensate and shall be Deltech series 1700 or approved equal. E. PRE-FILTERS 1. A Pre-filter shall be furnished and installed immediately downstream of the air receiver. The pre-filter shall be rated for 5-microns, have a removable metal bowl guard, and an automatic float drain. The pre-filter shall be rated for 140 psig and New Gate Technologies F Series, a Wilkerson model F16, or approved equal. F. COALESCING FILTER 1. A coalescing filter shall be furnished and installed immediately downstream of the air dryer. The coalescing filter shall be capable of removing water, oil aerosols, and particulates larger than 0.1 microns and have an automatic drain. The coalescing filter shall be Class 1 and be Gardner Denver Model RNC., Wilkerson Model M21 or approved equal. G. REFRIGERATED DRYER 1. A refrigerated compressed air dryer rated for 35 cfm at 100 psig and 100 degrees F, at a dewpoint of 38 degrees F shall be furnished and installed downstream of the pre-filter and upstream of the coalescing filter as shown on the Drawings. The dryer shall be Gardner Denver RNC Series, Wilkerson model WDRD 50, or approved equal. 2.04 AIR COMPRESSOR AND RECEIVER A. A packaged air compressor and receiver assembly shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the Contract Documents. The package shall be a manufacturer's standard unit and shall be factory assembled, wired, piped, and tested delivering a minimum of 74 acfm compressed air at 125 psig. Maximum pressure rating shall be 250 psi. The packaged air compressor shall be air cooled and continuous duty with 100% standby capacity. The receiver shall have a minimum 240 gallon capacity tank. B. The compressors shall be furnished and installed with all necessary power and controls integrated into the existing filter control system with power and controls identical to the existing system. The existing system is powered from the MCC and controlled from the filter PLC with individual starters mounted in disconnects on the receiver assembly. At minimum the new compressor shall be equipped with mounted magnetic starters and a duplex alternator. COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 11370 - 3 01/07/11 1 C. The compressed air system shall include a discharge air pressure gage, an intake air 2 filter/silencer and maintenance indicator, hour meter for both compressors, compressor 3 discharge air temperature gages, and control transformer as needed. 4 5 D. The receiver shall be a steel tank constructed in accordance with and meeting ASME 6 Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII, Division 1. The receiver pressure rating 7 shall be equal to or higher than the highest rated discharge pressure of the connected 8 compressors. The receiver shall be permanently labeled with all appropriate code 9 symbols, markings, and the pressure rating. The interior finish shall be corrosion 10 resistant. The tank shall include a safety valve, a pressure gauge, an automatic drain 11 valve, and a manual drain valve. 12 13 E. The Contractor shall furnish and install the packaged air compressor/receiver unit 14 using the manufacturer's recommended vibration control and anchoring system. 15 16 F. The compressor shall be reciprocating or rotary, receiver mounted with a maximum , 17 speed of 820 RPM. A belt guard shall totally enclose all pulleys and shafts. All 18 reciprocating or rotary units shall be equipped with a low oil level switch that shall 19 prevent the unit from operating with insufficient oil level. 20 21 G. The compressors shall be equipped with open drip proof 10 HP motors with a 22 minimum service factor of 1.15. The units shall be designed to operate to 120 degrees 23 F ambient temperature rise type motor, ball bearing, 480 Volt, 3 phase and conforming 24 to NEMA standards. The maximum motor speed shall be 1800 RPM. Each motor 25 shall be of sufficient size to operate each compressor without overloading and without 26 operating within the service factor. 27 28 H. The after cooler shall be capable of cooling the air stream within 25°F of ambient air 29 temperature before it enters the receiver. The after cooler shall be built in accordance 30 with applicable requirements of ASME Code for Pressure Vessels and be provided 31 with an automatic condensate drain trap. Each compressor shall be provided with an ' 32 after cooler. 33 34 I. The sound level of the compressor package shall not exceed 62dB (A) when 35 measured in the free field conditions at one meter. 36 37 PART 3 - EXECUTION 38 39 3.01 INSTALLATION 40 41 A. Piping shall be installed in accordance with Specification 15065 and this section. This 42 section shall prevail in the case of conflicts. Pipe shall be along the same general 43 alignment and elevation as the existing piping and shall be exposed. 44 45 B. Exposed piping shall be installed at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal 46 runs are prohibited unless indicated. 47 48 C. Piping installed adjacent to equipment shall be located that allows for the required COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 11370 - 4 01/07/11 f 1 11 1 1 1 1 11 service clearances. D. Air and drain piping shall be installed with a 1% slope downward in direction of flow. E. Nipples, flanges, unions, transitions, and special fittings, and valves shall be installed with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating. F. Only eccentric reducers shall be installed where compressed air piping is reduced in direction of flow, with bottoms of both pipes and reducers fitting flush. G. Branch connections shall be installed from the top of the main compressed air line. Drain legs and drain traps shall be installed at the end of each main and branch and at all low points in the system. H. Thermometers and pressure gages shall be installed on discharge piping from each air compressor and on each receiver. Valves and unions shall be installed to permit servicing and removal of all equipment and components. J. Pipes shall be installed free of all sags and bends. K. Piping shall be cut square and accurately with a cutter (sawing is not permitted) to measurements determined at place of installation and worked into place without springing or forcing the pipe. The pipes shall be reamed to remove burrs, being careful not to expand pipe and that no chips of metal remain in the line. L Care shall be exercised in handling equipment and tools used in cutting, reaming, and threading of pipe to prevent oil or grease being introduced into piping. The entire high pressure air piping system shall be cleaned and flushed with alcohol prior to placing into service. M. Hanger spacing shall be based upon NFPA 99. N. Rigidly support valves and other equipment to prevent strain on tube or joints. END OF SECTION COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 11370 - 5 01/07/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 11370 - 6 01/07/11 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 1 48 1 SECTION 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including all specification sections apply to the work. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations and includes requirements common to more than one section of these specifications. 1.03 ACCESSIBILITY A. Equipment and materials shall be installed allowing for adequate access for service and. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment with the final location of access panels and doors. Allow ample space to remove all parts that may be replaced or require service. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location. 1.04 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building components. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical installations. B. Coordinate the installation of supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning. C. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment above ceilings with suspension system, light fixtures, and other installations. D. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-1 01/07/11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1.05 NAMEPLATE DATA A. Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power operated mechanical equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location. 1.06 THIRD PARTY CERTIFICATION A. All packaged equipment shall be Independently Third Party labeled as a system for its intended us by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) in accordance with OSHA Federal Regulation 29CFR1910.399 and NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code" (NEC), Article 90-7. PART 2 - PRODUCTS-NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION- NOT USED END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 Li 1 1 1 F 1 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 2 01/07/11 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 f 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 1 SECTION 15061 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all the materials, tools, labor, supervision and appliances for and properly install, connect, adjust, test and place in continuous satisfactory service all ductile iron pipe and fittings at the locations and to the elevations indicated, specified or required for the proper completion of all work. B. Wherever Construction activities disturb existing conditions or work already completed, Contractor shall restore the same to its original condition in every detail. All such replacement and repair shall meet with the approval of the Engineer and the Owner. C. Ductile iron pipe and fittings are not necessarily completely indicated or detailed on the Construction Drawings. The Drawings are schematic only, and indicate pipe and fittings in a general way. It is the Contractor's responsibility to furnish all materials, pipe and fittings required. D. It is the intent of these Contract Documents to require an installation, complete in every detail, whether or not indicated on the Construction Drawings, or specified herein. Consequently, the Contractor shall be responsible for all details, devices, accessories, and special construction necessary to properly furnish, install, adjust, test, place into continuous satisfactory service, and complete the Work in an acceptable manner. E. Full responsibility for designing, fabricating, and installing the ductile iron pipe and fittings, for selecting materials of construction, and for demonstrating compliance with specified performance requirements shall rest with the Contractor, and through the Contractor, the Manufacturer and the Material Supplier. The Engineer's approval of 1) the manufacture and installation of the ductile iron pipe and fittings 2) the use of materials included in this Specification, and 3) alternative materials offered by the Contractor, shall not relieve the Contractor and Supplier of full responsibility for meeting all performance requirements and guarantees. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A. Piping shall be installed in the locations as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. All pipe, fittings, specials and appurtenances used for potable water piping shall be NSF-61 certified for continuous contact with potable water. 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. All Work specified herein shall be in accordance with the standards of the below listed organizations, except as otherwise shown or specified. Where reference is made to a DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-1 01/07/11 B C 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. D. i standard of one of these, or other organizations the version of the standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. B1,1 - Standard Specification for Unified Inch Screw Threads. 2. 1316.5 - Standard Specification for Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings and other special Alloys. Americ S i t f T ti M t i l ASTM an oc e y or es ng a er a s ( ) 1. A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 2. C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 3. C128 - Standard Specification for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate. C144 - Standard Specification for Masonry Mortar. C150 - Portland Cement. D75- Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates. E8 - Methods of Tension Testing of Metallic Materials. E23 - Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic Materials. G95 - Cathodic Disbandment Test. ' American Water Works Association (AWWA) ' 1. C104 - Standard for Cement - Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 2. C105 - Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids. 3. C110 - Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings. 3-inch through 48-inch for Water and Other Liquids. 4. C111 - Standard for Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile Iran Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 5. C115 - American National Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges. DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-2 01/07/11 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 [l 6. C150 - Standard for the Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe. 7. C151 - Standard for Ductile - Iron Pipe. Centrifugally Cast for Water or Other Liquids. 8. C153 - Standard for Ductile Iron Compact Fittings. 3-inch through 16-inch for Water and Other Liquids. 9. C600 - Standard for Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances. 10. C651 - Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains. E. NSF International, The Public Health and Safety Company 1. No. 60 - Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals - Health Effects. 2. No. 61 -Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to the Engineer of pipe, fittings and all appurtenances in accordance with these Contract Documents and Sections 01300 and 01340. The requirements of AWWA C110, C150, C151 and the following supplemental requirements are applicable: 1. Catalog-cut type dimensional drawings of all pipe, specials and fittings. 11 1 2. Joint and pipe/fitting wall construction details, which indicate the type and thickness of the wall; manufacturing tolerances; performance history; and all other pertinent information required for the manufacture of the product. 3. Details of fittings and specials such as elbows, wyes, tees, outlets, connections, test bulkheads, bosses and nozzles or other specials where shown on the Construction Drawings, which indicate amount and position of reinforcement. All fittings and specials shall be properly reinforced to withstand the internal pressure both circumferential and longitudinal, and the external loading conditions as indicated in the Contract Documents. Shop Drawings shall clearly detail special castings indicating all pertinent dimensions. 4. The Supplier of the pipe shall submit, through the Contractor, an Certificate of Compliance that the pipe, fittings and other products or materials furnished for this project comply with all applicable provisions of these Specifications. B. The Contractor shall furnish a certified affidavit of compliance for all pipe and other products or materials furnished under this Section of the Specifications, as specified in ANSI/AWWA C105, C110, C150, and C151; respectively, and certified copies of the following supplemental data for all pipe, fittings, and specials: DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-3 01/07/11 1 1. The Supplier shall provide, through the Contractor, a sworn statement that the 2 inspection and all specified tests have been made and all results thereof comply 3 with the requirements of these Specifications. 4 5 C. All expenses incurred in making samples for certification of tests and in the preparation 6 of any design reports shall be borne by the Contractor. 7 8 D. Approval of the Shop Drawings and the design report and acceptance of the 9 certifications by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to 10 ensure that the pipe is designed and installed in strict accordance with the Contract 11 Documents. 12 13 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 14 15 A. The Contractor shall furnish materials under this Section that are new, unused and as 16 specified, or if not particularized herein, which are the best of their respective kind, free 17 of defects and imperfections, and suitable for the service intended, subject to the 18 approval of the Engineer. 19 20 B. The Contractor shall provide workmanship that is first class in every respect, and have 21 the installation performed by workmen thoroughly experienced in such work. A neat 22 and workmanlike appearance in the finished Work shall be required. 23 24 C. The Contractor shall perform Work in accordance with all applicable laws and 25 regulations and in accordance with all applicable permits and easements. 26 27 28 D. The ductile iron pipe furnished under this Specification shall comply with AWWA C151 except as it may be modified herein. 29 30 E. Welders and welding methods shall be certified to a nationally recognized welding 31 specification for the type of ductile iron used to manufacture the pipe and fittings. 32 33 F. All test equipment used in activities affecting quality control shall be calibrated and 34 certified at not longer than annual intervals, unless otherwise specified or required, 35 36 37 G. All pipe shall be clean, sound, and without defects. No manner of repair will be 38 accepted, unless otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer. 39 40 H. The Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall perform all the testing and 41 recording that is required in these Specifications unless otherwise specified. 42 43 I. The Engineer shall have the right to determine the amount of pipe to be rejected as 44 defined in AWWA C151 Section 5.7.1 "Determining Rejection." 45 46 1.06 SUPPLIER'S QUALIFICATIONS 47 48 A. All pipe shall be manufactured, fabricated, coated, cement mortar-lined by a single 49 qualified Manufacturer at one location. Fittings may be fabricated and the lining for DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-4 01/07/11 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 force main pipe and fittings may be applied at a site other than where the pipe is manufactured, however, all testing and application of cement mortar linings and coatings shall be performed where the pipe is manufactured and shall be subject to inspection by the Owner, the Owner's Representative and/or the Engineer- The Manufacturer shall have at least 5 years experience in work similar in specification to that which is to be furnished on this project. The Manufacturer shall be required to show experience in supplying pipe in environments similar to those expected to exist on this project and that the pipe supplied in those environments has functioned satisfactorily. 1.07 SHOP TESTS A. All pipe shall be tested by the Manufacturer in accordance with AWWA C104, C110, C150, and C151, the Manufacturer's standard procedures, and this Specification. Shop Tests shall be subject to witness by the Engineer and/or Owner, and/or the Owner's Representative and certified test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor for approval. No lot of pipe shall be shipped to the site of the Work until acceptable shop tests are completed and approved. 1.08 INSPECTION A. All Work under this Specification, including but not limited to proof of design testing, shop testing and the production of the pipe, fittings and specials, shall be subject to inspection by the Owner's representatives and/or the Engineer in the Supplier's plant. All travel, lodging and meal costs associated with this plant inspection shall be incurred by the Owner and/or the Engineer. B. The Engineer shall have the right to order any pipe that, in the Engineer's opinion, does not meet the Specifications to be rejected and not shipped to the Project site. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All ductile iron pipe, including flanged, mechanical joint, push-on joint, restrained joint, and plain end pipe, shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA Specification C 151/A 21.51. Minimum wall thickness of pipe shall be calculated as specified herein. B. Where ductile iron pipe is supplied for the Project or shown on the Drawings, above ground pipe shall be flanged and buried (underground) pipe shall be mechanical joint, restrained joint or push-on joint, as required. C. All ductile iron fittings shall be marked in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 110/A 21.10 Section 10-9, "Markings on Fittings." All ductile iron pipe shall be marked in accordance with Section 51-10, "Marking Pipe" of ANSI/AWWA Specification C 151/A 21.51. In addition, each 18" diameter and larger pipe shall be marked by casting or stamping it with a unique identifying number that will allow the Owner to correlate the pipe to shop tests pertaining to it and to allow the Contractor to mark the laying DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-5 01/07/11 1 schedule in accordance with the requirements of this Specification. 2 , 3 D. Maximum pipe laying lengths shall be 20 feet with shorter lengths provided as required 4 by the Construction Drawings or to complete the Work and as allowed by AWWA 5 C151. 6 7 E. Shop cement-mortar lined pipe shall have smooth dense interior surfaces and shall be 8 free from fracture, excessive interior surface crazing and roughness. 9 10 F- Pipe joints shall not be bonded for electrical conductivity in accordance with these 11 Specifications and the details as shown on the Construction Drawings and the 12 following schedule: 13 14 1. All blow-offs, air valve assemblies, and lateral connections to or from the pipe 15 shall not be fitted with dielectric gaskets and/or couplings. 16 17 G. All materials that may be in contact with the water being conveyed (linings, gaskets, 18 lubricants, grout, disinfecting agents, etc.) shall be in accordance with and approved by 19 the appropriate NSF Standard 60 or 61. 20 21 2.02 DESIGN CRITERIA 22 23 A. The pipe furnished under this section shall be ductile iron pipe, cement mortar or 24 epoxy lined and asphalt coated, with EPDM gasket joints. The pipe shall consist of a 25 cast ductile iron wall, shop lined with Portland cement mortar (potable water and 26 reclaimed water) or epoxy (sanitary force main) and an exterior coating of asphalt. 27 28 B. The pipe shall be designed, manufactured, tested, inspected, and marked according to 29 applicable requirements stated herein and except as modified, shall conform to 30 ANSI/AWWA C104, C150, C151. 31 32 C. Where shown on the Drawings, or where required to meet the conditions shown on the 33 34 Drawings, the pipe, fittings and specials wall thickness shall be as required to meet the following parameters: 35 36 37 Water Main (All Sizes) 38 Working Pressure (Pw): 150 psi 39 40 Force Main (AII Sizes) 41 42 Working Pressure (Pw): 100 psi 43 44 All Mains 45 46 Pt Surge Allowance 100 psi r 47 Pf Field Test Pressure 1.25 times Pw 48 F Safety Factor 2 49 Wd Dead Load wHcBc (see note 1) DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-6 01/07/11 1 Ww Live Load AASHTO H-20 2 Minimum Bedding Type 3 3 He Height of fill over top of pipe (feet) See Note 1 3 4 w Weight of Soil (lb/ft) 120 Ib/ft 5 6 Note (1): All pipe of each size furnished under this project shall be designed for a 7 single condition representing the worst possible combination of dead load (Wd) and 8 live load (Ww). The dead load shall be computed using the greatest depth shown on 9 the drawings, and based on assuming a soil weight of 120lbs/ft3 and transition trench 10 width conditions. The determination of live load shall be as recommended by 11 AASHTO in "Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges." 12 13 E. Pipe supplied for this project shall be enclosed in a sealed polyethylene sleeve 14 supplied and installed to pipe manufacturer's specification. 15 16 F. Pipe supplied for this project shall be suitable for use with neutral pH (approximately 17 7.0) treated wastewater effluent meeting FDEP Part IV water quality standards 18 (reclaimed water), domestic raw sewage (force mains) or chloraminated drinking water 19 (potable water) as applicable. 20 1 1 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 TABLE 1 iameter Pressure Class (psi) Average Outside Diameter in Wall Thickness (in) Casting Nominal Tolerance 12 350 13.20 0.28 0.06 16 250 17.40 0.30 0.07 18 250 19.50 0.31 0.07 20 250 21.60 0.33 0.07 24 771 -200 25.80 0.33 0.07 36 150 38.30 0.38 0.07 2.03 PIPE DESIGN A. All ductile iron pipe shall have a minimum wall thickness, shown in Table 1, as calculated according to AWWA C150. B. Where threaded flanges are used on ductile iron pipe, the minimum thickness of the pipe wall at the last critical thread after threading shall not be less than the minimum calculated thickness of the pipe including net thickness, casting tolerance and service allowance. C. The Contractor shall provide design data on the pipe including calculations showing the separate and combined stresses in the wall of the pipe due to the design loads. 2.04 MATERIALS DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-7 01/07/11 i 1 2 A. All ductile-iron pipe shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C 151/A21.51. The 3 interior of the pipe shall be finished so that the Hazen-Williams friction factor will not be 4 less than 130. Each length of pipe shall be hydro tested to at least 500psi by the 5 manufacturer in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 151/A21.51. Additionally, 30" and , 6 larger pipe shall be hydrostatically tested to 75% of the yield strength of the metal, 7 based on the nominal thickness of the pipe. i 8 9 B. Castings and connecting pieces, such as bell and bell, bell and spigot, bell and flange, 10 flange and flange, flange and spigot, and flange and flare, shall meet the requirements ' 11 of ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10. Connecting pieces maybe fabricated. 12 13 C. The exterior of exposed ductile iron pipe, fittings, glands and bolts shall be field coated 14 with one prime coat of Tnemec 66, 3.0 to 5.0 mils minimum dry film thickness, a 15 second coat of compatible Tnemec Enamel, 4.0 to 6.0 mils per coat minimum dry film 16 thickness and a final coat of Tnemec 73, 2.5 to 4.5 mils per coat minimum dry film 17 thickness. Field coatings shall be applied in strict conformance with the coating 18 manufacturer's recommendations and Section 09900. 19 20 D. Pipe that is to be buried shall have the standard asphaltic outside coating specified in 21 ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51. 22 23 E. The weight and class designation shall be painted conspicuously in a contrasting color 24 on the outside of each pipe, fitting, and special casting after the shop coat has cured. 25 26 F. Epoxy lining for force mains shall be an amine cured epoxy containing at least 20% 27 ceramic quartz pigment by volume. The standard of quality is Proteco 401 Ceramic 28 Epoxy or approved equal. 29 30 2.05 JOINTS 31 32 B. Flanges and flanged joints for ductile iron piping shall conform to the dimensions and 33 requirements of ANSI Specification B 16.1. Where threaded flanges are used, they 34 shall be ductile iron and conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA Specification C 35 115/A 21.15. All flanged ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be rated for 250 pound 36 working pressure and shall be faced and drilled to match ANSI 816.1 Class 125 37 flanges unless special drilling is called for or required. Where tap or stud bolts are 38 required, flanges shall be drilled and tapped accordingly. 39 40 C All pipe flanges shall be coated with a rust reventive coatin a ifi d i . p g, s spec e n 41 ANSI/AWWA Specification C 115/A 21.15, immediately after they have been faced 42 43 and drilled. ' 44 D. Flanged bolt holes on each end of flanged pipe and fittings shall accurately straddle 45 the same horizontal and vertical centerlines unless special drilling is called for, or 46 required. 47 48 E. The Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the flanges of the pipe are 49 compatible with the flanges of the various components and/or appurtenances. DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-8 01/07/11 1 2 F. Flanged pipe, approximately twelve (12) inches or less in length, shall have flanges 3 cast solidly to pipe barrel. Flanges on pipe longer than twelve (12) inches in length 4 may be of the threaded type. Pipe threads shall be of such length that, with flanges 5 screwed home, the end of the pipe shall project beyond the face line of the flange. 6 Flange and pipe shall then be faced to give a flush finish to the flange and the flange 7 surface shall be normal to the axis of the pipe. Flanges shall be of such design that 8 the flanged neck completely covers the threaded portion of the pipe to protect it 9 against damage and corrosion. 10 11 G. Push-on joints for ductile iron piping shall conform to the dimensions and requirements 12 of ANSI/AWWA Specification C111/A 21.11 as they apply to push-on joints. 14 H. Mechanical joints for ductile iron piping shall conform to the dimensions and 15 requirements of ANSI/AWWA Specification C 111/A 21.11. Where stud bolts are 16 required, bells shall be drilled and tapped accordingly. The Contractor shall tighten 17 joint bolts by the use of approved wrenches, to a tension recommended by the pipe 18 Supplier. " 20 I. Where joints are in contact with liquids, or buried underground, the Contractor shall 21 paint all bolts and nuts with two (2) heavy coats of coal tar pitch and where joints are 22 buried, the joints, including glands and bolts, shall be wrapped with two laps of 8 mil 23 polyethylene film and sealed to the pipe with polyethylene adhesive tape. 24 25 J. Restrained Joints: 26 27 1. All buried pipe shall be restrained as shown on the Drawings and as specified 28 herein. Pipes subject to pressure or being fed by a pumping system shall be 29 restrained based on the pressures shown on the drawings or specified 30 elsewhere herein. Pipes subject to gravity flow shall be restrained based on 30 31 psi of working pressure. Restrained joint length indicated in the Tables included 32 on the Drawings represents the length on all sides of fittings and valves within 33 which all joints must be restrained. As a minimum, the joints at all fittings and 34 valves shall be restrained. 36 2. Restrained joints shall be capable of holding against withdrawal for line 37 pressures 50 percent above the normal working pressure, but not less than 200 38 psi. The pipe and fittings shall be restrained push-on joints or restrained r 39 mechanical joints. 40 41 3. The pipe Supplier's standard restrained joints shall be of the type utilizing cast 42 lugs, shop welded retainer lugs or retainer rings bearing against pipe shoulders. 43 Field installed joint restraint systems, such as Megalugs, as manufacturered by 44 EBAA Iron, or approved equal, may be used for restraining mechanical joints. 45 Field welding or grooving of the restrained joint or components shall not be 46 acceptable. Restrained joints shall be capable of withstanding full bulkhead 47 thrust that can be developed within the pipeline due to the sum of the working 48 and surge pressures. 49 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-9 01/07/11 1 4. Thrust blocks shall not be permitted unless specifically identified on the 2 Drawings. 3 4 5. Joints in tunnels and casings shall be restrained joints as defined previously. 5 6 2.06 FITTINGS 7 8 A. All restrained joint, flanged, mechanical joint, and push-on joint shall be ductile iron ? 9 and shall be manufactured in accordance with, and shall meet the requirements of 10 ANSI/AWWA Specification C 110/A 21.10 or C153. 11 12 B. Dimensions of flanged fittings not included under ANSI/AWWA Specification C110/A 13 21.10 shall conform to the requirements of ANSI Specification B 16.1, Class 125. 14 Fittings shall be short radius type were possible. 15 C. All fittings shall meet the requirements, as to dimensions and weights, as shown in the 16 current Edition of the "Handbook of Ductile Iron Pipe" of the Ductile Iron Pipe Research 17 Association. 18 19 D. All fittings furnished under ANSI/AWWA Specification C110/A 21.10 or C153 shall be 20 ductile iron and shall have the same minimum pressure rating as the pipe to which it is 21 connected. 22 23 E. Special fittings, where required, shall be of an approved design and have the same 24 diameters and thickness as standard fittings, unless otherwise required, but their laying 25 lengths and other functional dimensions shall be determined by their positions in the 26 pipelines and by the particular piping materials to which they connect. 27 28 2.07 INTERIOR LINING 29 30 A. Potable Water and Reclaimed Water Piping: 31 32 1. All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be lined with standard single thickness 33 cement mortar lining and bituminous seal coated inside, at the point of 34 manufacture, in accordance with ANSI/AWWA Specification C 104/A 21.4. 35 Portland cement for cement mortar lining shall be in accordance with the 36 requirements of ASTM C150, Type II cement. Shop cement-mortar lined pipe 37 38 shall have smooth dense interior surfaces and shall be free from fractures, excessive interior surface crazing, disbondment, and roughness. 39 40 2. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent damage to the interior lining 41 and shall repair all damaged linings to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 42 43 3. Test records shall be submitted to the Engineer for his review and approval. 44 45 4. The use and type of any admixtures must be approved by the Engineer prior to 46 their use. All material batching shall be by weight. 47 48 5. The method of placing and curing of the mortar lining shall be one with which 49 the manufacturer has experience and can demonstrate a successful history. 50 The lining shall be cured in a manner acceptable to the Engineer so that it will DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-10 01/07/11 provide a hard and durable lining with a minimum of cracks, surface crazing and disbonded areas. B. Epoxy Lining for Sanitary Force Mains 1. Prior to abrasive blasting, the entire area to receive the protective compound shall be inspected for oil, grease, etc. Any areas with oil, grease, or any substance that can be removed by solvent, shall be solvent cleaned to remove those substances. After the surface has been made free of grease, oil or other substances, all areas to receive the protective compounds shall be abrasive blasted using sand or grit abrasive media. The entire surface to be lined shall be struck with the blast media so that all rust, loose oxides, etc., are removed from the surface. Only slight stains and tightly adhering oxide may be left on the surface. Any area where rust reappears before lining must be re-blasted- 2. After the surface preparation and within 8 hours of surface preparation, the interior of the pipe shall receive 40 mils nominal dry film thickness of Protecto 401. No lining shall take place when the substrate or ambient temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. The surface also must be dry and dust free. If flange pipe or fittings are included in the project, the lining shall not be used on the face of the flange. 3. Due to the tolerances involved, the gasket area and spigot end up to 6 inches back from the end of the spigot end must be coated with 6 mils nominal, 10 mils maximum using Protecto Joint Compound. The Joint Compound shall be applied by brush to ensure coverage. Care should be taken that the Joint Compound is smooth without excess buildup in the gasket seat or on the spigot ends. Coating of the gasket seat and spigot ends shall be done after the application of the lining. 4. The number of coats of lining applied shall be as recommended by the lining manufacturer. However, in no case shall this material be applied above the dry thickness per coat recommended by the lining manufacturer in printed literature. The maximum or minimum time between coats shall be that time recommended by the lining material manufacturer. To prevent delamination between coats, no material shall be used for lining which is not indefinitely recoatable with itself without roughening of the surface. 5. Protecto Joint Compound shall be used for touch-up or repair in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2.08 EXTERIOR COATINGS A. The exterior of all pipe and fittings to be submerged in water and for underground installation shall be given a bituminous coating at the point of manufacture, in accordance with ANSI/AWWA Specification C 151/A 21.51. 2.09 PIPE APPURTENANCES DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-11 01/07/11 1 A. Threaded flanges shall be ductile iron and shall meet the requirements of 2 ANSI/AWWA C1 15/A21.15. Flanges with long hubs for flanged pipe shall be screwed 3 on the threaded end of the pipe in the shop. The face of the flange and the end of the 4 pipe shall be refaced together. There shall be no leakage through the pipe threads, 5 and the flanges shall be designed to prevent corrosion of the threads from outside. 6 Flanges shall meet the requirements of ANSI B16.1, and shall be faced and drilled to 7 that standard, unless special drilling is called for or required. The Contractor shall be 8 responsible for assuring that the flanges of the pipe are compatible with the flanges of 9 the various components and/or appurtenances. They shall be faced accurately at right 10 angles to the pipe axis, drilled smooth and true, and the machined faces covered with 11 zinc dust and tallow or equivalent material. The back of the flanges and bolt holes 12 shall be coated with asphaltic coating meeting the requirements of ANSI/AWWA 13 C151/A21.51, Section 51-8.1. Coating material shall be applied immediately after 14 facing and drilling. Where tap or stud bolts are required, flanges shall be tapped. All 15 flanged joints shall be thoroughly bolted through, stud or tap bolts of required size. All 16 flanged joints buried underground shall also be protected as specified under Section 17 2.08. 18 19 B. All bolts and nuts used in the finished work for flanges shall be of carbon steel and 20 shall conform to the ASTM A 307 Grade B. The ends of all bolts shall be finished to the 21 standard radius in an acceptable manner. All screw threads shall be "American 22 Standard, Coarse Thread (N.C.). Stud bolts shall be hexagonal, cold pressed 23 semi-finished and made of medium open-hearth steel. All dimensions shall be in 24 accordance with "American Standard, Heavy." Bolts and nuts shall be cadmium or 25 zinc plated at the point of manufacture by an approved process with a plating thickness 26 of 0.0003 to 0.0005 inches. All bolts and nuts furnished shall be delivered to the field 27 free from grease, rust, and dirt. 28 29 C. All nuts and bolts that come into contact with water or that are to be buried shall be 30 painted with two (2) heavy coats of an approved coat tar pitch, in accordance with 31 Section 09900. 32 33 D. Gaskets for flanged joints shall be full-faced type EPDM gaskets one-eighth (1/8) inch 34 thick. All gaskets for flanged joints shall be EPDM having a Durometer of 75 to 85 or 35 neoprene having a Durometer of 55 to 65. As an alternate, the Contractor may supply 36 the pipe Supplier's (manufacturer's) gasket such as American Cast Iron Pipe 37 Company's "Toruseal" gasket or U.S. Pipe's "Flange Tyte" gasket. Gaskets for bell 38 and spigot joints shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with AWWA C111. 39 40 E. Subject to the Engineer's approval, welded outlets shall be allowed; however, the 41 welded-on outlet diameter shall not be greater than one quarter the diameter of the 42 main line. 43 44 2.10 COMPRESSION SLEEVE COUPLINGS 45 46 A. The Contractor shall furnish and install where required or where shown on the 47 Drawings, manufactured compression couplings equal to Style 38 or Style 39 where 48 isolating dielectric couplings are required, as manufactured by the Dresser 49 Manufacturing Division of Dresser Industries or an approved equal. The compression DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-12 01/07/11 ' 2 3 1 5 6 8 9 10 ' 11 12 13 ' 14 15 16 t 17 18 19 ' 20 21 22 ' 23 24 25 ' 26 27 ' 2$ 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 ' 37 38 39 ' 40 41 42 ' 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 couplings shall consist of two (2) steel follower flanges, one (1) steel middle ring with pipe stops removed, and sufficient rolled thread, track-head bolts to properly compress the gaskets. After fabrication, the middle and follower rings shall be cold expanded to size and dimension. Thickness of the middle ring shall be suitable for the pressures specified, and the application, and in no case be less than one-half (1/2) inch thick. All parts of the compression coupling shall be galvanized or heavily cadmium plated at the point of manufacture and shall be epoxy coated in accordance with AWWA C210 or AWWA C203. B. The entire compression sleeve coupling unit shall be rated for working pressure plus surge pressure as a minimum. C. The Contractor shall provide field coating for buried couplings in accordance with AWWA C203 and these Contract Documents. D. Small deflections in the pipe alignment shall be allowed at compression type coupling joints, but such deflections shall not exceed three (3) degrees between any two (2) adjacent pipe sections. Where changes in line and/or grade in excess of three (3) degrees are required the deflections shall be made by deflecting multiple joints or by using fittings approved by the Engineer. PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 HANDLING PIPE AND FITTINGS A. The Contractor shall transport, deliver and distribute along the line of the work, the pipe, specials and appurtenances. All Work shall be in strict accordance with the provisions of applicable permits and easements. B. Pipe shall be loaded for shipment upon suitable cars or trucks that shall be provided with padded bunks with nylon belt tie-down straps or padded banding. In loading and unloading the pipe, more than ordinary care shall be taken to prevent any injury to the pipe, ends, coatings and connections. Such work shall be done slowly with the pipe at all times under control, and under no condition shall the pipe be dropped. Field repair of damaged pipe shall not be allowed, except for linings and coatings. The pipe shall be protected during shipping by covering or some other means acceptable to the Engineer to prevent contamination of the pipe and to protect the lining from drying during transport. C. All pipe, fittings, etc., shall be carefully handled and protected against damage to the lining and coating/interior and exterior surfaces, impact shocks, and free fall. All pipe handling equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Pipe handling equipment shall consist of wide belt slings, padded cradles, or other devices designed and constructed to prevent damage to the pipe or coatings. The use of forks, chains, hooks, or other equipment that may damage the pipe or its lining or coating shall not be allowed. D. In distributing the pipe in the field, each pipe shall be placed as nearly as possible to the point where it is to be laid, and facing in the proper direction. Pipe shall not be DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-13 01/07/11 1 placed directly on rough ground but shall be supported in a manner that will protect the 2 pipe against injury whenever stored at the trench site or elsewhere, Coated pipe shall 3 be stored on padded skids, sand or dirt berm, sand bags, or other suitable means so 4 that coating will not be damaged. Coated pipe shall be handled with wide belt slings. 5 Pipe fittings and specials which are placed in storage, streets or drives must be so 6 arranged as not to cause undue inconvenience to traffic and must be protected 7 sufficiently to prevent any damage including but not limited to the interior lining and 8 exterior coatings. Chains, cables or other equipment likely to cause damage to the 9 pipe, fitting or special coating or lining shall not be used. Pipe which has been 10 improperly distributed and which must be moved longitudinally along the trench shall 11 be reloaded on a suitable car or truck or lifted and swung by a derrick or moved by 12 such means as may be satisfactory to the Engineer. 13 14 E. If in the process of manufacture, transportation, or handling, any ductile iron pipe, 15 fitting or special receives any deformation to the pipe wall, ends or connections, such 16 pipe, fitting or special shall be rejected and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 17 18 F. In the presence of the Engineer, the Contractor shall inspect upon delivery all pipe, 19 fittings, and specials and mark as "rejected" all pipe lengths and fittings or specials 20 exhibiting signs of damage to the exterior coating, interior cement mortar linings, joint 21 ends, or pipe wall and the Contractor shall at the Contractor's expense immediately 22 remove the same from the job site, or repair to the Engineer's satisfaction. Any pipe, 23 fittings or specials deemed not suitable for installation shall be replaced in kind by the 24 Contractor at the Contractor's own expense. 25 26 G. The Contractor shall inspect each pipe and fitting to insure that there are no damaged 27 portions of the pipe. If any defective pipe is discovered after having been laid, it shall 28 be removed and replaced with a sound pipe or fitting in a satisfactory manner, by the 29 Contractor at the Contractor's own expense. 30 31 H. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean each pipe or fitting of any foreign substance that 32 may have collected on or in it prior to the pipe or fitting being placed in the trench. The 33 openings of all pipes and fittings in the trench shall be closed during any interruption of 34 the Work. As pipe laying progresses, the Contractor shall keep the pipe interior free of 35 all debris. The Contractor shall completely clean the interior of the pipe of all sand, 36 dirt, mortar splatter, and any other debris following completion of pipe laying, pointing 37 of joints and any necessary interior repairs prior to testing and disinfecting the 38 completed pipeline. 39 40 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPE 41 42 A. Ductile iron piping shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's 43 instructions. Pipe shall be laid only after the trench has been excavated as described 44 Division 2 of the Specifications. Pipe laid in trench shall be laid to a firm and even 45 bearing for its full length. Precautions shall be taken against flotation. The pipe shall 46 be backfilled with selected fine excavated material as shown on the Drawings and 47 thoroughly compacted to one foot above the top of the pipe and thereafter backfilled as 48 specified in Section 02221. 49 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-14 01/07/11 1 B. Precautions shall be taken against flotation. Pipe shall be laid directly on the bedding 2 material. Pipe shall be laid in the trench where the bedding forms a continuous and 3 uniform support for the full length of the pipe except that the grade may be disturbed 4 for the removal of lifting tackle. Bell holes shall be formed at the ends of the pipe to 5 prevent point loading at the bells or couplings. Excavation shall be made as needed 6 outside the normal trench section at field joints to permit adequate access to the joints 7 for field connection operations. 8 9 C. Each section of pipe shall be laid in the order and position shown on the laying 10 schedule. In laying pipe, it shall be laid to the set line and grade, within plus or minus 11 one inch. 12 13 D. The maximum obtainable separation between raw water, potable water, reclaimed 14 water ad sewage lines shall be practiced. A minimum horizontal separation of 3 feet, 15 outside to outside, shall be maintained between raw water lines, potable water mains 16 and reclaimed water mains or a minimum of 6 feet separation between sewage lines 17 and either water or potable water lines. In instances where water lines cross a potable 18 water main or a sewage collection line, a minimum vertical separation of 12 inches 19 shall be maintained between the invert of the upper pipe and the crown of the lower 20 pipe. In instances where a vertical separation of 12 inches between a raw water line 21 and a potable water main or a sewage collection line cannot be achieved, then the raw 22 water line shall be placed in a cast iron sleeve or encased in concrete centered at the 23 point of crossing. 24 25 E. Where necessary to raise or lower the pipe due to unforeseen obstructions or other 26 causes, the Engineer may change the alignment and/or the grades. Such change 27 shall be made by the deflection of joints, or by the use of additional fittings. 28 29 F. Except for short runs that may be permitted by the Engineer, pipe shall not be laid 30 uphill on grades exceeding 10 percent. Pipe that is laid on a downhill grade shall be 31 blocked and held in place until sufficient support is furnished by the following pipe to 32 prevent movement. 33 34 G. Contractor shall coordinate yard piping installation such that a minimum of 36 inches of 35 cover is maintained over piping at all times, unless otherwise indicated on the plans. 36 At crossings, a minimum of 6 inches of vertical separation between pipes shall be 37 maintained while also maintaining 36-inch minimum cover, unless otherwise indicated 38 on the Drawings. 39 40 H. Bedding and backfilling shall be in accordance with Section 02221 of these 41 Specifications and the details shown on the Construction Drawings. 42 43 I. Bedding shall be carefully worked into the area between the trench bottom and the 44 pipe wall to keep it round. Bedding shall not be deposited on top of the pipe, but 45 alongside it, and in such a way that it rises evenly on both sides. 46 47 J. All joints shall be assembled in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommended 48 procedures. In general the procedure shall be as described herein. Immediately 49 before jointing pipe, the bell of the pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned, and a clean 50 gasket shall be placed in the bell groove. The spigot shall be carefully cleaned and the 51 bell containing the gasket and the spigot lubricated with a vegetable-based lubricant. DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-15 01/07/11 1 The spigot of the pipe section shall then be aligned with the bell end and inserted into 2 the bell of the previously laid joint and telescoped into its proper position. Tilting of the ' 3 pipe to insert the spigot into the bell will not be permitted. 4 5 K, Restrained joints shall be assembled in a similar manner as described above except 6 that the restraining device shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's 7 recommended procedures. 8 9 L. Bolt holes of flanges shall straddle the field horizontal and field vertical centerlines of 10 the pipe, The Contractor shall clean flanges by wire brushing before installing flanged 11 fittings. The Contractor shall clean flange bolts and nuts by wire brushing. ' 12 13 M. The Contractor shall insert the nuts and bolts (or studs), finger tighten, and 14 progressively tighten diametrically opposite bolts uniformly around the flange to the ' 15 proper tension. The Contractor shall execute care when tightening joints to prevent 16 any strain upon valves, pumps and other equipment. After tightening all bolts any 17 stulls shall be removed from the interior of the pipe if it is not to be buried. ' 18 19 N. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reset or 20 replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and retest the joints. 21 Flanged joints shall be watertight. 22 23 O. Pipe stulls, if recommended by the Supplier, shall be left in place until bedding and 24 backfilling operations have been completed. After the backfill has been placed, the 25 stulls shall be removed and shall remain the property of the Contractor. 26 ' 27 P. After stulls are removed, the Contractor shall check the inside diameter of the pipe to 28 verify that deflection has not exceeded the allowable 3 percent. The frequency of 29 checking shall be as directed by the Engineer but in no case shall be less than the 30 frequency of soil density testing. ' 31 32 Q. All pipes shall be laid with a 2-inch metallic tape, appropriately color coded and 33 imprinted with the type of service, 12 inches below final grade and directly above the 34 utility, for identification and ease of location. The appropriate tape color codes are as 35 36 follows: ' 37 1. Sanitary Force Main: Green 38 2. Potable Water: Blue 39 3. Reclaimed Water: Purple ' 40 41 R. Care shall be taken in bolting flanged joints so that there is no restraint on the opposite 42 end of one piece which would induce stresses in the pipe or fitting or prevent pressure ' 43 from being evenly and uniformly applied upon the gasket. The pipe or fitting shall be 44 free to move in any direction while bolting, Bolts shall be gradually tightened, each in 45 turn, at a uniform rate of gasket compression around the entire flange. ' 46 47 S. No pipe shall be installed upon a foundation into which frost has penetrated or at any 48 time that there is a danger of the formation of ice or penetration of frost at the bottom 49 of the excavation. No pipe shall be laid unless it can be established that the trench will 50 be backfilled before the formation of ice and frost occurs. 51 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-16 01/07/11 ' 1 T. Pipes underneath structures and slabs shall be ductile iron and shall have a 6-inch 2 minimum concrete encasement for pipes 24 inches and smaller (except pipes 3 inches 3 and smaller, which shall be SCH 80 PVC). 8-inch minimum concrete encasement for 4 pipes larger than 24 inches up to and including 36 inches and 9 inches minimum ' 5 concrete encasement for pipes larger than 36 inches. Concrete encasement shall 6 extend a minimum of 12 inches past edge of structure or slab. 7 8 U. All pipe and fitting joints occurring within restrained joint limits as required on the 9 Construction Drawings, or as ordered, shall be properly secured to prevent thrust 10 forces from pulling the pipeline joints apart. All tied joints shall be harnessed by using ' 11 the pipe Manufacturer's standard restrained joint arrangements conforming to these 12 Specifications. Where approved by the Engineer, joints may be restrained by the use 13 of rods and clamps. The rods and clamp harnessing arrangements shall be installed ' 14 utilizing lugged fittings and pipe with saddle clamps placed to bear against the pipe 15 bells. Saddle clamps around the barrel of the pipe that depend on friction or set 16 17 screws to prevent sliding of the clamp are not acceptable. The pipe clamps, tie rods and their assembly shall meet the requirements of the National Fire Protection 18 Association Bulletin No. 24. After each tied joint is connected up, all pipe clamps, 19 tie rods and nuts shall be coated as recommended by the Supplier. heads bolts ' 20 , , 21 V. Careful inspection shall be made of every joint to insure a smooth continuous interior 22 surface. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean the interior of the pipe and remove any ' 23 obstructions that may reduce the pipe's carrying capacity. Following completion of 24 pipeline progressively or in sections, including completion of inside inspections, insofar 25 as might be possible or practicable, the line shall be kept partially filled with water. 26 27 W. The Contractor shall patch the cement mortar lining of any pipe that has a crack 28 exceeding the allowable crack as determined by the Engineer. Lining failures that ' 29 exceed 100 square inches and that have dimension greater than 12 inches shall be 30 cause for the pipe to be rejected. There shall not be more than one patch on the lining 31 of any one joint of pipe, fitting or special. 32 33 X. Wherever necessary and approved by the Engineer, patches shall be made by the 34 Contractor with a mortar of one part Portland cement and two parts clean, sharp sand; 35 all measurements to be by weight. No pipe requiring the lining to be patched shall be ' 36 installed until the patch is placed. Pipe thus patched shall not be installed until the 37 patch has been properly and adequately cured and approved for laying by the 38 Engineer. ' 39 40 3.03 CUTTING PIPE 41 ' 42 A. Whenever pipes require cutting to fit into the lines, the work shall be done in a 43 satisfactory manner so as to leave a smooth end, at right angles to the axis of the pipe. ' 44 Pipe cutting shall only be done by saws specifically designed for that purpose. After 45 cutting, the end of the pipe shall be beveled to the dimensions of the Manufacturer's 46 specifications. ' 47 48 3.04 COMPRESSION SLEEVE COUPLINGS 49 ' 50 A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean with a wire brush all surfaces that will be in 51 contact with the gaskets. DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS ' 15062-17 01/07/11 1 2 B. The follower rings shall be placed over the pipe ends, then the Contractor shall slip the ' 3 gaskets that have been lubricated with an approved vegetable based lubricant over the 4 pipe ends. The Contractor shall place the middle ring over the previously laid pipe ' 5 then insert the end of the joining pipe into the middle ring, and position both gaskets 6 evenly in the middle ring gasket grooves. The Contractor shall insert bolts in bolt holes 7 of follower rings and tighten nuts in the sequence and with the torque requirements of ' 8 the coupling manufacturer. After tightening all bolts the stulls shall be removed from 9 the interior of the pipe if it is not to be buried. 10 11 3.05 DRILLING AND TAPPING ' 12 13 A. Where shown on the Construction Drawings or where required, ductile iron pipe ' 14 fittings or specials shall be drilled and tapped to receive drainage outlets, air relief 15 outlets, or other pipe or plugs for pressure testing and/or chlorination. Holes shall be 16 drilled accurately and at right angles to the axis of the pipe or fitting. ' 17 18 B. Where size of the outlet pipe to be connected is such as to require bosses or 19 reinforcement saddles for making the connection, the Contractor shall furnish such ' 20 outlet connections with bosses or reinforcement saddles drilled and tapped as 21 indicated on the Construction Drawings or as approved by the Engineer. 22 ' 23 3.06 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING 24 25 A. The Contractor shall remove all debris, dirt, grease, mortar and other foreign material 26 by the use of soap and water or other solvent as may be required. 27 28 B. After each joint has been made the Contractor shall give all steel bolts and nuts a ' 29 chemical wash of the phosphate type followed by one (1) coat of primer especially 30 prepared for the finish of the bolt and nut installed. After this pretreatment, the 31 Contractor shall coat all bolts and nuts as follows: ' 32 33 34 C. Give all bolts and nuts that will be exposed one (1) coat of primer. ' 35 D. Paint all bolts and nuts that will be underground in accordance with these Contract 36 37 Documents. 38 E. All piping and fittings shall have its surface prepared and painted as specified in 39 40 Sections 09865 and 09900. ' 41 3.07 SU PPLIER'S FIELD SERVICE 42 43 A. Contractor shall, at no additional cost to Owner, arrange for pipe Manufacturer's field ' 44 representative to be on-site and provide instruction to each crew working during the 45 46 installation of a minimum of four push-on joints and four restrained joints The Manufacturer's field representative shall certify that the installations observed were ' 47 satisfactorily completed and all pipe installation crews were familiar with the proper 48 49 methods and procedures for the pipeline installations. , DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-18 01/07/11 ' 2 3 ' 4 3.08 5 6 8 9 ' 10 11 12 ' 13 14 15 16 17 18 ' 19 20 21 22 23 24 ' 25 1 1 1 1 1 FLUSHING AND TESTING A. The Contractor shall remove all sand and foreign matter from the pipeline as work progresses. The ends of all pipes shall be suitably closed, in a manner approved by the Engineer, at each break or pause in pipe laying, and at the end of each work day, so as to minimize the amount of materials that can enter the pipe. B. Prior to pressure testing, all 24-inch and smaller mains shall be flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter. The velocity of the flushing water shall not be less than 2 feet per second. Flushing shall be terminated at the direction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall dispose of the flushing water without causing property damage or violation of environmental regulations or permits. C. Prior to pressure testing, all 30-inch and larger mains shall be televised. All dirt and foreign matter shall be removed and the pipe shall be cleaned in a manner approved by the Engineer. After cleaning, the mains shall be re-televised. Pre-and post-cleaning videotapes shall be furnished to the Owner. D. Testing of lines shall be as specified in Sections 01625. END OF SECTION DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-19 01/07/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062-20 01107111 ' 1 1 SECTION 15064 2 3 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 4 5 PART I - GENERAL 6 ' 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install in the ' 10 locations as shown on the Drawings, the PVC piping, fittings and appurtenances as 11 specified herein. 12 ' 13 B. The requirements of this specification 15064 supersede relevant articles in Section IV_ 14 15 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM 16 17 A. Piping shall be installed in the locations as shown on the Drawings. ' 18 19 B. All pipe, fittings, valves, solvents and glue used for potable water piping shall be NSF- 20 61 certified for continuous contact with potable water. 21 22 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS 23 ' 24 25 A. All PVC pipe, fittings and appurtenances shall be furnished by a single manufacturer who is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the items to be 26 furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance ' 27 28 with the best practices and methods and shall comply with these Specifications. 29 1.04 SUBMITTALS 30 ' 31 A. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for review in accordance with the 32 General Conditions and shall include dimensioning and technical specification for all 33 piping to be furnished. ' 34 35 B. Submit to the Engineer, for review, samples of all materials specified herein. 36 ' 37 1.05 TOOLS 38 39 A. Special tools, solvents, lubricants, and caulking compounds required for normal ' 40 installation shall be furnished with the pipe. 41 42 PART II - PRODUCTS ' 43 44 2.01 MATERIALS ' 45 46 A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: 47 ' 48 1. Class-rated PVC pipe and accessories four to twelve inches (4"-12") in 49 diameter, where shown or as specified on the Drawings, shall meet the POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15064-1 01/07/11 requirements of AWWA Specification C900 "Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure ' Pipe." Pipe shall be Class 150, meeting requirements of Dimension Ratio (DR) 18 with ductile iron outside diameters. Each length of pipe shall be hydro- tested to four (4) times its class pressure by the manufacturer in accordance ' with AWWA C900. Reclaimed water (RCW) piping shall be pipe Class 200 meeting requirements of Dimension Ratio (DR) 14. 2. Class-rated fourteen inch (14") or larger PVC pipe and accessories for force ' main use only shall meet the requirements of AWWA Specification C905, "Polyvinyl Chloride Water Transmission Pipe". Pipe shall be Class 235, ' meeting the requirements of DR 18 with ductile iron outside diameters. Each length of pipe shall be hydro-tested by the manufacturer to two (2) times its class pressure in accordance with AWWA C905. , 3. Pressure rated PVC pipe smaller than 4-inch shall be 200 psi SDR-21 conforming to the requirements of ASTM D2241. Potable water main pipe shall have EPDM gasket push-on joints conforming to ASTM F 477. Force main pipe shall have SBR gasket push--on joints conforming to ASTM F-477. 4. PVC pipe less than 4-inches in diameter, which is exposed to view, shall be ASTM D-1785 Schedule 80 pipe with UV inhibitors. 5. All PVC pipe shall be new, unused and manufactured forthis project. Polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe shall conform to ASTM D-3034, F794, and D-1784 (PVC compound). The PVC pipe shall be manufactured by Johns-Manville Corporation, Certain-Teed Corporation, or equal. All PVC sewer pipe shall be green and conspicuously labeled with the manufacturer's name, nominal pipe size, applicable material code or PVC cell classification, standard dimension ratio number, product type, standard specification designation, and production record code. 6. Pipe shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Provisions shall be made for expansion and contraction at each joint with a elastomeric ring, and shall have an integral thickened bell as part of each joint. PVC Class pipe shall be installed in accordance with the Uni-Bell Plastic Pipe Association Guide Specification UNI-B-3-76, and as recommended by the manufacturer. 7. Pipe shall be furnished in nominal lengths of approximately 20 feet, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Pipe for potable water supply and accessories shall bear the NSF mark indicating pipe size, manufacturer's name, AWWA and/or ASTM Specification number, working pressure and production code. Pipe and couplings shall be made from Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B virgin compound, as designed in ASTM D1784. 8. PVC pipe shall be color coded as follows: sanitary mains - green; potable water ' mains - blue; reclaimed water mains - lavender, process piping - brown. Specific colors shall match Owner's standard colors as applicable. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS ' 15064-2 01/07/11 1 1 1 B C Joints: 1. Joints for PVC sewer shall be of the bell and spigot type conforming to ASTM D-3212 using factory installed, flexible elastomeric seals (gaskets). These gaskets shall be SBR and shall conform to ASTM F-477. Joints for PVC water pipe shall be of the bell and spigot type using factory installed, flexible elastomeric seals (gaskets). These gaskets shall be EPDM and shall conform to ASTM F-477. 2. The PVC joints for buried pipe shall be of the push-on type unless otherwise directed by the Engineer so that the pipe and fittings may be connected on the job without the use of solvent cement or any special equipment. The push-on joint shall be a single rubber gasket joint designed to be assembled by the positioning of a continuous, molded rubber ring gasket in annular recess in the pipe or fitting socket and the forcing of the plain end of the entering pipe into the socket, thereby compressing the gasket radially to the pipe to form a positive seal. The gasket and annular recess shall be designed and shaped so that the gasket is locked in place against displacement as the joint is assembled. The rubber ring joint shall be designed for thermal expansion or contraction with a total temperature change of at least 75 degrees F in each joint per length of pipe. The bell shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross-section elastomeric ring which shall meet requirements of ASTM D1869. The thickened bell section shall be designed to be at least as strong as the pipe wall. Lubri- cant furnished for lubricating joints shall be nontoxic, shall not support the growth of bacteria, shall have no deteriorating effects on the gasket or pipe material, and shall not impart color, taste, or odor to the water. 3. PVC joints for exposed pipe shall be threaded or solvent welded joints where called for on the Drawings, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Teflon thread tape or liquid teflon thread lubricant shall be used on all threaded joints to serve as both a sealer and lubricant. Threaded joints should be made hand tight (hard). When the joint is hand tight a strap wrench should be used to makeup one to two (1-2) additional full turns past the hand tight point. Do not use pipe wrenches or pump pliers on plastic pipe or fittings. Fittings: 1. Fittings for pressure rated PVC pipe smaller than 4-inches in diameter shall be solvent welded Schedule 80 PVC and shall conform to ASTM Specification D2464-69. 2. The manufacturer of the pipe shall supply all polyvinyl chloride accessories as well as any adaptors and/or specials required to perform the work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Standard double bell couplings will not be accepted where the pipe will slip completely through the coupling. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15064-3 01/07/11 2 2.02 RESTRAINED JOINTS 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 A. All buried piping shall be restrained in accordance with the restrained joint table provided in the Drawings. Pipes subject to pressure or being fed by a pumping system shall be restrained based on a 150 psi working pressure. Pipes subject to gravity flow shall be restrained based on a 30 psi working pressure. Restrained joint length indicated in the Tables represents the length on all sides of fittings and valves within which all joints must be restrained. As a minimum, the joints at all fittings and valves shall be restrained. B. Restrained joints shall be capable of holding against withdrawal for line pressures 25% percent above the working pressure but not less than 150 psi. The pipe and fittings shall be restrained push-on joints or restrained mechanical joints. C. PVC push-on pipe bell and spigot joints shall be restrained with the Uni-Flange Corp. Series 1390 Restrainer or approved equal. The restraining device and Tee head bolts shall be manufactured of high strength ductile iron meeting ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45- 12. Clamping bolts and nuts shall be manufactured of corrosion resistance high strength, low alloy CORTEN steel meeting the requirements of ASTM A-242. D. Ductile iron mechanical joint fittings used with PVC pipe shall be restrained with the Uni-Flange Corp. Series 1300 Restrainer, EBAA Iron, Inc., Series 2000PV Mechanical Joint Restraint Gland, or approved equal. The restraining device and Tee head bolts shall be manufactured of high strength ductile iron meeting ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45- 12. Clamping bolts and nuts shall be manufactured of corrosion resistant high strength, low alloy CORTEN steel meeting the requirements of ASTM A-242. E. Thrust blocks shall not be permitted unless specifically shown on the Drawings. 1 PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 HANDLING PIPE AND FITTINGS I A. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting, and unloading to prevent injury to the pipe, I Pipe or fittings shall not be dropped. Any damaged pipe or fittings shall be replaced. B. All pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a careful inspection just prior to being laid or ' installed, and no piece shall be installed which is found to be defective. C. If any defective pipe is discovered after it has been laid or installed, it shall be removed ' and replaced with a sound pipe in a satisfactory manner at no additional expense to the Owner. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before laying, shall be kept clean until they are used in the work, and when installed or laid, shall conform to the ' lines and grades required, 47 3.02 INSTALLING EXPOSED PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS ' 48 49 A. All piping and fittings shall be installed true to alignment and rigidly supported thrust 50 anchors shall be provided where required. Each length of pipe shall be cleaned out I 51 before erection. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS ' 15064-4 01/07/11 B. Sleeves shall be installed of proper size for all pipes passing through floors or walls as shown on the Drawings. Where indicated on the Drawings or required for liquid or gas-tightness the pipe be sealed with a mechanical seal equal to Link-Seal as manufactured by Thunderline Corp., Wayne, Michigan. 7 C. Concrete inserts for hangers and supports shall be furnished and installed in the 8 concrete as it is placed. The inserts shall in accordance with the requirements of the 9 piping layout and jointing method and their locations shall be verified from approved ' 10 piping layout drawings and the structural drawings. Pipe hangers and supports are 11 specified in Section 15094 of these specifications. 12 ' 13 D. All valves, fittings, equipment, and appurtenances needed upon the pipelines shall be 14 set and jointed as indicated on the Drawings or as required. Valves and 15 appurtenances are included in Section 15100 of these specifications. All pipe and 16 appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in such a manner as to 17 prevent any strain being imposed on the equipment. When manufacturers have 18 indicated requirements that piping loads shall not be transmitted to their equipment, a ' 19 certification shall be submitted stating that such requirements have been complied 20 with. 22 3.03 FLUSHING AND TESTING 23 24 A. Prior to pressure testing, all mains shall be flushed to remove all sand and other 25 foreign matter. The velocity of the flushing water shall not be less than 2 feet per 26 second. Flushing shall be terminated at the direction of the Engineer. The Contractor 27 shall dispose of the flushing water without causing a nuisance or property damage. 28 29 B. Complete PVC piping systems shall be field pressure tested after installation and 30 including all components to the required pressure for 2 hours. Any leaks discovered 31 during testing shall be repaired. The repaired component or portion must be retested 32 until the entire system passes the pressure testing. ' 34 3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING 35 36 A. All piping and fittings exposed to view shall have its surface prepared and be painted 37 as specified in Sections 09865 and 09900 of these specifications. Surface preparation 38 and shop priming is a park of the work of this Section. Pipe marking is included in 39 Section 09900, but it shall be part of the work of this Section to assist as required by 40 the Engineering in identifying pipe contents, direction of flow and all else required for 41 proper marking of pipe. 43 END OF SECTION I POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15064-5 01/07/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15064-6 01/07/11 ' SECTION 15065 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This specification covers the preparation of detailed shop drawings and the fabrication, inspection and testing of low pressure stainless steel process piping systems. The specific piping systems covered include the following. 1. 8-inch, 3-inch, and 2-inch Low Pressure Air System Pipe and Fittings. 2. 3/-inch High Pressure Air System Pipe and Fittings. B. All work shall be done in accordance with applicable standards as listed herein unless otherwise stated in the purchase order and/or attached addenda to this specification. Sound engineering practices shall be followed in the absence of specified standards or specifications. C. Fabrication of piping subject to the requirements of the ASME boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section I, "Power Boilers," is not covered in this specification. 1.02 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. ANSI and/or ASME Standards B1.1 Unified Inch Screw Threads B1.20.1 Pipe Threads (Except Dryseal) B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings B16.9 Factory-made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded B16.25 Buttwelding Ends B18.2.2 Square and Hex Nuts B31.3 ASME Code for Pressure Piping - Process Piping B36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe B36.19 Stainless Steel Pipe B. MSS Standards SP-43 Wrought Stainless Steel Butt Welding Fittings C. PFI Standards ES-3 Fabricating Tolerances STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15065-1 01/07/11 I 2 D. ASTM Standards ' 3 1. ASTM A 999 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Alloy and 4 Stainless Steel Pipe. 5 2. ASTM B 804 - Standard Specification for UNS N08367 and UNS N08926 ' 6 Welded Pipe. 7 3. ASTM A 403 - Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel 8 Piping Fittings. ' 9 4. ASTM A 276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Steel Bars and 10 Shapes. 11 5. ASTM A 312 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic ' 12 Stainless Steel Pipes. 13 6. ASTM A 403 - Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel , 14 Piping Fittings. 15 7. ASTM A 774 - Standard Specification for As-Welded Wrought Austenitic 16 Stainless Steel Fittings for General Corrosive Service at Low and Moderate ' 17 Temperatures. 18 8. ASTM A 778 - Standard Specification for Welded Unannelaed Austenic 19 Stainless Steel Tubular Products. 20 21 E. Documents referenced in each of the above are hereby incorporated by reference. 22 ' 23 F. The latest revision of all documents shall apply unless otherwise noted herein. 24 25 1.03 SUBMITTALS 26 27 A. The fabricator shall prepare the necessary detail fabrication drawings from the 28 isometric piping drawings. Pipe size and dimensions of the existing piping system ' 29 shall be verified and measured in the field before the drawings are submitted. 30 31 B. All piping shown on the isometric drawings is shown in normal assembly and operating 32 position. When specifically required, thermal expansion requirements and cold 33 34 springing will be shown on the drawings. 35 C. Pipe detail pieces shall be fabricated in accordance with the piece marks shown on the 36 drawings, unless otherwise required for handling and/or shipping. Changes from the 37 piece mark arrangement shown on the drawings shall require approval of the Engineer. , 38 39 D. If any conflicts exist between the Isometric Drawings and the Piping Material 40 Specification, such conflict shall be immediately brought to the attention of the 41 Engineer, 42 43 E. In addition to the above, the following shall be submitted: ' 44 45 1. The weight of each length of completed piping. , 46 2. A complete total bill of materials. 47 3. Applicable Material Data Sheets from the supplying mill. 48 4. Original copies of mill certifications for each heat of material to be utilized. ' 49 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15065-2 01/07/11 , 1 1 it L FJ 5. Original copies of certified design calculations. 6. Original written certification from the supplying mill stating that the fabricator has been pre-qualified for all required fabrication processes. 7. Original copies of certified test reports including a statement that the pipe, flanges and appurtenances have been fabricated in accordance with all applicable standards. 8. Recommended solvents and cleaning procedures for removal of protective coatings applied prior to shipment. 9_ Proposed welding repair methods. 10. A complete fabrication schedule. 1.04 APPROVAL OF PROCEDURES A. The fabricator shall submit a minimum of five (5) copies of his welding procedures and procedure qualification records to the Engineer for review. B. An approval of welding procedures is required from the supplying mill, in writing, before welding is performed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LOW AND HIGH PRESSURE AIR SYSTEM PIPING A. The Contractor shall furnish and install low pressure air system stainless steel piping, fittings, supports, hangers, hardware, and valves as shown on the drawings on each filter and down stream of the coupling located just above the floor in the compressor room. This includes the run and the valve serving the chlorine contact chamber. B The air headers shall be provided with welded flat or angle faced rings and backup flanges or roll grooved ends to match the existing piping and connect to new valves as required. C. The Contractor shall furnish and install high pressure air system stainless steel piping, fittings, supports, hangers, hardware, and valves as shown on the drawings on each filter and down stream of the air compressor receiver located in the compressor room. 37 2.01 MATERIALS 38 39 A. All low pressure air system stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be a minimum wall 40 thickness of Schedule 5 with welded, flanged, or grooved ends as required. The 41 anchors and hardware for anchoring the air header shall be type 18-8 stainless steel. 42 The air header shall be installed in strict accordance with the Manufacturers 43 requirements 44 45 B. All high pressure air system pipe and fittings shall be threaded and be a minimum wall 46 thickness of Schedule 40 and rated for a minimum of 150 psi. 47 48 C. All stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be fabricated from Type 316L extra low carbon 49 grade austenitic stainless steel. STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15065-3 01/07/11 1 D 1. Pipe shall conform to ASTM A-778 and be die-formed or rolled true to ' dimension and round within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16-inch. 2. The two edges of the sheet shall be brought to line so as not to leave a ' shoulder on the inside of the pipe. Fittings shall conform to ASTM A-403 or ASTM A-774. ' 3. Ends of pipe shall be true and perpendicular to the longitudinal axis with the edges deburred. ' 4. Longitudinal seams on pie and fittings shall be welded by either tungsten gas or the metallic-gas method. Welding rod or wire shall be of same composition or superior to the pipe and fittings material. 5. Weld deposit at the seam shall have a slight crown on both sides of the weld ' and no cracks or crevices shall be allowed. Excessive weld deposits, slag, weld spatter, and projections into interior of pipe shall be removed by grinding. The interior welds shall be smooth, even, and shall not have an internal bead higher ' than 1/16 inch. 6. All pieces shall be marked with gauge and type of stainless steel. 7. Pipe and fitting shall be immersed in pickling solution in Manufacturer's plant and scrubbed and washed until all discoloration and possible iron, picked up ' from manufacturing process, is removed. Fittings- 1 . Fittings for buried or submerged pipe shall be butt-welded, conforming to ASTM A403, class WP, same material and wall thickness as the pipe, conforming to ANSI B16.9. Elbows shall be long radius. 2. Fittings for above ground or exposed pipe shall be butt-welded, flanged, ' grooved, or threaded to match existing pipe, conforming to ASTM A403, class WP, same material and wall thickness as the pipe, conforming to ANSI 816.9. ' Elbows shall be long radius. 3. Flanges shall be Class 150 per ANSI B16.5. Flanges shall be welded on both I sides. 5. Field welding shall only be allowed when approved by the Engineer. All field welding shall be preformed by a Certified welder and shall be tested for ' verification of weld. 6. Pipe ends shall be prepared for couplings as required. , 7. Blind Flanges shall be constructed entirely of the same material (or better) as , the pipe (minimum thickness 3/8-inch). STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS ' 15065-4 01/07/11 L 1 2 E. Any material which is not in accordance with the classification shall be noted on the 3 Fabricator's Drawings as "out of spec." material. Material substitutions must be ' 4 approved in writing. 5 6 1. The fabricator shall provide Mill Test Reports for pipe and Certificates of ' 7 Compliance for fittings and flanges. 8 9 F. All materials shall be heat treated, welded, pickled, passivated and tested in ' 10 accordance with the supplying mill's requirements for the intended service conditions. 11 Any conflict between the supplying mill's requirements and these specifications shall 12 be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. 13 14 2.02 FABRICATION 15 16 A. Fabrication shall be in accordance with American National Standard, ASME 831.3, 17 "Process Piping" latest edition. Any allowable exceptions are noted on the Piping 18 Drawings or Piping Material Specifications. 19 20 B. Welding 21 22 1. All welding procedures shall be in accordance with the requirements of the mill 23 supplying the pipe and fittings. Any conflicts between the mill requirements and 24 25 those specified herein shall be brought to the Engineer's attention prior to initiating welding. 26 27 28 2. Welding procedures and operators shall be qualified for welding materials specified in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 29 IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications," latest issue. Welding Procedures and 30 31 Welder's Qualification Test records shall be available for examination by the Owner. 32 r 33 34 3. All welding shall be performed by welders or welding operators qualified in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding 35 and Brazing Qualifications" welder performance qualification. ' 36 37 4. All welding, brazing and cutting shall be performed in accordance with 38 Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA). 39 40 5. The fabricator's welding techniques shall be GTAW, GMAW, SAW and SMAW, 41 used either individually or in combination with one another. 42 43 6. . The design of weld joint, welding bevel, and reinforcement shall be in 44 accordance with ASME B31.3. 45 46 7. Prior to welding, the welding groove and adjacent base metal shall be cleaned 47 inside and outside of all scale, rust, oxides, paints, oils, or other materials that 48 may affect the welding. 49 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15065-5 01/07/11 1 8. The edges or surfaces of parts to be joined by welding shall be prepared in the , manner specified in the fabricator's qualified welding procedure. 9. The ends of piping components to be joined by welding shall be aligned as accurately as is practicable within the tolerances of diameter, wall thickness, etc. Where the misalignment exceeds 1/16" (1.6 mm), the inside diameter of the pipe extending internally shall be trimmed with the angle of the bevel not to ' exceed 30 degrees. However, this trimming shall not result in a piping component wall thickness less than the design thickness plus corrosion allowance. ' 10. Alignment shall be preserved during welding by tack welds, spaced as required, but with at least one tack weld in each quadrant- Tack welds shall be of the , same quality and material as the completed weld and shall be thoroughly fused with the weld beads. Otherwise they shall be removed during the welding operation. 11. The use of backing rings or strips is not permitted in the welding of girth or longitudinal joints. ' 12. The total joint penetration shall not be less than the thinner of the two components being joined, except that incomplete root penetration is permissible if it does not exceed 1/32" (0.8 mm) or 20 percent of the nominal wall thickness of the thinner component, whichever is smaller. The total length of such incomplete root penetration shall not exceed 1-1/2" (38 mm) in any 6" (150 mm) , of weld length. Welds on which 100 percent radiography is specified shall have complete joint penetration. , 13. The undercut and weld reinforcement of a butt weld shall be in accordance with Table 341.3.2 of ASME B31.3-For double welded joints this limitation on reinforcement shall apply to each surface of the weld separately . 14. On large diameter lines, where practicable, weld metal shall be deposited from both sides (double welded). , 15. Prior to depositing each weld layer, the previous weld shall be thoroughly ' cleaned to remove all oxide, scale, slag, flux, or defects. Grinding or chipping may be required to correct the defects. Peening shall not be used to close cavities in the weld metal. ' 16. Longitudinal seams shall be located to clear openings and attachments where practicable, and shall be staggered a minimum of 5t or 2" (50 mm) whichever is less in adjoining courses. Where necessary to add outside structural attachment to pipe across longitudinal seam weld, omit attachment weld where crossing seam weld and notch out attachment. 17. The fabricator shall bevel, or otherwise prepare joint ends that are to be field welded. , STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS , 15065-6 01/07/11 1 1 18. Alloy welding electrodes (filler metal) should be of the same approximate 2 analysis as piping material being welded. 4 2.03 ACCESSORIES 5 6 A. Bolts and Nuts for Flanged Fittings: 7 8 1. Bolts and nuts for flanged connections shall be Type 316 stainless steel 9 conforming to ASTM A913, Grade B8M, for bolts and ASTM A194, Grade 8M, ' 10 for nuts. 11 12 2. Provide washer for each nut. Washers shall be the same material as the nuts. 13 14 B. Gaskets for flanged connections shall be full-faced gaskets for flat-faced flanges and 15 ring gaskets for raised face flanges. Gaskets shall be EPDM or FKM suitable for the r 16 service of the pipe. A? 18 19 2.04 TESTING 20 A. Testing of the pipe and pipe materials shall be as outlined in Section 3.07 of this 21 22 specification. 23 2.06 EXAMINATION AND INSPECTION 24 25 A. Examination 26 27 28 1. The fabricator shall examine all welds in accordance with the requirements set forth by ASME B31.3. 29 30 2. The acceptance criteria for welds shall be per Table 341.3.2 of ASME B31.3. If 31 weld examination reveals a defect it shall be repaired per paragraph 328.6 of 32 ASME 631.3. Further, for any weld defect revealed with random or spot 33 examination, additional items per paragraph 341.3.4 of ASME B31.3 shall be 34 examined. 35 36 3. The Engineer and/or Owner's Inspector may specify further examination in any 37 category where he feels it is necessary. 38 39 4. The intent of these examinations is to provide the examiner and the inspector 40 with reasonable assurance that the requirements of ASME B31.3 and the 41 engineering design have been met. The fabricator shall provide the inspector a 42 certification that all the quality control requirements of the Code have been met. 43 44 B. The Owner's Inspector shall perform such inspection as deemed necessary. 45 46 47 48 ' 49 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15065-7 01/07/11 1 2 PART 3 - - EXECUTION 1 3 3.01 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT 4 5 A All pipe shall be delivered clean Cleani h ll i t f i . . ng s a cons s o remov ng all non-adhering 6 material such as loose scale, sand, weld spatter particles, rust, cutting chips, oil or 7 mineral spirits, etc., from the inside of the piping assembly by any suitable means, ' 8 Pipe shall not be coated with any protective or oil based coatings. 9 10 B. Open ends, whether plain, beveled, or flanged shall be protected from damage or 11 entrance of foreign materials with suitable protectors securely fastened. ' 12 13 C. Small pieces shall be boxed or wired together to avoid loss in transit. 14 15 D. Loading and handling shall be done with reasonable care and details braced where 16 required to prevent damage during transit. 17 ' 18 E. Marking 19 20 1. Each fabricated pipe detail shall be marked as follows, using waterproof paint, 21 or paint protected with a clear waterproof varnish. 22 23 2. On stainless steel and alloy material, the marker shall be lead, zinc and sulfur 24 free, and less than 200 PPM chlorides. 25 ' 26 3. The Pipe Detail Number shall be marked on each end of the detail on opposite 27 sides. The detail number consists of area number, piece designation, and line 28 number. 29 30 Example: 111-A-25, 111-B-25, etc. 31 32 4. The welders identification symbol shall be marked adjacent to each weld. Metal 33 stamping shall not be used on austenitic stainless and other high alloy type 34 materials. Additionally, stamping on carbon and alloy steel materials shall be 35 prohibited when the design temperature specified is below -20°F (-29°C). In 36 these cases, the welders symbol shall be applied in waterproof paint per 37 paragraph 9.7.1. , 38 39 3.02 FIE LD WELDING 40 41 A. In general, field welding shall be as specified in Section 2.02 Fabrication Welding. 42 43 B. Each welder or welding operator shall be assigned an identifying symbol. The welder's ' 44 identification symbol shall be marked adjacent to each weld he makes. The 45 identification mark shall be made with ink stencil. Metal stamping shall not be used on 46 austenitic stainless, nickel, titanium, or aluminum materials. In these cases the , 47 welder's symbol shall be applied with waterproof paint containing no lead and less than 48 200 ppm of chlorides. 49 ' STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15065-8 01/07/11 ' 1 L' 1 1 L- 1 1? 1 3.03 SOCKET WELD FITTINGS 2 3 To avoid possible cracking of fillet welds when the pipe is seated against the bottom of the 4 socket prior to welding, it is required that the pipe be withdrawn approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) 5 away from contact with the bottom of the socket before starting welding. 6 7 3.04 FABRICATION DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES 8 9 A. Flanged branches with raised face or lap joint flanges: 10 center of header to face of flange or lap ±1/8" (3.2 mm) 11 maximum lateral offset x-1/16" (1.6 mm) 12 13 B. Flanged branches with RTJ or tongue and groove flanges: 14 center of header to face of flange ±3/32" (2.4 mm) 15 maximum lateral offset x-1/16" (1.6 mm) 16 17 C. Beveled end branches: 18 center of header to end of bevel ±1/8" (3.2 mm) 19 maximum lateral offset ±1/16" (1.6 mm) 20 21 D. In fitting reinforcing pads to the curvature of the pipe the maximum allowable gap shall 22 be 1/8" (3.2 mm). 23 24 E. Flange faces must be square with the pipe. The tolerance measured across the 25 outside diameter of the gasket surface with a level and thickness gage shall be with 26 the following: 27 28 Up to 4" ±1/32" (0.8 mm) 29 6" to 8" ±1/16" (1.6 mm) 30 10" ±3/32" (2.4 mm) 31 12" and Up x-1/8" (3.2 mm) 32 33 F. Bolt holes shall straddle the vertical centerlines of horizontal piping and in vertical 34 piping the centerline of the detail (spool) unless otherwise specified, and shall be within 35 1/16" (1.6 mm) of exact alignment. 36 37 3.05 ERECTION 38 39 A. The piping systems shall be erected to conform to the piping drawings and 40 specifications. Qualified craftsmen shall perform all work in a neat and workmanlike 41 manner. 42 43 B. Piping shall be installed in a manner such that the resultant forces on the equipment 44 will be kept to a minimum. Particular care shall be taken at mechanical equipment 45 where piping forces can cause misalignment. Flange misalignment beyond the 46 acceptable tolerance shall be corrected by cutting and re-welding, and not by the use 47 of force on the bolting. 48 49 C. Pipe supports, anchors and guides shall be installed and adjusted in accordance with 50 the pipe support drawings and specifications to properly support the piping and to STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15065-9 01/07/11 1 1 control movements due to expansion of piping and equipment. Sufficient ties shall be 2 installed to prevent excessive sway and/or vibration of the piping and lines having , 3 outstanding unsupported corners. 4 5 D. Where necessary to provide piping anchor points that are not shown on the job pipe 6 support drawings, consideration shall be given to expansion and contraction 7 movements of the piping and equipment, with minimum forces and stress being 8 transmitted to the equipment. ' 9 10 E. When permanent pipe supports cannot be installed during erection, adequate 11 temporary supports shall be provided, so that piping is not strained or deformed during 12 the erection process. 13 14 F. All precautions shall be taken to assure internal cleanliness of installed piping. Flange 15 protectors, or other end closures shall not be removed until time of installation. Pipe 16 sections shall be inspected just prior to installation, to assure that all debris has been 17 removed. Wherever practicable, hydrostatic test water shall be drained quickly to 18 promote flushing for further cleaning. 19 20 3.06 EXAMINATION AND INSPECTION 21 22 A. Examination 23 ' 24 1. The acceptance criteria for welds shall be per Table 341.3.2 of ASME B31.3. If 25 weld examination reveals a defect it shall be repaired per paragraph 328.6 of 26 ASME B31.3. Further, for any weld defect revealed with random or spot 27 examination, additional items per paragraph 341.3.4 of ASME B31.3 shall be 28 examined. 29- ' 30 2. The Welding Inspector may specify further examination in any category where 31 he feels it is necessary. 32 33 B. Inspector shall inspect all piping systems including pipe supports to assure that the 34 installation has been made in a good workmanlike manner and conforms to the , 35 drawings and specifications. In addition, the work maybe subject to inspection by the 36 client's authorized agency such as an insurance company or government agency. 37 38 3.07 TES TING 39 40 A. Completed piping systems shall be pressure tested with air as specified in this section. , 41 Testing shall be conducted on all new low and high pressure air system piping and 42 fittings. 43 44 B. A general hydrostatic test of all completed shop fabricated details is not required. 45 46 C. Testing shall be conducted after the completion of all field welding by blind flanging all ' 47 open ends. For testing purposes, blind flanges may be carbon steel of the proper 48 pressure class. Testing medium shall be air. All defective welds shall be chipped or 49 ground out and re-welded to the satisfaction of the inspector. The cost of repairing ' STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15065-10 01/07/11 ' 1 ' 2 3 ' 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ' 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 ' 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 L leaky shop welds will be back-charged to the fabricator. D. Any appreciable amount of re-welding after checking and/or testing will require the detail to be rechecked for fabrication dimensional tolerance. E. The test pressure must be at least 150 percent of the maximum operating pressure or 50 psi gauge, whichever is greater and for a duration of 2 hours. F, The Contractor shall schedule the air testing and notify the Engineer 2 weeks in advance of the scheduled testing. G Any test pump(s), piping connections, taps, fittings, pressure gauges, compressors, and all necessary components thereof which might be required for the testing, shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. H All visible leaks shall be corrected. Any defective material or components and all lines that fail to meet the test shall be repaired and retested as necessary, until all test requirements are met. All repairs and retests shall be performed at the Contractor's own expense with no additional cost to the Owner. 3.08 STAINLESS STEEL A. Gas tungsten arc, gas metal arc, shielded metal arc or submerged arc welding (GTAW, GMAW, SMAW & SAW) may be used. An inert gas purge shall be used for the root and second passes in all welding processes except the shielded metal arc. B. Preheat is not required unless the metal temperature is below 50°F (10°C). When such a condition exists, the metal shall be heated until it is warm to the hand before any welding is performed. C. Post weld heat treatment (stress relieving) is not required. D. Bending of pipe and fittings is not allowed. END SECTION STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15065-11 01/07/11 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS , 15065-12 01/07/11 1.1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 ' 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 ' 19 20 21 ' 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 ' 34 35 36 37 38 39 ' 40 41 42 43 44 45 ' 46 47 ' 48 SECTION 15094 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. It is the intent of the project to remove existing pipe supports, hangers, and straps in the pipe galley, compressor room, and control area and furnish and install new pipe supports, hangers, and straps. This applies only to supports, hangers, and straps on the low pressure air system, high pressure air system, and chemical clean system piping. B. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals and install hangers, supports, concrete inserts, and anchor bolts, including metallic hanging and supporting devices for supporting exposed piping. C. All new pipe supports, hangers, straps hardware, clips, unistrut, and anchors shall be 316 stainless steel and shall match the number, type, location, and capacity of the existing supports. 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS A. Hangers and supports shall be of approved standard design and shall be adequate to maintain the supported load in proper position under all operating conditions. The minimum working factor for pipe supports shall be five (5) times the ultimate tensile of the material, assuming 10 feet of water filled pipe being supported. B. All pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in such a manner as to prevent any strain being imposed on the equipment. When manufacturers have indicated requirements that piping loads shall not be transmitted to their equipment, the Contractor shall submit a certification stating that such requirements have been complied with. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer for review, as provided in the General Conditions, shop drawings of all items to be furnished under this section. B. Submit to the Engineer, for review, samples of all materials specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All pipe and tubing shall be supported as required to prevent significant stresses in the pipe or tubing material, valves and fittings, and to support and secure the pipe in the PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094-1 01/07/11 1 3 4 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 I intended position and alignment. All supports shall be designed to adequately secure the pipe against excessive dislocation due to thermal expansion and contraction, , internal flow forces, and all probable external forces such as equipment, pipe and personnel contact. All pipe supports shall be approved prior to installation. , B. All materials used in manufacturing hangers and supports shall be capable of meeting, the respective ASTM Standard Specifications with regard to tests and physical and chemical properties, and be in accordance with MSS SP-58. C. Hangers and supports shall be spaced in accordance with ANSI B31.1.0 that the , maximum unsupported- span shall not exceed 10 feet otherwise specified herein. D. Unless otherwise specified herein, pipe hangers and supports shall be manufactured by Piping Technology & Products, Inc. or equal. Any reference to a specific figure or number is for the purpose of establishing a type and quality of and shall not be considered as proprietary. Any item in type, style, quality, design and performance will be for approval. 2.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR METAL PIPE A. Suspended single pipes shall be supported by 316 SS hangers suspended by steel from 304 SS concrete inserts, beam clamps or ceiling mounting as follows: 1. Hangers: Pipe Size Inches Piping Technology & Products Fig. No. 1/2" to 3" 50 3" to 30" 83 Above 30" See SPECIAL SUPPORTS, Paragraph 2.04 2. Hanger rods shall be rolled 304 stainless steel machine threaded with load ratings conforming to ASTM Specifications and the strength of the rod shall be based on root diameter. Hanger rods shall have the following minimum diameters: Pipe Size, Inches Less than 2-1/2 2-1/2 though 4 4 6 8-12 14-16 20-30 Above 30 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094-2 Min. Rod Diameter. In. 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/2 See SPECIAL SUPPORTS, Paragraph 2.04 t 1 1 01/07/11 1 3. Where applicable, structural attachments shall be beam clamps. Beam clamps, for rod sizes 1/2-inch through 3/4-inch shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. No. 229, and for rod sizes 7/8-inch through 1-1/4 inches shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. No. 228, or equal. 4. Concrete inserts for pipe hangers shall be designed to be used in ceilings, walls or floors, spot inserts for individual pipe hangers or ceiling mounting bolts for individual pipe hangers, and shall be as manufactured by Ramset/Red Head, or equal, and shall be as follows: a. 316 SS Multi Set II drop in style anchors shall be used where applicable and shall be used for hanger rods up to and including 7/8-inch diameter. b. Ceiling mounting plates shall be used, where applicable, and be for hanger rod sizes 1-inch through and including 1-1/4 inches, shall be Fig. 47, Fig. 49 or Fig, 52 as manufactured by Grinnell or approved equal. All pipe hangers shall be capable of vertical adjustment under load and after erection. Turnbuckles, as required and where applied, shall 304 SS be equal to Grinnell Fig. No. 230. Wall or column supported pipes shall be supported by welded steel brackets equal to Grinnell Fig. 194, 195, and 199, as required, for pipe sizes up to and including 20-inch diameter. Additional wall bearing plates shall be provided where required. ' 25 5. Where the pipe is located above the bracket, the pipe shall be set on a 0.5-inch 26 neoprene pad and U-bolt assembly supported by the bracket for pipes 4-inches 27 28 and larger or by a U-bolt for pipes smaller than 4-inches. U-bolts shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 120 and 137. 29 30 31 6. Where the pipe is located below the bracket, the pipes shall be supported by pipe hangers suspended by steel rods from the bracket. Hangers and steel 32 rods shall be as specified above. 33 34 7. Wall or column supported pipes 8-inches and smaller may be supported by 35 hangers equal to Grinnell Figures 103, as required. 36 37 C. Floor supported pipes 3-inches and larger in diameter shall be supported by either 38 cast-in-place concrete supports or adjust-able pipe saddle supports as directed by the 39 Engineer. In general, concrete supports shall be used when lateral displacement of 40 the pipes is probable (unless lateral support is provided), and adjustable pipe saddle 41 type supports shall be used where lateral displacement of the pipes is not probable. 4L 43 1. Each concrete support shall conform to the details shown on the Drawings. 44 Concrete shall be poured after the pipe is in place with temporary supports. Top 45 edges and vertical corners of each concrete support shall have 1-inch bevels. ' 46 Each pipe shall be secured on each concrete support by a wrought iron or steel 47 anchor strap anchored to the concrete with cast-in-place bolts or with expansion 48 bolts. Where directed by the Engineer, vertical reinforcement bars shall be PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ' 15094-3 01/07/11 1 grouted into drilled holes in the concrete floor to prevent overturning or lateral 2 displacement of the concrete support. Unless otherwise approved by the ' 3 Engineer, maximum height shall be five (5) feet. 4 5 2. Concrete piers used to support base elbows and tees shall be similar to that 6 specified above. Piers may be square or rectangular. 7 8 3. Adjustable pipe saddle support shall be screwed or welded to the corresponding 9 size 150 lb. companion flanges or slip-on welding flanges respectively. 10 Supporting pipe shall be of Schedule 40 steel pipe construction of the size 11 recommended by the pipe support manufacturer. Each flange shall be secured 12 to the concrete floor by a minimum of two (2) expansion bolts per flange. 13 Adjustable saddle supports shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. No. 259. Where used ' 14 under base fittings, a suitable flange shall be substituted for the saddle, Floor 15 supported pipes less than 3-inches shall be supported by fabricated steel 16 supports. 17 18 D. Vertical piping shall be supported as follows: 19 ' 20 1. Where pipes change from horizontal to vertical, the pipes shall be supported on 21 the horizontal runs within 2 feet of the change in direction by pipe supports as 22 previously specified herein. ' 23 24 2. For vertical runs exceeding 15 feet pipes and greater than eight-inches in 25 diameter shall be supported by the fabricated pipe support as shown in the , 26 drawings. 27 28 3. Where vertical piping passes through a steel floor sleeve, the pipe shall be r 29 supported by a friction type pipe clamp which is supported by the pipe sleeve. 30 Pipe clamps shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 262. Anchor bolts shall be equal to 31 Kwik-Bolt as manufactured by the McCullock Industries, Minneapolis, 32 Minnesota or Wej-it manufactured by Wej-it Expansion Products, Inc., 33 34 Bloomfield, Colorado. 35 E. All rods, hangers, inserts, brackets, and components shall be 304 Stainless Steel. 36 37 2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLASTIC PIPE 38 39 A. Single plastic pipes shall be supported by pipe supports as previously specified herein. 40 41 B. Multiple, suspended, horizontal plastic pipe runs, where possible, and rubber hose 42 shall be supported by ladder type cable trays such as the Electray Ladder by Husky_ 43 Burndy, the Globetray by the Metal Products Division of United States Gypsum, or 44 equal. Ladder shall be of mild steel construction. Rung spacing shall be 45 approximately 18 inches for plastic pipe and 12 inches for rubber nose. Tray width ' 46 shall be approximately 6 inches for single runs of rubber hose and 12 inches for double 47 runs of rubber hose. Ladder type cable trays shall be furnished complete with all 48 hanger rods, rod couplings, concrete inserts, hanger clips, etc., required for a complete ' PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094-4 01/07/11 , support system. Individual plastic pipes shall be secured to the rungs of the cable tray by strap clamps fasteners equal to Globe Model M-CAC, Husky-Burndy Model SCR or equal. Spacing between clamps shall not exceed 9 feet. The cable shall provide continuous support along the length of the pipe. C. Individual clamps, hangers, and supports in contact plastic pipe shall provide firm support, but not so firm as to prevent longitudinal due to thermal expansion and contraction. 2.04 SPECIAL SUPPORTS A. Pipes, requiring special supports as defined in this specification or shown on the drawing, shall be supported by means of a supporting framework anchored into the floor or curbing. The vertical piping shall be suitably secured to horizontal support members connected at each end vertical support members and spaced as required to provide a rigid installation. 1. The complete supporting system shall be as manufactured by the Unistrut Corporation, Globe-Strut as manufactured by the Metal Products Division of U.S. Gypsum, or equal. Vertical and horizontal supporting members shall be U- shaped channels similar to Unistrut Series P1000. 2. Vertical piping shall be secured to the horizontal members by pipe clamps or pipe straps equal to Unistrut Series P1100M and Series P2558. All components shall be of 304 stainless steel. 3. The assemblies shall be furnished complete with all nuts, bolts, and fittings required for a complete assembly. 4. The design of each individual framing system shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall show all details of the installation including dimensions and types of supports. B. Any required pipe supports for which the supports specified in this Section are not applicable, including pipe supports for above 30-inch diameter pipe; high temperature and high pressure (greater than 150 psi) shall be fabricated or constructed from standard aluminum shapes in accordance with Specifications, concrete and anchor hardware similar to items previously specified herein and shall meet the minimum requirements listed below and be subject to the approval of the Engineer. 1. Pipe support systems shall meet all requirements of this Section and all related Sections of this Specification. 2. Complete design details of the entire pipe support systems shall be provided, for approval by the Engineer. 3. The pipe support system shall not impose loads on the supporting structures, in excess of the loads for which the supporting structure is designed. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094-5 01/07/11 1 3 4 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 4. Hanger rods for above 30-inch pipe shall be a minimum of 1-1/2-inch diameter , and shall not exceed the Manufacturer's standard maximum recommended safe load. 2.05 PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORT SPACING A. Pipe hanger and support spacing shall be in accordance with ANSI 831.1.1.0 and MSS SP-69. In no case shall the spacing of hangers or supports exceed the following: Maximum unsupported pipe span (FEET) Nominal Pipe Size - Ductile Iron Steel PVC-1 and PVC-2 Inches Sch. 80 1 /2 N/A 5 3.5 3/4 N/A 6 3.5 1 N/A 7 3.8 1-1/4 N/A 7 4.0 1-1/2 - 3 N/A 9 4.0 4 7 10 5.5 5-10 10 10 10 12-48 10 per manufacturer or 10 as shown on drawin s PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All pipes, horizontal and vertical, shall be rigidly supported from the building structure by approved supports. Supports shall be provided at changes in direction and elsewhere as shown in the Drawings or specified herein. No piping shall be supported from other piping or from metal stairs, ladders and walkways, unless it is so indicated on the Drawings, or specifically directed or authorized by the Engineer. B. All pipe supports shall be designed with liberal strength and stiffness to support the respective pipes under the maximum combination of peak loading conditions to include pipe weight, liquid weight, liquid movement, and pressure forces, thermal expansion and contraction, vibrations and all probable externally applied forces. Prior to installation, all pipe supports shall be approved by the Engineer. C. Pipe supports shall be provided to minimize lateral forces through valves, both sides of split type couplings, and sleeve type couplings and to minimize all pipe forces on pump housings. Pump housings shall not be utilized to support connecting pipes. D. Pipe supports shall be provided as follows: PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094-6 01/07/11 1 1 1. Cast iron and ductile iron shall be supported at a maximum support spacing of 2 10 feet-0-inches with a minimum of one support per pipe section at the joints. 3 4 2. Supports for multiple PVC pipes shall be continuous wherever possible. 5 Individually supported PVC pipes shall be supported as recommended by the 6 manufacturer except that support spacing shall not exceed five (5) feet. 7 8 3. Support spacing for galvanized steel pipe and copper tubing shall not exceed 9 five (5) feet. 10 11 4. All vertical pipes shall be supported at each floor or at intervals of at least 15 12 feet by approved pipe collars, clamps, brackets or wall rests, and at all points 13 necessary to insure rigid construction. 14 15 E. Pipe supports shall not result in point loadings, but shall distribute pipe loads evenly 16 along the pipe circumference. 17 18 F. Effects of thermal expansion and contraction of the pipe shall be accounted for in pipe 19 support selection and installation. 20 21 G. Inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be installed on forms before concrete is 22 poured. Before setting these items, all Drawings and figures shall be checked which 23 have a direct bearing on the pipe location. Responsibility for the proper location of 24 25 pipe supports is included under this Section. 26 H. Continuous metal inserts shall be embedded flush with the concrete surface. 27 28 3.02 PRIME COATING 29 30 A. Prior to prime coating, all pipe hangers and supports shall be thoroughly clean, dry, 1131 and free from all mill-scale, rust, grease, dirt, paint and other foreign substances to the 32 satisfaction of the Engineer. 33 34 B. All submerged pipe supports shall be prime coated with Koppers 654 Epoxy Primer or 35 equal. All other pipe supports shall be prime coated with Rust-Inhibitive Primer No. 36 621 as manufactured by Koppers Company, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa. or equal. 37 38 C. Finish coating shall be compatible with the prime coating used and shall be applied, as 39 specified in Section 09900. 140 41 3.03 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTROLYSIS 42 143 A. Where dissimilar metals are used in conjunction with each other, suitable insulation 44 shall be provided. between adjoining surfaces to eliminate direct contact and any 45 resulting electrolysis. The insulation shall be bituminous impregnated felt, heavy 146 bituminous coatings, nonmetallic separators or washers, or upon approval by the 47 Engineer. 48 END OF SECTION PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094-7 01/07/11 u THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 F-1 r 1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094-8 01/07/11 SECTION 15100 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 1 1 PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for complete and ready operation of all valves and appurtenances shown on the Construction Drawings and as specified herein. B. All valves and appurtenances shall be of the size shown on the drawings. C. All new 2-inch air valves, 3-inch air valves, 18-inch wafer valves, and 20-inch wafer type valves shall be from the same manufacturer. D. All new pneumatic actuators shall be from the same manufacturer. 1 1 1 E. All valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the manufacturer cast in raised letters on some appropriate part of the body. F. The equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Resilient seated and resilient wedge gate valves 2. Ball valves 3. Butterfly valves for wastewater service 4. Butterfly valves for air service 5. Eccentric plug valves 6. Valve Actuators 7. Air release valves 8. Air and vacuum valves 9. Flange adapter coupling 10. Flexible type expansion Joints 11. Flexible couplings 12. Unions 13. Pressure and vacuum gauges 14. Quick connect couplings 15. Cushioned Swing check valve with bottom mounted oil buffer 15. Slanting disk check valve 16 Swing check valve 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS A. All of the equipment and materials specified herein are intended to be standard for use in controlling the flow of potable water, wastewater, reclaimed water, chemicals, air, etc., depending on the applications. VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-1 01 /28/11 B. Unless otherwise specified herein or on the drawings all resilient seats, seals, and other sealing components of valves and flexible fittings shall be EPDM. C. All replacement valves are to be provided with an actuator to match the type of the existing actuator and mounted in an identical fashion as the existing actuator. 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS t A. All of the types of valves and appurtenances shall be products of well-established reputable firms who are fully experienced and qualified in the manufacture of the ' particular equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with these Specifications, as applicable. ' 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Complete shop drawings of all valves and appurtenances shall be submitted to the ' Engineer for review. B. Air actuated valves shall have information on opening and closing rates submitted to the Engineer for review. C. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and approval a Butterfly Valve ' Replacement Plan that includes a valve schedule. The Plan shall identify the brand name, model type, and lay length of all existing and proposed replacement valves. ' The Plan shall consist of a step by step procedure proposed to be used by the Contractor in replacing the existing filter valves, including modifications to the filter gallery piping, so as to maintain the required filters in service as specified in Section IV ' Scope of Work. 1.05 TOOLS A. Special tools, if required for normal operation and maintenance, shall be supplied with ' the equipment. 1.06 VALVE INDICES , A. The Contractor shall submit a valve schedule containing all valves required for the work. The schedule shall the location, type, a number, words to identify the valve's function, and the normal operating position for each valve. PART II - PRODUCTS , 2.01 RESILIENT SEATED AND RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES A. All gate valves 4 inches to 24 inches in.diameter shall be resilient seated or resilient 1 wedge, manufactured to meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA C515 of latest VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-2 01/28/11 revision and in accordance with the following Specifications. Valves shall have an unobstructed waterway equal to or greater than the full nominal diameter of the valve. ' B. The valves are to be non-rising stem with the stem made of cast, forged or rolled bronze shown in AWWA C515. Two stem seals shall be provided and shall be EPDM of the O-ring type, one above and one below the thrust collar. ' C. The sealing mechanism shall consist of a cast iron gate having an EPDM coating. The resilient sealing mechanism shall provide zero leakage at the valve design pressure ' when installed with the line flow in either direction. D. The valve body, bonnet, and bonnet cover shall be cast iron ASTM A126, Class B. All ' ferrous surfaces inside and outside shall have a minimum 10 mil fusion-bonded epoxy coating. A handwheel or wrench nut shall be provided for operating the valve. All Valves are to be tested in strict accordance with AWWA C515. E. Handwheels or chain wheels shall be turned left or counterclockwise to open the valves. Handwheels shall be of ample size and shall have an arrow and the word ' OPEN cast thereon to indicate the direction of opening. F. Valves shall have a factory-applied, internal and external, fusion bonded epoxy resin ' coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to all applicable requirements of the American Water Works Association Standard C550-90 entitled "Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants". ' G. Valves shall be equal to those as manufactured by American, M&H, Mueller, Kennedy, ' Clow, or equal. 2.02 BALL VALVES ' A. PVC ball valves shall be of Type 1, Grade 1 PVC with union, socket, threaded or flanged ends as required. Ball valves shall be full port, full flow, all plastic construction, ' 150 psi rated with Teflon seat seals and T-handles. PVC ball valves shall be as manufactured by Spears, Plastiline, Hayward, or equal. B. True union, vented, PVC ball valves shall be used on the chemical clean system and shall be manufactured to ASTM F 1970 specifications and constructed from PVC Type I, ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification 1245. All O-rings shall be Latharge Viton. All ' valves shall have stem with double O-ring seals. All valve handles shall be polypropylene with built-in lockout mechanism. All valve union nuts shall have Buttress threads. All seal carriers shall be Safe-T-Blocked. All valve components shall be ' replaceable. All valves shall be certified by NSF International for use in potable water service. All 1/2" through 2" valves shall be pressure rated to 235 psi, all 2-1/2" through 8" and all flanged valves shall be pressure rated to 150 psi for water at 73° F. Valves shall have a vent hole in the ball to equalize internal fluid pressures. Install valve with ball vent on the pressure (upstream) side when in closed position. Vented ball valves shall be True Union 2000 Industrial Ball Valves as manufactured by Spears, True VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-3 01/28/11 Union Z-Ball Valves by Hayward, or Engineer approved equal. ' C. Bronze, brass or stainless steel ball valves shall be of 2-piece (1" and smaller) or a- piece (1-1/2" and larger) construction. Valves shall be rated for 150 psi saturated ' steam pressure and 400 psi WOG pressure. Valves shall have stainless steel, bronze or brass body, stainless steel or chrome plated brass ball, replaceable Teflon or TFE seats and seals, blowout proof stem and vinyl covered steel handle. All end , connections shall be threaded. 2.03 D. All valves shall be mounted in such a position that valve position indicators are plainly , visible when standing on the floor. BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR WASTEWATER SERVICE I A. Replacement butterfly valves for the Marshall Street filters shall be supplied with identical mounting types as those they are replacing. Existing wafer type valves shall ' be replaced with wafer type valves and existing flange type valves shall be replaced with flange type valves. B. The 18-inch and 20-inch replacement butterfly valves for the Marshall Street filters ' shall be of the resilient seated, wafer type valves with offset discs type in which the seat is uninterrupted by the shaft around its entire circumference. The seat material ' shall be NBR. Valves shall be Dezurik Model BOS, or approved equal. C. All other butterfly valves shall meet, exceed, or otherwise conform to the AWWA ' Standard Specifications for Resilient Seated Butterfly Valves, Designation C504, except as hereinafter specified. Valves, except as specified hereinafter, shall be Class 150A or B, and equal to those manufactured by Bray, Henry Pratt Company, DeZurik, ' American, Kennedy, Mueller, Homestead, or equal. The valve discs shall be constructed of cast iron conforming to ASTM A-48, Class 40, ASTM A-126, Class B or ductile iron conforming ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 for Class 150 or less. Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 shall he provided for all Class 250 valves. D. All butterfly valves shall be in accordance with Table 2 of above-mentioned AWWA Specification for short-body valves. Adequate two-way thrust bearings shall be provided. Flange drilling shall be in accordance with ANSI B16.1. , E. Valve seats for flanged valves shall be EPDM synthetic rubber compound. Valve seats 24 inches and larger shall be field adjustable and replaceable without dismounting ' operator disc or shaft and without removing the valve from the line. All retaining segments and adjusting devices shall be of corrosion resistant material with stainless Nylock screws and be capable of a 1/8-inch adjustment. Valves 20 inches and smaller ' shall have bonded or mechanically restrained seats as outlined in AWWA C504 except for the wafer type valves. Where elastomer seat is mounted on the valve body, the mating edge of the valve disc shall be 18-8 stainless steel or Nickel-Chrome, 80-20%. , Where elastomer seat is mounted on the valve disc, the valve body shall be fitted with VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-4 01/28/11 ' an 18-8 stainless steel seat offset from the shaft, mechanically restrained and covering 360 degrees of the peripheral opening or seating surface. F. The valve body shall be constructed of ductile iron or close grain cast iron per ASTM A-126, Class B with integrally cast hubs for shaft bearing housings of the through boss-type. G. The valve shaft shall be turned, ground, and polished constructed of 18-8, ASTM A-276, Type 304 stainless steel and designed for both torsional and shearing stresses when the valve is operated under its greatest dynamic or seating torque. Shaft shall be of either a one-piece unit extending full size through the valve disc and valve bearing or it may be of a stub shaft design. Shaft bearings shall be Teflon or nylon, self-lubricated type. H. All valves shall be subject to hydrostatic and leakage tests at the point of manufacture. The valves shall be tested in conformance with AWWA C-504. Gearing for the operators shall be totally enclosed in a gear case in accordance with Paragraph 3.8 of the above-mentioned AWWA Standard Specification. J. The manufacturer shall certify that the required tests on the various materials and on t the completed valves have been satisfactory and that the valves conform with all requirements of the Specification and the AWWA standard. ' K. Where indicated on the Construction Drawings extension stems, floor stands, couplings, stem guides and floor boxes, as required, shall be furnished and installed. L. Valves shall have a factory-applied, internal and external, fusion bonded epoxy resin coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to all applicable requirements of the American Water Works Association Standard C550-90 entitled "Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants". 2.04 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES A. All plug valves shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with standard ANSI/AWWA C517 Table 1, Resilient-Seated Cast-Iron Eccentric Plug Valves, of the latest revision unless otherwise specified. MANUFACTURER shall provide affidavit of compliance with AWWA Standard. Valves shall be as manufactured by DeZurik, Val- Matic, Homestead or approved equal. B. Plug valves shall be tested in accordance with AWWA C504, latest edition. Each valve shall be performance tested in accordance with Paragraph 5.2 of the above reference and shall be given a leakage test and hydrostatic test as described in Paragraphs 5.2.2 and 5.2.3 of the above reference. The leakage test shall be applied to the face of the plug tending to unseat the valve. The manufacturer shall furnish certified copies of reports covering proof of design testing as described in Section 5.2.4 of the above reference. VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-5 01/28/11 C. Valves shall be of the non-lubricated eccentric type with resilient faced plugs and shall , be furnished with end connections as shown on the plans. Flanged valves shall be faced and drilled to the ANSI 1316.1 125/150 lb. standard. Mechanical joint ends shall be in full compliance with ANSI/ AWWA C111/A21.11. Screwed ends shall be to the , NPT standard. D. Valve bodies shall be of ASTM A126 Class B or ASTM A48, Class 40 cast iron. ' E, Port areas for valves 20 inches and smaller shall be a minimum of 80 percent of full pipe area. Valves 24-inch and larger shall have a minimum port area of 100 percent of I full nominal pipe area. F. All exposed nuts, bolts, springs, washers, etc., shall be zinc or cadmium plated. Valve ' plugs shall be constructed of ASTM A-48, Class 40 cast iron or ASTM A-536 ductile iron. Resilient plug facings shall be of Neoprene. G. Valves shall be furnished with permanently lubricated stainless steel, oil-impregnated ' bronze or non-metallic upper and lower plug stem bearings. H. Valve seats shall be either nickel or stainless steel. Epoxy seats are not acceptable. ' Plug valves greater than 6 inches in diameter shall be supplied with manual gear I actuators unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. J. Shaft seals shall be of the multiple V-ring type with a packing gland follower. Shaft ' seals shall be externally adjustable and repackable without removing the actuator or bonnet from the valve. K. Valves shall have a factory-applied, internal and external, fusion bonded epoxy resin ' coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to all applicable requirements of the American Water Works Association Standard C550-90 entitled "Protective ' Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants". 2.05 VALVE ACTUATORS ' A. General 1. All valve actuators shall conform to Section 3.8 of AWWA Standard , Specification C504, latest edition, and shall be manual, motor-operated, or air- operated as specified or shown on the Drawings. 2. Actuators shall be capable of seating and unseating the disc against the full design pressure and velocity, as specified for each class, into a dry system ' downstream, and shall transmit a minimum torque to the valve. Actuators shall be rigidly attached to the valve body. 3. Butterfly valve actuators shall conform to the requirements of Section 3.8 of the AWWA Standard Specifications for Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves, Designation C504, insofar as applicable and as herein specified. ' VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-6 01/28/11 ' 1 4. The Contractor and the actuator manufacturer are responsible for providing actuators of adequate size, pressure, and torque ratings for the respective application. 5. The Contractor is responsible for handling and installing valves and actuators in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The Contractor shall replace any actuator damaged during shipping or installation without cost to the Owner. 6. Valves located seven (7) feet or more above the floor level shall be equipped with an actuator that allows operation of the valve less than five (5) feet from floor level. Manual operators shall have a chainwheel and electric actuator shall have a remote mounted control panel. B. Manual Actuators Manual actuators shall have permanently lubricated, totally enclosed gearing with handwheel and gear ratio sized on the basis of rated valve pressures and actual velocities. Actuators shall be equipped with handwheel, position indicator, and mechanical stop-limiting locking devices to prevent over travel of the disc in the open and closed positions. They shall turn counter-clockwise to open valves. Manual actuators shall be of the traveling nut, self-locking type and shall be designed to hold the valve in any intermediate position between fully open and fully closed without creeping or fluttering. Actuators shall be fully enclosed and designed to produce the specified torque with a maximum pull of 80 pounds on the handwheel or chainwheel. Actuator components shall withstand an input of 450-foot pounds for 30" and smaller and 300-foot pounds for larger than 30" size valves at extreme actuator positions without damage. Valves located above grade shall have handwheel or chain wheel and position indicator, and valves located below grade shall be equipped with a 2-inch square AWWA operating nut located at ground level and cast iron extension type valve box. Valve actuators shall conform to AWWA C504, latest revision. 2. Handwheels or chainwheels shall be turned left or counterclockwise to open the valves. Handwheels shall be of ample size and shall have an arrow and the ' word OPEN cast thereon to indicate the direction of opening. 3. Chainwheels shall be provided for valves 6 feet or more above the operator ' walkway. Process air piping valves in the aeration basins shall have actuators and handle extensions to allow actuation of the valve a minimum of 24 inches above the operator walkway. C. Motor-Operated Actuators ' 1. Motor-Operated actuators shall include the electric motor, reduction gearing, valve stem drive nut/bushing, position sensor, overload torque sensor, ductile iron gear case, automatic declutchable handwheel, local control and VALVES AND APPURTENANCES ' 15100-7 01/28/11 mechanical position indication, and remote control and position indication 2. Motors shall be totally enclosed, non-ventilated 480 volt, 3 phase and specifically designed for high torque, low inertia duty- Motors for actuators shall also be specifically designed and rated for 15-minute duty operation at 104°F (40°C). Output capacity shall be sufficient to open or close the valve against the maximum differential pressure when the voltage is 10% above or below normal at the specified service conditions. Motors shall have Class F insulation. Motors must be protected by 3 thermal contacts, which are embedded in the motor windings. The actuator shall be suitable for up to 60 starts per hour for open/close service and 1200 starts per hour for modulating service. 3. The actuators shall be suitable for use on nominal 3 phase power supply and must include motor, integral reversing starters, local controls and terminals for remote control and indication housed within a self contained, sealed enclosure. The actuator gearing shall be totally enclosed in a lubricant filled cast iron gearcase suitable for operation in any orientation. Non-metallic gearing is not acceptable. For rising stem valves the output shaft shall be hollow to accept a rising stem, and incorporate thrust bearings of the roller type at the base of the actuator. All gearing and bearings shall be oil or grease lubricated and suitable for year-round service based on prevailing ambient temperature conditions. 4. The actuator shall be furnished with a handwheel with a maximum rim pull requirement of 60 pounds for valve travel loads. An external manual declutch lever shall be included to place actuator in the manual mode. The lever shall not require more than 10 pounds of force to engage even when the valve has been tightly seated. The lever is to be padlockable in either handwheel or motor mode. Operation by motor shall not cause the handwheel to rotate, or operation of the handwheel shall not cause the motor to rotate. Handwheel shall operate in the clockwise direction to close. 5. Two nameplates, made of stainless steel, shall be attached to each actuator; one on the motor housing, showing all relevant motor data, one on the actuator housing showing all relevant actuator data. Special information, such as the valve tag no., shall be shown if required. The nameplates shall be securely fixed to the actuator and motor, so that they cannot be removed or scratched off during shipment, installation, operation or maintenance. 6. The rated output torque of the motor actuator shall be at least 1.5 times the maximum torque required to open or close the valve at any position including seating and unseating conditions when subjected to the most severe operating condition including any mechanical friction and/or other restrictive conditions that are inherent in the valve assembly. Do not include hammer-blow effect in sizing the actuator to comply with this torque requirement. Valve manufacturer is responsible to assure that the motor actuator stall torque output does not exceed the torque limits of the valve operating stem or shaft. Maximum torque shall include seating or unseating torque, bearing torque, dynamic torque, and VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-8 01/28/11 hydrostatic torque. Assume that the differential pressure across the valve is equal to the pressure or head rating of the valve. 7. Actuator housings, supports, and connections to the valve shall have a ' minimum safety factor of five based on the ultimate strength or three based on the yield strength of the material used. Actuators shall be 0-ring sealed, ' watertight to NEMA 4/6 (6 feet for 30 minutes). All external fasteners shall be of stainless steel. Gear case shall be cast iron. ' 8. Torque switch bypass to be provided for the torque sensing system to inhibit torque switch trip during unseating or during starting in mid travel against high inertia loads. Manual operation shall be by handwheel. Manual operation will be via power gearing to minimize required rimpull and facilitate easy changeover from motor to manual operation when the actuator is under load. A seized or inoperable motor shall not prevent manual operation. ' 9. Test each actuator prior to shipment in accordance with AWWA C540. The application torque shall be the maximum torque required to open or close the ' valve at any position including seating and unseating conditions. 10. For all actuators that are installed greater than five (5) feet above the finished ' floor surface, the actuator manufacturer shall furnish for installation by the Contractor a remote control unit, such that the operator is able to manually control the actuator while standing on floor grade. The remote control unit shall ' be hardwired to the actuator and be equipped with all the controls/functionality as on the face of the actuator. Remote controllers shall be mounted between 3 feet and 5 feet from the nearest operator accessible floor surface. ' 11. The operator face plate shall include as a minimum: ' a. Buttons for OPEN - STOP - CLOSE - RESET. b. Backlit LCD display showing the actuator status in plain English text. C. Lockable selector switch with LOCAL - OFF - REMOTE function. d. Indication lights for CLOSED, OPEN, RUNNING, and FAULT. 12. The terminal compartment shall provide sufficient space to accommodate the ' possible maximum number of incoming wires. A minimum of three cable entries must be provided. Each cable entry shall be properly sealed by cable glands during site installation. The cable glands size shall be chosen by the Contractor, responsible for wiring during the commissioning phase. 13. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) - back-lit for setting menu showing status indication and diagnostic information. The actuator shall include a digital position indicator with a display from fully open to fully closed in 1 % increments. For all actuators that utilize a battery, the actuator manufacturer shall furnish ' one (1) spare battery for each actuator furnished. 14. Setting of all actuator parameters including the torque levels, position limits, VALVES AND APPURTENANCES ' 15100-9 01/28/11 D configuration of the indication contacts, and positioner functionality shall be ' accomplished without removing covers from the actuator control assemblies or housing. 15. Actuators shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use. The actuator shall be ' capable of functioning in an ambient temperature ranging from -20 °F to +140°F, up to 100% relative humidity. In orderto prevent condensation, a space , heater shall be installed inside the actuator, suitable for continuous operation. The actuator shall be stored according to the Manufacturers instructions. If the Contractor voids the actuator warrantee in any way, he shall replace the ' actuator at no cost to the Owner. 16. Actuators are to receive remote input commands for OPEN, CLOSE, and ' POSITION (as required). Actuators are to provide remote indication as listed above, 17. Contractor is to provide startup, inspection, and instruction services from the ' Manufacturer's authorized technical representative. Startup and inspection shall not be less than five (5) days. One (1) day shall be provided for training of , plant personnel in operation and maintenance of electric operators. 18. Each actuator shall be warranted for a minimum of 24 months from the date of I system acceptance by the Owner. Air-Operated Actuators 1 1 Pneumatic actuators shall be double action vane type design with only (1) moving part as manufactured by K-Torq Controls or Engineer-approved Equal. ' 2. The pneumatic operators shall be designed to operate at 150 psi maximum and a normal operating pressure of 80 psi supply air and shall be supplied complete with all components necessary for proper mounting, installation, and operation. 3. Actuators shall have male output shafts (square) on both sides of actuator to ' drive valve and accessories. Actuator shall have a vane position indicator milled into the output shaft. One side of the actuator shall be manufactured to ISO/NAMUR mounting standards for attachment of accessories (limit switches, , indicators, positioners). Seals shall be double opposed lip seals with stainless steel expanders. Seal backing plates shall be carbon steel with all surfaces coated with thermosetting epoxy powder coat. O-ring seals on vane will not be ' acceptable. 3. Actuator Materials of Construction: ' a. Casing: Pressure die castA380 aluminum alloy, orA356T51 V-process , sand casting with all surfaces coated with thermosetting hybrid polyester/epoxy powder coat with Ultraviolet Inhibitor. 1 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES ' 15100-10 01/28/11 1 b. Vane/ Output Shaft: Steel ASTM A148 per AWWA C540-2, Grade 115- 95, heat treated with electro less nickel plated finish. C. Vane Seals: Molded polyurethane. d. Shaft Seals: Buna N 1 e. Vane Seal Expanders: Stainless spring steel. f. Side Plates: Steel with all surfaces coated with thermosetting epoxy powder coat. g. Bolting Hardware: All stainless steel 4. Actuator Position-Control Capability: a. Open/Close Valves: Actuators shall be solenoid operated. Solenoids for smaller size actuators shall be standard ISO/NAMUR VDI/VDE 3845 direct mounted with the option to be remote mounting for increased accessibility. Solenoid coils shall be 120 VAC 60 Hz NEMA 4 rated. Speed control devices shall allow independent adjustment of OPEN and CLOSE cycling speed. Exhaust air mufflers shall be standard. The manufacturer as a standard shall provide OPEN/CLOSE visual indicator. Solenoids shall have manual override feature to allow operation of valves in the event of power outage. On loss of power, the valve remains in the last position. Solenoids shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, single phase power supply. b. Modulating Valves: There are no modulating actuators for this project. ' 5. Torque Capability: a. The rated torque capability of each actuator shall be sufficient to seat and unseat the valve disc it controls under the operating conditions specified herein. Torque safety factors shall conform to AWWA ' Standards and in no case be less than 1.25 times the valve manufactures published torques. ' 6. Safety Factor: a. Actuator housings, supports, and connections to the valve shall be designed with a minimum safety factor of 5, based on the ultimate strength, or a minimum safety factor of 3, based on the yield strength of materials used. 1 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-11 01/28/11 7. Stop-Limiting Devices: ' a. Valve actuators shall be equipped with adjustable mechanical stop- limiting devices to prevent over-travel of the valve disc in the open and I closed positions. 8. Actuators shall be equipped with adjustable flow-control devices controlling the ' operating air exhausting from the actuator. The flow control device shall be located at or near the actuator. The opening and closing speeds shall be adjustable from 5-60 seconds. Final adjustments shall be made by the filter ' equipment manufacturer to minimize line surges during normal operation. 9. Operating air pressure shall be maintained on the actuator at each end of its , stroke, unless other means are provided to prevent drifting. 10. Actuators shall not require more than five (5) psig to be cycled a complete ' stroke in each direction before they are connected to the valve. 11. The actuator manufacturer shall provide a qualified factory trained technician for , installation inspection, start- up, and training. The contractor shall provide a certificate by the valve actuator supplier indicating proper installation and start- up procedures have been followed. This certificate shall be required and ' included as part of the final operation and maintenance manuals. 2.06 AIR RELEASE VALVES A. The air release valves shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. The valves shall have a cast iron body cover and baffle, stainless steel float, EPDM seat and stainless steel trim. The fittings shall be threaded. Air release valves shall be equipped with a vacuum ball or check feature in order to prevent air from entering the valve during vacuum conditions. The valves for wastewater and sludge applications shall be Model D-025 as manufactured by A.R.I. or equal. Air release valves for reclaimed and potable water service shall be A.R.I. Model D-040-C-VAC or equal. B. A stainless steel or brass ball valve shall be provided on the inlet of all air release valves. Stainless steel or brass piping shall be provided for air release valves on pumps. 2.07 AIR AND VACUUM VALVES A. The air and vacuum valves shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. The valves shall have a cast iron body cover and baffle, stainless steel float, and an EPDM seat. The valves shall be 2-inch threaded connection. Air and vacuum valves shall be equipped with a baffle to protect the float from direct contact with the rushing air and water and to prevent the float from closing prematurely in the valve. The valves shall be Model D-040-C as manufactured by A.R.I. or equal. VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-12 01/28/11 B. A stainless steel ball valve shall be provided on the inlet of all air and vacuum valves. 2.08 FLANGE ADAPTER COUPLINGS A. Flange adapter couplings shall be of the sizes shown on the Drawings. ' B. Flange adapter couplings shall have a 150 psi minimum pressure rating. C. All couplings shall be restrained and shall have a sufficient number of anchor studs to meet or exceed the test pressure rating for this project, 150 psi minimum. D. Couplings shall be JCM Model 301 R or equal. 2.09 UNIONS ' A. Unions on ferrous pipe 2 inches in diameter and smaller shall be 150 pounds malleable iron, zinc-coated. Unions on water piping 2-1/2 inches in diameter and larger shall be flange pattern, 125-pound class, zinc-coated. Gaskets for flanged unions shall be of the best quality EPDM. Unions shall not be concealed in walls, ceilings, or partitions. 2.10 PRESSURE AND VACUUM GAUGES A. All pumps furnished under this contract shall have pressure/ vacuum gauges installed on their respective suction lines and pressure gauges installed on their discharge lines. All pressure and vacuum gauges furnished under this Contract shall be mounted per manufacturer requirements using tapping saddles and sleeves specified in Section 15100, 2.19. B. Each gauge shall be direct mounted, phenolic, shock resistant or 304 stainless steel case with a 4-1/2-inch diameter dial and furnished with a clear glass crystal window, 1/4-inch shutoff valve, and a bronze pressure snubber. Provide stainless steel diaphragm seals between shutoff valve and pressure gauge on all lines with nonclear matter in suspension of solution. All gauges shall be weatherproofed. The face dial shall be white finished aluminum with jet black graduations and figures. The face dial shall read in units of both pounds per square inch and feet of head. C. Suction gauges shall read from 10 inches of mercury vacuum to 50 feet of head. Discharge gauges shall read from zero feet of head to the expected shutoff head of the respective pump. I D. Gauges shall be as manufactured by H.O. Trerice Co., Marshalltown Instruments, Dwyer, Ametek, Ashcroft, Helicoid, Wekslar or equal. VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-13 01/28/11 2.11 SWING CHECK VALVES A. Swing check valves shall be constructed with heavy cast iron or cast steel body with a bronze or stainless steel seat ring, and a noncorrosive shaft for attachment of weight and lever. Flanges shall be drilled for ANSI Standard B.16.1, 125 lb. Class. Check valves shall absolutely prevent the return of water or wastewater back through the valve when the inlet pressure decreases below the delivery pressure. B. The valves must be tight seating and must operate without hammer or shock. The seat ring must be renewable and shall be securely held in place by a threaded joint. C. Check valves shall be the lever and weight type with an adjustable position weight and lever arm attached to the disc assembly to allow adjustment of the closure force. D. The valves shall be as manufactured by the.Mueller, Kennedy or approved equal, and shall be suitable for horizontal installation. E. The Contractor is responsible for all labor and material costs associated with all work made necessary by the use of replacement check valves with lay lengths different than the existing check valves. 2.12 SLANTING DISK CHECK VALVE A. Valve body shall be heavy two-piece ASTM A126 Grade B cast iron. The two (2) body halves and body seat shall be O-ring sealed and bolted together in a manner to sandwich the body seat on a 55° angle. Each body half shall have a covered access hole for internal inspection and each body half and disc shall be fully machined to accept the attachment of a bottom buffer oil dashpot. , B. The seat ring and disc ring shall be replaceable in the field without need for special tools or machining. Disc and seat ring shall be bronze. The. area throughout the valve ' body must be equal to full pipe area. C. The pivot pins in the body and the bushings in the disc lugs shall be stainless steel of ' different hardnesses to prevent galling. The bushings shall be press fit to prevent wear. D. An indicator shall be provided to show position of the disc. E. The valve shall have a bottom mounted buffer for free open and positive non-slam closing. The buffer shall be designed to contact the disc during the last 10% of closure and thereafter control the disc closure until the valve is shut in a manner to minimize or prevent water hammer. The rate of hydraulic control and the initial point of buffer ' contact to the disc closure shall be externally adjustable and variable to suit the water column reversal time. The bottom buffer hydraulic system must be self contained and independent from pipeline media to prevent contamination of the media and protect the cylinder against corrosion. The buffer rod, oil reservoir and buffer pneumatic tank shall be stainless steel. 1 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-14 01/28/11 , u F. Valve shall be Apco Series 800B slanting disc check valve with bottom mounted buffer or approved equal. 2.13 BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR AIR SERVICE A. Butterfly valves shall be of the offset disc design and shall be DeZurik Model BOS or Engineer approved equal. B. The face-to-face dimensions and lay length of flanged end valves and wafer type valves shall be in accordance with Table 2 of AWWA Specification C-504 for short-body valve. Adequate two-way thrust bearings shall be provided. Flange drilling shall be in accordance with ANSI B16.1. All air service valves shall be wafer style. C. Valve seats and sealing rings shall be EPDM synthetic rubber compound adequate for ' constant service at 250 degrees F. Valve seats 24 inches and larger shall be field adjustable and replaceable without dismounting operator disc or shaft and without removing the valve from the line. All retaining segments and adjusting devices shall be of corrosion resistant material with stainless Nylock screws and be capable of a 1/8-inch adjustment. Valves 20 inches and smaller shall have bonded or mechanically restrained seats. Where elastomer seat is mounted on the valve body, the mating ' edge of the valve disc shall be 18-8 stainless steel. Where elastomer seat is mounted on the valve disc, the valve body shall be fitted with an 18-8 stainless steel seat offset from the shaft, mechanically restrained and covering 360 degrees of the peripheral ' opening or seating surface. D. The valve body shall be constructed of ductile iron or close grain cast iron per ASTM A-126, Class B with integrally cast hubs for shaft bearing housings of the through boss-type. E. The valve shaft shall be turned, ground, and polished constructed of 18-8, ASTM A-276, Type 304 stainless steel and designed for both torsional and shearing stresses when the valve is operated under its greatest dynamic or seating torque. Shaft shall be of either a one-piece unit extending full size through the valve disc and valve bearing or it may be of a stub shaft design. Shaft bearings shall be Teflon or nylon, self-lubricated type adequate for constant service at 250 degrees ' F. Gearing for the operators shall be totally enclosed in a gear case in accordance with Paragraph 3.8 of the AWWA C-504 Standard Specification. ' G. Where indicated on the Construction Drawings extension stems, operators with extended handles, floor stands, couplings, stem guides and floor boxes, as required, ' shall be furnished and installed. H. Valves shall have a factory-applied, internal and external, fusion bonded epoxy resin ' coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to all applicable requirements of the American Water Works Association Standard C550-90 entitled "Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants". 1 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 1 15100-15 01/28/11 PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION ' A, All valves and appurtenances shall be installed in the locations shown, true to alignment and rigidly supported. Any damage to the above items shall be repaired to I the satisfaction of the Engineer before they are installed. B. After installation, all valves and appurtenances shall be tested at least 2 hours at the ' working pressure corresponding to the class of pipe, unless a different test pressure is specified. If any joint proves to be defective, it shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer, , C. Install all floor boxes, brackets, extension rods, guides, the various types of operators and appurtenances as shown on the Construction Drawings that are in masonry floors or walls, and install concrete inserts for hangers and supports as soon as forms are erected and before concrete is poured. Before setting these items, the Contractor shall check all plans and figures which have a direct bearing on their location and he shall be responsible for the proper location of these valves and appurtenances during the construction of the structures. D. Pipe for use with flexible couplings shall have plain ends as specified in the respective pipe sections in Division 15. E. Flanged joints shall be made with high strength, low alloy Corten bolts, nuts and washers. Mechanical joints shall be made with mild corrosion resistant alloy steel bolts and nuts. All exposed bolts shall be painted the same color as the pipe. All buried bolts and nuts shall be heavily coated with two (2) coats (14-20 mils DFT) of bituminous paint comparable to Carboline Bitumastic 300M, Tnemec Series 46H-413 Tneme-Tar, or approved equal. , F. Prior to assembly of split couplings, the grooves, as well as other parts, shall be thoroughly cleaned. The ends of the pipes and outside of the gaskets shall be moderately coated with petroleum jelly, cup grease, soft soap or graphite paste, and the gasket shall be slipped over one pipe end, After the other pipe has been brought to the correct position, the gasket shall be centered properly over the pipe ends with ' the lips against the pipes. The housing sections then shall be placed. After the bolts have been inserted, the nuts shall be tightened until the housing sections are firmly in contact, metal-to-metal, without excessive bolt tension, G. Prior to the installation of sleeve-type couplings, the pipe ends shall be cleaned thoroughly for a distance of 8 inches. Soapy water may be used as a gasket lubricant. A follower and gasket, in that order, shall be slipped over each pipe to a distance of about 6 inches from the end, and the middle ring shall be placed on the substantial , completion date unless otherwise requested by the Owner, H. Valve boxes with concrete bases shall be installed as shown on the Construction 1 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-16 01/28/11 1 Drawings. Mechanical joints shall be made in the standard manner. Valve stems shall be vertical in all cases. Place cast iron box over each stem with base bearing on compacted fill and top flush with final grade. Boxes shall have sufficient bracing to ' maintain alignment during backfilling. Knobs on cover shall be parallel to pipe. Remove any sand or undesirable fill from valve box. 3.02 SHOP PAINTING A. Ferrous surfaces of above ground valves and appurtenances to be painted shall ' receive a coating of rust-inhibitive primer compatible to paint system specified in Section 09900. All pipe connection openings shall be capped to prevent the entry of foreign matter prior to installation. ' 3.03 FIELD PAINTING A. All metal valves and appurtenances specified herein and exposed to view, except ball valves, shall be painted as part of the work in Section 09900. 3.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Completed pipe shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure and leakage in ' accordance with Section 01625. All leaks shall be repaired and lines retested. Priorto testing, the pipelines shall be supported in an approved manner to prevent movement during tests. END OF SECTION 1 1 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-17 01/28/11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100-18 01/28/11 ' 1 APPENDIX ODP DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION I Table of Contents: OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS • Instructions for Addendum to Agreement • ODP Agreement Form • Addendum to Agreement • Attachment "A" • Attachment "B" • Attachment "C" • Attachment "D" • Procedures for Sales Tax Savings, Requests to Requisition and Receiving/invoicing • Request to Requisition Form PROJECT PERMITS No FDEP Permit is Anticipated. Contractor to obtain City of Clearwater Building Department Permits. GEOTECHNICAL SOIL REPORT, No Geotechnical Soil Report is Anticipated. ASBESTOS REPORT, No Asbestos Report is Anticipated. SIEMENS FILTER PROPOSAL AND PROPOSAL DRAWINGS. 1 Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 HAS E ODP DOCUMENTS OWNER DIRECT PURC t 1 1 11 I Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 INSTRUCTIONS FOR ADDENDUM TO AGREEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF MARSHALL STREET WRF RAPID SAND FILTER REHABILITATION PROJECT CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT # 09-0045-UT 1. The Contractor and the City, prior to the ordering of any materials, must complete the Addendum to Agreement for Construction of the Marshall Street WRF Rapid Sand Filter Rehabilitation project, 2. Attachment "A" is to be completed by the Contractor and submitted with the Addendum. 3. Attachments "B", "C" and "D" relate to Owner-Furnished Materials that are part of the of a Subcontractor's Work. Attachments "B" and "C" would be completed for each Subcontractor responsible for materials as part of the Subcontractor's Work. 4. Submit two (2) original copies of the Addendum and Attachments to: City of Clearwater Attention: Tara Kivett, Engineering Project Manager Phone: 727-562-4758 Fax: 727-562-4755 City of Clearwater Engineering Department 100 South Myrtle Avenue, #220 Clearwater, FL, 33756-5520 5. If you have any questions regarding this process please direct them to: Name, Tara Kivett, Engineering Project Manager Phone: 727-562-4758 Fax : 727-562-4755 E-Mail: tara.kivett@myclearwater.com Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 ADDENDUM TO AGREEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF MARSHALL STREET WRF RAPID SAND FILTER REHABILITATION PROJECT CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT No. 09-0045-UT In reference to contract # 09-0045-UT dated between City of Clearwater, the Owner, and , the Contractor, it is further AGREED as follows: 1. The Owner has reserved the right to purchase certain portions of the material for the Project directly ' in order to save applicable sales tax in compliance with Florida Law since owner is exempt from the payment of sales tax. 2. The attachments lettered "A", "B", and "C", attached hereto (as amended by notations thereon) and ' incorporated herein shall be executed by the Contractor and applicable Sub-contractors and the terms thereof shall govern the purchase of materials for the Project as determined by the Owner. 3. The contract price shall be reduced by the cost of the materials purchased by owner plus the normally applicable sales tax as bid by the Contractor even if the cost is in excess of the cost for the materials as bid by the Contractor. However, for purposes of calculating engineering fees, contractor fees, architects fees, and any other amounts that are based on the contract amount, the original contract amount shall be used. 4. The Contractor reserves the right to authorize payments for invoiced materials, prior to Owner's ' authorization process, as outlined in Attachment "D". 5. The Contractor will assist Owner in owner's direct purchase of materials for the project. However, owner acknowledges that Contractor's Sub-contractors nonetheless each reserves the right to purchase project materials directly, without Owner's prior approval and consequent power to eliminate reimbursement of sales tax. This addendum, upon its execution by both parties, is made an integral part of the aforementioned agreement. CITY OF CLEARWATER: CONTRACTOR: I Date: 11 C [11 William B. Horne II City Manager/Owner ATTEST: Date: Contractor ATTEST: Cheryl Wright City Clerk Secretary (City's Corporate Seal) APPROVED AS TO FORM: Camilo Soto Assistant City Attorney I Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 ATTACHMENT "A" FROM: CITY OF CLEARWATER (OWNER) TO: OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS (CONTRACTOR) PROJECT: MARSHALL STREET WRF RAPID SAND FILTER REHABILITATION PROJECT, PROJECT NUMBER 09-0045-UT T - 1, The Contract Price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for material, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Contractor's Work. The owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Contractor's contract. Owner-purchasing of construction material, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number. 2. The Contractor shall provide the Owner a list of all intended suppliers, vendors, and material for consideration as Owner-Furnished Materials. The Contractor shall submit price quotes from the vendors, as well as a description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices. 3. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials furnished by the Owner in accordance with these Special Provisions including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery due to the negligence of the Contractor. However, the owner assumes the risk of damage or loss during the time that the building materials are physically stored at the job site prior to their installation or incorporation into the project. The Contractor shall coordinate delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the Contractor for the particular material furnished. The Contractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non-payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Contractor. 4. As Owner-Furnished Materials are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for material delivered- The Contractor shall assure that each delivery of Owner-Furnished Materials is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order againstwhich the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The Contractor will then forward the invoice to the Owner for payment, pursuant to Attachment A of this Contract. ' 5. The Contractor shall insure that Owner-Furnished Materials conform to the Specifications and determine prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials are patently defective, and whether such materials are identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers defective or non-conformities in Owner-Furnished Materials upon such visual inspection, 1 the Contractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials in the Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Contractor's Work such defective or nonconforming Owner-Furnished Materials, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner, resulting from Contractor's incorporation of such materials into the Project, including liquidating or delay damages. 6. The Contractor shall maintain records of all Owner-Furnished Materials it incorporates into Contractor's Work from the stock of Owner-Furnished Materials in its possession. The Contractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any Owner-Furnished Materials delivered into the Contractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials which have been incorporated in the Contractor's Work. ' Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 7. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage- repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or subcontractor. 8. Notwithstanding the transfer of Owner-Furnished Materials by the Owner to the Contractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all Owner-Furnished Materials. 9. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that sales made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to Owner-Furnished Materials. 10. As invoices are received, Contractor shall be required to review invoices submitted by all suppliers of Owner-Furnished Materials delivered to the Project during that delivery for use by the Contractor and either concur or object to the Owner's issuance of payment to the suppliers, based upon Contractor's records of materials delivered to the site and any defects in such materials. 11. In order to arrange for the prompt payment to the supplier, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a listing indicating the acceptance of the goods or materials within thirty (30) days of receipt of said goods or materials. The list shall include a copy of all applicable Purchase Orders which will include owner's Certificate of Exemption number, invoices, delivery tickets, written acceptance of the delivered item, and such other documentation as may be reasonably required by the Owner. The check will be released, delivered and remitted directly to the supplier. The Contractor agrees to assist the Owner to immediately obtain partial or final release or waivers as appropriate. At the end of the Project, Contractor will be provided with a deductive Change Order for the cost incurred by the Owner to provide all Owner-Furnished Materials. Salvage materials shall be stored or removed from the site by the Contractor at the Owner's direction, or may be turned over to the Contractor for salvage or disposal at the Contractor's option. 12. The Contractor shall be entitled to the benefits of any discounts attributable to the early payment of vendor invoices for materials furnished by the Owner pursuant to the Specifications. 13. The Contract between Contractor and Owner is hereby amended to clarify that Owner- Furnished Material shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining the Contract Sum due Contractor. Appcndix.doc 9/27/2010 ' 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ATTACHMENT "B'" FROM TO OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS CONTRACTOR) (SUBCONTRACTOR) PROJECT' MARSHALL STREET WRF RAPID SAND FILTER REHABILITATION PROJECT, PROJECT NUMBER 09-0045-UT 1. The Contract Price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for material, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Subcontractor's Work. The Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Subcontractor's contract. Owner-Purchasing of construction material, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include owner's Certification of Exemption number. 2. The Subcontractor shall provide the owner a list of all intended suppliers, vendors, and material for consideration as Owner-Furnished Materials. The Subcontractor shall submit price quotes from the vendors, as well as a description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices. 3. The Subcontractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials furnished by the Owner in accordance with these Special Provisions including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery due to the negligence of the Subcontractor. However, the Owner assumes the risk of damage or loss during the time that the building materials are physically stored at the job site prior to their installation or incorporation into the project. The Subcontractor shall coordinate delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the Subcontractor for the particular material furnished. The Subcontractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials. The Subcontractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non-payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Subcontractor. 4. As Owner-Furnished Materials are delivered to the job site, the Subcontractor shall visually inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for material delivered. The Subcontractor shall assure that each delivery of Owner-Furnished Materials is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The Subcontractor will then forward the invoice to the Owner for payment, pursuant to Attachment "A" of this Contract. 5. The Subcontractor shall insure that Owner-Furnished Materials conform to the Specifications and determine prior to incorporation into the Subcontractor's Work if such materials are patently defective, and whether such materials are identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Subcontractor discovers defective or non-conformities in Owner-Furnished Materials upon such visual inspection, the Subcontractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials in the Subcontractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Subcontractor's Work such defective or nonconforming Owner-Furnished Materials, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an inspection, Subcontractor shall be responsible for all damages to the owner, resulting from Subcontractor's incorporation of such materials into the Project, including liquidating or delay damages. ' 6. The Subcontractor shall maintain records of all owner-Furnished Materials it incorporates into Subcontractor's Work from the stock of Owner-furnished Materials in its possession. The Subcontractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any owner-Furnished Materials delivered into the Subcontractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials which have been incorporated in the Subcontractor's Work. Appcndix.doc 9/27/2010 7. The Subcontractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and ' guarantees for all materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage-repair calls shall be forwarded to the Subcontractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or sub-subcontractor- 8. Notwithstanding the transfer of Owner-Furnished Materials by the Owner to the Subcontractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all Owner-Furnished Materials. ' 9. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Subcontractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that sales made by ' Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Subcontractor agrees to promptly notify Owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to Owner-Furnished Materials. 19. As invoices are received, Subcontractor shall be required to review invoices submitted by all suppliers of Owner-Furnished Materials delivered to the Project during that delivery for use by the Subcontractor and either concur or object to the Owner's issuance of payment to the suppliers, based upon Subcontractor's records of materials delivered to the site and any defects in such materials. , 11. In order to arrange for the prompt payment to the supplier, the Subcontractor shall provide to the Owner a listing indicating the acceptance of the goods or materials within fifteen (15) days of receipt of said goods or materials. The list shall include a copy of all applicable Purchase Orders which will include owner's Certificate of Exemption number, invoices, delivery tickets, written acceptance of the delivered item, and such other documentation as may be reasonably required by the Owner. The check will be released, delivered and remitted directly to the supplier. The Subcontractor agrees to assist the Owner to immediately obtain partial or final release or waivers as appropriate. At the end of the Project, Subcontractor will be provided with a deductive Change Order for the cost incurred by the Owner to provide all Owner-Furnished Materials. Salvage materials shall be stored or removed from the site by the Subcontractor at the Owner's direction or may be turned over to the Subcontractor for salvage or disposal at the Subcontractor's option. , , 1 Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 1 ATTACHMENT "C" From: (CONTRACTOR) To: _ (SUBCONTRACTOR) Project: MARSHALL STREET WRF RAPID SAND FILTER REHABILITATION PROJECT PROJECT NUMBER 09-0045-UT This project qualifies the Owner to utilize its sales tax exemption for the purchase of materials used in the project. In order to do this, the City of Clearwater, Florida, (Owner) must pay for the materials directly. This shall be accomplished in the following manner: 1. Subcontracts will be issued by Contractor to Subcontractors in the usual manner, including sales tax. 2. Subcontractors will prepare their material orders and forward same to Contractor so that City of Clearwater (owner) purchase orders may be placed for these materials. 3. Contractor will return to the Subcontractor a copy of the City of Clearwater (owner) purchase order on behalf of the City of Clearwater (Owner). It shall read: To: Supplier For: Material per attached Subcontractor order, 4. The material supplier will then bill the City of Clearwater (Owner) c/o "Subcontractor" c/o Contractor. Subcontractor will approve invoice and send to Contractor who will submit same to City of Clearwater (Owner) for payment. 5. City of Clearwater (Owner) will then pay the invoice directly and the Subcontractor will be issued a deductive change order for the amount of the invoice plus sales tax. It is imperative that the Subcontractor approve the invoices and forward them to Contractor by the of each month for payment by the . Those received after the will be processed in the next month's billing cycle. I Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 ATTACHMENT "D" PROCEDURE FOR GENERATING SUB-CONTRACTOR DIRECT PURCHASE ORDERS FOR SALES TAX CREDITS 1. General Contractor will submit requisition for materials with vendor information required (see vendor application form), item description, quantity if applicable, price, etc. Also included will be the sales tax savings amount. 2. Architect will review the requisition, and forward to the project manager for approval and preparation of electronic purchase requisition. Requisition must contain project number as well as correct account number, 3. Project Manager will then request requisition approval from the Finance Director. 4. Purchasing will issue purchase order and will mail, fax, or otherwise distribute purchase order as requested. 5. A purchase order summary report will be maintained indicating the following: purchase order number, owner Certificate of Exemption number, vendor, total amount of P.O., total tax savings, amount previously requested, amount of current request, and remaining balance of P.O. This report will be updated and issued with each group of payment requests (monthly). 6. Payment requests with invoices must have receiving paperwork with authorized signatures and must be submitted for approval as indicated below: 7. Payment authorization sequence: invoices must be submitted for approval in the following order: a. General Contractor b. Architect c. Project Manager d. Engineering/City Manager e. Purchasing/for processing only f. Finance/for processing only r 1 r I 1 Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 PROCEDURES FOR SALES TAX SAVINGS, REQUESTS TO REQUISITION and RECEIVING/INVOICING CITY OF CLEARWATER MARSHALL STREET WRF RAPID SAND FILTER REHABILITATION PROJECT, PROJECT NUMBER 09-0045-UT ' Contractor: CEI: Addendum to Agreement for Construction: 1. See separate instructions for completing the Addendum to Agreement. Process procedures for tax savings, 2. Completion of the Request to Requisition forms by Contractor. 3. Approved by CEI. Approver(s): 4. Original to Owner's Representative for processing of P.O. requisition. 5. Based on Request to Requisition forms a schedule will be prepared for the City's Purchasing Manager to reduce the Contractor's P.O. by the amount of the P.O.s to the Materials Suppliers. It is important to process as many material supplier Requests to Requisition as possible at one time thereby reducing the amount of changes necessary to Contractor's P.O. Construction contract will not change and the sum of the P.O.s to the Materials Suppliers plus the Contractor's P.O will represent the total contract commitment. Before sending to the Purchasing Mana er the schedule will be forwarded to the Owner's Representative, CEI and Contractor's representative fora rovaL We will need the e-mail address for the Contractor's & CEI's contact person(s) for this process. 6 The estimated sales tax savings for each materials requisition will be deducted from the primary lines of Contractor's P.O. A related Sales Tax Savings line for each charge code will be added to the Contractor's P.O. No changes will be made to the sales tax savings lines until all materials are purchased, received, accepted and paid for unless additional materials purchases are necessary. ' 7. Closing of the sales tax savings line on the Contractor's P.O. can only be done through a change order (Recommendation is that it's done on the final C/O). Process p rocedures for request to requisition forms: 1. General description is a brief recap (sewer lines and manholes; water lines; etc) 2. Contractor should include their fax number as well as a contact number. 3. In the description section of the Request to Requisition include any special delivery ' instructions. i b ithh ld Cit ' t d d i 5% h i 4. e . s s an ar s . e w y Indicate w ether or not reta nage s to 5. Include the address where the supplier is to mail invoices. 6. Where applicable, shipping and handling costs should be listed as a line item on the request to requisition. 7. City staff will complete the charge code line. Procedures where a detailed line item proposal has been received from the ODP supplier: a. On the request to requisition summarize the materials to be ordered by type of system (stormwater, streets, water, sewer, reclaimed, etc) giving the total dollar amount per for each system. leave 2 line spaces between each system to allow for I Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 the addition of the City's charge code. I b. Attach the supplier's proposal to be mailed as an attachment to the purchase order. Attachment should include estimated quantities and types of materials. Cost information is optional, Procedures where a detailed line item proposal is not available: C, Provide quantities and detailed descriptions of the items to be ordered, per unit and total cost as the City's P.O. will be sent directly to the Materials Supplier. d. Materials on each request to requisition should be grouped in relation to the major ' billing line items on Contractor's P.O. Leave 2 spaces between each group, as the City will add the appropriate charge codes. 8. The requesting official will be the Contractor's official with authority to procure materials. , Contractor's authorized procurer(s) 9. The official approving that the materials requested meet the design specifications will be authorized personnel from the CEI only. Authorized approvers: NOTE: An materials ordered b the contractor that. are not included on the Citv's issued purchase order or any amounts ordered that exceed the amounts on the City issued purchase order MUST be separately, ordered pursuant to a purchase order directly between the supplier and the contractor. These materials MUST be invoiced separately from the materials su lied pursuant to the Cit issued purchase order. Another option would be to submit an additional Request to_Requisition to increase the amount of the ODP purchase order for that supplier. Process procedures for receiving and invoicin : 1. Upon receipt of materials, Contractor's representative will verify the materials are in usable condition and the quantity received. 2. The Materials Suppliers will be instructed on the City's P.O. to send their original invoice to the Contractor to the attention of 3. Contractor must sign off on the invoice to approve the payment and, if no receiving report is attached, must indicate on the invoice that all materials were received in usable condition. Any discrepancies with the invoice are to be resolved between the Contractor and the Materials Supplier. If the invoice is in error, it can be corrected by the Contractor before forwarding for payment under the following conditions: a. A corrected supplier's invoice can be paid up to the amount of the originally issued invoice but not in excess of that amount. b. None of the original data on the invoice can be obliterated. If it is the City will return the invoice for replacement by a corrected one from the supplier. C. If the corrections cause the invoice amount to exceed the original billed amount, the excess must be invoiced separately by the supplier and is to have the same support documentation and/or approvals as all other invoices to be paid. 4. Supplier invoices for retainage amounts, if any has been withheld, are not required support documentation but must follow the approval process as all other invoices. 5. After approval the Contractor will forward the original invoice and any attachments to City of Clearwater's Owner Representative: City of Clearwater Attention: Tara Kivett, Engineering Project Manager Phone: 727-562-4758 Fax: 727-562-4755 City of Clearwater Engineering Department 100 South Myrtle Avenue, #220 Clearwater, FL, 33756-5520 Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 6. After approval and verification of the materials received the Owner's Representative will forward the original invoice and any attachments to the appropriate City department for payment processing. 7. Steps 1 through 7 will be followed for each materials receipt and invoice. 8. Materials purchase P,O.s can be closed only upon completion of the materials acquisition and at the approval of the Contractor. 9. Upon closing of a materials purchase P.O. any unused balance will be added back to the r. appropriate line(s) on Contractor's P.O. ?. Closing of Contractor's P.O.: 1. All Materials Suppliers' P.O.'s must be closed prior to the final change order and closing of the Contractor's P.O. 1 I Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 Engineering Department REQUEST TO REQUISITION f STANDARD PURCHASE ORDER General Item Description: j Vendor: Street Address- City/State/Zip. Phone No: Receiving Location (Ship to): Street Address: City/State/Zip: ` Requested by: Phone Number: Date Needed by: Expense Code: Cit will complete) Units Detailed Description Price Per Line # Quantity $, etc. (List shipping & handling charges, if applicable) Each Total i Date: Date: Requesting Official Approving Official Title and Organization- Contractor Title and Organization- C.E.I. services ' Completed forms are routed for approval to contracted C.E.&I. Firm and to Engineering.Engineering will process and provide records retention according to City of Clearwater's Records Management Program. Page 1 of 2 ' Appcndix.doc 9/27/2010 C1 e."arwater ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT REQUEST TO REQUISITION STANDARD PURCHASE ORDER (Continuation page) Requested by: Phone Number: Date Needed by: Expense Code: Completed forms are routed for approval to contracted C.E.&I. Firm and to Engineering. Engineering will process and provide records retention according to City of Clearwater's Records Management Program. Page 2 of 2 ' Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 1 1 PROJECT PERMITS, No FDEP Permit is Anticipated. Contractor to obtain City of Clearwater Building Department Permits. Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 SIEMENS FILTER PROPSAL AND PROPOSAL DRAWINGS 1 Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 I SIEMENS ' PROJECT: Filter Rehabilitation I Marshall Street APCF Clearwater, Florida ENGINEER: King Engineering Jeffrey E. Ellick DATE: January 14, 2011 REPLY TO: Heyward Florida, Inc. 415 Country Club Drive Winter Park, FL 32789 ITEM: Sand Filter Rehabilitation Model 12-KK12X30 REF: Siemens/Zimpro File No. 88416 ATTENTION: Greg Chomic Phone: 407-628-1880 Fax: 407-628-9860 E-mail: gehomic@heywardfl.com Siemens Water Technologies Corp. (Siemens) submits the following proposal for equipment and services for refurbishing the existing Siemens-Zimpro Hydro-Clear® Rapid Sand Filtration System, Model KK- 12x30(12) as described in this Proposal and shown on the attached Siemens drawings. Equipment and services to be furnished by Siemens include the following items (paragraph numberin corresponds to paragraph number scheme inspecification section 11366): 1.04 SUBMITTALS: Shop drawings and other submittals as required for the owner's and/or their agent's review and approval prior to component fabrication. 1.05 UPDATED OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: Updated Operation and Maintenance Manuals as required per the contract documents. 1.06 SPARE PARTS: Recommended spare parts are included as follows: • two (2) diaphragm level sensors • one (1) float type level sensor • one (l.) roll 3" x 3/16" x 50' Long Roll Neoprene Gasket • one (1) 1 1/2" Chem-Clean® Ball Valve • two (2) PVC Diffusers - 3/4" Diameter 2.03 UNDERDRAIN (See Siemens Drawing No. 403): ' E. 36 new PVC underdrain cores F. 72 Pieces of stainless steel wire mesh (100% replacement) G. 36 new sections of fiberglass grating ' H. 288 Pieces of loose perimeter angle constructed of factory finish painted (see painting in 2.05 below) carbon steel (100% replacement) Clearwater, FL Marshall Street APCF January 14, 2011 -1- SIEMENS 1. 432 Pieces of Structural 1-Beams constructed of factory finish painted (see painting in 2.05 below) carbon steel (100% replacement) 2.05 FILTER MEDIA: Three thousand nine hundred sixty cubic feet (3960 ft3) of single grade filter media. Three thousand six hundred cubic feet (3600 ft) field installed and three hundred sixty cubic feet (360 ft) extra for future use. 2.06 CELL INLET BOX AND WEIR ASSEMBLY (See Siemens Drawing No. 404): Twelve (12) new inlet boxes factory fabricated of 1/4" structural grade carbon steel (factory finish painted per below) with new FRP weir plates with 18-8 stainless steel mounting hardware to mount weir plates. PAINTING: Appropriate surface preparation and factory painting will be as follows: After fabricating, all steel surfaces that are to be factory painted shall be sandblasted to an SSPC- SP10 near-white surface profile before painting. Factory primed steel surfaces shall be coated with one (1) coat of Tnemec Series 66 at 3.0 to 5.0 mils dry film thickness (DFT). Factory finished painted steel surfaces shall be coated with two (2) coats of Tnemec Series 104 epoxy one (1) coat at a DFT of 3.0 to 5.0 mils and one (1) coat at a DFT of 8.0 to 10.0 mils. One (1) gallon of each paint shall be provided for field touch-up. The Contractor shall be responsible to touch-up any items damaged during construction or scratched in shipping, and for compatible finish coats, as required. 2.07 CELL DISTRIBUTION/BACKWASH TROUGH ASSEMBLY (See Siemens Drawing No. 405): Twelve (12) new distribution/backwash trough assemblies including trough support angles, trough support stands, removable flip-up splash plates, adjustable v-.notch. weirs and all appropriate connecting elements. The troughs shall be constructed of 1/4" structural grade carbon steel (factory finish painted per 2.05 above). Trough stands and support angles shall be carbon steel (factory finish painted per 2.05 above). Removable, flip-up splash plates are constructed of 304 stainless steel. Weir plates are constructed of FRP and fabricated with 90° V-notches on 6" centers and slots that provide approximately 2" of vertical adjustment. 2.08 HARDWARE, GASKET, AND CONSUMABLES (see Siemens drawing No. 403): • 51 Rolls of 3" Neoprene closed cellular gasket (100 % replacement) (underdrain cores) • 15 Rolls of 1" glued back Neoprene closed cellular gasket (100% replacement) (underdrain cores) • 864 Pieces of 5/8" x 8" long 18-8 stainless steel threaded rod with 3 nuts and 3 washers each (1 nut factory welded by Siemens to one end of the all threaded rod). (100% replacement) (used to hold down existing frames) • 432 Pieces of 5/8" x 4" Square Head 18-8 stainless steel set screw with 2 nuts and 2 washers each (100% replacement) (used to hold down underdrain cores) Clearwater, FL Marshall Street APCF January 14, 2011 -2- SIEMENS ' 2.09 LOCAL CONTROL CONSOLES: Six (6) new stainless steel NEMA 12 floor mounted Local Filter Cell Control Consoles containing all necessary compartments, switches, signal ' lights, terminal boards, timers, circuit breakers and pilot valves for air operated butterfly valves for two (2) filter cells. Each local filter cell control console shall be completely factory assembled, wired, piped, and tested prior to shipment to the project site. ' 2.10 MAIN FILTER CONTROL PANEL AND PLC CONTROLLER: Programming services for programmable logic controller will be provided by Siemens. Physical components of the PLC & HMI by others. HMI programming will be by others with screen shot sketches provided by Siemens. Program will operate all functions of the refurbished filter. No new components are being provided for the main control panel. 2.11 LEVEL SENSORS: Twenty-six (26) new diaphragm type level sensors with sufficient cord length to reach the electrical control panel or junction box and stainless steel mounting ' clamps as follows: • 24 - in filter cell, 2 in each filter cell ' 1 - in inlet channel • 1 in clearwell One (1) micro-switch, float type level sensor with 15 ft. cord length to reach the appropriate control panel or junction box in the media cleaning system chemical storage tank. ' 2.12 SURFACE AIR SYSTEM: (See Siemens Drawing No. 602): New surface air mix components consisting of one hundred and forty-four (144) 304 stainless steel diffuser drop mounting supports with 18-8 stainless steel u-bolts; two hundred eighty-eight (288) I Schedule 80 PVC diffusers and two hundred eighty-eight (288) 304 stainless steel diffuser mounting supports with 18-8 stainless steel u-bolts. ' 2.13 CHEMICAL CLEAN SYSTEM: (See Siemens Drawing No. 501): New media grease Clean System consisting of: one (1) 360 gallon Polyethylene chemical storage tank, and twelve (12) 1-1/2" electric ball valves. ' 3.09 INSPECTION AND TRAINING: Installation supervision/inspection, start-up, and training services shall be provided by a Siemens Senior Field Service Technician for a ' period of twenty-one (21) non-consecutive on-site eight (8) hour days within seven (7) trips. Siemens has made no provisions for on-site time during performance testing per Specification 11366, Paragraph 3.11.13. Additional on-site time shall be provided upon request at a per diem rate of $1,250.00 per day plus travel and living expenses at cost plus 1 15%. I3.11 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE: Siemens offers the following performance guarantee as part of this proposal: ' Clearwater, FL Marshall Street APCF January 14, 2011 -3- SIEMENS Based on proper installation, operation, and maintenance, Siemens shall guarantee that the Hydro- Clear filter being refurbished under this proposal shall meet the following process requirements per specification section 11366, Paragraph 3.11.A: Performance Requirements Value Peak Flow Rate, m/ftz 4.0 Maximum Backwash Flow Rate m/ftz 12 Maximum. Effluent TSS, mg/L 5 Maximum Effluent Turbidity, NTU 2.5 *Peak Flow Rate gpm/sq ft) is based on a total maximum flow rate to the filter of 12 MGD with six (6) filter cells online. **Maximum Effluent TSS is based on a maximum of 20 mg/L TSS influent to the filter. ***Maximurn Effluent Turbidity is based on a maximum of 1.0 NTU influent to the filter. In order to achieve above requirements, particle sizes must be filterable (greater than 3 microns in size). Responsibility for meeting influent characteristics to the filter as defined above rests solely by others. Siemens is not responsible for any labor, chemical addition system, monitoring devices, or other equipment or services necessary to achieve influent characteristics defined above. PRICING The price for equipment and services under item 1.04 through item 3.09 of this proposal by Siemens is EIGHT HUNDRED THIRTY-SIX THOUSAND DOLLARS ($836,000.00 USD). No taxes of any description are included in the above stated selling price. Clearwater, FL Marshall Street APCF January 14, 2011 -4- i SIEMENS The following chart summarizes specification section 11366 and identifies Siemens scope of suvvly in comparison with the Contractor's scone of supply and installation requirements: 1 t FURN ISHED BY Section _ _Description uanti Siemens Contractor Installed h 1.04.A Submittals -- X X - 1.04.8 Filter Media Submittal -- X -- 1.05 _ O&M Manual -- X -- 1.06.A Special Tools _ NA -- 1.06.13 Spare Parts x -- 1.08 Storage and Handling -- X -- 2.02.D Specialty Hardware see prop, x _ X Contractor 2.03.0 Underdrain Frames 72 X Existin 2,03.1) Gullet Covers 72 x Existing 2.03.E Underdrain Cores 216 36 New Contractor 2.03.F Wire Mesh 72 X Contractor 103.G FRP Gratin _ 216 36 New Contractor 2.03.11 Hold Down Angles 288 X Contractor 2.031 Hold Down Beams 432 X Contractor 2.04 Underdrain Grout -- X Contractor 2.05 Filter Media 3960 cf x Contractor 206 Inlet Boxes 12 X Contractor 2.07 Trou h Assemblies 12 X Contractor 2.08 Hardware & Gaskets -- X Contractor 2.09 Local Control Consoles 6 X Contractor 2.10.13 PLC Programming /,HMI sketches 1 X Ci 2.1 LA Level Sensors 27 X Contractor 2.12.A Surface Air System 288 X Contractor 2.13.A.I FRP Chemical Storage Tank 1 X Contractor 2.13.A.2. Chem Clean Piping - X Contractor 2.13.A.3 Chem Clean Piping -- X Contractor 2.13.A.4 Chem Clean Valves 12 X Contractor 3.01 Filter Cell Equip. Removal 12 cells Contractor 3.02 Cleaning and Protection During Installation, Testing and Startup 12 cells x Contractor 3.03 Underdrain Inspection and Replacement See 2.03.E Contractor 3.04 Hydrostatic Testing for Wall Penetrations -- 3.05 Cell Interior Walls and Floor Painting -- X Contractor 3.06 Filter Assembly x Contractor 3.07 w Media Installation 12 Cells x Contractor 3.08 Technical Direction -- x x 3.09 Inspection and Trainin -- x x 3.11 Process Performance Test -- x Contractor ' Clearwater, FL Marshall Street APCF January 14, 2011 -5- I SIEMENS ITEMS NOT INCLUDED: 1. Field installation mechanical /electrical labor of any description including dismantling and disposal of existing components and installation of new components. For specific requirements of the Contractor see above chart. 2. Automatic and manual valves, piping, tubing and fittings. 3. Proposal item 2.03 covers thirty-six (36) replacement underdrain core assemblies and thirty-six (36) grating sections. Upon completing inspection of each filter cell's underdrain components, if necessary or required, additional underdrain core assemblies and grating sections can be purchased at an addition to the proposal price as follows: + One (1) set of Underdrain Assembly consisting of one (1) Underdrain core section and one (1) grating section - $2,051.00 plus shipping and handling. 4. Removal and disposal of existing media (sand). 5. Repairs of existing concrete structures, foundations, pads or vessels. 6. Fasteners or anchor rods/bolts, ex_ cep as delineated in this proposal. 7. Repair or replacement of existing embedded anchor bolts. 8. Pressure cleaning of existing components to be reused including piping and headers. 9. Sandblasting and painting of any description, ex_ cept as delineated in this proposal. 10. Unloading, storage of any equipment furnished by Siemens. 11. [Intentionally left blank] 12. [Intentionally left blank] 13. [Intentionally left blank] 14. [Intentionally left blank] 15. Section 11366, Paragraph 1.06.A. - No special tools are required therefore none are included in this proposal. 16. Section 11366, Paragraph 1.07.A. - Warranty for equipment supplied by Siemens will be as follows: Clearwater, FL Marshall Street APCF January 14, 2011 -6- 11 SIEMENS The equipment manufacturer shall provide to Buyer a twelve (12) month warranty commencing from the time of Substantial Completion as outlined in the specifications or eighteen (18) months from delivery whichever occurs first. The equipment manufacturer shall guarantee to Buyer that the equipment furnished conforms matcriall to the description in the a ui ment manufacturer's documentation and shall be suitable for the , ncl free from defects of desk-, material and workmanship. In the event the equipment fails to perform as specified, upon prompt written notice of breach of this warranty the equipment manufacturer shall, at its sole option and as Buyer's sole remedy promptly repair or replace the defective equipment without any cost to the B_ uyer Owne (including handling and shipment costs). The equipment manufacturer's warranty is conditioned on Buyer's (a) operating and maintaining the Equipment in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions, (b) not making any unauthorized repairs or alterations, and (c) not being in default of any payment obligation to equipment manufacturer. Equipment manufacturer's warranty does not cover damage caused by chemical action or abrasive material, misuse, or improper installation (unless installed by equipment manufacturer). ' THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION ARE SELLER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE WARRANTIES AND ARE SUBJECT TO LIMITATION OF LIABILITY STATEMENT BELOW. SELLER MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY ' KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. ' LIMITATION OF LIABILITY: NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING ELSE TO THE CONTRARY, SELLER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE OR OTHER INDIRECT DAMAGES, AND ' SELLER'S TOTAL LIABILITY ARISING AT ANY TIME FROM THE SALE OR USE OF THE EQUIPMENT SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR ,rHE EQUIPMENT. THESE LIMITATIONS APPLY WHETHER THE LIABILITY IS ' BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, STRICT LIABILITY OR ANY OTHER THEORY EVEN IF REMEDIES PROVIDED UNDER SELLER'S DOCUMENTATION FAIL THEIR ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. ' 17. Section 11366-5, Paragraph 2.02.D. & 2.08.A. -- Hardware included is as detailed in proposal above. All other hardware is by Contractor. ' 18. [Intentionally left blank] ' 19. SECTION 11366, PARAGRAPH 3.11. - ALL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE PROCESS PERFORMANCE TEST ARE BY CONTRACTOR. SIEMENS HAS MADE NO PROVISIONS FOR ON-SITE TIME DURING PERFORMANCE ' TESTING. Clearwater, FL Marshall Street APCF January 14, 2011 -7- I SIEMENS 20. Contract Drawing M-10 & D1: Diffuser support brackets will be 304 SS, u-bolts will be 18-S SS. 21. Contract Drawing D-2: Hold down threaded rod will be according to paragraph 2.08 above and Siemens drawing 403 per direction of Engineer. Preliminary Drawings: Drawing No. Description -403 Underdrain Installation Sequence -404 Cell Inlet Box Installation Detail -405 Backwash Trough Installation Detail -501 General Assembly Information. (2 sheets) -602 Low Pressure Diffuser Air Piping -603 Filter Cell Components Installation Sequence Validity of Pricing: This proposal shall remain firm and in effect for ninety (90) days from proposal date, after which time SIEMENS reserves the right to increase the above quoted selling price, extend the offer or void the entire offer. This proposal is also based on delivery of equipment no later than August 31, 2011. SIEMENS reserves the right to increase the quoted price (not to exceed 1.25% per month) if INSTALLATION CONTRACTOR cannot accept delivery by this date. Payment: Ninety percent (90%) of the above stated price shall be payable upon delivery of the equipment to the job site within thirty (30) days of receipt of manufacturer's invoice. The balance of the payment shall be due upon completion of installation and start-up of the equipment or thirty (30) days after final delivery of the equipment, whichever comes first. Interest will be charged at an annual rate of eighteen percent (18%) on any unpaid balance thirty (30) days overdue. Delivery: Delivery of equipment will be made by truck and delivery time after approval will be determined at time of order. Freight is allowed to the project site, F.O.B. the factory. It is the INSTALLATION CONTRACTOR's responsibility to receive, expeditiously unload, or suitably store the equipment. INSTALLATION CONTRACTOR agrees to accept partial shipments. Partial shipments shall be billed for the value of the shipments and are subject to the above payment terms. Clearwater, FL Marshall Street APCF January 14, 2011 -8- SIEMENS The attached Terms and Conditions are hereby made a part of this proposal. Submitted this 14"' day of January, 2011 Accepted by (L YL PI-L This day of By. oe Nordin, Product Manager By Hydro-Clear® Filtration Systems Zimprot Systems Title Siemens Water Technologies Corp. Attachments: Drawings, Terms and Conditions 2011. The above Offer is hereby Accepted and Approved this day of 2011. SIEMENS WATER TECHNOLOGIES CORP. By Title Clearwater, FL Marshall,5treet APCF January 14, 2011 -9- SIRNIF,NS WATER TECHNOLOGIES CORP. STANnARD TERMS OF SALE 1. Applicable Tents, Tlmese terms govern the purchase and sale of the equipment and related services, if any (collectively, "Equipment"), referred to in Seller's purchase order, quotation, proposal or acknowledgment, as the case may be ("Seller's Documentation"). Whether these terms are included in an offer or an acceptance by Seller, such offer or acceptance is conditioned on Buyer's assent to these terms. Seller rejects all additional or different terms in any ofBuyer's forms or documents. 2. Pavmet_ Buyer shall pay Seller the full purchase price as set forth in Seller's Documentation. Unless Seller's Documentation provides otherwise, freight, storage, insurance and all taxes, duties or other governmental charges relating to the Equipment shall be paid by Buyer. If Seller is required to pay any such charges, Buyer shall immediately reimburse Seller. All payments are due within 30 days after receipt of invoice. Buyer shall be charged the lower of I %N interest per month or the maximum legal rate on all arnounts not received by the due date and shall pay all of Seller's reasonable costs (including attorneys' fees) of collecting amounts due but unpaid- All orders are subject to credit approval- 3_ Delivery. Delivery of the Equipment shall be in material compliance with the schedule in Seller's Documentation. Unless Seller's Documentation provides otherwise, Delivery terms are Ex-Works Seller's facility. 4. Ownership, of Materials. All devices, designs (including drawings, plans and specifications), estimates, prices, notes, electronic data and other documents or information prepared or disclosed by Seller, and all related intellectual property rights, shall remain Seller's property. Seller grants Buyer a non-exclusive, non- transferable license to use any such material solely for Buyer's use of the Equipment. Buyer shall not disclose any such material to third parties without: Seller's prior written consent- 5, Chanpes. Seller shall not implement any changes in the scope of work described in Seller's Documentation unless Buyer and Seller agree in writing to the details of the change and any resulting price, schedule or other contractual modifications. This includes any changes necessitated by a change in applicable law occurring after the effective date of any contract including these terms. Any costs associated with changes necessitated by a. change in applicable law, decision by public official and/or court decisions, or engineering standards occurring after the effective date of this Purchase Order shall be borne Buyer. 6. Warranty. Subject to the following sentence, Seller warrants to Buyer that the Equipment shall materially conform to the description in Seller's Documentation and shall be free from defects in material and workmanship. The foregoing warranty shall not apply to any Equipment (bat is specified or otherwise demanded by Buyer and is not manufactured or selected by Seller, as to which (i) Seller hereby assigns to Buyer, to the extent assignable, any warranties made to Seller and (ii) Seller shall have no other liability to Buyer under warranty, tort or any other legal theory. If Buyer gives Seller prompt written notice of breach of this warranty within 18 months from delivery or I year from acceptance, whichever occurs first (the "Warranty Period"), Seller shall, at its sole option and as Buyer's sole remedy, repair or replace the subject parts or refund the purchase price thereof. If Seller determines that any claimed breach is not, in fact, covered by this warranty, Buyer shall pay Seller its then customary charges for any repair or replacement made by Seller. Seller's warranty is conditioned on Buyer's (a) operating and maintaining the Equipment in accordance with Seller's instructions, (b) not making any unauthorized repairs or alterations, and (c) not being in default of any payment obligation to Seller. Seller's warranty does not cover damage caused by chemical action or abrasive material, misuse or improper installation (unless installed by Seller). THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN TIBS SECTION ARE SELLER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE WARRANTIES AND ARE SUBJECT TO SECTION 11 BELOW. SELLER MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING 'W TIIOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. 7. Indemnity. Seller shall indemnify, defend and hold Buyer harmless from any claim, cause of action or liability incurred by Buyer as a result of third party claims for personal injury, death or damage to tangible property, to the extent caused by Seller's negligence. Seller shall have the sole authority to direct the defense of and settle any indemnified claim. Seller's indemnification is conditioned on Buyer (a) promptly, within the Warranty Period, notifying Seller of any claim, and (b) providing reasonable cooperation in the defense of any claim. 8. F MaLeure. Neither Seller nor Buyer shall have any liability for any breach (except for breach of payment obligations) caused by extreme weather or other act of God, strike or other labor shortage or disturbance, fire, accident, war or civil disturbance, delay of carriers, failure of normal sources of supply, act of government or any other cause beyond such party's reasonable control. 9. Cancellation. If Buyer cancels or suspends its order for any reason other than Seller's breach, Buyer shall promptly pay Seller for work performed prior to cancellation or suspension and any other direct costs incurred by Seller as a result of such cancellation or suspension. I0. Export Buyer acknowledges that Seller is required to comply with applicable export laws and regulations relating to the sale, exportation, transfer, assignment, disposal and usage of the Equipment provided under this Agreement, including any export license requirements. Buyer agrees that such Equipment shall not at any time directly or indirectly be used, exported, sold, transferred, assigned or otherwise disposed of in a manner which will result in non-compliance with such applicable export laws and regulations. It shall be a condition of the continuing performance by Seller of its obligations hereunder that compliance with such export laws and regulations be maintained at all times. BUYER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY AND HOLD SELLER IIARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL COSTS, LIABILITIES, PENALTIES, SANCTIONS AND FINES RELATED TO NON-COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE EXPORT LAWS AND REGULATIONS. 11. LIMIT N OF LIABILITY. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING ELSE TO THE CONTRARY, SELLER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE OR OTHER INDIRECT DAMAGES, AND SELLER'S TOTAL LIABILITY ARISING AT ANY TIME FROM THE SALE OR USE OF THE EQUIPMENT SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THE EQUIPMENT. THESE LIMITATIONS APPLY WHETHER THE LIABILITY IS BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, STRICT LIABILITY OR ANY OTHER THEORY EVEN IF REMEDIES PROVIDED UNDER SELLER'S DOCUMENTATION FAIL THEIR ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. 12. cellaneous. If these teens are issued in connection with a government contract, they shall be deemed to include those federal acquisition regulations that are required by law to be included. These terms, together with any quotation, purchase order or acknowledgement issued or signed by the Seller, comprise the complete and exclusive statement of the agreement between the parties (the "Agreement") and supersede any terms contained in Buyer's documents, unless separately signed by Seller. No part of the Agreement may be changed or cancelled except by a written document signed by Seller and Buyer. No course of dealing or performance, usage of trade or failure to enforce any terns shall be used to modify the Agreement. If any of these terms is unenforceable, such tern shall be limited only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable, and all other terms shall remain in full force and effect. Buyer may not assign or permit any other transfer of the Agreement without Seller's prior written consent. The Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania without regard to its conflict of laws provisions. ADWD07-REV-2 7/01108 µ G P?d z ? U ? o E i s? 9 1n m r 2 N? p ?v ig ?s nl ?I ?g B ?g tS Si4 ijj? Sao ?s \ UN Iy??? -1?1 tA WI` 2 .. .I YI 7l oW ? ? ?? 8S? -? J U 4?m Jo - '. f wwa _ #z . 12 d r Q W a- I I I C r?L 0 C-LL VI ______,___._--- ---------__-- j ?W F1 LL - LL?? K?°e I 9 C- I i I Mil sxusuadmnae - oiae/ei/I? - iaxn - co.\v'unvmenlruav?s?mHSww.o?aoaa,aana\en? oen?u\u?isao?:n ?+?w?o $+e cis ? ? ? Z -pry ?9^ }.?.L whop ?? ? n ? G1 ? = IS l8 (,jF ' >m?. ;?ePo ? O a a y z z W B B m ? ??3 ? Y Z Z d ? W d? ` G m T, T, 3 any ?{ d ? • li: ? F ?- - NAY'- o ?#?Q"i N SS?w m?z? =6 Z N N N u ? ? x m g3 H 1ig7 II Q EY ??y ? 6B? g ?????z?55€IR ? Qp@ ?'? ? ' ? ; ?5o? g ? ? p ???ye d a r M m ® ? p? 7 ¢p ?[ 7p ypypp ddy 4E?°f€HAlile`l?e? 6 Y 4 r?r ? p 5 U f yy ? k Y4 S? '?? b €: 5 _ o F 3 ICE a s9 G xi m b N ?° B d I it I KK k p ?v ygp +5? rv n ? ? g w II I a9 ? : o, ho ad II 11 Y? ?=q=off - ?,? •? ?o ?? ?? I &V I I I I mom" ? m-e ^ - • • I I I ? R O I I I I ? y! E??fi ? - -_ l? 55 d u I 1 I ?? - ba I I I 2 I- _ a IYe ? ? o . . pe g ?oxsxod•em ?o - w=ere olozinvu - ?xow - smaz-las\Id?aivmv?}p-?3:a?s?w,rsv+w\oldo ad\doad\rrrla'onaw\xols3o\?o QI a ? ?a Z LIJ LM p? gg W 3 LU ? pp a ? ?9 t= ? a I - -ice 5 ? Y RS {Na?1 O i2 N g 555? p y,, 5 ,,'?11 ?W( I I ?? + 4? ?Wr$ ?I? } G? "?. b - .7 ZS 1 t 11 1 a-0 S-p -bo V-. - ?xa'iov\?'tl31v 00 1a]tl151WHSWM\O.dOhJ\JOtlJ\W110-000AI I\WJIS30\? ?I a 9? i^ 3 l _m ? WN C u a ? r- C W WAS \ \`/ \ \. / 7, \ Po?v a 3: a _ d C ?. ?\ J?Jr; ``\ a `tea \ ? O 0 Giy9 ga[ y J< --------- lqr ? r 'r ? ` Y \ D ? ? k ?i,o--.yam---- \ •\ \ o y d r \ S\ ? ------- UV ---------- u / g \ ? i S ._ ------ --- y R m 9 N g fill \ 0 c? 8 I 1 I I? 1 v?oxsxoarmae - ?s:oi o??e/ei/?? - voo? - to w x9 a e?a V O !? 0 ?g x 41 °¢ ?? rn s o Jvr ?V7 p? d pp z g o z ° 4 F J ° V1 2 o °W?li 3 ir- 0 77 a d z o w o o° a z C_ Z LU o v o N M°Mc°i3 ° r ~ o L) LL ° WNi g i m ui ag . x `ao a asgri oZ s w? w a i v i o - ?r??s Ld v z u tfz mZ a rZ o. L) z-?z ?z LL W W O n ? ? ? ? ( ? ?• d N Z c FF8? 9 =° YO W Q W O mz ?K ?l {(a ?? Z 0? ON e a = a o m a a ?.. ca N 4u j m. M v j c?.. a 4 N m aK n r ° o.. a ad of ?.? O a ; ?1 r z W O?wJ Z U O(li i O O ° m ( l?9fi ye'?t'?'glagfi t• 3 ?? l pg9?•``4tl f9f{??efrf9 _ .._ z 0 z N z Y 2 - - w a z 8 o CL - - - r •--• nJ - ZZ 4 F ?1 Z ? CL [ 0) g Ow emu' pg ? Q.?PJJwv 9au??F - m \ ?z z - nZE _ a av ? U) ? ~ RO O 0- V) In ON N mm pm in O 3 aZ \ aE N9 uWi R o a. ?I - ___. ....._..--- ---- -------- --- i w m N°i I t 1 11 'J t 1 1 I I LI s>o"sxod rvwea - -w?:o' t'Qz 0/'0 - I - amvrjxv-?ttra-ua.zs-?rmswn\v .aArmum- in.zs ?TMSn.n\o?aouawoxa\xre}......\xoisaava 0 g3 ?o c R t A ?5n ? W gaY I ' ... ? a - r a a Z rv ?? [• Y 9 $ g E G3? ?? B?6@ s ?tv E? t? a S SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Table of Contents: CONTRACT BONI) ..................................................................................................................... 1 CONTRACT .................................................................................................................................. 3 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT ..................................................... 6 PROPOSAL BOND ...................................................................................................................... 7 AFFIDAVIT .................................................................................................................................. S NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT ............................................................................................... 9 PROPOSAL ................................................................................................................................. 10 CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET ................................................................. 13 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL .............................................................................................................14 Section V.doc Page i 9/27/2010 0 GUI April 25, 2011 1 ' City of Clearwater, Florida 100 South Myrtle Avenue ' Clearwater, FL 33756-5520 ' Re: Authority to Date Bonds and Powers of Attorney Principal: Wharton-Smith, Inc. ' Bond No.: 929523821 Project: Marshall Street WRF Rapid Sand Filter Rehabilitation (09-0045-UT), 1605 Harbor Drive, Clearwater, FL ' 33755 t Dear Sir or Madam: ' Please be advised that as Surety on the above referenced bond, executed on your behalf for this project, we hereby authorize you to date the bonds and ' the powers of attorney concurrent with the date of the contract agreement. ' Once dated, please send a copy of the dated bonds to our office. Best regards, ' Western Surety Company 1 nnifer L. cCarta ' Attorney In Fact and Florida"Li?--nsed Resident Agent 1 GNARD COMPANY SURETY BONDS 1904 BOOTHE CIRCLE - LONGWOOD, FL 32750 ' PH (407) 834-0022 / (888) 220-3780 - FAX (407) 260-1767 / (888) 220-3228 - www.guignardcompany.com 1 Public Work F.S. Chapter 255.05 (1)(a) Cover Page 1 ' BOND NO.: 929523821 CONTRACTORNAME: Wharton-Smith, Inc. ' CONTRACTOR ADDRESS: 750 Monroe Road Sanford, FL 32771 ' CONTRACTOR PHONE NO.: (407) 321-8410 ' SURETY COMPANY: Western. Surety Company P.O. Box 5077 ' Sioux Falls, SD 57117-5077 ' SURETY COMPANY PHONE NO.: (800) 331-6053 OWNER NAME: City of Clearwater, Florida ' OWNER ADDRESS: 100 South Myrtle Avenue Clearwater, FL 33756-5520 ' OWNER PHONE NO.: (727) 562-4750 OBLIGEE NAME: (If contracting entity is different from the owner, the contracting public entity) ' OBLIGEE ADDRESS: BOND AMOUNT: $2,433,819.24/$2,433,819.24 ' CONTRACT NO.. (If applicable) DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Marshall Street WRF Rapid Sand Filter Rehabilitation ' (09-0045-UT) PROJECT LOCATION: 1605 Harbor Drive, Clearwater, FL 33755 ' LEGAL DESCRIPTION: (If applicable) ' FRONT PAGE All other bond page(s) are deemed subsequent to this page regardless of any page number(s) that may be printed thereon. 1 OBLIGEE PHONE NO.: W ' Public Work F.S. Chapter 255.05 (1)(a) Cover Page Forms and Becomes a Part of this Bond. EXECUTED IN 3 COUNTERPARTS BOND DUMBER: 929523821 ' CONTRACT BONI) STATE OF FLORIDA ' COUNTY OF PINELLAS KNOW ALL ?Tl"ti BY THESE PRESENTS: That we W'HARTON-Smun, INC. Contractor ' and WESTERN' SURETY COMPAh1" (Surety) whose horne address is P. O. BOX 5077, SIOUX FALLSL, SOUTH DAKOTA 57117-5077 ' HERE NAF1 LIZ CALLED THE "Surety". are held and firmly bound into the City of Clear\v.itcr, Florida (hereinafter called the "Owner"1 in the penal sum of. THE BASE BID OF 52,341,819.24 ' AND THE BID ALTERNATE OF $92,000.00, FOR A TOTAL CONTRACT AMOUNT OF TWO MILLION, FOUR HUNDRED THIRTY THREE THOUSAND EIGHT HUNDRF. ) NINETEEN DOLLARS AND TWENTY FOUR CENTS (2,433,81.9.24)for the payment of which ' we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns for the faithful performance of a certain written contract, dated the c? , day of 2011, entered into between the Contractor and the City of Clearwater for: ' iv1.ARSHALL STREET WRF RAPID SAND FILTER REHABILI'T'ATION (09-0045-UT) a copy of which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and is made a part hereof as if fully copied herein. ' NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION. ARE SUCH, that if the Contractor shall in all respects comply ?,vith the terms and conditions of said contract, including the one-year guarantee of material and labor. and his obligations thereunder, including the contract documents (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Form of Proposal. Form of Contract, Norm of Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Technical Specifications) and the Plans and Specifications therein referred to and made a part thereof, and such alterations as may be ' made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and save harmless the said Owner against and from all costs, expenses, damages, injure, or conduct, want of dare or skill. ne ,ligence or default, including patent infringements on the part of the said Contractor agents or employees. in the execution or performance of said contract, including errors in the plans furnished by the Contractor, and further, if such "Contractor" or "Contractors" shall promptly make ' payments to all persons supplying him, them or it. labor, material, and supplies used directly or indirectly by said Contractor, Contractors, Sub-Contractor, or Sub-Contractors, in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract, this obligation shall be void, otherwise, the Contractor and Surety jointly and severally agree to pay to the Owner any difference between the sum to which the said Contractor. would be entitled on the completion of the Contract, and that which the Owner may be obliged to pay for the completion of said work by contract or otherwise. & any damages, direct or indirect, or consequential, which said (honer may sustain on account of such work, or on account of the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in all things, keep and execute all the provisions of said contract. This bond is given to comply with Section 255.05 Florida Statutes, and any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in Section 255.05(2), Florida Statutes. Page 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CONTRACT BOND And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves. their successors, executors. administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally. that-tlic% will amply and fully protect the said Owner against. and will pay any and all amounts, damages, costs and judgments which may be recovered against or which the Owner may be called upon to pay to any person or corporation by reason of any damages arising from the performance of said work. or ofthe repair or maintenance thereof, or the manner of doing the same or the neglect of the said Contractor or his agents or servants or the improper performance of the said work by the Contractor or his agents or servants. or the infringements of any patent rights by reason of the use o('any material furnished or work done; pis aforesaid, or otherwise. 4nd the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors. heirs. executors, administrators, and assigns. jointly and severallN, to repay the owner any sum which the Owner may be compelled to pay because of any lien for labor material furnished for the work. embraced by said Contract. And the said Surety, for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond. and it sloes hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this day uE_.jYC 2011. ITT r C-' ?? cy W. ain 15. 92n$on, Jr., Corporate cretary -7 7) ckaw, f Kathy Clawson, Witness CQ NTF.RS GNED: I ' Je ifer L. M C rta, Attorney-In-Fact & Florida Licensed Resident Agent 1 Page 2 WHARTON-SMITH IN . QNT CT012 '?? BY= Ronald F. Davoli, President/CEO WESTERN SURETY COMPANY SURE} By: A TORN -IN-FA'.. & Florida Licensed ResidentAge4t4%7,f- J , x Jennifer L. McCarta Inquiries: (407) 834-0022 r . 1111111 I I - Western Surety Company 1 POWER OF ATTORNEY APPOINTING INDIVIDUAL ATTORNEY-IN-FACT Know All Men By These Presents, That WESTERN SURETY COMPANY, a South Dakota corporation, is a duly organized and existing corporation having its principal office in the City of Sioux Falls, and State of South Dakota, and that it does by virtue of the signature and seal herein affixed hereby make, constitute and appoint J W Guignard, Bryce R Guignard, M Gary Francis, April L Lively, Paul J Ciambriello, Jennifer L McCarta, Margie L Morris, Peggy Snow, Allyson Foss, Individually of Longwood, FL, its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact with full power and authority hereby conferred to sign, seal and execute for and on its behalf bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of similar nature - In Unlimited Amounts - and to bind it thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by a duly authorized officer of the corporation and all the acts of said Attorney, pursuant to the authority hereby given, are hereby ratified and confirmed. This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the By-Law printed on the reverse hereof, duly adopted, as indicated, by the shareholders of the corporation. In Witness Whereof, WESTERN SURETY COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by its Senior Vice President and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed on this 23rd day of August, 2010. WESTERN SURETY COMPANY artier,-c oft. ? q W 1z 3rf sf A?'?v ?IjNµ01 Paul . Bruflat, Senior Vice President State of South Dakota ss County of Minnehaha On this 23rd day of August, 2010, before me personally came Paul T. Bmflat, to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say: that he resides in the City of Sioux Falls, State of South Dakota; that he is the Senior Vice President of WESTERN SURETY COMPANY described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Board of Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto pursuant to like authority, and acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said corporation. My commission expires +44444444444444yy44444444 + s D. KRELL i November 30, 2012 sEAL NOTARY PUBLIC SFJtL r SOUTH DAKOTA r +44444444444444444444444 + XQa k1tow D. Krell, No ry Public CERTIFICATE I, L. Nelson, Assistant Secretary of WESTERN SURETY COMPANY do hereby certify that the Power of Attorney hereinabove set forth is still in force, and further certify that the By-Law of the corporation printed on the reverse hereof is still in force. In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the seal of the said corporation this day of WESTERN SURETY COMPANY s WQ??pDa4r?.`'?- ???CAb.1i L. Nelson, Assistant Secretary Form F4280-09-06 1 1 CONTME1 In addition to the foregoing provisions; the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements: 1 In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment becauseof race, sex, religion, color, or national origin: The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the fallowing: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay-off or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including ' apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non-discrimination clause. ' The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or workees representatives, except sub-contractors for ' standard commercial supplies or raw materials. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the ' event that the work. to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then fir agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the sum of JM.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the ' Contractor remains. incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per y shall only and solely represent damages which. the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is ' not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract. ' It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract. and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall. at any time deem the surety or ' sureties upon such performance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to be adequate : in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within tea (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional bond. or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City. If.such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guars n*ing the faithful ' performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and famished to the City in a form satisfactory to it. Page 4 0 1 CO'1 T T IN WITNESS WHEREOF. the parties to the agreement have hereunto set. their hands and seals and ' have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day and year first above writte ?Q2 1 CITY OF CLEARWATER. IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA C.) O By: - - ?ArEK (Seal). ' 1illianz B. home, II City Manager Attest: Countersigned: _k QQ-Q-?Ka? u-- Rosemarie Call ' r ' Frank Hibbard, Mayor-Councilmember 1 (Contractor must indicate whetherl arporati ' Partnership, Company or Individual.) 1 (The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own. name, and. his title; where the person is signing fora Corporation, he must, by .Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation). Page 5 1 1t,11n?c 5 %. l? . , FCC (Con By. fri ? r ,? l kti, Carnilo Soto Assistant City Attorney 1 1 C NT CT ' F)ID V T EQR FINAL PAYMENT ' CO ORATION FORM STAT `OF FLORIDA ' COUNTY OF On this day personally appeared before me. the undersigned authority, duly authorized to ' administer oaths and tape acknowledgments; , who after being duly sworn. deposes and says: ' That he is the (TITLE). of WHARTON-SM 1TH;. INC. a Florida Corporation, with its principal place of business located at 750 MONROE ROAD. SANFORD, FLORIDA .32771 (herein, the "Contractor"). ' That the Contractor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the day of 20_, with the. CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a municipal corporation,: as ' Owner, and that the. Contractor was to perform the construction of 'lr?'IARSHALL STREET WRF RAPID SAND FILTER REHABILITATION (09-0045-UT). ' That. said work has. now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discharged all sub-contractors, laborers and material men in connection with said work and there are no liens outstanding of'anynature ' nor any debts or. obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance. in connection with said work against the described property. ' That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statutes, and. upon consideration of the payment of .. (Final Full Ap 9Mgt of Contract) in full satisfaction and discharge of said contract. ' That the Owner is hereby released from any claim which might arise out of said Contract. ' The word "liens"as used in this affidavit shall mean any and. all arising under the operation of the F(orida.Mechanic's.Lien Law as set forth in Chapter 713, Florida. Statutes. ' Sworn and subscribed to before me 3WARTON-SMITH, INC. AFFIANT This day of , 2211. BY: ' NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires: PRESIDENT .Page 6 1 1 1 1 1 PROPOSAL BOD (Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted) KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, Wharton-Smith, Inc. as Principal, and _Western Sure 'Comp an as Surety, who's address is P.O. Box.5077, Sioux Falls, SD 57117-5077 are held. and firmly bound unto the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the sum of Ten. Percent of the Amount Bid Dollars ($ 1011io ) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid.amount) for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. The condition of the above,obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of Wharton-Smith,_ Inc: as Principal, and Western Surety Company as Surety,.for work specified as: Marshall Street WRF Raid Sand Filter Rehabilitation # 09-0045-UT all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and specifications provided herefor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to time above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter :into a contract, in. writing, and furnish the required Performance Bond with surety or sureties to he. approved by the City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue by law and the full amount. of this. Proposal Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or :liquidated damages. ' Signed this 17th day of March ' (Principal must. indicate whether corporation, partnership, company or. individual) 1 The person signing shall, in his own ' handwriting, sign the Principal's name; his own name and his title; the person signing for a corporation ' must, by affidavit, show his authori ty. to bind the corporation. 1 Section V 2011 . Corporation Wharton-Smith, Inc. Principal sy: f)W the Donald F`.. Davoli, President/CEO Western Surety Company r '11bi / 14 /Yov, IC/ 1?)/ CK/ Suurety AnAfer L. McCarta Attorney-In-Fact & Florida Licensed Resident Agent Inquiries: (407) 834-0022 Page 7 or 14 9/2712010 AFFIDAVIT (To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation) STATE OF FLORIDA ) COUNTY OF Seminole ) ' William C. Robinson, Jr. being duly sworn, deposes and says that. he/she is Secretary of Wh on-S i h too, a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having its principal office at: ' 750 r e Qad sa for F 3 71 S mingle Cgugnjy. FLodda Street & Numbcr City County State 11 11 Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by-laws of Wharton-Smith, Inc. (Name of Corporation) Affant further'says that Ronald F. Davoli is PresidentICE0 (Officer's Name) (Title) of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign. the Proposal for Wharton-Smith, Inc. for said corporation by virtue of B (state whether a. provision of by laws or a Resolution of the .Board. of Directors. If by Resolution give date of adoption). Af t WNiam C. Robinson,jr., Corporate Secretary Sworn to before me this. 17th day of March ; 2011 . 1 Section V DAWN K, SRAG.G E.E012887 - _ ' MY C.DMIiAISS ' xPiRES Oc"ar 24, 2014 ?cp7j.85-U1.?3: FIOrldBFW?Y9brrAecom Page i8 of 14 Notary Public Dawn K Bragg Type/print/stamp name of'Notaty Title or rank,. and Serial No,, if any 9,'2.7'2.010 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 NON»t,OLLUS_ ION AFFIDAVIT STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF Seminole ) Ronald F. Davoli being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is PresidentlCE0 of Wharton-Smlth, Inc. , the parry making the foregoing.Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine, and not collusive or sham: that said bidder is not. financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder on the same.contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or afant or my 'other bidder; or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element:.of said bid price, or that of any other bidder„ or to secure. any advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the.proposed contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further; that. such bidder has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto to any association or to any member or agent thereof. Siv . m to and subscribed before me this 17 day of March DAWN K. BRAGG MY o4MM16610N 0 U012897 % \ ` LXPIRt:5 Nft5r 24, 2014 4091398-0?sa F?entleNaer aom 1 Section V Page 9 or 14 Affiant Ronald F. Davoli;.'PresidentlCEO ,2011 Notary Public 9,•'272010 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PROPOSAL (l) . TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for NARSHALL STREET W RAPID SAND F R REHABILITATION (PROJECT #09-0L45-UT) and doing.such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked MARSHALL STREET WRF AP112 SAND FILTER REHABILITATION (PROJECT #49-004§:U7) Every bidder must take notice of the. fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form add legality of the contract and all the. pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is. hereby charged. with this notice, . The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties nterosted in this Fropasal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications, General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Contract Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida,. in the form of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment., tools or apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the .General Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the.following prices to wit: S,ection V Page 10 of 14 9127•2010 ERR POSA4 (2) If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall fail to. execute a. satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check :shall be retained: by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying. this Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein. Attached hereto is. a End r certified check on Western Surety Company 1 Bank, for the sum of ten percent of amount bid ($10°x6 of Amount Bid ) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount). The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows: (If corporation, give the names: and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not. only his name but also the name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether. sub-contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder), NAMES; ADDRESSES: Ronald R .psvoli, Pr+esident(CEC 750 Monroe Road, Sanford, FL 32771 Wl iatn.:C, Robinson, Jr., Cog?qrste :Secretary 750 Monroe Road, Sanford, FL 32771 Please see attached Co rate Officers Section V Page I I of 14 9)271'20 1 0 1 (The bidder must indicate wheth Corporation, Partnership, Company or Individual). PROPOS_AL (3) The person signing shall, in his. own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his awn name and his title. Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice-President, he must, by affidavit, show his authority, to bind the a ration. Princi>aQl ^arAi-Smith, Inc. By- Title: Ronald F. Davoli, Presldent(CEO Business Address of Bidder: 750 Monroe..Road City and State: Sanford FL Zip Code 32771 Dated at BOO am. , this 17th day of March , A.D., 20 11 . Wharton-Smith, Inc.. A. Florida. Corporation 750 Monroe Road Sanford, FL 32771 scction V Page 12 of 14 9•17,2010 CITY OW CLEABAA-TER. ADDEND[]UMEET PROJECT4 M "R LL STRE F RAPID ND FILTER _REHABILITATIQN LPRUJECT- M2,045-UT) Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and Specifications. Addendum No. 1 Date: 02123/11 Addendum No. 2 Date: 03/10/11 Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No.. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum. No. Date: Wharton-Smith: Inc. (Name of Bidder) 0 0,0 C, (Signature of Officer) Ronald F. Dayoii, President/CEO (Title of Officer) March 17.2011 (Date) Section V Page 13 or 14 4127.'2010 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A 1 BIDDER'S P T,^0,?'? QSAL R. r_R Pizon=- 11'I. WHAT L .4TRFTT W121FRAPth RAP1h FILTFR RMAR11.1TAT1f1N Pl n.fFrT fiWL A9-11T BID ITEMS. EST ,, UNIT PRICE RIC TOTAL, Y la Sand Filter Rehab Equipment in accordance to. Section Q1150, 1 LS 000.00 5836 0OQ.00 S836 3.01A (ODP amount aid direct! to. Siemens b the Ci .) , , 1b ODP - Sales} Tax Saving's retained by the City, in accordance to I LS 550 210;00 S50 210 00 Section 01150 3,018 , , . I c d Sand Filters in accordance with tion of Rapi S tio 1 LS S J Wa OW nO S 084/ 004 ec n O1 C , , . Furnish and deliver d itia al Underdrain Core Assemblies 2a in accordance with Section 01154, 3-01D.- (ODP amount paid .9 EA $2,051.00 $18,459.00 dircctl y to Siemcnc b the C'i ) 26 ODP - Sales Tax Savings retained by the City, in. accordance 9 EA 5 128:6: 51. ] 57 58 to Section 01150, 3,01E. , , . 2c Install, Test and warranty additional under drain core 9 EA em S I OQQ eo 5 q;QpO assemblies. in accordance to Section 01..150 r3:01F: , . , Control Building Trench lnfi'lling & Concrete Pad Removal in 3 accordance with Sheets M-1, S-1 &.S-2 and. Section 01150, 1 LS S 3jr d` S sw' 00O. °° 3.016. 4 Mobilization in accordance. with Section 01150, 3.01H. I LS S ?4 odV, pO S g.7 OCp, .5 Indemnification in accordance with Section 01150, 3.011. 1 LS S100.00 S. t0U:00. SU B-TOTAL ITEMS 1-5 S 1 111 O;'s 6 10% Owner's Contingency in accordance with Section 01150. 3.01J 109' of Subtotal; Items 1-5 1 LS S .742 9 V. 6 5 :242 89,7,46 BASE BID TOTAL (ITEMS 1-6) $ 2 ADDITIVE ALTERNATE WOR K. A Stainless Steel Low Pressure Air System Piping in I LS $ eo C px' S ee ODo" ? accordance with Section 011,50, 3.02A. • B Air Compressor System Complete in accordance with 1 LS ° am. S /l: 0o S /S DAD. Section 01150.3.025. " . C Repaint:Jpper Level Common Area Walls and Ceiling in 1 LS $. $ pep. °" S T. .q00'. O° accordance with Section 01150,102C. D Repaint.Pipe Gallery Walls and Oiling in accordance 1 LS ." S 12, oaf $ °° with Section 01150, 3.020. L Repaint Air Compressor Room Walls and Ceiling in 1 L5 $ 3 e> S. Opp. accordance with Section 01150, 3.02E. . F 1.0% CONTrNGENCY (To be, completed by Owner) 1 IS S S. CONTRACTOR. Wharton-Smith, Inc, BIDDER'S BASE BID TOTAL (Items 1.0): $_ s2t*3,Y1 j Vl?,2 ? Mumbem) BIDDER'S BASE BID TOTAL (Items 1-6): 6I,way Ali, . 0,4 f !rr a ow c A!i 0 'r; v» rrr.C> Z/? $n.? (Words) THE SIDDEA'S TOTAL ABOVE IS H19 TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP'SU-%1 PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTrnES REQUIRED FOR EACH SECTION. THIS FIGURE ..IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS, THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABLILATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES. AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER,. IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. Section V Page 14 of 14 9:27`2010 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 \Akstern Surety Company POWER, OF ATTORNEY APPOINTING,INDNIDUAL ATTORNEY-IN-FACT Know Ail'bten..By These Presents, That WESTERN SURETY COMPANY, a South Dakota corporation,. is a duly organized and existing corporation having its principal office in the City of.Sioux Fails, and Statc of South Dakota, and that it does by vinue of the signature and seal herein aflnced.hereby make, const itute.and.appoint J W Guignard, Bryce R Guignard, M Gary Francis, April L Lively, Paul J Ciambriello, Jennifer L McCarta, Margie L Morris, Peggy Snow, Allyson Foss, Individually of Longwood, FL, its true and lawfut +Anorney(s)-in-Feel with tltll power and authority hereby conferred to sign, seal and execute for. and on its behalf bonds, undertakings and otherobligattlry instruments of similar nature - In Unlimited Amounts - and to bind it.thercby as N fly and to the same extent as if such Instruments were signed by a duly authorized officer of the corporation and all the acts of said Attorney, pursuant to the authority hereby given, arc hereby ratified end confirmed, This Power of Attorricy is made and executed.purstiont wand by authority of the By-Law printed on the reverse hereof: duly adopted, as' indicated, by the shareholders. of the corporation. In Witness Whereof W'ES'TERN SURETY COMPANY has caused dim presents to be signed by its Senior Vice President and its cotporile seal to be hereto affixed on this23rd day of August: 2010. WESTERN SURETY COMPANY Y ?lAM leeoo Paul . Bruflat, Senior Vice President State otSouth Dakota 53 ' County of Mimtehaha E A On this 23rd. day of August, 2010, before me personally came Paul T. Brufiat, to Me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say; that he resides in the City of Sioux. Falls, State of South Dakota that'he is the Senior Vice President of WESTERN SURETY COMPANY described in and which executed the above.: instnrinent: that he knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to the said Instrument is such corporate. seal; that it was so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Board ,of 'Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name theme pursuant to like authority, and acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said corporation My commission expires ?•?rr`+++r+rrrr«rr+r+++rr; • Q. KRELL _ November 30; 2012 Ntl mm Put.lc faSOVrH DA( OIR •?rrtirrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr D. Krell. No Public CERTIFICATE 1, L. Nelson, Assistant Secretary of WESTERN SURETY COMPANY do hereby certify that the Power of Attorney hcrcinabove set forth is still in force, and further certify that the By-Law of the corporation printed on the reverse hereof is still in farce. In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the seal of the said corporation this 17th day of March, 2011, I Fiwm F4280-09.06 rF WESTERN SURETY COMPANY aa?.. L Nelson,.Assistant Scmtary M 1 1 DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE FORM ' The undersigned vendor in accordance with Florida Statute 287.687 hereby certifies that 4V_ harton-Smith, Inc. does: ' (Name of Business) 1 Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing. ' possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace. and specifying the actions that will be taken. against employees for violations of such prohibition. ' 2. Inform employees about the dancers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse ' violations. ' .3. Give each. employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are corder bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). ' 4. In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the -commodities or contractual services that are under bid,, the employee will abide by.the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or.plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of Chapter 803 or of any controlled substance law of the United 1 States or any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drag abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is ' so convicted. 6. Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through imp lernentation of ' this section. As the person. authorized to sign the staternerit, I certify that this firm complies fully with the requirements. ' ' Bidder's Signature Ronald F. Davoli, presidenVCE.0 1 March 17, 2011 Date PLIR06Z.036 rn.10,97 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Licenses 4STATE.Of FLORIDA so D ??6 z8 Qv&LlrIjv ro?iMt??w Cr-or 499 rS. datoA x • RR(THIS I6 A fw c ? w T?R, A16LSYWS AI?IX . 00 >>CCli 3i8 it It 9" A :I1?t1!R. } WE&RTGK- OUTS INC R4 a?rlk DR .,RA Itb IrL 3777'1 c1CAR{.x?I'8T (711A I.E;9 N ZRA,+ln R Df5p.kv AS PEA 9iRFo By ;..n?': SSe:.11ETkRY ,1Cr WATE OF FUMDA Dow ?Eq?Ids7ICW SEt2 L10062900597 ? t ?, _ _ __,.... . s o10 ot is I age No-Rd b *'Iow is CsR?"C, Under the prayisat aiC C Rxpirat} dams .1 Asa Stu ' rM k h 1 CNARUN fin oils ?' =k1tLIE LIRM xWMIN SRCR$TARY ' MplAY AS REQU1Rgp BY LAY ! A 'd 9116119 5 :TAM OF FLOWA VRPAXTJI RRCSZ? Ya?aT 7 q T-ZON. . SE?Mniaoui6nxaea ibw ux*w1t p b'P Sawitd tfN tro?il " 9' ', RD' ITrydat' wr' tour'' rta ?i tprpi,rwl?iak'? ?rtf r ''. ?'? ???,?^',',? ' +•.?., .. rr. ,r Rhm EIA I . 7.0 r1% Qs32747''-1026 CgA=a GRIST CK"LTR LIM GC1r1RR1iCR. INTERIM SECRBTAIIY OkaP .AY AS REC ;KRE 0 SY LAW Licenses tYk''?A4 I 1 d Molt 7 t1 $' _ i r. The taOL + lp'xal±AGR #1"I STIM{,ki ??` BYwaGrd n.iow all CIRTT!'Iii7 .Under Cite px?vi wioxlr 0 Cbaptiro 1 todra[kuEle 71rit3 31r 29 l2.. . Tilt. aRORGE >a . 7s?illq?'OR11 affi RS?I?IY FL 3277 QO NlVCRTST 01-SPLAY AS REWIRED S,' L AW CMK;tLI6 LIEM 14TERIN SYCRETARY tiIAWN01A.. c:01 NA-1 fit:Sftif wti I t? Rl r:1 11:11 . . i;tbtklllkw?k?kl\111I1fit?liil'w rl1illf?l, .. - ?? d't M Ii?.r, d'? gll ¦ ".r F1';r'+I. R l . `.'. .,, .. i ? ,. I: VALID THtr OUGi# 09/34!11 W'1#AItT(1N-5411TH 1,N'C .. T56 CR 1; Accuunt.11:0MI7 VAKE N111\ROF M'1. ;12737 ? RE:GU.x r?u ; j GEE R'/:1•' p: ti'i ITH IPRF_SI Slab LkA - ('t: (-03.6fihV Doan ler- GEORGE E S111TCI Rcrcl tl p: IN 1.Ii0201 RDtiit?.I/ea34 Arnv,ml Paid Date Paid: 118M2/20111; 7 "J z ,, V;• `p r, d i 40 l 1 f .,. ay V 'I CY pI' w?C e ; WW ME .: r; •r (e l I ...,' swum 1a ot[ar ammaww" f ? f; tklM?r if a± d wx* Chllpla 471, p wft S1A t1 '??011 C?No: MNM h ! . 4811 . REytR1:tk DY LAW j? Itd1' 1 Licenses 1 1 1 State of Florida Department of State I certifY from the records of this ofce that WHARTGN-SMITH, INC. is.a corporation organized under the laws of the State of Florida, filed on April 3, 1984, effective April 2, 1984. The document number of this corporation is G943 83. I further certify that said corporation has paid all fees due this office through December 31, 2011, that its most recent annual report was filed on January 5, 2011, and its status is active. I further certify that said corporation has not filed articles of Dissolution. G'4wn orderney kand and the (irrw 57ra1 of M W& at TeMakener, Meg Clappi?aI rays th Naventeemk day of Jmaw ,X111 d f Secretary of Mate .'twt7?cnr?>,mf+7 l011191Si171RN-011714f:'>i3RS 1%, ClAhMXwe [1Y.4 [ST(111C0[d,7 Ei[[ Qw {uI1 t IV. I !Sr' emet Ira. ad [11['17 falolw the ![eECNL[I[8L 111?y'19)Y':1 ht4m:)ielVe awnhlz:nr*cerbutbver.html 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 u 1 Licenses S ! 2010•2,?Dtl. W1WWR??W .? WBIN RE 0 ?r ?.-'? 10r?.. ?en?eavAG,_:, d?CG . C? . weer 1ryiE 0 0 010 . COOOMW" .201 0 . 201 .. 4812 l/bVUrz ST ?ac+?1c?+ TAMPA 33607 SNOTH MORGE E t VVHA"ON4Mr H INC wcw»w 32747-ton =M=K BUSINESS. T RECEIPT OOW MUM. rAx VX LCrOA wAq Nlr ryp.A I1MMf?R"rW l%AMWIMIY..: '6t34354Mn .. Tmm wct7ws,%?A74 wcowty"tN YAt"rlip kRh.rrao: r+rMw/ap r?F.?tra.w rrrytlY+?ewwcw 17584 OWD .MA.ryyy?u. A100 1BGt7 PAID-1773, - 85 0f!?OFirl.010'•- S8 00 TiRffil'1TNitTf;Nrpr?l? •: - D" NitwlMoA" W, PGLK:agUllrYALIC?Il?iS7NiC1IFT.: ' 8 .'. A 1JN{T' go. 'f$ e..1Ff.-...,... ?' yy ? i j 02 all E/1, p#wk . . - +WrRa6l , LOCATION SY11M.iiWiMti A mr OR FoApam i 0m) WAA a A . COCIE ACTy1f .rrr .. . 3*10 C41A7RICTOMl481MEM+tA.. ' . . '' pNAll'TOMi111tIW INR . 27!1'1! C41MlR?IG1<OR lyRdiM okras Pte;...: , . Pp?Gac!?Tbgi ...... 9300 cawraAcvm p1 ei4wo(Vtaa 1) A1: LMM MQii1bE, FL *a4m . ? . ? pr?/E¢aipMAl, wfPE1u`.?pt ?F'1'1tG4tf?.FV - ? .. ow1R. COCS32M ? CUGiii R#Pll iitl /?,QFICE CW /??. JOE / OQf ., G. Tom, CSC ? AX COLLECTOR tl?i r[W 9C1VnYtdJK?.'IKfsrf[?4d ?M??:i??'z ?:^?1 r# . ,'iob'Ite,tpy.r WtR I.•tri wt "YK AVRw 'N :'J?°J'?•w PAS!-3203G?•pRG'1-{7pp1 dA?O?/2g1?4 pd?pti/2pXq NG4 12 57.75 *Z> Licenses _..._._, .... 4 I' af?taet.t rirrkr t .Jt1lL . 1371 WO artrl eodoig SEPtEMIREA 30. 201, Tim, 3071S13.3 Llated. 0.7411410 ApFll ?r ?, fVa, q TiIIW 13r, v*o s Tam PAL14,0 *** tW 00frW ft O #WX%Iof 19 0MR20IrrrYdL'flir7lRof eh?y C04 Lay* ~!t?.t;)+:Sl+uf='a??ii b.ut not I ot" W, xt#timrq Antl t>" orM9 i" rt0uR411'" 11 {el ik obt Me h1f7IttN1.9r{OA111t vrrfty fr'w. h; e1i Ma' er ft.11, 0+M pDp'''vlfi I* ^30" OV 4am4*10 VW Ofkv of i oW Noooo twry co-"oflauv, 41 ;1 11, :T •,i-!!.'F?rr `'Mrl7i !3.:7rv?l.nr ' i.i ?'? wh?itt ? ?`?d!INIt?A/(KaYlp 13M!ktA?'J t1 pWlftq e)1 tM,AHtAel14 . i'faxri 41tit6bn C7nTy1 ?7n _^-_ :s ..,...,.._ 20 1 t _._ M_ .__ ._,_. ........._........ _ , _._...._._ .......,. r„.,.... , ...,...._....,...,......_.......u...,.., CITY OF T"AMPA i .WI GE;NERA.L.CONTFIALTOM ? .?'i1HJ3 TAXPECE1PT f*]:90) A171 M.1NHANDLING FFf. 1t1 ou BUSINESS TAX DIVISION ©usifleit?.Name and Atldt'0so 4512 W LA SA.U6 SST .AMPA, FL.,. '8 Ownei Name Anti Aadthl s WHARrON-SMITH INC: PO BOX d71WIS LAKE MONROE, FL +2747.0(M) Hy 1h(.'f$ Atovioto i Ito "t ContrW No 01 Fo, F'0600 I„r(Nliailalf' c;wV JULY 1St. 2010 artd erv*mv SEPTEMBEA 30,2011 ` i '. $11!3.63 !Da too 07-W2010 Appw.tprfprn No 0 r" R 1Vom- TAR I6c t 41Y1dr 1W 4wrff71! t1w17 1NT1flf m tMWrntn A, vK11[itk: nr Cx! *A v C.11 .,:tw o f.7 dYv .li y .1, qoi, iti y 00 Vo owflw! W. zf3" And dSmhor !.ltid aot filpilsWoms It vgCy4"' tY}p N•IONf %NjkI rY vov% t14.116 491 '?f 'ur•- 7 'j, tfw D +1!(1{Tr''44v44W ftft4v.** trl * 'Wa 0"N;rr 1 of i.al%j (}br?i> fM11'rr, rf;?„.• r11 J??u1rx'7f?:lt ld l'{ji'4-!{L:'!i Tvr•y tl nl6aare?M+• ":1• ; +G•-Ya0 *fruN tP -VOWUM" pt]AW ?n OWfs 01 WrInWit cfanotir4ltkarl .._ ()fsGGhpt{ _ __ _ .....,?.... .? ... _ .... -- _........__...... _... Aml,a;f 1 w... ._ .._ •. ......._......._.. 2011 ' CITY OF TAMPA mw POLLUTANT 'T0AAt1E SYSTEM b7 :i•;l TAX RECEIPT th?nClr14 *rwiN HA.N('tim(i F°f',£: $10 00 BUSINESS. TAX l;•tVIS14N q?51111Q tib r1{y1nVN ,11nd Adoes4y,, Owner fN41rtttN arir.1 Adffsetit; W4AATON,5MIT, H IN;: GiFORGE f? iM! i t,o 4912.W LA SAL.I.F S T RO BOX 471i)2+H TaAft'A fi- 331094K :) LAKE MiAROF Ft &1,-4,'.t0X) Hy Vdt:L6 4->-- II 1 S Morton -Smifh, Inc. CONSTRUC'"ON GROUP CORPORATE OFFICERS Ronald F. Davoli, President/CEO & Treasurer 750 Monroe Road, Sanford, R 32771 ' Eric Palmer, Senior Vice President Commercial 750 Monroe Road, Sanford, FL: 32771 Charles A. McCurdy, Vice President Estimating ' 750 Monroe Road, Sanford, FL 32771 Clyde Burgess,. Vice. President Environmental Design Build Division 750 Monroe Road, Sanford, FL32771 David Hayes, Vice President International/Entertainment Division 750 Monroe Road, Sanford, FL 32771 ' Chris Myer,. Vice President Tampa Region 4912 LaSalle Street, Tampa, FL 33607 John Lyons, Vice President Commercial Pre-Construction Services 750 Monroe Road, Sanford, FL 32771 ' Pat Hewitt -- Vice President Orlando Environmental Division 750. Monroe Road, Sanford, FL 32771 1 John French -- Vice President Palm City Region 3547 SW Corporate Parkway, Palm City, FL 34990 William C. Robinson,. Jr., Corporate SecretaryNice President Finance 750 Monroe Road, Sanford; FL 32771 George E. Smith; Chairman of the Board 750 Monroe Road, Sanford, FL 32771 20 years 13 years 21 years 25 years 15 years 12 years 25 years 12 years 9 years 26 years 26 years 750 Monrae Road 4 Sanford. F1.327'71 • P.U. Box 471028 • Lake Nlonrcx. Florida 32747-10241 407-321.8410 ? Fax 407-323-12.16 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Wharton-Smith, Inc. CONSTRUCTION GROUP CORPORATE RESOLUTION I, the undersigned Secretary of Wharton Smith, Inc., a corporation organized and existing under the.laws of the State of Florida, do hereby certify that a meeting of the Board of Directors of said corporation, duly held on August 25, 2010 a quorum being present, the following resolution was adopted and entered upon the regular minute book of said corporation, is.in accordance. with the by-laws and is now in full force and effect to-wit: The current list of qualifiers to act for the business organization in all matters connected with its contracting business has now been amended to read: Ronald F. Davoli George E. Smith William C. Robinson, Jr. John S. French David V. Hayes Christopher M. Myer Erickson H. Palmer Timothy S. Smith Ted C. Hicks I HEREBY certify that the foregoing is a true and exact copy of the resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of this Corporation, and that such resolution has not been amended, modified, or revoked and is still in force and effect. Signed and sealed this 25th day of August, 2010 C William C. Robinson, Jr., Secretary (Seal of Corporation) C"d _'Z'7 9? w jwr George E. S , Director William R. Wharton, Director Ronald F_ Davoli, Director